Home

1763-RM001 - Rockwell Automation

1. SLC 5 04 PLC 5 This Controller Parameters See Target Device Parameters on page 370 Control Bits Parameters See Control Bits Parameters on page 353 Target Device Parameters Message Timeout See Message Timeout on page 370 Data Table Address See Data Table Address Offset on page 371 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 393 Local Bridge Address This variable defines the bridge address on the local network In the example DH 485 node 12 MicroLogix 1100 on Link ID 1 is writing data to node 51 SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 The SLC 5 04 at node 17 is the bridge device This variable sends the message to local node 17 Remote Bridge Address This variable defines the remote node address of the bridge device In this example the remote bridge address is set to zero because the target device SLC 5 04 at node 63 octal is a remote capable device If the target device is remote capable the remote bridge address is not required If the target device is not remote capable SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and MicroLogix 1000 Series A B and C the remote bridge address is required Remote Station Address This variable is the final destination address of the message instruction In this example integer file 50 elements 0 to 4 of the SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 at node 63
2. Additional MicroLogix 1200 1500s MicroLogix 1100 1 Configure the SLC s Channel 0 port for DH 485 protocol 2 Enter the following ladder logic into the SLC processor Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 560 Knowledgebase Quick Starts EGS LAD 2 iof x MSG 0000 Read Write Message EN El Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write DN3 Target Device S00CPU Local Remote Local ER gt Control Block N100 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen MSG DoNe Bit emma MSGENableBit N100 0 B3 0 N100 0 0001 EL c8 13 0 15 MSG ERror Bit N100 0 12 MSG N100 0 14 Elements The example above messages the SLC 500 Date and Time data 8 37 S 42 to the MicroLogix 1100 RTC each time the SLC processor is powered up and placed into the RUN mode or each time the Time Synchronization Bit B3 0 0 is enabled Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 A ATTENTION Valid years for the Micrologix 1100 begin with 1998 Any date time year values prior to 1998 that are sent to a Micrologix controller will generate a MSG Error Code 10h 18498 Quick Start Data Logging DLG Knowledgebase Quick Starts 561 For each processor that requires its RTC to be synchronized a MSG write will be required This is done simply by duplicating the above ladder logic referencing a different Control Block i e N100 0
3. below Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Source Bits Destination Bits 15to04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x not used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Conversion Instructions 203 Instruction Type output ncode yp P 1 of 16 to 4 ENC Execution Time for the ENC Instruction E d ud dug m Controller When Rung Is 0000000000000000 lt True False 0000h lt MicroLogix 1100 27 84 us 0 87 us The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit looking for the first bit set The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer The ENC instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Dest
4. Sao Sequencer Output 1 C EN 5 File B10 1 Mask OFOF L CDN 5 Dest 014 0 Control R6 20 Length 4 lt Position 2 lt Destination 0 14 0 External Outputs 0 14 at Step 2 15 87 0 00 0000 0101 0000 1010 01 g ON 02 Mask Value OFOF 03 ke ON 15 87 0 04 0000 1111 410000 1111 05 06 Sequencer Output File B10 1 07 Step 08 ON 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 09 1010 0010 1111 10101 1 10 ON 1111 10101 10100 11010 2 Current Step 11 0101 10101 10101 10101 3 12 0000 1111 10000 11111 J4 13 14 15 Sequencer Instructions 245 This instruction uses the following operands Word 0 e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and stored in the destination TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Mask The mask operand contains the mask value When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through to destination When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to destination The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF word or 0 to OXFFFFFFFF long word TIP If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file Destination The destination operand is the sequencer location or file Control This is a contr
5. Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 248 Sequencer Instructions 3 Control file only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS LCD and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 16 JMP Jump to Label Q2 0 lt JMP gt Program Control Instructions Use these instructions to change the order in which the processor scans a ladder program Typically these instructions are used to minimize scan time create a more efficient program and troubleshoot a ladder program Instruction Used To Page JMP Jump to Label Jump forward backward to a corresponding 249 LBL Label label instruction 250 JSR Jump to Subroutine Jump to a designated subroutine and return 250 SBR Subroutine Label 200 RET Return from Subroutine 251 SUS Suspend Debug or diagnose your user program 251 TND Temporary End Abort current ladder scan 251 END Program End End a program or subroutine 252 MCR Master Control Reset Enable or inhibit a master control zone in 252 your ladder program Instruction Type output Execution Time for the JMP Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1100 When Rung Is True False 1 15 us 0 81 us The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to t
6. 12 6 34 5 1 5 2 6 3 4 rung goes true instruction successfully queued instruction execution complete NOTE The RN bit is not addressable 1 2 3 4 instruction scanned for the first time after execution is complete 5 6 via the Control R file rung goes false instruction execution starts Using In line Indirection This allows you to insert integer and long word values into ASCII strings The Running bit RN must be set before the string value can be used The following conditions apply to performing in line indirection All valid integer N and long word L files can be used e File types are not case sensitive and can include either a colon or semicolon Positive value symbol and leading zeros are not printed Negative values are printed with a leading minus sign Commas are not inserted where they would normally appear in numbers greater than one thousand Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instruction Error Codes Examples For the following examples N7 0 25 N7 1 37 L9 0 508000 L9 1 5 Valid in line direction ASCII Instructions 337 Input Flow rate is currently N7 0 liters per minute and contains L8 0 particles per liter contaminants Output Flow rate is currently 25 liters per minute and contains 508000 particles per liter contaminants Input Current position is N7 1 at a speed of L9 1 R
7. SLC 5 04 50 DH 485 Network AIC Personal um Computer z illl MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1500 pum Example 2 Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI DNI SLC 5 03 with 1747 SDN DNI PanelView 550 PanelView BB BBISsiss SS BS Jm 9 Paes Master DeviceNet Network Personal um Computer MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1500 p Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 363 Example 3 Local DF1 Half Duplex Network RS 232 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol eeeecee Modem ar TS E Le Ss E 7 d r 1 P T we iw TA 7 4 7 j os Pd e C
8. i Address Data Files Function Files Mode Address Level A S Parameter E e 2 T z E jo s s y 9 le ec gx a F 3 ls e 2 2 z g l E c3 g amp v e J jo j l E la i ln a JE I8 5 e Je E s e Si a Ee FE e 2 o I Ia Ie jz lu B a B l lz fe la ka jm ES IS S a E a la S S ja Source e e e e e e e e e e e Destination Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 AWA ASCII Write with Append AWA ASCII Write Append Channel Source Control String Length Characters Sent Error LEN 5 0 ON gt CER gt ASCII Instructions 317 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AWA Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100 13 96 us character 14 21 us Use the AWA instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device This instruction adds the two appended characters that you configure on the Channel Configuration screen The default is a carriage return and line feed appended to the end of the string TIP You configure append characters via the Channel Configuration screen The default append characters are carriage return and line feed Programming AWA Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional
9. Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 119 RAC Reset Accumulated Value Instruction Type output RAC Reset Accumulated Value Counter HSCO POM E Controller Execution Time When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 140 81 us 0 87 us The RAC instruction resets the high speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator The RAC instruction uses the following parameters Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used Counter Number 0 HSCO Not support HSC1 e Source Specifies the location of the data to be loaded into the HSC accumulator The data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below RAC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 7 2 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode E p o 5 Parameter E lt lt 5 a 8 g S3 E ec a x a x v 5 B IB 9 T HS gd Z la jo l Io _ B la e la la JE e 15 l ls 8 5 e Sila E la E IFE e 2 o w la e 2 lu o 4 E Z a la lo G a E S 6 2 ja J ja z S ja Counter Number Source e e e
10. I1 MOV MOVE nace N72 Jee 0001 0010 0011 0100 4660 Dest 13 al 4660 CLR CLEAR Dest 114 0 FRD FROM BCD 13 and 8 14 are Source Wr MET displayed in BCD format Dest N7 0 1234 0000 0100 1101 0010 When the input condition I 0 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word NT 2 into the math register Status word S 14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 208 Conversion Instructions TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD TOD ToBCD Source N7 0 0 lt Dest N7 1 0000h lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TOD Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 29 31 us 0 87 us The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table TOD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 A 1 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode Parameter E E e e E e lt e 5 z ole d E a t
11. The ACC Accumulator contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub system If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured the value of the software accumulator is cleared 0 when a high preset is reached or when an overflow condition is detected High Preset HIP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT control read write The HIP High Preset is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt To load data into the high preset the control program must do one of the following e Toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 118 The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSC 0 OVF parameter or an HSC error is generated Low Preset LOP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT control read write The LOP Low Preset is the lower setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt To load data into the low preset the control program must do one
12. Error ER Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST Data Table Offset Message Enabled EN Local Node Addr dec Local Remote cal p Eror Eror Code Hex 0 Error Description Mo errors Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 371 In this example the controller reads five elements words from the target device s Local Node 2 CIF file starting at word 20 or byte 20 for non SLC 500 devices The five elements are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types o0 0 B N L lt gt read write 485CIF T lt gt read write 485CIF C lt gt read write 485CIF R read write 485CIF sT lt gt read write 485CIF 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 378 Communications Instructions Example 3 Local Read from a PLC 5 Message Instruction Setup T MSG
13. Format Explanation PLSf e s PLS Programmable Limit Switch file f File number The valid file number range is from 9 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Sub Element delimiter s Sub Element number The valid sub element number range is from 0 to 5 Examples PLS10 2 PLS File 10 Element 2 PLS12 36 5 PLS File 12 Element 36 Sub Element 5 Output Low Source Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 122 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch PLS Example Setting up the PLS File 1 Using RSLogix 500 create a new project give it a name and select the appropriate controller Bul 1764 MicroLogix 1500 LSP Series A Bul 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series C 1 or 2 Comm Porta MicroLogix 1200 Series B MicroLogix 1200 Series A Bul 1763 Micrologix 1100 Series 7 Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 Analog x Processor Name PLS Micrologix LSP Series C Cancel Bul 1764 Micrologix 1500 LSP Series B Help Kal Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 DH 485 HDSlave Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 1747 L40A 24 115 VAC In 16 RLY Out 1747 L40B 24 115 VAC In 16 TRIAC Out 1747 L40C F 24 DC SNK In 16 RLY Out 1747 L40E 24 DC SNK In 16 TRANS SRC Out xl Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout 48 DFI 1 v decimal eg __ Who Active I0 Sec Octal 2 Right click on Data Files and select New
14. Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 120 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Programmable Limit Switch PLS File The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch ot rotaty cam switch When PLS operation is enabled the HSC High Speed Counter uses a PLS data file for limit cam positions Each limit cam position has corresponding data parameters that are used to set or clear physical outputs on the controller s base unit The PLS data file is illustrated below IMPORTANT The PLS Function only operates in tandem with the HSC of a MicroLogix 1100 To use the PLS function an HSC must first be configured PLS Data File Data files 9 to 255 can be used for PLS operations Each PLS data file can be up to 256 elements long Each element within a PLS file consumes 6 uset words of memory The PLS data file is shown below Data File PLS10 0 o000 0000 0000 0000 o000 0000 0000 0000 k PLS10 0 HIP Hip l x Symbol SG TOIT 4 x Desc risio 24 Properties Usage Help PLS Operation When the PLS function is enabled and the controller is in the run mode the HSC will count incoming pulses When the count reaches the first preset High HIP or Low LOP defined in the PLS file the output source data High OHD or Low OLD will be written through the HSC mask At that
15. Error ER 0 r Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout Bs Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Offset Qs Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information File RI20 0 Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors E Description MultiHop Setup Screen to change IP Address Del Remove Hop Setup String Data File Offset LEN String Text Symbol ST30 0 13 Ue ee Description LI pia ST30 0 Radix z Symbol a Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 418 Communications Instructions Channel Channel must be 1 Integral Communication command Communication command must be 485 CIF Write Data Table Address Data Table Address must be a String file To change Ethernet Channel Configuration you must enter the characters for the configuration parameter e Size in Elements Size in Element must be 1 e Message Timeout Cannot edit e Data Table Offset Valid value is 0 to 5 10 and 40 for Ethernet Channel Configuration Basically Data Table Offset in MSG configuration setup screen is used to direct the internal virtual offsets You can configure the listed parameter setting by sending a String File Data to these offsets Data Table Offset Addressing to change Ethernet Channel Configuration parameters Data Table Affect to Description Co
16. Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 338 ASCII Instructions Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 11 0x0B The requested number of characters for the ASCII Enter a valid string length and retry operation read was too large or negative 12 0x0C The length of the Source string is invalid either a Enter a valid string length and retry operation negative number or a number greater than 82 13 0x0D The requested length in the Control field is invalid Enter a valid length and retry operation either a negative number or a number greater than 82 14 0x0E Execution of an ACL instruction caused this None required instruction to abort 15 0x0F Communications channel configuration was changed None required while instruction was in progress Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 339 ASCII Character Set The table below lists the decimal hexadecimal octal and ASCII conversions Standard ASCII Character Set Column 2 Column 3 ASC OmOnANOoOFRWN ON Seek A a Ss ss a os a EE EE TT FT1 CJ C2 UJ 75 CO COO O2 O1 4 CO 2 CD SV As OCT ASC gl Co gt TAIN lt mCIOOUOZZZzU AC ICOmmogcdor g N C2 CJ 1 mw x FA r The standard ASCII character set includes values up to 127 decimal 7F hex The MicroLogix 1100 C
17. 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The HPR High Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is greater than ot equal to the high preset variable HSC 0 HIP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Underflow UF Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The UF Underflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the underflow variable HSC 0 UNF This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the underflow condition Underflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Underflow Mask UFM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFM HSC 0 UFM Jbi Underflow Mask t 2to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 103 The UFM Underflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a underflow interrup
18. m Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Node Addr dec Local Remote r Control Bits Message Transmitting 5T 0 Ignore if timed out TO 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Error ER 0 Message done DN D Message Enabled EN T r Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Channel 1 Setup Screen MSG MG10 0 1 Elements 3l MultiHop This Controller Channel Communi Data Table Address Size in Elements Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Remote Routing Information File Al Yes Local MultiHop Control Bits Message Transmitting 5T la x Ignore if timed out TO 0 Break Connection BK 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Error ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Enabled EN 1 1 RI20 1 Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Ignore if Timed Out TO Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 TO Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Timed Out Bit TO can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control You can create your own timeout toutine by monitoring the EW and ST bits to start a timer When the timer times out you can set the TO bit which removes
19. Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500 message MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic 1 Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen 2 The RSLogix 500 Message Setup Screen appears This screen is used to setup or monitor message parameters for This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of these sections follow Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 382 Communications Instructions This Controller Parameters Channel You must select Channel 1 Integral to use Ethernet pathways for messaging General MultiHop This Centroller r Control Bits Channel negrab J Ignore if timed out TO 0 erp ATTE Break Connection BK 0 DANSE Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements L Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 33 1 Message Transmitting ST I Data Table Address Message Enabled EN T Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information File Rl Eror Error Code Hex 0 Ne errors B Description Communication Command The controller supports seven different types of communication commands If the target device supports any of these command types the controller should be capable of exchange data with the device You can use one of the seven kinds of message commands 500CPU 485CIF PLC5
20. WND is set when LCD menu is in U MSG The controller also notifies this status to LCD screen as U MSG status OK key in Customized Display OK Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access OK OK key in Customized LCD 0 OK binary bit status read write Display control OK is set when OK key is pressed This bit should be cleared so as to get the next key input Because once OK key is pressed this bit is set and latched until it is cleared by manually This OK bit is very useful for LCD instruction You can use this bit as any input of ladder logic when you program with several LCD instructions TIP OK bit is presented for handy interface to LCD instruction and keypad so it is just updated in U MSG screen ESC key in Customized Display ESC Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access ESC ESC key in LCD 0 ESC binary bit status read write Customized Display control Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 LCD Information 453 LCD LCD Instruction LCD LCD Display L2 Source A ST9 0 L2 Source B 0 L3 Source A ST9 1 L3 Source B 0 L4 Source A ST9 2 L4 Source B 0 Display With Input No Setup Screen ESC is set when ESC key is pressed This bit should be cleared so as to get the next key input Because once ESC key is pressed this bit is set and latched until it is cleared by manually This ESC bit is very useful for LCD instruction You can use this bi
21. ADD Add Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Dest N7 2 0 lt SUB Subtract Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 Dest N72 0 Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 ADD word 13 44 us 0 8 us long word 13 34 us 0 87 us SUB word 13 31 us 0 84 us long word 13 46 us 0 84 us Use the ADD instruction to add one value to another value Source A Source B and place the sum in the Destination Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value from another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 194 Math Instructions MUL Multiply DIV Divide MUL 1 Multiply Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Dest N7 2 0 lt DIV Divide Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Dest N7 2 0 lt NEG Negate NEG Negate Source N7 0 0 Dest N71 0 CLR Clear CLR Clear Dest N7 0 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MUL and DIV Instructions Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 MUL word 20 59 us 0 87 us long word 20 68 us 0 87 us DIV word 14 68 us 0 87 us long word 14 96 us 0 87 us Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value by another value Source A x Source B and place the result in the Destinati
22. Program Files SYS0 SYS1 4 Lap2 3 Data Files Cross E oo c UnHide E n Properties E s2 s ve E 83 BINARY Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 123 3 Enter a file number 9 to 255 and select Programmable Limit Switch as the type A Name and or Description may be entered as well but is not required x File 1o Type lites einen V Name Desc Elements Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global Local To File 2 Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download OK Cancel Help 4 Elements refers to the number of PLS steps For this example enter a ata Files ake value of 4 Cross Reference E 00 ourPuT DI n PUT If more steps are required at a later time simply go to the properties ST 3 iris fot the PLS data file and increase the number of elements E T4 TIMER E c5 COUNTER 5 Under Data Files PLS70 should appear as shown to the left E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER i F8 FLOAT E PLs10 6 Double click on PLS70 under Data Files For this example enter the values as illustrated below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 124 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Data File PLS10 0 o000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0
23. Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 69 Active Node Table Block of Communications Status File Active Node Table Block Word Description 23 Active Node Table Category Identifier Code always 3 24 Length e always 4 for DH 485 e always 18 for DF1 Half Duplex Master e always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Modbus RTU Master and ASCII 25 Format Code always 0 26 Number of Nodes e always 32 for DH 485 e always 255 for DF1 Half Duplex Master e always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Modbus RTU Master and ASCII 27 Active Node Table DH 485 and DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 0 to 15 CS0 27 1 is node 1 CS0 27 2 is node 2 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network If a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node is inactive 28 Active Node Table DH 485 and DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 16 to 31 CS0 28 1 is node 16 CS0 28 2 is node 17 etc 29 Active Node Table DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 32 to 47 CS0 29 1 is node 32 CS0 29 2 is node 33 etc 42 Active Node Table DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 240 to 255 CS0 42 1 is node 240 CS0 42 2 is node 241 etc If you are using RSLogix 500 version 7 00 00 or higher you can view the active node table by clicking on
24. 336 Using In line Indirection oos eonun cbe e b ue a eb ERR 336 ASCI Instruction Error Codes ii tate RC DR eh aOR 337 ASCIT Chigtqctet Settore qs S EET REF E V EF E ES Ree 339 Chapter 21 Communications Instructions Messaging Ovetview 0 000 ccc ete eeeeees 341 SVC Service Communications 0 eee eee ee eee 344 MSG Message sida a an d s ete ect 346 The Message Blem nt sieri rioei noi Saal e phe eee SIR Sas 347 Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction 00004 356 Communication Servicing Selection and Message Servicing Selecion o or ex we eva BARRE Sa e eet A Rema ales 359 MSG Instruction Ladder Lopes Pi ania vh ie tet RE eee wy awe 360 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 10 Table of Contents Recipe and Data Logging LCD Information MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time System Status File Fault Messages and Error Codes Local MCSA SCS rame rt ania oy Reda e Rara e N n Car TERR 361 Configuring a Local Message o oe E Ce ND 363 Local Messaging Examples Jod pv Se AR CO eed 373 Remote Messages ean Ne oes ae AN e Aaaa etes 388 Configuring a Remote Mess ge ies tener et briers brc Arad 391 Configuring a Multi hop Remote Message on EtherNet IP Communication Channeli pasii s ret ew xa e ER Yd t a Cep 394 Configuring a MicroLogix 1100 CIP Generic Message via Ethernet OS Seri s B FPRNvEoOP BSQ one cos ep I tpa doe s bee es 409 MSG Instruction Error Codes cs eos bee
25. i f Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E 2 E e amp 2 lx BEE bs iF LER c a S lv jo 9 jo _ B la ln a E BS o z er le lmejcizuwliiisSsStiitib5iumursmsrsisijiis ija s S la LIFO e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length e e Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 238 File Instructions SWP Swap SWP Swap Length Source S710 1 DATAIO 13 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SWP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 9 15 us 0 43 us swapped word 0 87 us Use the SWP instruction to swap the low and high bytes of a specified number of words in a bit integer or string file The SWP instruction has 2 operands e Source is the word address containing the words to be swapped e Length is the number of words to be swapped regardless of the file type The address is limited to integer constants For bit and integer filetypes the length range is 1 to 128 For the string filetype the length range is 1 to 41 Note that this instruction is restricted to a single strin
26. Cancel Separator Character Date Stamp Help Time Stamp Address to Log Delete Curent Address List Enter the following information Data Log Queue Configuration Parameter Number of Records Separator Character Description Defines the number of records data sets in the queue Choose the character to act as the separator for the data in this queue tab comma or space The separator character may be the same or different for each queue configured Date Stamp if selected the date is recorded in mm dd yyyy format Time Stamp if selected the time is recorded in hh mm ss format Address to Log Enter the address of an item to be recorded and click on Acceptto add the address to the Current Address List The address can be any 16 or 32 bit piece of data Current Address List This is the list of items to be recorded Record size can be up to 80 bytes You can use the Delete button to remove items from this list See page 434 for information on record size A record consists of configured Date Stamp Time Stamp Current Address List and Separator Characters 1 If the real time clock is disabled and Date Stamp and Time Stamp are selected enabled the date is recorded as 00 00 0000 and the time as 00 00 00 4 After entering all the information for the data log queue click on OK The queue is added to the Data Log Que window with a corresponding queue
27. Ethernet Status IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Address 00 Por Total Message Connections z J Incoming Message Connections z Outgoing Message Connections Maximum Connections Allowed p The last Port tab will show the current states of Ethernet communications port according to word 5 of Ethernet Communications Status File Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 79 3 Channel Status Channel 0 Channel 1 Ethernet Status IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Address 00 00 General Commands Replies Connections Auto Negotiate Status Disabled Link Status Port Speed 10 Mbps SNMP Server Disabled Port Duplex Half Duplex HTTP Server Disabled Input 0 utput Status File The input output status IOS file is a read only file in the controller that contains information on the status of the embedded and local expansion I O The data file is structured as Input Output Status File Word Description 0 Embedded Module Error Code Always zero 1to4 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the I O module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1100 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 80 Function Files Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Instruction Set Chapter Programming Instructions Overview The following table shows the MicroLogix 1100 prog
28. Positive Decimal Values The far left position will always be 0 for positive values As indicated in the figure this limits the maximum positive decimal value to 32767 All positions ate 1 except the far left position Other examples 0000 1001 00001110 211428423422471 2048 256 8 4 2 2318 00100011 00101000 213429428425473 8192 512 256 32 8 9000 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 582 Number Systems 1x214 16384 1x213 8192 1x212 4096 1x211 2048 1x210 1024 1x29 512 1x28 256 1x27 128 1x28 64 13292 32 1x2 16 1x23 8 132224 1x2 2 n2 1 0111 4444 414 474 1111 32767 0x2 0 This position is always zero for positive numbers Negative Decimal Values The 2s complement notation is used The far left position is always 1 for negative values The equivalent decimal value of the binary number is obtained by subtracting the value of the far left position 32768 from the sum of the values of the other positions In the following figure the value is 32767 32768 1 All positions are 1 Another example 1111 1000 0010 0011 21214 2124211425421420 215 163844 8192 4096 2048 32 2 1 32768 30755 32768 2013 An often easier way to calculate a value is to locate the last 1 in the string of 1s beginning at the left and subtract its value from the total value of
29. e Slot The slot is the physical location that is updated with data from the output file IMPORTANT Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IOM cannot be used with expansion 1 0 e Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data is passed to the physical outputs A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data from being passed to the outputs The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFE Bit J54 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 j2 1 JO Output Data OuputWord i tt t lt Cs sSs SOSO O Mask 0 JO I0 JO jO jO 0 0 1 1 1 Jt Yt Jt 1 Real Outputs Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Output Word e Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the outputs Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below IOM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode N Parameter s gig E S z c amp ox a een e isla 5 j S ja jo 9 o S jaa M E i5 S5 e go a is e 9 JE o LE KE Oo l 3 e o a je l la lo 4 S Z a t z a lo m la S 9S 2 a j a S jS fa Slot
30. 04 Read Input Registers reading words 05 Write Single Coil writing 1 bit 06 Write Single Register writing 1 word 15 Write Multiple Coil writing multiple bits 16 Write Multiple Registers writing multiple words Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 367 Data Table Address This variable defines the starting address in the local controller Valid file types for the Data Table Address are shown below Message Read MessageWrite BUB o Timer T Input I Counter C Bit B Control R Timer T Integer N Counter C Floating Point F Control R Long Word L Integer N String SJ Floating Point FJ Long Word L String ST 9 Real Time Clock RTC 1 Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 3 4 A85CIF write to 485CIF only for MicroLogix 1100 OS Series A FRN 3 or earlier MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only TIP Only Bit B and Integer N file types are valid for Modbus Command messages Modbus bit commands require a starting bit address for the Data Table Address Floating Point F and Long L file types are valid for Modbus Command messages for Holding Registers commands 03 06 and 16 when Data is configured for 32 bit Size in Elements This variable defines the amount of data in elements to exchang
31. 2 Does each node receive the radio transmissions of every other node being both within radio transmission reception range and on a common receiving frequency either via a Simplex radio mode or via a single common full duplex repeater If so then go to question 3 to see if you can use the DF1 Radio Modem driver to set up a peer to peer radio network If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver by configuring intermediary nodes as Store amp Forward nodes 3 Do the radio modems handle full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance If so and the answer to 2 is yes as well then you can take full advantage of the peer to peer message initiation capability in every node i e the ladder logic in any node can trigger a MSG instruction to any other node at any time If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver but only if you limit MSG instruction initiation to a single master node whose transmission can be received by every other node Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 524 Protocol Configuration 4 Can I take advantage of the SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 channel to channel passthru to remotely program the other SLC and MicroLogix nodes using RSLinx and RSLogix 500 running on a PC connected to a local SLC processor via DH or Ethernet Yes with certain limitations imposed based on the radio modem network Refer to the SLC 500 Ins
32. 5 E 2 2 e o _ a jo Si 9 ls s e o L lo le 2 lu Jo S le la fe 2 E i uu Ei 9 8 e a E meis a Source e e e e e e e e e Destination ejojojojoj o 2 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See TOD Instruction Destination Operand below IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files TOD Instruction Destination Operand The destination can be either a word address or math register The maximum values permissible once converted to BCD are e 9999 if the destination is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the destination is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in 13 and the high order digit in S 14 If the destination is the math register it must be directly addressed as S 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Conversion Instructions 209 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if BCD result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This resu
33. ASCII Channel Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 0 Driver ASCII Baud Rate Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K and 38 4K 1200 Parity Toggles between None Odd and Even None Termination 1 Specifies the first termination character The termination character defines the one or two character d sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the first ASCII termination character to undefined Vf indicates no ASCII receiver line termination is used Termination 2 Specifies the second termination character The termination character defines the one or two Mf character sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the second ASCII Termination character to undefined Mf and the first ASCII Termination character to a defined value d indicates a single character termination sequence Control Line Toggles between No Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS On Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS No Handshaking handshaking and No Handshaking 485 Network Delete Mode The Delete Mode allows you to select the mode of the delete character Toggles between Ignore Ignore CRT and Printer Delete Mode affects the characters echoed back to the remote device When Delete Mode is enabled the previous character is removed from the receive buffer eIn CRT mode when a delete charac
34. DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File Viewing Channel Status Data for DF1 Half Duplex Master ini x 3 Channel Status E 0 xl Project x h E Help Channel 1 Controller Controller Properties Processor Status Function Files Au 10 Configuration E ps Channel Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Master Messages Sent 0 Messages Retried Messages Received _ a Undelivered Messages D Duplicate Messages Received Bad Packet No ACK Sent fs Double click on the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status E Program Files svso Channel Status screen sys1 Last Normal Poll List Scan 100ms p Max Normal Poll List Scan 100ms os df Lap2 Last Priority Poll List Scan 100ms 9 Max Priority Poll List Scan 100ms Data Fies Modem Lines RTS CTS E uc ge E n Pur E s2 status Fh ono omar Communication Status Function DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Status Field Status File Location Definition Messages Sent CSx 10 The total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor including message retries Messages Received CSx 11 The number of messages received with no errors Polls Sent CSx 15 The number of poll packets sent by the processor it did not have available memory
35. Element 1 Acceleration Count Element 2 Deceleration Count Elements 2 and 4 reserved The choice of selecting a common profile or separate profiles must be made at the time of programming This cannot be changed once the program is downloaded into the controller The selection of the ramp type must be made prior to going to run The acceleration and deceleration counts must be entered before the PTO is enabled If the four long elements are not properly identified the controller will return a 3 error in the PTO function file when going to run Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 142 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Accel Decel Pulses ADP ADI 0 or File Elem ADI 1 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP long word 32 bit INT 0 to 1 073 741 824 control read write ADI 0 0 to 2 147 483 647 ADI 1 The PTO ADP Accel Decel Pulses defines how many of the total pulses TOP variable will be applied to each of the ACCEL and DECEL components The ADP will determine the acceleration and deceleration rate from 0 to the PTO Output Frequency OF The PTO Output Frequency OF defines the operating frequency in pulses second during the run portion of the profile TIP When entering the ADP parameters the PTO will generate an Accel Decel Error if one of the following conditions occur e The PTO ADP for accel and or d
36. Mask e e e e e e e e Length e Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 258 Input and Output Instructions REF 1 0 Refresh Instruction Type output C REF gt Execution Time for the REF Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 see p 462 0 84 us The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels This includes write outputs service communications all communication channels communications toggle functionality and comms housekeeping and read inputs The REF instruction has no programming parameters When it is evaluated as true the program scan is interrupted to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the REF instruction The REF instruction cannot be executed from an STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine TIP Using an REF instruction may result in input data changing in the middle of a program scan This condition needs to be evaluated when using the REF instruction ATTENTION The watchdog and scan timers are reset when executing A the REF instruction You must insure that the REF instruction is not placed inside a non terminating program loop
37. No errors MSG MG50 0 1 Elements loj x General fMi 3 Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To ETE ur Iw n Address This Controller Parameters You must select CIP Generic in Communication Command field Also the size of bytes receive or send is the length of service data to be sent or received in the message Target Device Parameters Extended Routing Information File The CIP generic communication command requires an extended routing information file type RIX to store the longer path information for CIP generic message types Each RIX file Element consists of Sub Elements 0 through 24 as shown in the following table To reach another MicroLogix 1100 an SLC 5 05 a PLC 5E or a controller connected to Ethernet via 1761 ENI simply enter in the destination IP address Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 411 Extended Routing Information File Element Sub Bit Description Element 0 Subtype of Ethernet Message 19 0x13 for CIP Generic MSG 1 High word of 32 bit target IP address 2 Low word of 32 bit target IP address 3 15 ASA Service to 8 nr Internal Object Identifier IO size in words 1 to 5 4to8 ASA Internal Object Identifier 101 9 ASA Connection Path Size in words 1 to 15 to ASA Connection Paths Service Type and Service Code The table below indicates the service for example
38. Retrieving Reading Data is retrieved from a data logging queue by sending a logical read Records command that addresses the Data Log retrieval file The oldest record is retrieved first and then deleted The record is deleted as soon as it is queued for transmission If there is a power failure before the transmission is complete the record is lost The data is retrieved as an ASCII string with the following format date UDS time UDS 1 Data UDS 2 Data UDS UDS Last Data NUL e where date mm dd yyyy ASCII characters date is optional time hh mm ss ASCII characters time is optional lt UDS gt User Defined Separator TAB COMMA or SPACE lt X Data gt ASCII decimal representation of the value of the data lt NUL gt record string is null terminated e f the Real Time Clock module is disabled in the controller date is formatted as 00 00 0000 and lt time gt is formatted as 00 00 00 e The Communications Device determines the number of sets of data that have been recorded but not etrieved See the Data Log Status File on page 440 e The controller performs a the data integrity check for each record If the data integrity check is invalid a failure response is sent to the Communications Device The data set is deleted as soon as the failure response is queued for transmission TIP For easy use with Microsoft Excel use the TAB character as the separ
39. e0 100 MB Half Duplex was not advertised during auto negotiation e 1 100 MB Half Duplex was advertised during auto negotiation Advertise 10 MB Full Duplex Flag This bit indicates advertisement status if Auto negotiate enabled e0 10 MB Full Duplex was not advertised during auto negotiation e 1 10 MB Full Duplex was advertised during auto negotiation Publication 1763 RMO01D EN P September 2011 74 Function Files General Channel Status Block 6 to 8 Ethernet Hardware Address 6 byte string A unique Ethernet hardware address assigned to this MicroLogix 1100 processor 9 to 10 IP Address in network byte order Internet address that is specified for this MicroLogix 1100 processor 11 to 12 Subnet Mask in network byte order Subnet mask that is specified for this processor 13to 14 Gateway Address in network byte order Gateway address that is specified for this processor 15 to 116 Reserved Always zero 117 Message Connection Timeout The amount of time in ms allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the destination node The MSG Connection Timeout has a range of 250 ms 65 500 ms 118 Message Reply Timeout The amount of time in ms that the MicroLogix 1100 processor waits for a reply to a command that it has initiated via a MSG instruction The MSG Reply Timeout has a range of 250 ms 65 500 ms 119 Reserved Always zero Inactivity Timeout The amount of time in min
40. 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file this is also the length of source if it is a file data type The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as source if it is a file data type It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value ot constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SOL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode S8 Parameter E g 2 E e E amp bs SFE Elsie 55 m ec jv jo 9 jo I_ E a a JE V Ss le o S S o lw a le lz ha Bh S le le IZ FIG Ela ES 8 e ja 2 6 2 le S la Filel2 e e e e e e e e e Source e e e e e e e e e e Control 3 Length Position 1 See Important note abou indi ect addressing 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies
41. Chapter 23 LCD Information This chapter describes how to use the LCD functions Through the embedded LCD your MicroLogix 1100 lets you monitor bit and integer data within the controller and optionally modify that data to interact with your control program Similarly to the optional 1764 DAT for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers the embedded MicroLogix 1100 LCD allows users access to 48 bits and 48 integers each of which can be individually protected Need to know the speed of a conveyor the status of a remote sensor or how close your process is running relative to its optimal temperature Just monitor your LCD Need to manually start an operation change a timing sequence or make adjustments to a counter Why use your laptop and programming software when the LCD allows you to simulate pushbuttons or numeric entry devices By simply moving ot copying data in and out of the bit and integer files you now can monitor and modify the parameters that your controller uses Making use of the new MicroLogix 1100 LCD Instruction your controller can directly interface with a local operator using your ladder logic The LCD Instruction executes under two modes of operation the first mode being ladder logic output to the display only hereafter called Display Only mode In this Display Only mode up to three lines of data with up to 12 characters per line can be sent to the display from the ladder logic running in the controller Thi
42. Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Source Bits Destination Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15to04 03 02 01 00 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X determines the state of the flag TIP If source is zero the destination is zero and the math status is zero the flag is set to 1 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 00 Cary always resets NNNnnn 0 1 Overflow sets if more than one bit in the source is set otherwise resets The math overflow bit S 5 0 is not set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always resets Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 204 Conversion Instructio
43. For example to disable EH Event 1 and EII Event 3 EI Event 1 32 EII Event 3 04 32 04 36 Enter this value in the UID instruction Notes on using Interrupt bits If the Auto Start bit AS is set this will start the interrupt on power up and set the Timed Interrupt Enabled bit TIE automatically allowing the interrupt to execute Shown in the above example If the AS bit is not set then the TIE bit must be set through the ladder logic in order for the interrupt to execute The User Interrupt Enable bit UIE determines if the interrupt executes or not The following example illustrates a message wtite from an SLC 5 03 or higher processor to a Micrologix 1100 processor with RTC that has been enabled This example can also be applied for messaging between MicroLogix 1100 1200 and 1500 controllers When messaging from a MicroLogix 1100 1200 1500 controller to MicroLogix 1100 1200 1500 it is recommended that RTC 0 be used as the source instead of S 37 8 42 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 559 Minimum Hardware Software requirements All MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 2 MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 e RSLOGIX 500 v7 00 00 Example The example shows network connections using DH 485 however DF1 Full or Half Duplex Ethernet IP will also wotk 24vdc n D Li
44. Function Files Address Level Data Files gt Mode r T s e g Parameter 5 Elo n ae amp x x SFE Rise le Ble a a E ln jo l S Ie _ E Ja ln lw IE e Is 2 15 o jm zl 5 E Ex ke S le zm 9j S a E J s S ia Channel Source e e Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1763 RM00 D EN P September 2011 ABL Test Buffer for Line ABL Ascii Test For Line EN gt Channel 0 Control R6 0 lt DN gt Characters 1 lt Error 0 lt CER 5 ASCII Instructions 321 Example I1 AWT E ASCII WRITE EN 10 Channel 0 Source ST3720 DN Control R6 23 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set write 40 characters from String Length 40 ER ST37 20 to the display device Characters Sent 0 Error 0 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Forty characters from string ST37 40 are sent through channel 0 The Done bit DN is set and a value of 40 is present in the POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER is set See ASCII Instruction
45. IP Address of Mult Hop must be local IP Address 127 0 0 1 or its own IP Address SMTP Error Codes Internal Fail Codes When SMTP sub system cannot send an email due to some reason error code is shown via MSG instruction Error Code 0xDD is stored in Word 18 of MG file Internal Fail Code is stored in Word 22 of MG file When messaging through SMTP communication and the low byte is OXDD the high byte of this sub element contains detailed Fail Code returned by the SMTP sub system The element values of Fail Codes are shown below Fail Code in MG file Comment Word offset 22 0x0000 Delivery successful to the mail relay server 0x01DD SMTP mail server IP Address not configured 0x02DD To destination Address not configured or invalid Ox03DD From reply Address not configured or invalid 0x04DD Unable to connect to SMTP mail server 0x05DD Communication error with SMTP server Ox06DD Authentication required 0x07DD Authentication failed 0x10DD SMTP Configuration File does not exist Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 425 Inline Indirection in String File for Subject and Body For e mail subject and body user can use Inline Indirection functionality In the previous General MSG setup screen e mail subject is ST70 0 and body is ST70 1 If user write SMTP BODY 0 N7 0 in String File N7 0 is replaced to String of the value of N7 0 SMTP Authentication
46. LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the soutce string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is word 1 in the control data file e Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 82 The number of characters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length LEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length LEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length LEN if inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length LEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error code desctiptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AWT Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles
47. MCR Master Control Instruction Type output Reset CMER gt Execution Time for the MCR Instructions When Rung ls Controller MicroLogix 1100 MCR End 1 25 us 1 12 us The MCR instruction works in pairs to control the ladder logic found between those pairs Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non retentive outputs Non retentive outputs are reset when the rung goes false This instruction defines the boundaries of an MCR Zone An MCR Zone is the set of ladder logic instructions bounded by an MCR instruction pair The start of an MCR zone is defined to be the rung that contains an MCR instruction preceded by conditional logic The end of an MCR zone is defined to be the first rung containing just an MCR instruction following a statt MCR zone rung as shown below 1 0030 XE CMCR gt Ladder Logic within MCR Zone 0033 CMCR gt Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Program Control Instructions 253 While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true execution proceeds as if the zone were not present When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false All non retentive outputs within the MCR zone ate reset MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications When you program MCR ins
48. More details are provided below ASCII String Control These instructions are used to manipulate string data When a string control instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately It is never sent to the ASCII queue to wait for execution The following table lists the ASCII string control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1100 controllers MicroLogix 1100 ACI String to Integer AIC Integer to String ACN String Concatenate ASC String Search AEX String Extract ASR ASCII String Compare ASCII Port Control These instructions use or alter the communication channel for receiving ot transmitting data The following table lists the ASCII port control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1100 controllers MicroLogix 1100 ABL Test Buffer for Line ARD ASCII Read Characters ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ARL ASCII Read Line ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AWT ASCII Write When the ACL ASCII Clear Buffer instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately and causes all instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue including stopping execution of the ASCII instruction currently executing The ER error bit is set for each instruction that is removed from the ASCII queue When any of the other port control instructions are encountered in a ladder logic program it may or
49. erel E 2l 2 o S lv jo 9 JO _ B la la Iw JE e lS le s Je o l lv la e iz l z EF ZEEE is e 8 jS a E J JE la S Operand Bit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS LCD and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Relay Type Bit Instructions 161 OTE Output Energize Instruction Type output B3 0 eU Execution Time for the OTE Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 1 43 us 1 5 us Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 4 OTE instructions ate reset turned OFF when e You enter or return to the program or remote program mode or power is restored e The OTE is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone TIP A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OTE instruction remains set until the OTE is scanned again ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the ast instruction executed A on the rung la
50. false to 3 ER Erro ER bit is ble Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next rue rung transition after the rung goes false Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set 4 FD Found bit is set when the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the word in the sequencer reference file This bit is assessed each time the SOC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true e e ngth The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to receive the current comparison data Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 for words and 0 to 127 for long words The position is incremented on each false to true transition Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Sequencer Instructions 243 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following
51. la la S e e S Data Files Function Files Parameter a cc a x a o g S v jo a I A o lw a le Z iu B a la e b b lz a Sj Time e e e e e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use Indirect addressing with Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 SI MG PD RIC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files UID User Interrupt Disable UID User Interrupt Disable Interrupt Types Instruction Type output Execution Time for the UID Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1100 When Rung Is True False 9 28 us 0 87 us Using Interrupts 265 The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 Reserved Reserved 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero To disable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to disable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you sele
52. 0 9 us The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into anothet COP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E 8 2 E e S E ec gx E S Bis l8 2 isle c o In jo 19 lo l jA la n JE g s x 5 lo o lw a le le lu blh E le le EIS E Ela EB 8 le ja Eja E a E Sl Source e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e a e Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 224 File Instructions The source and destination file types must be the same except bit B and integer N they can be interchanged It is the address that determines the maximum length of the block to be copied as shown in the following table Maximum Lengths for the COP Instruction Source Destination Data Type Range of Length Operand 1 word elements ie word 1 to 128 2 word elements ie long word 1 to 64 3 word elements ie counter 1 to 42 42 word elements ie string 1 to3 Publication 1763 RM0
53. 1 Controller Mode 468 8 2 STI Mode 473 2 9 Memory Module Program Compare 474 2 15 Math Overflow Selection 475 S 3H Watchdog Scan Time 475 S 4 Free Running Clock 476 5 Minor Error Bits 471 S 6 Major Error Code 479 S7 Suspend Code 480 8 8 Suspend File 480 8 9 Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 480 10 Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 481 8 13 8 14 Math Register 481 S 15L Node Address 481 15H Baud Rate 482 22 Maximum Scan Time 482 29 User Fault Routine File Number 482 30 STI Set Point 483 8 31 STI File Number 483 8 33 Channel 0 Communications 403 35 Last 100 Sec Scan Time 485 36 10 Data File Overwrite Protection Lost 485 37 RTC Year 485 8 38 RTC Month 486 8 39 RTC Day of Month 486 S 40 RTC Hours 486 S 41 RTC Minutes 487 S 42 RTC Seconds 487 53 RTC Day of Week 487 8 57 OS Catalog Number 488 8 58 OS Series 488 59 OS FRN 488 S 60 Processor Catalog Number 488 S 61 Processor Series 488 62 Processor Revision 489 63 User Program Functionality Type 489 S 64L Compiler Revision Build Number 409 S 64H Compiler Revision Release 489 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Status File Details System Status File 467 Arithmetic Flags The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math logical or move instruction The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math logical or move instruction in the program is executed Carry Flag Address
54. 1785 KA5 bridge device OS Series B FRN 4 or later The following illustrates the MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B CH1 Ethernet sending a remote message to a SLC5 03 processor DH Node 51 The remote message will passthru an ENET module a ControlLogix chassis Gateway a DHRIO module and a 1785 K A5 bridge device In order for the message to pass through the network a multiHop MSG must be setup Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 401 and a DHRIO Routing table must exist It must route to a DHRIO module onto DH thru a 1785 K A5 bridge to DH485 Follow the example below for the configuration steps SLC5 03 amp KFC fo ML1100 Control Logix Gateway Backplane e Link ID 20 1785 KA5 100 100 115 7 LinkID 27 7 Adding 1785 KA5 bridge module Routing to a DHRIO module onto DH thru a 1785K A5 bridge to DH485 In order for the RSLinx RSWho window to browse the DH485 netwotk you must configure the 1785K A5 bridge in the ControlLogix Gateway Configuration software 1756gtwy Follow the example below for the configuration steps To go from a DHRIO module through a 1785 K A5 bridge device to a DH485 network the DHRIO module must be configured using the ControlLogix Gateway Configuration tool For example if a 1785 K A5 bridge is on a DH network at node 37 and the DH485 LinkID is 13 complete the following DHRIO Routing table crea
55. 2 word 51 LCR 3 word 34 RTC 8 word 1 write only srt 42 word 2 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 369 Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message PLC5 0 1 B N 1 word 103 F2 L 2 word 51 T 5 word 20 grt 42 word 1 Modbus B N command 5 1 bit 1 Commands B N command 6 1 word 1 B N 1 bit 1920 Modbus bit elements commands 1 2 and 15 120 words Commands 1 and 2 are read only 15 is write only 1 MicroLogix 1100 Se 2 Message Type mus B N commands 3 4 and 16 ries B FRN 4 or later multi register 120 Modbus register elements 120 words Commands 3 and 4 are read only 16 is write only be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 3 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series A FRN3 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 370 Communications Instructions Target Device Parameters EIE Rung 2 0 MG11 0 General r This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N7 0 Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Channel 0 Error ER p Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec 2 octal
56. 217 File CPW COP FLL BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL LFU The file instructions perform operations on file data 221 Sequencer SQC SOO SQL Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines that have 239 consistent and repeatable operations Program Control JMP LBL JSR SBR RET SUS TND MCR END The program flow instructions change the flow of 249 ladder program execution Input and Output IIM IOM REF The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting 255 for the input and output scans User Interrupt STS INT UID UIE UIF The user interrupt instructions allow you to interrupt your program based on 259 defined events Process Control PID The process control instruction provides closed loop control 279 ASCII ABL ACB ACI ACL ACN AEX AHL AIC ARD ARL ASC ASR AWA AWT The ASCII instructions 309 convert and write ASCII strings Communications MSG SVC The communication instructions read or write data to another station 341 Recipe RCP The recipe instruction allows you to transfer a data set between the recipe database and a set of 427 user specified data table elements Data Logging DLG The data logging instruction allow you to capture time stamped and date stamped data 427 LCD LCD The LCD instruction transfers data from a data file to the LCD and receives a value from the LCD 445 1 The RTA Real Time Cloc Adjust Ins
57. 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP long word see p 142 control read write 142 32 bit INT 1 OF OFS and JF are signed 16 bit 32768 32768 variables in MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller but they are unsigned 16 bit 0 65535 variables in MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller 2 3 4 The variable range of OF OFS and JF is 0 20000 in MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller and it is 0 40000 in MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller Applies only to MicroLogix 1100 Series A Controller Applies only to MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controlle Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 201 Using High Speed Outputs 135 PTO Output OUT Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OUT Output PTO 0 0UT word INT 2 or 3 control fread only The PTO OUT Output vatiable defines the output O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 that the PTO instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the uset program e When OUT 2 PTO pulses output 2 O0 0 0 2 of the embedded outputs e When OUT 3 PTO pulses output 3 O0 0 0 3 of the embedded outputs TIP Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running stops all output pulses and causes a PTO error PTO Done DN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DN Done PTO 0 DN
58. 45 18 us 1 62 us matching character Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string This instruction executes on a true rung Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address of the string you want to find e Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 within the search string An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string e Search is the address of the string you want to examine e Result is the location from 1 to 82 that the controller uses to store the position in the Search string where the Source string begins If no match is found result is set equal to zero Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ASC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 z Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode o a Parameter 5 8 g t a S ar cz T jx a CFEEeB feels S a ln o 9 lo j _ E la lt la a JE e l 15 2 15 e e O0 e jz N 2 m e w o lo E le la a lo G la S S S ja E ia la s 3 a Source eje Index Search Result 1 The Control data file is the only valid ile type for the Control Element
59. BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files The terms used within the table are defined as follows e Parameter The parameter is the information you supply to the instruction It can be an address a value or an instruction specific parameter such as a timebase e Data Files See Data Files on page 40 e Function Files See Function Files on page 49 e CS See Communications Status File on page 57 e IOS See Input Output Status File on page 79 e DLS See Data Log Status File on page 440 e Address Mode See Addressing Modes on page 83 e Addressing Level Address levels describe the granularity at which an instruction allows an operand to be used For example relay type instructions XIC XIO etc must be programmed to the bit level timer instructions TON TOF etc must be programmed to the element level timers have 3 words per element and math instructions ADD SUB etc must be programmed to the word or long word level Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Programming Instructions Overview 83 Addressing Modes The MicroLogix 1100 supports three types of data addressing e mmediate e Direct e ndirect The MicroLogix 1100 do not support indexed addressing Indexed addressing can be duplicated with indirect addressing See Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing on page 87 How or when each type is used depends on the instruction being programmed and the type of elemen
60. CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 230 File Instructions FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FFL Instruction Data Size word long word When Rung Is True 38 7 0 02 us word 38 0 0 02 long wordus False 37 09 us 37 09 us On a false to true rung transition the FFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a FIFO stack This instruction s counterpart FIFO unload FFU is paired with a given FFL instruction to remove elements from the FIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL FIFO Load C EN 5 Source N7 0 Controller FIFO 3N71 lt DN gt Control R6 0 Length 1 lt lt EM gt MicroLogix 1100 Position 0 lt FFL FIFO LOAD EN Source N7 10 HDN FIFO N7 12 Control R6 0 EM Length 34 Position 9 FFU FIFO UNLOAD EU FIFO N7 12 DN Dest N7 11 EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair This instruction uses the following operands Destination Position N7 11 N7 12 I FFU instruction unloads data from stack N7 12 at position 0 N7 12 Source N7 13 N7 14 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N7 10 FFL instruction loads data into sta
61. Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 0 binary 00r 1 status read write This bit is set 1 if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes OverFlow Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 1 binary 00r 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in the destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 Whenever this bit is set 1 the overflow trap bit 5 0 is also set 1 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes Zero Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 2 binary 00r 1 status read write This bit 1s set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is zero Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 2 is restored when execution resumes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 468 System Status File Sign Flag Ad
62. Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors A MSG route must be configured in the MultiHop tab of the MSG Setup Screen Click on the MultiHop tab Haix General MultiHop Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop This Processor EtherNet IP IET st 100 100 115 7 ControlLogix Backplane NA 1756 Backplane Slot dec Enter in the IP address of the 1756 ENET module select ControlLogix backplane press the Insert key and enter in the backplane slot numbers of the DHRIO module 0 16 under the To Addtess fields Click on the ControlLogix Backplane to highlight it and press the Insert key on your computer s keyboard to add another hop Double click on the From Device under the ControlLogix Backplane and select the 1756 DHRIO Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 400 Communications Instructions Make sute that the From Port for the DHRIO module is set for Channel A Enter in the destination node address DH octal address of target processor under the To Address General MultiHop Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device e To Address This Processor EtherNet IP Device str 100 100 115 7 ControlLogix Backplane N 1756 Backplane Slot dec 6 1756 DHRIO or 1756 DH485 Channel A Station oct dec 51o 41d Note Make sure that the Target Device Data Table Address exists in the target device Network Message Example 2 MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet to SLC 5 03 DH485 via ENET DHRIO and
63. FCH PCCC Description Disk file is write protected or otherwise inaccessible off line only FDH PCCC Description Disk file is being used by another application update not performed off line only FFH Local communication channel is shut down TIP For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG instruction Codes E0 to EF represent EXT STS codes 0 to F Codes F0 to FC represent EXT STS codes 10 to 1C Special Function with MicroLogix 1100 Series B FRN 4 supports the configuration of IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Default Domain Name MSG instruction 0S Primary Name Server and Secondary Name Server in the Ethernet Series B FRN 4 or Channel Configuration File via Ethernet MSG instruction Also later MicroLogix 1100 supports Email Capability These features can be done by sending the 485CIF write message to local IP Address with ST file type Ethernet Channel Configuration Change Functionality Configure MSG Setup Screen to change Ethernet Channel Configuration Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 417 General MSG Setup Screen to change IP Address This Controller m Control Bits Channel T integral Ignore if timed out ero Communication Command 485CIF Write Break Connection BI Data Table Address ST30 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements
64. Forces Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 5 binary 1 status read only This bit is always set 1 by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled Forces Installed Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 6 binary 0 or 1 status read only This bit is set 1 by the controller to indicate that 1 or more inputs or outputs ate forced When this bit is clear a force condition is not present within the controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 470 System Status File Fault Override At Power Up Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 8 binary 0 or 1 control read only When set 1 causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 at powet up The power up mode is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also FO Fault Override on page 55 Startup Protection Fault Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 9 binary Oor 1 control read only When set 1 and the controller powers up in the RUN or REM RUN mode the controller executes the User Fault Routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 to resume operation If the User Fault Routine does not clear bit S 1 13 the co
65. Instructs the PTO sub system to generate a single Jog Pulse Cleared 0 Arms the PTO Jog Pulse sub system PTO Jog Pulse Status JPS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JPS Jog Pulse Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO has generated a Jog Pulse The JPS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state TIP The output jog pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared 0 off Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 147 PTO Jog Continuous JC Sub Element Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Description Access JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 0 or 1 control read write The PTO JC Jog Continuous bit instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous pulses The frequency generated is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Continuous operation is only possible under the following conditions e PTO sub system in idle Jog Pulse not active e Enable not active The JC bit operates as follows e Set 1 In
66. Last Normal Poll List Scan CSx 19 Time in 100 ms increments of last scan through Normal Poll List Last Priority Poll List Scan CSx 21 Time in 100 ms increments of last scan through Priority Poll List Message Retry CSx 13 The number of message retries sent by the processor Undelivered Messages CSx 12 The number of messages that were sent by the processor but not acknowledged by the destination device Duplicate Messages CSx 18 The number of times the processor received a message packet identical Received to the previous message packet Bad Packets Received CSx 16 The number of incorrect data packets received by the processor for which no ACK was returned Max Normal Poll List Scan CSx 20 Maximum time in 100 ms increments to scan the Normal Poll List Max Priority Poll List Scan CSx 22 Maximum time in 100 ms increments to scan the Priority Poll List RTS Request to Send CSx 9 1 The status of the RTS handshaking line asserted by the processor CTS Clear to Send CSx 9 0 The status of the CTS handshaking line received by the processor DCD Data Carrier Detect CSx 9 3 Reserved 1 x equals the Channel number Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 515 Monitor Active Stations To see which slave stations are active when the channel is configured for Standard Polling Mode either single or multiple message per scan view the DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node Table The table is stored in
67. Local Remote MEE p Error Error Code Hex 0 r Error Description No errors Message Timeout This value defines how long in seconds the message instruction has to complete its operation once it has started Timing begins when the false to true rung transition occurs enabling the message If the timeout petiod expires the message errors out The default value is 5 seconds 2 seconds for Modbus commands The maximum timeout value is 255 seconds Message Timeout for any MicroLogix 1100 channel 1 MSG can not be modified in the Ethernet Message Setup dialog box It is assigned by the processor and is determined by adding the Channel 1 MSG Connection Timeout to the MSG Reply Timeout then adding 15 seconds This value can be modified by changing one or both of the timeout values in the channel configuration screen for channel 1 The modified message timeout applies to all Ethernet MSG instructions MSG timeout for channel 1 MSG Connection Timeout MSG Reply Timeout 15 seconds If the message timeout is set to zero the message instruction will never timeout Set the Time Out bit TO 1 to flush a message instruction from its buffer if the destination device does not respond to the communications request Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 371 Data Table Address Offset This variable defines the starting address in the target controller The data table address is u
68. MSG1 N100 20 MSG2 N100 40 MSG3 etc and specifying a different node address in the MSG set up screen General Information The Data logging feature allows the creation of memory queues to captute or store application data as a record for later retrieval Each record is stored in a user configured battery backed queue The size of memory where queues are stored is 128K bytes this is independent of the rest of the processor memory The Data logging feature allows the capture or storage of application data as a record for later retrieval Each record is stored in a user configured battery backed queue The size of the queue is 128K bytes independent of the rest of the processor memory Configuring the DLG instruction in the MicroLogix 1100 LRP 1 Create a new RSLogix 500 project for the MicroLogix 1100 2 Create a new rung of ladder logic in File 2 as shown below ECIEDE Bl xj FYI The DLG instruction ONLY captures data on a false to true rung transition 3 Double Click Data Logging Configuration in the controller otganizer to access the Data Log Queue Configuration window Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 562 Knowledgebase Quick Starts alo x B Help Eg Controller i Controller Properties D Processor Status Function Files AM 10 Configuration Bs Channel Configuration a Program Files svso SYS1 4 Lap2 E Data Files B Cross Reference E 00 ourPuT E n input E s2 s
69. Protectio Access the Download Data File Protect feature using RSLogix 500 programming software For each data file you want protected check the Memoty Module Download item within the protection box in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration To access this screen right mouse click on the desired data file User Program Transfer Requirements Data File Download Protection only operates when the following conditions are met during a User Program or Memory Module download to the controller The controller contains protected data files e The program being downloaded has the same number of protected data files as the program currently in the controller All protected data file numbers types and sizes number of elements currently in the controller exactly match that of the program being downloaded to the controller If all of these conditions are met the controller will not write over any data file in the controller that is configured as Download Protected when a program is downloaded from a memory module or programming softwate If any of these conditions are not met the entire User Program is transferred to the controller Additionally if the program in the controller contains protected files the Data Protection Lost indicator S 36 10 is set to indicate that protected data has been lost For example a control program with protected files is transferred to the controller The original program did
70. Reserved always 0 lo Channel 0 Channel 0 Ext Channel 1 Modbus RTU Master MessagesSent 0 Messages Received 0 Modem Lines Link Layer Eror Count 0 Link Layer Eror Code 0 RTS CTS iix Channel 0 hannel 1 Modbus PL Eror Code 1 Counter 0 Eror Code 4 Counter 0 Last Device Reporting Eror Code1 np ___ Error Code 5 Counter 0 Eror Code 2 Counter n Eror Code 6 Counter 0 1 Last Device Reporting Eror Code2 n 1 Error Code 7 Counter o Eror Code 3 Counter n Error Code 8 Counter 0 Last Device Reporting Error Code 3 0 Non Standard Response Counter 0 Last Device Reporting Error Code 4 8 or Non Standard Response 0 Clear Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 68 Function Files ASCII Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 5 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4to15 Reserved 10 0 Software Handshaking Status 1to15 Reserved 11 Echo Character Count 12 Received Character Count 13 to 18 Reserved 19 Bad Character Count 20 to 22 Reserved lolx Channel 0 Channel 1 Generic ASCII Echo Character Count Transmitter ENABLED CharacterCountReceived p BadCharacterCount p Modem Lines RTS CTS
71. Rockwell Automation Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Supersedes Publication 1763 RM001C EN P October 2009 Copyright 2011 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved
72. The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Example I1 AWA EN ASCII WRITE APPEND 10 Channel O Source ST37 42 DN If input slot 1 bit 10 is set read 25 characters from Rua M M i ES ST37 42 and write it to the display device Then g eng c Characters Sent 0 write a carriage return and line feed default Erfor 00 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 AWT ASCII Write AWT ASCII Write t C EN gt Channel 0 Source ST14 4 CDN gt Control R6 1 String Length 40 cER gt Characters Sent 0 Error ASCII Instructions 319 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction The controller sends 25 characters from the start of string ST37 42 to the display device and then sends user configured append characters The Done bit DN is set and a value of 27 is present in POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER is set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 337 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on pa
73. The DN bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Start ST Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ST Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Start Bit ST is set when the processor receives acknowledgment ACK from the target device The ST bit is cleared when the DN ER or TO bit is set The DF1 Radio Modem and Modbus RTU Master protocols do not have acknowledgements When the channel that the MSG instruction is being initiated on is configured for either of these two drivers the Start Bit ST is set when the message has been successfully transmitted Break Connection BK Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 BK Binary On or Off Control Read Write When the Break bit is used by the true the Ethernet IP connection will be closed after the MSG instruction is processed If set to 0 value the Ethernet IP connection will remain even if the MSG instruction sent successfully MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later only Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 356 Communications Instructions Timing Diagram forthe The following section describes the timing diagram for a message instruction MSG Instruction 3 Target node 5 Target node processes packet 1 Rung goes true receives packet successfully and returns data read or acknowledges receipt write m o mg 5 49 Publication 1763 RM0
74. The MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B only supports CIP Generic messages over ethernet port This section describes how to configure a CIP Generic message when you are use Ethernet communication channel 1 of the MicroLogix 1100 The Network Configuration is shown below ML1100 Control Logix Gateway Backplane Link ID 20 10 121 29 119 Link ID 16 The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below This screen is used to setup This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of the elements follow Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 410 Communications Instructions MSG MG50 0 1 Elements loj xl PGi eral MultiHop Send Data Receive Data Ts Controller Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore if timed out TO comet ion LL CIP Generic Break Connection BK Data Table Address Receive Awaiting Execution EW Size in Bytes Receive Send Error ER rror Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 33 Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote MuliHop Ves Extended Routing Info FileCRIX REXTT O Error Service Generic Get Attribute Single Service Code hex E Error Code Hex 0 Class hex F5 dec 245 Instance hex 1 dec i Attribute hex E dec 5 Description
75. The PWM EH Enable Hard Stop bit stops the PWM sub system immediately A PWM hard stop generates a PWM sub system error e Set 1 Instructs the PWM sub system to stop its output modulation immediately output off 0 Cleared 0 Normal operation Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 156 Using High Speed Outputs PWM Enable Status ES Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0O ES bit Qor1 status read only The PWM ES Enable Status is controlled by the PWM sub system When the rung preceding the PWM instruction is solved true the PWM instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set When the rung preceding the PWM instruction transitions to a false state the enable status bit is reset 0 immediately e Set 1 PWM is enabled Cleared 0 PWM has completed or the rung preceding the PWM is false PWM Output Frequency OF Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access Controller Series OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 OF word INT 0to20 000 control read write A word UINT 0 to 40 000 B The PWM OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PWM function This frequency can be changed at any time In the MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller the data less than zero or greater than 20 000 generates a PWM error However
76. The basis of character sets used in most microcomputers a string of 7 binary digits represents each character baud rate The speed of communication between devices Baud rate is typically displayed in K baud For example 19 2K baud 19 200 bits per second bit The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic where the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF block diagrams A method used to illustrate logic components or a sequence of events Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or E Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 594 branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program Its primary use is to build OR logic communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with devices such as other controllers and operator interface devices takes place during this period control program User logic the application that defines the controller s operation controller A device such as a programmable controller used to control output devices controller overhead A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes memory checks tests communications etc control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions c
77. V m u s WT anos IConnectionPoint Rev 2 0 F with Timestamp 3 Add a new item Add New OPC Item ML1100_UNSOLICITEDMSGI N 7 4 2 NSOLI D N D VT EMPTY E 407 4 Note that the Sub Quality will be Bad until an unsolicited message is received z RSI OPC Test Client RSLinx OPC Server 4 Configure the ML1100 MSG instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 408 Communications Instructions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ML1100 Channel 1 Network Link ID must be matched with the DDE OPC Topic Remote ID configured in step 2 0 in this example Also configure a Remote Ethernet MSG in the ML1100 to Remote Station Address 63 and Remote Link ID 15 Channel Configuration 0 LI v 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex MSG MG10 0 1 Elements Configuring a MicroLogix 1100 CIP Generic Message via Ethernet 0S Series B FRN 4 or later Communications Instructions 409 Trigger MSG instruction It should complete done and OPC Test Client should display the N7 0 data as well as Good Sub Quality lolx wi File Server Group ltem Log View Window Help m l8j x oea E S mili D test Actual Rate 1000 IterniD Sub Value Sub Quality Sub Updates Update Rate Run Avg ML1100 UNSOLICITEDMSG N 0 0 Good 2 0 0 077468
78. data ranges for these instructions are e 32 768 to 32 767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table EQU NEO GRT LES GEO and LEO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level gt Mode ie 5 Parameter E 2 E e S e x 9 _ fe Bislg elise T a E la lo le _ B la l la la E e iml s E o v lo e z 5 a E E lt E 2E GG aE 82 jS a E ja 2 le Su Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source B e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing 3 Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value e For EQU GEQ GRT LEQ and LES If either Source is not a number NAN then rung state changes to false For NEQ If either Source is not a number NAN then rung st
79. folder Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 0 Configuration 31 3 Open slot 0 controller 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab 5 Select the mask bits for the inputs that you want to operate as latching inputs 6 Select the state for the latching inputs The controller can detect both on rising edge and off falling edge pulses depending upon the configuration selected in the programming software The following information is provided for a controller looking for an on pulse When an external signal is detected on the controller latches this event In general at the next input scan following this event the input image point is turned on and remains on for the next controller scan It is then set to off at the next input scan The following figures help demonstrate this Rising Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 32 1 0 Configuration Rising Edge Behavior Example 2 External Input Latched Status Input File Value TIP IMPORTANT Scan Number X Scan Number X1 Scan Number X42 Input Ladder Output Inp
80. ieu ER ESSE Xo e ides 215 NOT Tocat INOLT Soest ehr opt e Ur Vae wt Ie pe UNE ae a 216 Chapter 13 Move Instructions MOV MOVE Sy pisa pratusu tek Pda e aT hf ee ay os b 217 MYM Masked Move Acne neben a IS HR Wee P Rh 219 Chapter 14 File Instructions CPW Oy Word satio o cues eulos rt ES 222 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 8 Table of Contents Sequencer Instructions Program Control Instructions Input and Output Instructions Using Interrupts Process Control Instruction COP SGopy File 34 Feng v etd atur Rd we dau Pe Era d d 225 FED el File ee ett IC d eed 225 DSL Bit Shift Eabb oos R4 A Ho rusos Ree A eos pes S 226 IBS Rie Bit Shift RIS x iue oe dli ue e te Pao eye det 228 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load eecsar thee abe wae 230 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 4 eet e pd soso petiole 232 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load wash odie Wie Ie dO 234 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload i sert rh xh 236 OW Pe Swapna kor OEE e enk naaa vec OT e poda doe RE art db doen 238 Chapter 15 SQC Sequencer Compare Suen eis ham heed Fes eons 240 SQO Seguent Output uusobudiuie vue quark pO RU I we oi 243 SOL Seg encer Load xosdbesttitus pag dde pu aro e Vatic Potes 246 Chapter 16 MEP s Tump to Label s tsar ese etek aes ac he whl far iet 249 LBE Label gae riss ias riaa anccs bese AAAA E G 250 JSR Jump to Subroutine its nah tbls pa Ae hats 250 SBR Subroutine Labels 35942 eee ph be ie cen et A 2
81. indicate that it has connected to the processor as shown below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 565 f Connected to DATA LOG Connected to DATA LOG J Read Status 5 Click Read Status once a valid connection is established The DLOG utility will now retrieve the status information from the MicroLogix 1100 controller Queue Allocated Recorded Disconnect Read Status Read Log In this example you can see that Queue 0 has 100 records allocated and 5 recorded IMPORTANT If you do not see 5 records verify your Data Logging Enable bit was toggled 5 times causing the 5 entries to be recorded in the Queue 6 Select Read Log This will retrieve the data from the ML1100 controller FYI Data CANNOT be viewed in the Data Log Utility The utility only allows retrieval of the data stored in the Queues and creates an off line file Once the Read Log has completed the following screen will appear confirming the number of records that have been read from the Queue s Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 566 Knowledgebase Quick Starts n Connected to DATA LOG 5 records read from 1 queue Disconnect Read Status FYI Remember that once the data records have been read from the MicroLogix the queue is automatically cleared 7 Click Save Data 8 Enter a file name In our example My DLG Data was used Make note of
82. loaded into the HSC sub system TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Output Mask Bits OMB Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary control read only The OMB Output Mask Bits define which outputs on the controller can be directly controlled by the high speed counter The HSC sub system has the ability to directly without control program interaction turn outputs ON or OFF based on the HSC accumulator reaching the High or Low presets The bit pattern stored in the OMB variable defines which outputs are controlled by the HSC and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC The bit pattern of the OMB variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the controller Bits that are set 1 are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub system Bits that are clear 0 cannot be turned on ot off by the HSC sub system The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup The table below illustrates this relationship Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Address 16 Bit Signed Integer Data Word HSC 0 HPO high preset output 15 14 13 171 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 J0 HSC 0 0MB output mask 00 0 0 UN jo 1 Publicati
83. message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses 0 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 ot higher processor Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 503 DH 485 Broadcast Messages A broadcast write command is sent as a DH 485 Send Data No Acknowledgement SDN packet No acknowledgement or reply is returned DH 485 Configuration Parameters When communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed Parameter Options Programming Software Default Baud Rate 9600 19 2K 19 2K Node Address 1 to 31 decimal 1 Token Hold Factor 1to4 2 Max Node Address 1 to 31 31 The major software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance e number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes e baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed Refer to your programming software s documentation for more information Number of N
84. positions to the right of that position For example 1111 1111 0001 1010 244 23 21 28 16 8 2 256 230 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Hexadecimal Numbers Number Systems 1x214 16384 1x23 8192 1x212 4096 1x21 2048 1x210 1024 1x29 2 512 1x28 256 1x2 128 1x26 84 1x2 32 1 1x2 2 1x29 1 1x2 16 1x23 8 x22 4 1111 1111 1x25 32768 This position is always 1 for negative numbers 32 67 583 Hexadecimal numbers use single characters with equivalent decimal values ranging from 0 to 15 HEX 1 23 45 67 89 A B C D E F Decimal 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 The position values of hexadecimal numbers are powers of 16 beginning with 169 at the right 165 16 16 16 Example Hexadecimal number 218A has a decimal equivalent value of 8586 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 584 Number Systems 2x16 8192 1x16 256 8x16 128 10x16 10 718A 8586 Hexadecimal and binary numbers have the following equivalence Hexadecimal 218A 8586 Binary 0010 0001 1000 1010 8586 8192 256 128 10 120 1295 12 ma Example Decimal number 8586 in equivalent binary and hexadecimal form Binary 1101 1110 0111 0110 858
85. valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller It is programmed and operated the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the EII Ell Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read only Any ER Error Code detected by the EII sub system is displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Ell Error Codes Error Recoverable Fault Description Code X Controller 1 Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not Number exist 2 Invalid Input Valid numbers must be 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Selection 3 Input Selection Ells cannot share inputs Each Ell must have a unique input Overlap Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using Interrupts 275 Ell User Interrupt Executing UIX Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing Ell 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the EIT mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PFN The EII mechanism clears the UIX bit when the controller complet
86. 0 0 00 0 E Columns 10 v Desc mo Properties Usage Help 9 Download the program to your MicroLogix 1100 10 Go On Line 11 Toggle the Data Logging Enable B3 0 0 bit Off to On a total of 5 times Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 564 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Using the Data Logging Utility Software to recover data ATTENTION If any other software package such as RSLINX has A control of the computers communication port or if the wrong COM port is selected or a processor other then the MicroLogix 1100 is connected to the computer you will not be able to continue The Data Logging utility is the only supported method for retrieving data that has been stored in the processor 1 Install the DLOG utility found at http www ab com plclogic micrologix 2 Execute DLCA1764 EXE 3 Configure Port Baud Rate and DF1 Node as shown below f Data Log Monitor 1 5 xl MicroLogix Data Log Capture Application Copyright 2000 Rockwell Automation Released Version 3 0 0 1 Settings for ML1500 LAP Processor Port Baud Rate DF1 Node cow 15200 fi Connect Quit 4 Click Connect FYI By default the MicroLogix 1100 communications are configured for 19200 baud If using defaults select 19200 above otherwise select the baud rate configured in the MicroLogix Channel Configuration Screen If a correct configuration has been selected the utility software will
87. 0 accumulated count equals the High or Low preset or passes through Overflow or Underflow The Integer number entered must be a valid sub routine program file 3 to 255 HSC 0 AS Auto Start defines if the HSC function will automatically start when the MicroLogix enters run or test HSC 0 CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the HSC HSC 0 HIP High Preset is the upper set point in counts that defines when the HSC will generate an interrupt and execute the PFN sub routine Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 547 Example The following example uses the HSC in Mode 0 Up Counter The Up Counter clears the accumulated value 0 when it reaches the High Preset HIP This mode configures 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 as the HSC 0 input Note Each mode for the HSC will configure the inputs for different functionality In this example the HSC will count input pulses coming into I 0 0 when the total number of pulses counted equals the High Preset HIP the HSC will jump to subroutine file 3 The HIP is set for 5000 pulses in this example Also once the HIP is reached the HSC will then reset HSC 0 ACC to zero 0 and start counting again Important It is assumed that the user has connected a device to I 0 0 to generate pulses Note The following ladder logic does not need to be entered into File 2 however this allows for easy viewing of the accumulated counts from th
88. 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 Usage Radix Structured s Help At powet up of after reconfiguration the master station assumes that all slave stations are inactive A station is shown active only after it responds to a poll packet Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 516 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Slave the following parameters can be changed DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking No Handshaking 485 Network Error Detection CRC BCC CRC EOT Suppression enabled disabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Message Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are set greater than 0 Poll Timeout 0 t
89. 1 27 FRD example 11 205 instruction 11 204 free running clock 5 476 free running clock status 8 476 full duplex G 596 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 608 function files 3 49 3 50 base hardware information BHI 3 56 communications status CS file 3 57 3 71 event input interrupt Ell 18 272 high speed counter HSC 5 90 input output status file IOS 3 79 memory module information MMI 3 54 pulse train output PTO 6 133 pulse width modulation PWM 6 150 real time clock RTC 3 57 selectable timed interrupt STI 18 268 future access status bit B 473 G GCD instruction 11 210 GEQ instruction 9 182 Gray code instruction 11 210 greater than instruction 9 181 greater than or equal to instruction 9 182 GRT instruction 9 181 H half duplex D 510 G 596 hard disk G 596 high byte 6 596 high speed counter Quick Start example 546 high speed counter function file 5 90 high speed counter load instruction 5 178 high speed outputs 6 127 housekeeping G 596 HSC Quick Start example 546 HSC function file 5 90 HSL instruction 5 118 l 0 G 597 l O configuration 1 15 l O forcing 1 27 I O refresh instruction 17 258 identifying controller faults C 491 IIM instruction 17 255 immediate input with mask instruction 17 255 immediate output with mask instruction 17 257 in line indirection 20 336 input and output instructions 17 255 input device G 596 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 inp
90. 1 to 254 in each field 0 0 0 0 Address The IP address of the gateway that provides a connection to another IP network This field is required when you communicate with other network devices not on a local subnet Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 538 Protocol Configuration Ethernet Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Default Only applicable to the MicroLogix 1100 Series B NULL Domain Name The default domain name can have the following formats a b c a b or a where a b c must start with a letter end with a letter or digit and have as interior characters only letters digits or hyphens Maximum length is 63 characters Primary Name Only applicable to the MicroLogix 1100 Series B 0 0 0 0 Server This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Primary Domain Name System DNS server Secondary Only applicable to the MicroLogix 1100 Series B 0 0 0 0 Name Server This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Secondary Domain Name System DNS server Network Link 0 to 199 0 ID The Link ID assigned to the MicroLogix 1100 either by an RSLinx OPC topic or by the routing table in a 1756 DHRIO or 1756 DH485 module Bootp Enable enabled disabled 1 enabled Check this box to enable Bootp If enabled this causes the processor at power up to try to obtain its network related parameters IP addre
91. 2 42 status S file B 465 string ST file 20 312 timer T 8 167 data logging 22 433 22 440 Quick Start example E 561 data table G 594 DCD instruction 11 202 decode 4 to 1 of 16 instruction 11 202 DF1 full duplex protocol D 505 configuration parameters D 505 description D 505 DF1 half duplex protocol D 506 configuration parameters D 512 D 516 description D 506 DH485 communication protocol D 502 configuration parameters D 503 DH485 network configuration parameters D 503 description D 502 protocol D 502 token rotation D 502 DIN rail G 595 DIV instruction 10 194 divide instruction 10 794 DLG Quick Start example 561 DLG Instruction 22 439 download G 595 DTE definition G 595 E Ell function file 18 272 embedded 1 0 1 15 EMI G 595 ENC instruction 11 203 encode 1 of 16 to 4 instruction 11 203 encoder definition G 595 quadrature 5 111 END instruction 16 252 EQU instruction 9 181 equal instruction 9 787 error codes C 491 C 492 ASCII instruction error codes 20 337 Ell error codes 18 274 fault messages and error codes C 491 HSC error codes 5 93 major error code status B 479 math overflow trap bit 10 189 math status bits 10 189 MSG instruction error codes 21 414 PID runtime errors 19 298 PTO error codes 6 148 PWM error codes 6 158 STI error code 18 270 troubleshooting guide C 492 errors identifying C 497 Ethernet Configuring an Ethernet IP Message 21 387 DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks 27 390 Driver D 537 Multi
92. 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 to 15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received 0 1 2 Undelivered Message Packets 3 ENQuiry Packets Sent 4 NAK Packets Received 15 JEN PactsReceved 6 7 8 9 1 Bad Message Packets Received and NAKed 17 JNoBuferSpceandNAKed i ss lt sCSCis 1 Duplicate Message Packets Received 191022 ss Reserved ipi x Channel 0 Channel 1 DF1 Full Duplex Messages Sent Messages Received ENQs Received Lack of Memory Sent NAK Received NAK Undelivered Messages omn Duplicate Messages Received o p p ENQs Sent 5 D B D Bad Packet Sent NAK Modem Lines RTS CTS Clear Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 62 Function Files DF1 Half Duplex Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 7 8 Format Code always 2 9 CTS RTS ah ae COCSCtCS 1 2 Reserved oo 3 Reserved 4 to15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets Message Packets Retried NAK Packets Received No Buffer Space 1 Bad Message Packets Received 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 19 to 22 l Reserved 1 Duplicate Message Packets Received 2 C
93. 2011 522 Protocol Configuration DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File Viewing Channel Status for DF1 Radio Modem ETT x EC Project J Help EC Controller i Controller Properties Processor Status Function Files Au 10 Configuration Channel Configuration Channel Status E i Program Files Bi svso Bi svs1 B v i Modem Lines RTS CTS B Cross Reference OFF OFF El 00 output Clear El n input D s2 status Fh ona mmame DF1 Radio Modem MessagesSen D UndelieeredMessages D Messages Received 0 Duplicate Messages Received 0 Double click on the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen Lack ofMemoy D BadPacketsReceived 9 Communication Status Function DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Status Field Diagnostic File Location Definition Messages Sent CSx 10 The total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor including message retries Messages Received CSx 11 The number of messages received with no errors Lack of Memory CSx 17 The number of times the processor could not receive a message because it did not have available memory Undelivered Messages CSx 12 The number of messages that could not be sent by the processor due to bad modem handshake signals Duplica
94. 314 OR Logical OR 12 214 ACN String Concatenate 20 325 OSF One Shot Falling 7 164 ADD Add 10 193 OSR One Shot Rising 7 164 AEX String Extract 20 326 OTE Output Energize 7 161 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines 20 328 OTL Output Latch 7 162 AIC ASCII Integer to String 20 316 OTU Output Unlatch 7 162 AND Bit Wise AND 12 213 PID Proportional Integral Derivative 19 282 ARD ASCII Read Characters 20 329 PTO Pulse Train Output 6 127 ARL ASCII Read Line 20 331 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 6 149 ASC String Search 20 333 RAC Reset Accumulated Value 5 119 ASR ASCII String Compare 20 334 RCP Recipe 22 427 AWA ASCII Write with Append 20 317 REF I O Refresh 7 258 AWT ASCII Write 20 319 RES Reset 8 177 BSL Bit Shift Left 14 226 RET Return from Subroutine 6 251 BSR Bit Shift Right 14 228 RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction 3 53 CLR Clear 10 194 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay 8 172 COP Copy File 14 223 SBR Subroutine Label 6 250 CPW Copy Word 14 222 SCL Scale 0 196 CTD Count Down 8 176 SCP Scale with Parameters 0 197 CTU Count Up 8 176 SQC Sequencer Compare 5 240 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 11 202 SQL Sequencer Load 5 246 DIV Divide 10 194 SQ0 Sequencer Output 5 243 DLG Data Log Instruction 22 439 SOR Square Root 0 199 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 11 203 STS Selectable Timed Start 8 264 END Program End 16 252 SUB Subtract 0 193 EQU Equa 9 181 SUS Suspend 6 251 FFL First In First Out
95. 485CIF write command to local IP address with ST file type Valid Data Table Offset range in MSG instruction is 0 through 5 and 10 e Supports DNS cache flush functionality by sending 485CIF write command to local IP address Data Table Offset is 40 e Supports the configuration of Primary Name Server Secondary Name Server and Default Domain Name to the Ethernet Channel Configuration via BOOTP DHCP Server The restriction of the connection number in the Configure CIP Options of RSLinx Classic during OLE or writing of Data Tables is removed The new firmware supports ST file type for all PCCC commands via Channel 0 and Channel 1 All MSG commands and replies SLC5 485CIF PLC5 Read Write support ST file type All incoming commands and replies SLC5 485CIF PLC5 Read Write support ST file type The following features are supported in the OS Series B FRN 4 firmware e Supports the frequency of the HSC High Speed Counter up to 40 KHz e Supports the frequency of the PTO PWM up to 40 KHz e Supports 12 5usec in the Embedded Input Filter Group 0 amp 1 e Supports an additional Analog Input Filter Group e Supports user selectable Analog Input Filters 10Hz 50Hz 60Hz and 250Hz e Supprts 1763 L16DWD model The new firmware supports Web View Disable feature from the file configurations Web View Disable bit in the Data File Properties is checked the data file is not opened to the browsing of Web Server If RSLogix
96. 7 164 one shot instruction 7 163 one shot rising instruction 7 164 online G 600 ONS instruction 7 163 operating system catalog number status 8 488 FRN status B 488 series letter status B 488 operating voltage G 600 OR instruction 12 214 OSF instruction 7 164 OSR instruction 7 164 OTE instruction 7 161 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 OTL instruction 7 162 OTU instruction 7 762 outgoing message command pending status bit B 484 output device G 600 output instruction 7 767 output latch instruction 7 162 output scan G 600 output unlatch instruction 7 762 overflow flag B 467 overflow trap status bit B 477 P password protection 2 45 PCCC G 600 PD data file 19 281 PID analog 0 scaling 19 299 application examples 19 304 application notes 79 300 errors 19 298 PID concept 19 279 PID equation 19 280 PID instruction 19 282 tuning parameters 19 289 PLS file 5 120 Polled report by exception defined D 509 power up mode behavior bit B 471 process control instruction 19 279 processor G 600 processor battery low status bit B 478 processor catalog number status 5 488 processor files G 600 processor revision status B 489 processor series status B 488 program control instructions 16 249 program end instruction 16 252 program file definition G 600 program mode G 600 program scan definition G 600 MicroLogix 1500 scan time worksheet A 462 programmable limit switch 5 89 5 120 programmable limit switc
97. 7 2 or higher 1 If the values of OF OFS JF are greater than 32767 than these values will be displayed as negative value For example If the JF value is 40000 with Series B project of RSLogix500 version 7 2 or later then 25536 will be displayed with RSLogix500 version 7 10 or lower No problem with operation although negative values are displayed Instruction issues There are some instruction issues to support maximum frequency of PTO amp PWM up to 40kHz Normally MicroLogix and RsLogix500 treat data variables as signed value When a user sets the frequency value that is greater than 32 767 using MOV EQU NEQ LES LEQ GRT GEQ MEQ LIM ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG ABS and SCP instructions numerical issues may happen 2 s complement notation and hexadecimal values are useful to solve this issue See Number Systems on page 581 e MOV Instruction When setting JE OF OFS of the PTO PWM function file using the MOV instruction a user cannot enter a source operand value over 32 767 in decimal format because the operand format is 16 bit signed integer 32 768 32 767 even though 16 bit unsigned integer 0 65 535 is functionally supported by PTO PWM To solve this issue 2 s complement notation or hexadecimal value should be used For example Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 574 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller if a user wants to set the PTO 0 JF to 40000 then put 2 s co
98. 96 14 21 2 0 None None None ASCII Write AWT 13 99 14 21 2 0 None None None Bit Shift Left BSL 34 5 0 2 word 34 50 2 0 None None None Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 458 MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1100 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory True False Usage in True False Usage in Words Words Bit Shift Right BSR 34 5 0 2 word 34 5 2 0 None None None Clear CLR 5 29 0 87 0 8 5 46 0 87 File Copy COP 16 8 0 28 0 90 2 0 None None None word Copy Word CPW 16 8 0 27 0 87 2 0 None None None word Count Down CTD 2 24 2 09 0 8 None None None Count Up CTU 2 28 2 15 0 8 None None None Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 25 68 0 87 1 4 None None None Divide DIV 14 68 0 87 2 0 14 96 0 87 Data Log DLG 35 9us 2 5 7 50 0 8 35 9ust 2 5 7 50 us data stamp us data stamp 1 9 us time 1 9 us time stamp 1 9 us stamp 1 9 word logged us word 4 3 us long logged 4 3 word logged us long word logged Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 27 84 0 87 1 4 None None None Equal EQU 8 78 0 87 14 9 09 0 87 FIFO Load FFL 38 7 0 02 37 09 2 0 38 0 02 long 37 09 word word FIFO Unload FFU 38 87 37 06 2 0 38 87 37 06 Fill File FLL 16 8 0 07 10 9 2 0 17
99. AS Accelerating Status RP Ramp Profile H ES Control Stop HIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status NS Normal Operation Status JPS Jog Pulse Status JCS Jog Continuous Status ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent JP Jog Pulse JC Jog Continuous EH Enable Hard Stop EN Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz JF Jog Frequency Hz H TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated H OPP Output Pulses Produced ADP amp ccel Decel Pulses or File Elem if ADI 1 tiu FILII Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 134 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output The variables within each PTO sub element along with what type of Function File behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed individually below All examples illustrate PTO 0 Terms and behavior for Sub Elements Summary PTO 1 ate identical Pulse Train Output Function File PTO 0 Sub ElementDescription Address Data Format Range lype User Program For More Access Information DN Done PTO 0 DN bit Oor1 status read only 135 DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only 136 RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 136 AS Accelerating Status PT
100. Check 2 bytes Total 10 bytes Each record consumes 10 bytes So if only one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 13107 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 128K bytes 10 bytes 128 1024 10 13107 records Recipe and Data Logging 431 Configuring Data Log Data Logging is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software Queues version V7 00 00 or later 1 Open a MicroLogix 1100 application The first step in using Data Logging is to configure the data log queue s Access to this function is provided via the RSLogix 500 Project tree EXAMPLE RESET DLG Mel ES fa Help HE Controler H E Program Files Double click H E Data Fies Configuration to Eg Data Logging access Data Log if E Configuration Configuration E Status H Force Files H E Custom Data Monitors H E Database 2 The Data Log Que window appears Double click on Data Log Configuration Data Log Que Configuration Es 7 e Appearance of Data Data Log Configuration Log Que Configuration window before creating a queue 3 The Data Log Que dialog box appears as shown below Use this dialog box to enter the queue information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 438 Recipe and Data Logging Data Log Que Configuration Number of Records i a did
101. D Momentary Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a momentary or transitional type of input This means that the false to true rung transition enables the PTO instruction and then returns to a false state prior to the PTO instruction completing its operation If a transitional input to the PTO instruction is used the Done DN bit turns on when the instruction completes but only remains on until the next time the PTO instruction is scanned in the user program The structure of the control program determines when the DN bit goes off So to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output you can monitor the Done DN Idle ID or Normal Operation NO status bits Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 131 Sage TIE CPTTTI BP9 7 Rung State qe ri cc rR Sub Elements Relative Timing Normal Operation NO Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN l ff Done DN Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC Start of PTO Start of PTO Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 132 Using High Speed Outputs Standard Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a maintained type of input This means that it enables the PTO instruction No
102. Data Table Address 17 50 Message Enabled EN Local Node Addr dec 2 actall Local Remote Local m Error Eror Code Hex 0 No errors Description Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 376 Communications Instructions In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types if lt gt read write T G lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R RTC gt write N RTC sql lt gt read write 783 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only 3 MiroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Example 2 Local Read from a 485CIF Message Instruction Setup Za MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command 485CIF Read Ignore if timed out TO Data Table Address N70 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution Ew el Channel
103. Do not place the REF instruction inside a program loop unless the program is thoroughly analyzed Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Information About Using Interrupts Chapter 18 Using Interrupts Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events This chapter contains information about using interrupts the interrupt instructions and the interrupt function files The chapter is arranged as follows e Information About Using Interrupts on page 259 User Interrupt Instructions on page 263 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 Using the Event Input Interrupt EI Function File on page 272 See also Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 89 The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of the User Interrupts including e What is an interrupt e When can the controller operation be interrupted e Priority of User Interrupts e Interrupt Latency e User Fault Routine What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended The Micrologix 1100 supports the following User Interrupts User Fault Routine e Event Interrupts 4 e High Speed Counter Interrupts e Selectable Timed Interrupt 1 The MicroLogix 1100 has one HSC
104. Encoding If the SMTP Authentication Flag is enabled MicroLogix 1100 sends encoded Username and Password There are several Authentication methods login plain cram md5 and etc But MicroLogix 1100 supports only the login method Base64 encoding is used to login to SMTP server Sending email in User Fault Routine When the controller mode is changed to User Fault mode if users want to send email user fault routine must be defined in the word 29 Fault Routine 2 29 of System Status File SMTP MSG instruction must be used in the configured Fault Routine also Configuration for sending email in UFR F4 Data File S2 STATUS Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 Debug Protection Mem Module Forces Fault Override At Powerup 1 8 0 Fault Routine 29 zB Startup Protection Fault 1 9 0 Major Error S 6 0h Major Error Halt 1 13 Error Description Math Overflow Trap S 5 0 Control Register Error 5 2 a Battery Low S 5 11 rd Clear Major Error Input Filter Modified 5 13 ASCII String Manipulation Error 5 15 0 0 0 Major Error Executing User Fault Rtn 5 3 0 7 p 0 0 Radix Structured z a _Properties Usage Hep Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 426 Communications Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 RCP Recipe Recipe and Data Logging Chapter 22 This chapter describes how to use the Recipe and Dat
105. FIFO Load 14 230 SWP Swap 4 238 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 14 232 TND Temporary End 6 251 FLL Fill File 14 225 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 208 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 204 TOF Timer Off Delay 8 171 GCD Gray Code 11 210 TON Timer On Delay 8 170 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To 9 182 UID User Interrupt Disable 18 265 GRT Greater Than 9 181 UIE User Interrupt Enable 18 266 HSL High Speed Counter Load 5 118 UIF User Interrupt Flush 18 267 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 17 255 XIC Examine if Closed 7 159 INT Interrupt Subroutine 18 263 XIO Examine if Open 7 159 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 17 257 XOR Exclusive OR 12 215 JMP Jump to Label 16 249 Function File Description Page JSR Jump to Subroutine 16 250 BHI Base Hardware Information 3 56 LBL Label 16 250 CS Communications Status 3 57 LCD LCD instruction 23 453 LCD LCD Information 23 445 LEQ Less Than or Equal To 9 182 Ell Event Input Interrupt 18 272 LES Less Than 9 18 HSC High Speed Counter 5 90 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 14 234 OS 1 0 Status 3 79 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload 14 236 MI Memory Module Information 3 54 LIM Limit Test 9 184 PTO Pulse Train Outpu 6 133 MCR Master Control Reset 16 252 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 6 150 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal 9 182 RTC Real Time Clock 3 51 MOV Move 13 217 ES Ethernet Status 3 71 Publication 17
106. File 9 to 255 B Bit BHI Base Hardware Information T Timer CS Communications Status C Counter IOS 1 0 Status DLS Data Log Status R Control LCD LCD N Integer ES Ethernet Status F Floating Point ST String L Long Word MG Message PD PID PLS Programmable Limit Switch RI Routing Information RIX Extended Routing Information OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Controller Memory and File Types 37 User Memory User memory is the amount of storage available to a user for storing ladder logic data table files I O configuration etc in the controller User data files consist of the system status file I O image files and all other user creatable data files bit timet counter control integer string long word MSG and PID A word is defined as a unit of memory in the controller The amount of memory available to the user for data files and program files is measured in user words Memory consumption is allocated as follows For data files a word is the equivalent of 16 bits of memory For example 1 integer data file element 1 user word 1 long word file element 2 user words 1 timer data file element 3 user words TIP Each input and output data element consumes 3 user words due to the overhead associated with 1 0 forcing For program files a word is the equivalent of a ladder instruction with
107. Format Type User Program Access MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT control read only The MOD Mode variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 8 types of operation This integer value is configured through the programming device and 1s accessible in the control program as a read only variable HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Counter with external direction Counter with external direction reset and hold Two input counter up and down Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold Ny ojl ojl A CG N Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 108 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 0 Up Counter HSC Mode 0 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO ICE Bit Comments Function Count Not Used Not Used Not Used Example 1 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 fT Jon IU Jjoff 0 off 0 Hold accumu
108. Get Attribute Single or Set Attribute Single that you want to perform Available services depend on the class and instance that you are using When the user clicks on the pull down button on the right of the Service Type box then a pull down list window with Custom as the default will appear for the user to select one of these service types Depending on which Service Type is selected user must fill the Class Instance and Attribute field that is represented as P mark with an appropriate Hex value The Service Code is the code for the requested EtherNet IP service This value changes based on the Service type that has been selected When user select a Service type other than Custom this is a read only box If user select Custom in the Service type box then user need to specify a service code in this box Note that only the Service Code is filled in for the user The Class Instance and Attribute must be filled in by the user just as the table below indicates with question marks in their corresponding columns Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 412 Communications Instructions Service Type Pull Down List Auto Fill fields Service Service Code Class Instance Attribute Custom Read Assembly OxOE 0x04 3 Write Assembly 0x10 0x04 3 Read Output Point 0x0E 0x10 3 Write Output Point 0x10 0x09 3 Read Input point 0x0E 0x08 3 Read Parameter OxOE OxOF 1 Write Par
109. Identifier Code MicroLogix 1100 always 0 43to 70 Reserved e MicroLogix 1100 words 43 to 70 when using Modbus RTU Slave Master or DF1 Half Duplex Master 43 to 69 Modbus Slave Diagnostic Counters Block e MicroLogix 1100 65 70 End of List Category Identifier Code e MicroLogix 1100 always 0 The following tables show the details of each block in the Communications Status File Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 58 Function Files General Status Block of Communications Status File General Channel Status Block Word Bit Description 0 Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code 1 Length 2 Format Code 3 Communications Configuration Error Code 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller Once the request has been satisfied the bit is cleared 0 1 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced during end of scan SVC or REF this bit is cleared 0 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue This bit is cleared 0 whe
110. Input I or Output 0 Data File Number optional 0 output 1 input Id s w b f Slot delimiter optional not required for Data Files 2 to 255 S Slot number decimal Embedded 1 0 slot 0 Expansion I 0 eslots 1 to 4 for MicroLogix 1100 See page 17 for an illustration Word delimiter Required only if a word number is necessary as noted below Range 0 to 255 w Word number Required to read write words or if the discrete bit number is above 15 Bit delimiter b Bit number 0 to 15 Addressing Examples Addressing Level Example Address Slot Word Bit Bit Addressing 0 0 4 2 Output Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 output bit 4 0 2 7 2 Output Slot 2 Expansion 1 0 word 0 output bit 7 1 1742 Input Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 input bit 4 0 15 Input Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 input bit 15 Word Addressing 0 1 0 Output Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 17 3 Input Slot 7 Expansion 1 0 word 3 3 1 Input Slot 3 Expansion 1 0 word 1 1 The optional Data File Number is not shown in these examples 2 A word delimiter and number are not shown Therefore the address refers to word 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 0 Forcing Input Filtering 1 0 Configuration 27 I O forcing is the ability to override the actual status of the I O at the user s discretion Input Forcing When an input is forced the value in the input data file is set to a user defined st
111. Messages Communications Instructions 361 Enabling the MSG Instruction Via User Supplied Input This is an example of controlling when the message instruction operates Input I 1 0 could be any user supplied bit to control when messages are sent Whenever I 1 0 is set and message MG11 0 is not enabled the message instruction on rung 0001 is enabled Internet if required Ethernet Switch D LT e D D p Li Dm nu J ii 0 a a in Lu NET ENI ENIW MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5 05 The controller is capable of communicating using local ot remote messages With a local message all devices are accessible without a separate device acting as a bridge Different types of electrical interfaces may be required to connect to the network but the network is still classified as a local network Remote messages use a remote network where devices are accessible only by passing or routing through a device to another network Remote networks are discussed on page 388 Local Networks The following three examples represent different types of local networks Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 362 Communications Instructions Example 1 Local DH 485 Network AIC AIC Ie PanelView
112. Non User e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and reset due to a noisy environment using surge suppressors in your controller s or internal hardware failure User Manual e The default program is loaded e Verify battery is connected e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0003 MEMORY MODULE Memory module memory error This Non User Re program the memory module If the error USER PROGRAM IS error can also occur when going to persists replace the memory module CORRUPT the Run mode 0004 MEMORY INTEGRITY While the controller was powered Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then ERROR up ROM or RAM became corrupt or re download your program and start up your when background integrity check system failed e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0005 Reserved N A N A Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Fault Messages and Error Codes 493 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0006 MEMORY MODULE The memory module hardware Non User e Upgrade the OS to be compatible with HARDWARE FAULT faulted or the memory module is memory module incompatible with OS e Obtain a new memory module 0007 MEMORY MODULE Failure during memory module Non User Re attempt the transfer If
113. P September 2011 e Sx General status bits for input channels 0 through 3 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range open circuit or input data not valid condition exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program See MicroLogix 1200 RTD Resistance Input Module User Manual publication 1762 UM003 for details e OCx Open circuit indication for channels 0 through 3 using either RTD or resistance inputs Short circuit detection for RTD inputs only Short circuit detection for resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number Ox Over range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 using either RTD or resistance inputs These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 using RTD inputs only These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Under range detection for direct resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number 1 0 Configuration 25 1762 114 Thermocouple Module Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs The input data file is shown below Word 15 14 7 0 Bit 0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 Z 1 Analog Input Data Channel 1 e 2 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Z 3 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Z 4 Reserved 0C4 0C3 0C2 OC1 O
114. Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the configured channel Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 70 Function Files Data File 2 STATUS Structured sj aoe Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Ethernet Function Files 71 The Ethernet Communications Status ES File is a read only file that C ommuni C ati ons St atus contains information on how the controller Ethernet communication File parameters are configured and status information on Ethernet communications activity The Ethernet communications status file uses 178 1 word elements TIP You can use the Ethernet Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for Ethernet communications issues The data file is structured as Communications Status File Word Description Applies to Controller Details on Page 0to119 General Channel Status Block MicroLogix 1100 58 120 to 176 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1100 60 177 End of List Category Identifier Code always 0 MicroLogix 1100 69 The following tables show the details of each block in the Ethernet Communications Status File General Status Block of Ethernet Communications Status File General Channel Status Block Word Bit Description 0 Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code 1 1 Length 236 2 Format Code 3 Communications Configuration Error Code Pu
115. Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 334 ASCII Instructions Example 1 ASC lE String Search 10 Source ST38 40 Index 35 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set search the string String Search ST52 80 in ST52 80 starting at the 36th character for Result N10 0 the string found in ST38 40 In this example the position result is stored in N10 0 Error Conditions The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII Error bit 8 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value is greater than Source string length The destination is not changed in any of the above conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 ASR ASCII String Instruction Type input Compare Execution Time for the ASR Instruction When Instruction Is Controller ASR ASCII String Compare Source A ST10 8 Source B ST10 9 27 27 us 0 65 us matching character MicroLogix 1100 Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings The controller looks for a match in length and upper lower case characters If two strings are identical the rung is true if there are any differences the rung is false Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this inst
116. RCP Recipe Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation Purple Paint Recipe RCP Recipe Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation White Paint Recipe RCP B3 0 B3 0 53 0 l l n Recipe 0 1 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation Application Explanation of Operation When B3 0 0 is energized and B3 0 1 and B3 0 2 are de energized Recipe File 0 Recipe number 0 is executed loading the following values to create Yellow paint e N7 0 500 e N7 1 500 e N7 2 0 e T4 0 PRE 500 When B3 0 1 is energized and B3 0 0 and B3 0 2 are de energized Recipe File 0 Recipe number 1 is executed loading the following values to create Purple paint e N7 0 500 e N7 1 0 e N7 2 500 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 432 Recipe and Data Logging e T4 0 PRE 500 When B3 0 2 is energized and B3 0 0 and B3 0 1 are de energized Recipe File 0 Recipe number 2 is executed loading the following values to create White paint e N7 0 333 e N7 1 333 e N7 2 333 e T4 0 PRE 1000 Monitor the N7 data file Notice the values change after each bit is togeled This example describes oading values from a RCP file to data table addresses However note that by changing the RCP file operation from Load to Store values can be loaded by ladder logic into the recipe database for each Recipe number Calculation of Consumed Memory The consumed memory in this example can be calculated
117. RM001D EN P September 2011 601 programming device Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams protocol The rules of data exchange via communications read To acquire data For example the processor reads information from other devices via a read message relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of binary or discrete logic restore To transfer a program from a device to a controller reserved bit A location reserved for internal use retentive data Information data that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits tun mode An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 602 rung A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true energized If all paths are false the outputs are made false de energized RTU Remote Terminal Unit save To save a program to a computer hard disk scan The scan is made up of four elements input scan program scan output scan and housekeeping scan time The time required for the controller to complete one scan sinking A term used
118. RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 2 in the AND mask resets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged e OR Mask is the mask used to se the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 2 in the OR mask sets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged Control is the control data file See page 313 e Channel Status displays the current status 0000 to 001F of the handshake lines for the specified channel This status is read only and resides in the POS field in the control data file The following shows how to determine the channel status value In this example the value is 001F Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 329 Channel 3115 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status Bit Handshake reserved RTS CTS Control Line 5 Jo Jo Jo Jo o Jo o Jo Jo jo lt V 1 Hn Setting Channel 0 0 1 F Status Word 2 of the Control Element 001F e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AHL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address D
119. Read Write Message EN 0 MSG File MG11 0 DN Setup Screen ER If B3 0 is on 1 the MSG rung is true and MG11 0 is not already processing a message then MG11 0 is processed If one of the four buffers is available the message and its associated data are processed immediately Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 The Message Element TEST RSS E43 Data Files 5 x Cross Reference E OUTPUT E 1 input E s2 status E B3 BINARY E T4 Timer E c5 COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER Ci mait a Message File Elements Communications Instructions 347 TIP How quickly the message is actually sent to the destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channel s communication protocol the baud rate of the communications port the number of retries needed if any and the destination device s readiness to receive the message The MSG instruction built into the controller uses a MG data file to process the message instruction The MG data file shown at left is accessed using the MG prefix Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file For example MG11 0 is the first element in message data file 11 Message File Sub Elements Each MSG instruction must use a unique Element in a MSG File The MSG element for each MSG instruction holds all of the parameters and status information for that particular MSG instructi
120. The amount of time that is acceptable should be based on application requirements and netwotk capacity loading A 2 second message timeout is generally sufficient as long as only one message is triggered at a time Modbus Data Address decimal The default Modbus Data Address is 1 The Range is 1 to 65 536 Slave Node Address decimal The default Slave Node Address is 1 The Range is 0 to 247 Zero is the Modbus broadcast address and is only valid for Modbus write commands 5 6 15 and 16 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 381 Example 5 Configuring an Ethernet IP Message This section describes how to configure a local message when you are use Ethernet communication channel 1 of the MicroLogix 1100 Message Setup Screen E me MSG Read Write Message 0 MSG File MGO das 0000 AG9 0 1 Elements MuttiHop This Controller r Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore if timed out TO 0 Communication Command S00CPU Read Break Connection BK 0 Data Table Address N70 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elernents Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST U Data Table Address N7 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote MultiHop Ves Routing Information File Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors m Description
121. The bits are defined as follows e SOx General status bits for output channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error OOx Over range flag bits for output channels 0 through 3 These bits indicate an input signal above the user range and can be used in the control program for error detection The module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value while this bit is set 1 The bit is reset 0 when the error clears e UOx Under range flag bits for output channels 0 through 3 These bits indicate an input signal below the user range They can be used in the control program for error detection The module continues to convert analog data to the minimum full range value while this bit is set 1 The bit is reset 0 when the error clears 1 0 Configuration 23 1762 OF4 Output Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the channel output data Raw Proportional Format Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 1709 8 7 6 4 3 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 2 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 3 Data 0 to 32 760 m gt 9IlWord oj CO CO oj O CO N oj o o O oj o ojl ojl Words 0 through 3 contain the analog output data for channels 0 through 3 respectively The module ignores the don t care bits 0 through 2 but che
122. Types can be used as shown in the following table Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 198 Math Instructions SCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Data Fil Function Files B Address Level ata riles ress Leve unction Files Mode s sg Parameter E lo S S e S z a x m E 8 B e I ie 3 z BE a IE ln le l lo l _ B A lm Iw EI 3 e ls o m z a i a S amp a 2 n m 8 8 je ja l lzis is u Input x eleje le e e e elele elejle e lej e le e ei e ele ele Input Min xo ele e e ej e e e eh eles em Input Max x ele e o o o e e ol ols m Scaled Min yo e o e o o o e e eua ee ele Scaled Max yi ele elelele e e olole PNIS Output y e lej e e e e e e o o e e o o e ele ele 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Scaled Output parameter in the SCP instruction Special Considerations when Using Floating Point Parameters If any of the parameters except Output a
123. a parallel system status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PTO status while it is running TIP PTO status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the same as the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PTO instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PTO instructions to your program to increase how often a PTO instruction is scanned The charts in the following examples illustrate the typical timing sequence behavior of a PTO instruction The stages listed in each chart have nothing to do with controller scan time They simply illustrate a sequence of events In actuality the controller may have hundreds or thousands of scans within each of the stages illustrated in the examples Conditions Required to Start the PTO The following conditions must exist to start the PTO e The PTO instruction must be in an idle state For idle state behavior all of the following conditions must be met Jog Pulse JP bit must be off Jog Continuous JC bit must be off Enable Hard Stop EH bit must be off Normal Operation NS bit must be off The output cannot be forced Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 130 Using High Speed Outputs e The rung it is on must transition from a False state 0 to a True state
124. alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit and prevents the control variable from exceeding either limit value The instruction limits the control variable to 0 and 100 if you choose not to limit Select upper and lower output limits by setting the limit enable bit bit OL and entering an upper limit CVH and lower limit CVL Limit values are a percentage 0 to 100 of the control variable The difference between selecting output alarms and output limits is that you must select output limiting to enable limiting Limit and alarm values are stored in the same words Entering these values enables the alarms but not limiting Entering these values and setting the limit enable bit enables limiting and alarms Anti reset windup is a feature that prevents the integral term from becoming excessive when the control variable reaches a limit When the sum of the PID and bias terms in the control variable reaches the limit the instruction stops calculating the integral sum until the control variable comes back in range The integral sum is contained in element IS The Manual Mode In the MANUAL mode the PID algorithm does not compute the value of the control variable Rather it uses the value as an input to adjust the integral sum IS so that a smooth transfer takes place upon re entering the AUTO mode In the MANUAL mode the programmer allows you to enter a new CV value from 0 to 100 This value is converted into a nu
125. along with the PTO and PWM instructions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 91 The HSC is extremely versatile the user can select or configure HSC for any one of eight 8 modes of operation Operating Modes are discussed later in this chapter See section HSC Mode MOD on page 107 Some of the enhanced capabilities of the High Speed Counters are e 20 kHz 40 kHz operation High speed direct control of outputs e 32 bit signed integer data count range of 2 147 483 647 Programmable High and Low presets and Overflow and Underflow setpoints Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count e Run time editable parameters from the user control program The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram Overflow 4 2 147 483 647 maximum High Preset Low Preset Underflow 2 147 483 648 minimum 1 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 92 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Speed Counter The HSC is comprised of 36 sub elements These sub elements ate ei
126. an error state PTO Normal Operation Status NS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS lbi t Oor1 status read only The PTO NS Normal Operation Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is in its normal state A normal state is ACCEL RUN DECEL or DONE with no PTO errors The NS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in its normal state PTO Enable Hard Stop EH Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access EH Enable Hard Stop PTO O EH bit 0 or 1 control read write The PTO EH Enable Hard Stop bit is used to stop the PTO sub system immediately Once the PTO sub system starts a pulse sequence the only way to stop generating pulses is to set the enable hard stop bit The enable hard stop aborts any PTO sub system operation idle normal jog continuous or jog pulse and generates a PTO sub system error The EH bit operates as follows Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 139 e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to stop generating pulses immediately output off 0 Cleared 0 Normal operatio
127. an i uo E the program andonter interrupt subroutine STI Ell HSC or i user fault routine 0036 INVALID PID An invalid value is being used fora Recoverable See page 279 Process Control Instruction for PARAMETER PID instruction parameter more information about the PID instruction 0037 HSC ERROR An error occurred in the HSC Recoverable See the Error Code in the HSC Function File configuration for the specific error 003B PTO ERROR An error occurred in the PTO Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PTO Function File for instruction configuration Non User the specific error 003C PWM ERROR An error occurred in the PWM Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PWM Function File instruction configuration Non User for the specific error 003D INVALID SEQUENCER A sequencer instruction SOO SOC Recoverable Correct the user program then re compile LENGTH POSITION SQL length position parameter is reload the program and enter the Run mode greater than 255 003E INVALID BIT SHIFT OR A BSR or BSL instruction length Recoverable Correct the user program or allocate more LIFO FIFO PARAMETER parameter is greater than 2048 or an FFU FFL LFU LFL instruction length parameter is greater than 128 word file or greater than 64 double word file data file space using the memory map then reload and Run Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 496 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisor
128. and CIP Genetic Refer to the previous examples for the usage of each command 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 383 General MultiHop This Centroller r Control Bits 4 s lgnnre if timed nut TO 0 Channel Communication Command ENC PU Read Break Connection BIO 0 Data Table Address famasi Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements 500CPU Write 485CIF Read Error ER 0 Target Device BCI We Message done DN 0 Message Timeout p C5 Write Message Transmitting ST 1 Data Table Address CIP Generic Message Enabled EN T Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information File Rl Eror Error Code Hex 0 Nc errors Description Target Device Parameters Message Timeout Message Timeout for any MicroLogix 1100 channel 1 MSG cannot be modified in the Ethernet Message Setup dialog box It is assigned by the processor and is determined by adding the Channel 1 MSG Connection Timeout to the MSG Reply Timeout then adding 15 seconds This value can be modified by changing one or both of the timeout values in the channel configuration screen for channel 1 The modified message timeout applies to all Ethernet MSG instructions Routing Information File The Routing Information RT File stores the path for reaching the
129. another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 8 through CSx 0 5 15 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Maximum Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 22 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program scans The controller compares each scan value to the value contained in 8 22 If a scan value is larger than the previous the larger value is stored in S 22 This value indicates in 100 us increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller Resolution is 100 us to 0 us For example the value 9 indicates that 800 to 900 us was observed as the longest program cycle User Fault Routine File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 29 word 0 to 255 status read only This register is used to control which subroutine executes when a User Fault is generated Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 483 STI Set Point Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 30 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 SPM SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Int
130. approximates the natural period For example if deadtime 3 seconds then 4 x 3 12 seconds natural period Divide the value obtained in step 5 by 10 Use this value as the loop updated time For example if natural period 12 seconds then 12 10 1 2 seconds Therefore the value 120 would be entered as the loop update time 120 x 10 ms 1 2 seconds Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate T4 of 0 a gain K of 1 and the loop update time determined in step 17 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feed forward Return to page 305 and complete the tuning procedure starting with step 4 Chapter 20 General Information ASCII Instructions ASCII Instructions This chapter contains general information about the ASCII instructions and explains how they function in your control program This chapter is arranged into the following sections e Instruction Types and Operation on page 310 Protocol Overview on page 311 e String ST Data File on page 312 Control Data File on page 313 The ASCII instructions are arranged so that the Write instructions precede the Read instructions Instruction Function Page A
131. at the specified frequency PWM 0 0UT Select Destination Output for pulses Output O 0 2 or O 0 3 PWM 0 0FS Output Frequency Frequency of the PWM 0 to 20 000 Hz PWM 0 DC PWM Duty Cycle Controls the output signal of the PWM 1 to 1000 DC 1000 100 Output ON Constant no waveform DC 0750 075 Output ON 025 Output OFF DC 0500 050 Output ON 050 Output OFF DC 0250 025 Output ON 075 Output OFF DC 0000 000 Output OFF Constant no Waveform Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 545 Example The following example will generate a waveform on Output O 0 2 at a frequency of 250Hz and a 50 Duty Cycle alo HSC PTO PWM sm jel ATC LCD MM BHI cso LDS Decelerating Status LAS Run Status LAS Accelerating Status I PP Profile Parameter Select LIS Idle Status I ED Error Detected Status LNS Normal Operation Status LEH Enable Hard Stop LES Enable Status follows rung state L ER Error Code LOF Output Frequency Hz L OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz I DC Duty Cycle e g 456 45 6 LDCS Duty de Status s 456 45 60 L ADD Accel Decel Delay 10ms 0 eicOreooooooooococorn e PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Number By toggling Bit B3 0 the PWM can be activated Note Once activated the PWM will continue to generate a waveform until B3 0 is toggled OFF or the PWM 0 EH Enable Hard Stop bit has been activated Pu
132. be individually defined but sequentially follow the first integer or bit file For example if the first file is N10 or B10 then the additional five files will be N11 or B11 N12 or B12 N13 or B13 N14 or B14 and N15 or B15 4 Enter the data table size and type for each required file The data table file s not including the five additional tables if Expanded is checked will be created automatically Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration When the system driver is Modbus RTU Slave the following communication port parameters can be changed Modbus RTU Slave Communications Configuration Parameters 529 Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 0 Driver Modbus RTU Slave Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even odd none Node Address 1 to 247 decimal 1 Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking 485 No Handshaking Network Inter character 0 to 6553 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times 0 Timeout x1 ms Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end of a message packet Modbus Data Coils Discrete outputs Modbus addresses 0001 to 4096 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 Hee E Contacts Discrete inputs Modbus addresses 10001 to 14096 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 Input Registers Read
133. below ABL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Channel Control TEE H Data Files Function Files Mode puntos Address Level Parameter DLS Data Log Immediate 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set The instruction is put in the ASCII instruction queue the Queue bit EU is set and program scan continues The instruction is then executed outside of the program scan However if the queue is empty the instruction executes immediately Upon execution the Run bit RN is set The controller determines the number of characters up to and including the termination characters and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no termination characters were found The Found bit FD is set if the POS field is set to a non zero value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 323 ACB Number of Instruction Type output Characters in Buffer ACB Ascii Chars In Buffer cS Execution Time for the ACB Instruction uL aa _con gt Controller When Instruction Is Characters 2 lt Error 0 lt lt ER g
134. bit 00r 1 status read only The PTO DN Done bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DN bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction has completed its operation successfully Cleared 0 When the rung the PTO is on is false If the rung is false when the PTO instruction completes the Done bit is set until the next scan of the PTO instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 136 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Decelerating Status DS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO DS Decel bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the deceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PTO Run Status RS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access 0 or 1 RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit status read only The PTO RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The RS bit
135. by the following equation Data Field Memory Consumption N7 1 2 byte N7 2 2 byte T4 0 PRE 2 byte Integrity Check 2 byte Total 10 byte Consumed memory size for Recipe File 0 Data Field per a recipe Number of Recipes 10 3 bytes 30 bytes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Data Logging Queues and Records Program Files 2 Recipe and Data Logging 433 Data Logging allows you to capture store application data as a record for retrieval at a later time Each record is stored in a user configured queue in battery backed memory B Ram Records are retrieved from the MicroLogix 1100 processor via communications This chapter explains how Data Logging is configured and used This section contains the following topics Queues and Records on page 433 Configuring Data Log Queues on page 437 e DLG Data Log Instruction on page 439 Data Log Status File on page 440 e Retrieving Reading Records on page 442 The MicroLogix 1100 processor has 128K bytes 128 x 1024 of additional memory for data logging purposes Within this memory you can define up to 256 0 to 255 data logging queues Each queue is configurable by size maximum number of records stored and by length each record is 1 to 80 characters The length and the maximum number of records determine how much memory is used by the queue You can choose to have one large queue or multiple smal
136. contains the number of 10 ms intervals allowed to occur during a program cycle The timing accuracy is from 10 ms to 0 ms This means that a value of 2 results in a timeout between 10 and 20 ms If the program scan time value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error is generated code 0022H Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 476 System Status File Free Running Clock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S4 binary 0 to FFFF status read write This register contains a free running counter This word is cleared 0 upon entering an executing mode Bits in status word 4 can be monitored by the user program The bits turn on and off at a particular rate cycle time The On Off times are identical and are added together to determine the cycle time 4 Free Running Clock Comparison for SLC 500 and MicroLogix Controllers The Free Running Clocks in the SLC 500 and MicroLogix controllers function the same but have different resolutions The resolution of the Free Running Clock depends upon which controller you are using e SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 10 ms bit 0 010 seconds bit e MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 100 us bit 0 0001 seconds bit The following table illustrates the differences Free Running Clock Cycle Times all Times are in Seconds Bit SLC500 and MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 11
137. destination node Each RI File Element consists of Sub Elements 0 through 19 as shown in the following table To reach another MicroLogix 1100 an SLC 5 05 a PLC 5E or a controller connected to Ethernet via a 1761 NET ENI simply enter in the destination IP address Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 384 Communications Instructions Routing Information File Element Sub Bit Description Element 0 Subtype of Ethernet Message e 16 0x10 for normal Multi Hop MSG e 17 0x11 for Remote Multi Hop MSG for a DH Network 1 High word of 32 bit target IP address 2 Low word of 32 bit target IP address 3 8to15 Internal Object Identifier IOI size in words 1 to 5 0 to 7 ASA Service Code 4to8 ASA Internal Object Identifier IOI 9 ASA Connection Path Size in words 1 to 8 10 to 17 ASA Connection Paths 18 to 19 Reserved for future use always 0 1 IP address is stored in network byte order big endian order For example IP address 10 121 30 11 will be stored as 0x0a791e0b Then the IP address will be stored as described in the table below Sub Element Bit Value 1 8to 15 0x79 decimal value 121 0to7 0x0a decimal value 10 2 8to 15 OxOb decimal value 11 0to7 0x1e decimal value 30 Channel 1 Ethernet In each MSG instruction setup screen enter in RIx y for the Routing Information FIle where x is an existing RI file number or an unused file number and y is an
138. diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feed forward 4 Get prepared to chart the CV PV analog input or analog output as it varies with time with respect to the setpoint SP value 5 Place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode then place the processor in the RUN mode 6 While monitoring the PID display adjust the process manually by writing to the CO percent value 7 When you feel that you have the process under control manually place the PID instruction in the AUTO mode 8 Adjust the gain while observing the relationship of the output to the setpoint over time 9 When you notice that the process is oscillating above and below the setpoint in an even manner record the time of 1 cycle That is obtain the natural period of the process Natural Period 4x deadtime Record the gain value Return to the MANUAL mode stop the process if necessary Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 306 Process Control Instruction 10 11 12 13 14 15 Set the loop update time and STI time interval if applicable to a value of 5 to 10 times faster than the natural period For example if the cycle time is 20 seconds and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate set the loop update time to 200 which would result in a 2
139. embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Modules are counted from left to right as shown below ES MY Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 s Expansion 1 0 TIP In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 26 for complete information on address formats Discrete 1 0 Configuration 1762 1A8 1762 108 and 1762 I080W6 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 18 1 0 Configuration Bit Position 15 14 173 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 B 2 1 JO x x Ix x x x x x j ir fr j jr jr jr i r read only x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 1016 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 r read only 1762 1032T Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 15 together with word 0 1 correspond to input terminals 0 31 Bit Position 3 15 14 13 172 11 17009 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 r r r r r r r r r r r
140. enter a 6 for the MOD parameter Note If the encoder is a High Voltage Differential Line Driver do not terminate A B or Z 1763 16BWA DC OUT MO Mi IVa Oo000006666 666550 Qu Uo00960090 70990 NOT VAC 0 0 VAC VAC VAC 0 3 VAC 0 4 VAC 0 5 NOT ie 240 n USED VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC USED l l l l l l TROUBLESHOOTING Problem 1 The input display on the MicroLogix LCD screen turn on and off but no counts are seen in the HSC accumulator Solution The input filter frequency may need to be adjusted in order to capture the input pulses Follow the steps below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 549 1 Select I O Configuration 2 Highlight the MicroLogix 1100 3 Select Adv Config 4 Select the Embedded I O Configuration Tab 5 Adjust Input filters as needed Module 0 Bul 1763 Micrologix 1100 Series A i x Embedded General Configuration Embedded IO Configuration Generic Extra Data Config Input Filter Input Latch Enable Inputs 0 1 X Bit 0 Inputs 2 3 default z Bit 1 Inputs 4 5 default v eeu de Bit 3 Inputs 6 default M BiA Inputs 8 to xxxx default Analog Input Filter 10 H2 M Bit 5 Bit B Be 4 2 oe Problem 2 The HS
141. equal to the result found below OF output frequency For Trapezoid Profiles OF x OF 4 0 5 For S Curve Profiles 0 999 x OF x SQRT OF 6 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 144 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Controlled Stop CS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access it Oor1 control read write CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS b The PTO CS Controlled Stop bit is used to stop an executing PTO instruction in the run portion of the profile by immediately starting the decel phase Once set the decel phase completes without an error or fault condition Normal Ramp Function without CS Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function Normal Ramp Decel After CS Function is Set Accel Run Decel If the CS bit is set during the accel phase the accel phase completes and the PTO immediately enters the decel phase Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 145 Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function Normal Ramp Decel After CS Function is Set Accel Decel PTO Jog Frequency JF Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access Controller Series JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO O JF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write A word UINT 0 to 40 000 B The PTO JF Jog Fr
142. faults C 491 manually clearing faults C 492 using the fault routine C 492 true G 603 U UID Quick Start example 557 UID instruction 18 265 UIE instruction 18 266 UIF instruction 18 267 upload G 603 user application mode status B 468 user fault routine creating a user fault routine 18 262 file number status B 482 major error detected status bit B 477 recoverable and non recoverable faults 18 262 user interrupt disable instruction 78 265 user interrupt enable instruction 18 266 user interrupt flush instruction 18 267 user memory 2 37 user program functionality type status B 489 W watchdog scan time B 475 write G 603 613 X XIC instruction 7 159 XIO instruction 7 159 XOR instruction 72 215 Z zero flag B 467 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 614 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MicroLogix 1100 List of Instructions and Function Files Instruction Description Page Instruction Description Page ABL Test Buffer for Line 20 321 NEG Negate 10 194 ABS Absolute Value 10 195 NEQ Not Equal 9 181 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 20 323 NOT Logical NOT 12 216 ACI String to Integer 20 324 ONS One Shot 7 163 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers 20
143. file type for the Control Element Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ARL ASCII Read Line ARL ASCII Read Line Channel Dest Control String Length Characters Read Error 0 ST10 5 R6 4 15 0 lt CEN gt lt DN gt CER gt ASCII Instructions 331 Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer the characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is put in the POS field of the control data file The number in the POS field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters are read TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 336 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ARL Instruction When Instruction Is True False 13 96 us character 14 25 us Use the ARL instruction to read characters from the buffer up to and including the Termination characters and store them in a string The Termination characters are specified via the Channel Configuration screen Controller MicroLogix 1100 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programmin
144. generated if a write attempt fails to the RTC function file This only occurs when attempting to write invalid data to the RTC function file Examples of invalid data are setting the Day of Week to zero or setting the Date to February 30th Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 223 Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table CPW Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 3 i p Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode 7 Parameter E E e E c T x i 759212 eZl m a S ln lo 9 jo j S ja ln E e E S je o O wm ja e Z jua A a ot 2 EU m FA o 6 e a E ja S S la Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing COP Copy File COP Copy File Source N7 0 Dest N7 1 Length 1 IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO Instruction Type output Execution Time for the COP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True MicroLogix 1100 16 8 us 0 28 us word False
145. has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 to 65 500 minutes Series B only Contact Not Applicable Location Not Applicable Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 540 Protocol Configuration Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 17444 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO Appendix E Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following Quick Start topics are included e 17444 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO on page 541 e 17446 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM on page 544 e 17447 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC on page 546 e 17465 Quick Start Message MSG on page 550 e 17501 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI on page 553 e 17503 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC on page 556 e 17558 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID on page 557 e 18465 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers on page 558 e 18498 Quick Start Data Logging DLG on page 561 NOTE The PWM function is only available when using the BBB models of the MicroLogix 1100 Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v7 00 or later and select the PTO tab then select the next to PTO 0 See Below iBi xj HSC PTO PWwM sT Ell ATC LCD MM BHI cso sl i H QUT Output LDN Done LDS Decelerating Status HRAS Run Status 4S Accelerating Status RP Ramp Profile LCS Control Stop IS I
146. hop Remote Message 27 394 event input interrupt Ell function file 18 272 examine if closed instruction 7 159 examine if open instruction 7 159 example active station file 3 70 D 515 DLG Quick Start E 561 HSC Quick Start 546 MSG Quick Start 550 PTO Quick Start E 541 PWM Quick Start E 544 607 RTC Quick Start F 556 RTC Synchronization Quick Start F 558 STI Quick Start 553 user interrupt disable UID Quick Start 557 exclusive OR instruction 12 215 executing mode 6 595 execution time MicroLogix 1500 instructions A 457 expansion 0 1 17 analog 1 0 configuration 1 20 discrete 1 0 configuration 1 17 F false G 595 fault messages C 491 C 492 fault override at power up bit B 470 fault recovery procedure C 492 fault routine description of operation 18 262 file number status B 482 manually clearing faults C 492 operation in relation to main control program 18 259 priority of interrupts 18 261 faults automatically clearing C 491 identifying C 491 manually clearing using the fault routine C 492 recoverable and non recoverable 18 262 FET G 596 FFL instruction 14 230 FFU instruction 14 232 FIFO First In First Out G 596 FIFO load instruction 14 230 FIFO unload instruction 14 232 file G 596 file instructions 14 221 fill file instruction 14 225 filtering inputs 1 27 first scan status bit B 473 FLL instruction 14 225 forces enabled status bit B 469 forces installed status bit B 469 forcing inputs and outputs
147. in the MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller the data less than zero or greater than 40 000 generates a PWM error RSLogix 500 version 7 10 or lower variable type change process is required unsigned integer to signed integer Refer to PTO and PWM function file changes in Series B Controller on page 571 in Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller for more information ATTENTION In order to use 40kHz PTO and PWM with a prior version of Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 157 PWM Operating Frequency Status OFS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access Controller Series OFS PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only A word UINT 10 to 40 000 B The PWM OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PWM sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the PWM sub system PWM Duty Cycle DC Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM O DC word INT 1to 1000 control read write The PWM DC Duty Cycle vatiable controls the output signal produced by the PWM sub system Changing this variable in the control program changes the output waveform Typical values and output waveform e DC 1000 100 Output ON cons
148. inati e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination 1 See Important note abo SCL Scale t indirect addressing SCL Scale Source N7 0 0 Rate 10000 N7 1 0 lt Offset N7 2 0 lt Dest N7 3 0 lt IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SCL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 40 62 us 0 87 us The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the Rate slope value The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination The following equations express the linear relationship between the input value and the resulting scaled value scaled value rate x source 10000 offset where e rate scaled max scaled min input max input min offset scaled min input min x rate Rate and Offset can both be immediate values The data range for rate and offset is 32768 to 32767 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Math Instructions 197 SCL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using th
149. is loaded into the STI If the STI is configured correctly and enabled the program file identified in the STI variable PFN is scanned at this interval This value can be changed from the control program by using the STS instruction TIP The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI program file STI 0 PFN plus the Interrupt Latency The EII event input interrupt is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific program file subroutine when an input condition is detected from a field device Within the function file section of RSLogix 500 the user sees an EIT folder Within the folder are four EII elements Each of these elements EIL0 EII 1 EIE2 and EII 3 are identical this explanation uses EII 0 as shown below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 3 Function Files HSC PTO sri El SEND L PFN Program File Number LER Error Code H ul User Interrupt Executing LUNE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending LEIE Event Interrupt Enabled LAS Auto Start LED Error Detected LES Edge Select CYS Input Select Using Interrupts 273 Biel Es nrc BHI MMI bat tr Lee E Each EII can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight inputs 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 Each EII can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal t
150. less than the minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program scan Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 600 online When a device is scanning controlling or when a programming device is communicating with the controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives a signal ot command from the controller output scan The controller turns on off or modifies the devices connected to the output terminals PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Commands processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor files The set of program and data files resident in the controller program file Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs MicroLogix controllers support multiple program files program mode When the controller is not scanning the control program program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the program scan the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated Publication 1763
151. logic and the EH bit must be off To change the Total Output Pulses Generated in a working program a new value can be moved into PTO 0 TOP by using the MOV command Important Note Once the PTO has been initiated and is generating pulses a new TOP value will not take effect until the PTO has either completed generating pulses and has been restarted or has been Hard Stopped using PTO 0 EH bit and been restarted Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 544 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17446 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM NOTE The PWM function is only available when using the BBB models of the MicroLogix 1100 Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v7 00 00 or later and select the PWM tab then select the next to PWM 0 See Below Function Files a HSC PTO PWM sm El RTC LCD MMI BH cso gt I LDS Decor Status RS Run Status L AS Accelerating Status L PP Profile Parameter Select LIS Idle Status LED Error Detected Status NS Normal paration Status LEH Enable Hard Sto ES Enable Status Us rung state L ER Error Code L OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz DC Duty cue e e g 456 26 LDCS Duty Cycle Status e g 56 d5t C ADD Accel Decel Delay 1 ms cOcccccocococcodococcococgocco i i Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration requited for the PWM to generate a waveform
152. lost condition Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 99 Low Preset Mask LPM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPM Low HSC O LPM bi Preset Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 t 2107 control read write The LPM Low Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a low preset interrupt from occurring If this bit 1s clear 0 and a Low Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit 1s controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Low Preset Interrupt LPI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPI Low HSC O LPI ibi Preset Interrupt t 2to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The LPI Low Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be clea
153. manual under the Data Logging chapter all the information necessary to create your own software application for retrieving the data stored in the processors Data Logging queue is shown Q2 Can the MicroLogix 1100 controller automatically send the information stored in the Data Logging queue directly to a printer A2 No To retrieve the data either the free Data Logging Utility software must be used or a custom application must be created by the user If the data does not need to be stored in the processor but sent directly to a printer then use the ASCII instructions of the MicroLogix processor to send out the data Using the DATALOG Utility to retrieve data remotely via a Remote Access Modem Kit RAD For more information on Remote Access Modem Kits visit http support rockwellautomation com modem modem Main asp Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 568 Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following outlines the configuration and steps that can be used to read data log records from an MicroLogix 1100 controller remotely via a 1747CHORAD Remote Access Modem Kit This example assumes that the programmer has configured the DLG instruction in the ML1100 to log data and that HyperTerminal 1s installed configured and the user is familiar with its use ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS 1 Connect the modem to Channel 0 of the ML1100 2 Configure Channel 1 9 Pin for DF1 Full Duplex 9600 baud no parity and full duplex
154. may not execute immediately depending on the contents of the ASCII queue The ASCII queue is a FIFO first in first out queue which can contain up to 16 instructions The ASCII queue operates as follows e When the instruction is encountered on a rung and the ASCII queue is empty the instruction executes immediately It may take several program scans for the instruction to complete Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Overview ASCII Instructions 311 e When the instruction is encountered on a rung and there are from 1 to 15 instructions in the ASCII queue the instruction is put into the ASCII queue and is executed when the preceding instructions are completed If the ASCII queue is full the instruction waits until the next program scan to determine if it can enter the ASCII queue The controller continues executing other instructions while the ASCII port control instruction is waiting to enter the queue Programming ASCII Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an intetval of 0 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port IMPORTANT If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is pl
155. not have protected files or the files did not match The data protection lost indicator S 36 10 is then set The data protection lost indicator represents that the protected files within the controller have had values downloaded and the user application may need to be re configured Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 44 Controller Memory and File Types TIP The controller will not clear the Data Protection Lost indicator It is up to the user to clear this bit Static File Protection When a data file is Static File Protected the values contained in it cannot be changed via communications except during a program download to the controller Using Static File Protection with Data File Download Protection Static File Protection and Data File Download Protection can be used in combination with MicroLogix 1100 Controller Series A and higher Setting Static File Protection Static File Protection can be applied to the following data file types Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Output O e Input I e Status S e Binary B e Timer T e Counter C Control R e Integer N e Floating Point F e String ST Long Word L e Proportional Integral Derivative PD e Message MG Programmable Limit Switch PLS e Routing Information RT e Extended Routing Information RIX Controller Memory and File Types 45 Password Protection Access the Static File Protect feature using
156. of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also LA Load Always on page 56 Power Up Mode Behavior Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 12 binary 0 or 1 control read only If Power Up Mode Behavior is clear 0 Last State the mode at powet up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch e state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 mode at the previous power down If Power Up Mode Behavior is set 1 Run the mode at power up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch e state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 IMPORTANT If you want the controller to power up and enter the Run mode regardless of any previous fault conditions you must also set the Fault Override bit S 1 8 so that the Major Error Halted flag is cleared before determining the power up mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 472 System Status File The following table shows the Power Up Mode under various conditions MicroLogix 1100 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Mode Switch Position Halted Mode Behavior at Power Up Program False Don t Care Don t Care Program True Program w Fault Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend or
157. on page 428 for the recipe file procedure The RCP instruction uses the following parameters Recipe File Numbet this is the file number that identifies the custom list of addresses associated with a recipe Recipe Number specifies the number of the recipe to use If the recipe number is invalid a user fault code 0042 is generated e File Operation identifies whether the operation is a Load from the database ot a Store to the database When executed on a True rung the RCP instruction transfers data between the recipe database and the specified data locations Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table RCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Data Files Function Files 2 Address Mode Address Level c E Parameter 5 BE e z e pon c ps s Sig g I Elz g o o S jo g I j l z El 4 la wilt ge Is Je S sis o L lo Ja le z 5 s z lE 2 E5 a a Els Elas S E 6 2 SSe ic Recipe Number File e o e e e e e 3 Data Files 000 1 1 1 to PEN Recipe File and Programming Example E 00 ourPuT E n input E s2 status Configuring the RCP file E B3 BINARY E T4 TIMER E cs COUNTER 1 Using RSLogix 500 locate and select RCP Configuration F
158. one Modbus broadcast message at a time When sequentially triggering multiple Modbus broadcast messages insert at least 10 msec delay in between each message Local Remote This variable defines the type of communications that is used Always use local when you need point to point communications via DF1 Full Duplex or network communications such as Ethernet IP DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND DF1 Half Duplex or DF1 Radio Modem For DH 485 use local if the target node is on the same DH 485 network as this controller or remote if the path to the target node goes through one or more communication bridges Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 373 Local Messaging Five examples of local messaging are shown in this section Examples e 500CPU message type e 485CIF message type e PLC5 message type e Modbus RTU Message type e EtherNet IP Message type A summary of the message instruction configuration parameters is shown in the following table Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 374 Communications Instructions Parameter This Controller Channel Description Identifies the communication channel Channel 0 or Channel 1 Communication Command 500CPU 485CIF and PLC5 message types Specifies the type of message Valid types are e 500CPU Read e 500CPU Write e 485CIF Read e 485CIF Write e PLC5 Read e PLC5 Write Modbus Command Specifies the type of messa
159. operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PTO Accelerating Status AS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the acceleration phase of the output profile Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 137 Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PTO Ramp Profile RP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bit 00r1 control read write The PTO RP Ramp Profile bit controls how the output pulses generated by the PTO sub system accelerate to and decelerate from the Output Frequency that is set in the PTO function file PTO 0 OF It can be used by an input or output instruction on any rung within the control program The RP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S Curve pr
160. otter c back otc eR pice en 572 Instr cti t 158068 5 44 1 223 Veo Ex EDS PRU vla Spe 573 Appendix G Number Systems Binary Nune uio ees d CA RNC EP MID EARRED Sig ats 581 Hexadecimal Nombefsziaa ce tud d a wa CREER RA UP Rk 583 Hex Mask nascatur Laer ees e e d anak ay ieee 585 Appendix H MicroLogix 1100 Firmware System Relatetbes t cvs eoe er se ha hated dent ees wake DL ne 587 Changes in OS Series B FRN4 Serial Communications Related 1 0 0 cee ees 587 Ethernet Communications Related uva sth weeds ota RIS 588 Application Layer Related co autete err ir art re Poor dti 590 Embedded IO Configuration Related ci eee oret en 590 Web Setver Related esa XC ROI e Ew ata Ee RE 590 RSLogix500 compatibility 4435s ta quera we et rer ak x wd 590 Glossary Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 12 Table of Contents Index MicroLogix 1100 List of Instructions and Function Files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Common Techniques Used in this Manual Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual e the purpose of this manual e related documentation conventions used in this manual e Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsi3ble for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1100 contr
161. programs a JUMP JMD instruction causes execution to jump to a specific rung in the user program ladder logic A graphical programming format resembling a ladder like diagram The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language least significant bit LSB The element or bit in a binary word that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 598 low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a wotd logic A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex ot lengthy set of information Modbus RTU Slave A half duplex serial communication protocol modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the desired voltage level network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication m
162. r r r r r 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read only 1762 0X6l and 1762 IQ80W6 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 5 correspond to output terminals 0 through 5 r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 0 Configuration 19 1762 048 1762 0B8 and 1762 OW8 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 T Bit Position 15 j4 13 12 11 o 9 ja 7 le 5 4 B R fi yj 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r w Ir w Ir w r w r w rw r w r w r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 0B16 and 1762 OW16 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminals 0 through 15 T Bit Position n5 14 13 12 11 01 8 7 6 5 4 B 2 pn fo O r w r w Ir w r w Aw Ir w ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w rw Ir w r w Ir w Ir w r w read and write 1762 OV32T 1762 OB32T Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output poi
163. reduce the number of input or output CONFIGURATION program exceeds the image size in words and ERROR the expansion I O module e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode xxgg 12 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non User e Refer to the 1 0 status file MODULE ERROR AENOR e Consult the documentation for your specific 1 0 module to determine possible causes of a module error xxgA 12 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion I O cable is Non User e Correct the user program to eliminate a CABLE configured in the user program cable that is not present CONFIGURATION but no cable is present or ehaccompl pile reload the program and enter MISMATCH ERROR gan expansion l O cable is the Run mode or configured in the user program and e Add the missing cable a cable is physically present but the types do not match e Cycle power xx8Bl1 2 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion I O power Non User e Correct the user program to eliminate a POWER SUPPLY CONFIGURATION MISMATCH ERROR supply is configured in the user program but no power supply is present or ean expansion O power supply is configured in the user program and a power supply is physically present but the types do not match power supply that is not present e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode or e With power removed add the missing power supply Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 498 Fa
164. report good bad communication status for all slave Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 509 stations to an operator interface connected to the master station for monitoring alarming and logging putposes and to precondition MSG instructions to each particular slave This second use is based on the supposition that if a slave station did not respond the last time it was polled it may not be able to receive and respond to a MSG instruction now and so it would most likely process the maximum number of retries and time outs before completing in error This slows down both the poll scan and any other messaging going on Using this technique the minimum time to message to every responding slave station actually decreases as the number of slave stations that can t respond znereases IMPORTANT In order to remotely monitor and program the slave stations over the half duplex network while the master station is configured for Standard polling mode the programming computer DF1 slave driver typically Rockwell Software RSLinx station address must be included in the master station poll list About Polled Report by Exception Polled report by exception lets a slave station initiate data transfer to its master station freeing the master station from having to constantly read blocks of data from each slave station to determine if any slave input or data changes have occurred Instead through user program
165. result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 AND Bit Wise AND AND Bitwise AND Source A N7 0 0000h Source B N7 1 0000h Dest N72 0000h Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AND Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1100 Logical Instructions 213 Data Size When Rung Is True False word 13 06 us 0 87 us long word 13 24 us 0 87 us The AND instruction performs a bit wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the AND Instruction Destination A AND B Source A 1 1 41 41 41 1 10 10 0 1 11 0 Source B 1 1 10 l0 1 11n 00 0 1 Destination 1 1 10 l0 1 1 10 10 0 10 10 10 IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For mote information see Using Logical Instructions on page 211 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 212 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 214 Logical Instructions OR Logical OR Instruction Type output R Bitwise Inclusive OR SES ae Execution Time for the OR Instruction Soue p o Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 2 tO True False MicroLogix 1100 word 13 06 us 0 84 us long word 13 31 us 0 84 us The OR instruction per
166. run mode Accel when Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI is set 1 Decel 2 Yes No No Overlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PTOO and PTO1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hard stop is detected This error does not Detected fault the controller To clear this error scan the PTO instruction on a false rung and reset the EH Enable Hard Stop bit to 0 2 No No Yes Output The configured PTO output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PTO to operate Error This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 No Yes No Frequency The operating frequency value OFS is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 4 No Yes No Accel The accelerate decelerate parameters ADP are Decel Error e less than zero e greater than half the total output pulses to be generated TOP e Accel
167. scan bit is reset bit is set false to false bit is reset bit is reset false to true and true to true bit is set bit is reset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 7 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level Mode wn E Sg Parameter a E E lo ne 5 o x SFE Bisle kl S GE Iw jo l Jo _ l B la lnm a E e ls Je ls gis Z uu bas z a e 2 EU m Ei 9 8 j2 a l Iis z S ja Storage Bit Output Bit e o Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 166 Relay Type Bit Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 8 Timer Instructions Overview Timer and Counter Instructions Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To Page TON Timer On Delay Delay turning on an output on a true rung 170 TOF Timer Off Delay Delay turning off an output on a false rung 171 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay turning on an output from a true rung 172 The accumulator is retentive CTU Count Up Count up 176 CTD Count Down Cou
168. seconds 1 00 to 0 00 If your program scan can exceed 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction on a different rung identical logic in a different area of the ladder code so that the rung is scanned within these limits Repeating Timer Instructions Using the enable bit EN of a timer is an easy way to repeat its complex conditional logic at another rung in your ladder program TIP Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 seconds no time is lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines a timer must be scanned at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 170 Timer and Counter Instructions TON Timer On Delay Instruction Type output TON Timer On Delay CEN 2 Timer T4 0 lune Base E CDN2 Execution Time for the TON Instructions reset I lt Accum 0 lt Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 12 71 DN 1 4 06 2 59 us DN 0 us Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an output The TON instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset va
169. see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The OFI Overflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the overflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 106 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Count Direction DIR Description Address Data Format HsC Modes Type User Program Access DIR Count HSC O DIR bi Direction t 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The DIR Count Direction status flag is controlled by the HSC sub system When the HSC accumulator counts up the direction flag is set 1 Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down the direction flag is cleared 0 If the accumulated value stops the direction bit retains its value The only time the direction flag changes is when the accumulated count reverses This bit is updated continuo
170. set in 1 ms increments When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion 1 The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used in a pseudo Master Slave mode with any radio modems as long as the designated Master node is the only node initiating MSG instructions and as long as only one MSG instruction is triggered at a time For modern serial radio modems that support full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance the DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used to set up a Masterless peer to peer radio netwotk where any node can initiate communications to any other node at any time as long as all of the nodes are within radio range so that they teceive each other s transmissions Using Store amp Forward Capability DF1 Radio Modem also supports Store amp Forward capability in order to forward packets between nodes that are outside of radio range of each other Each node that is enabled for Store amp Forward has a Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 520 Protocol Configuration user configured Store amp Forward Table
171. state is false ea RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 176 Timer and Counter Instructions CTU Count Up CTD Count Down CTU Count Up CU gt Counter C5 0 Preset 0 lt CDN 5 Accum 0 lt CTD Count Down lt CU gt Counter C5 0 Preset 0 lt CDN gt Accum 0 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CTU and CTD Instructions Controller CTU When Rung Is CTD When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1100 2 28 US 2 15 US 2 24 us 2 09 us The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false to true rung transition When the CTU rung makes a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count The CTD instruction operates the same except the count is decremented TIP If the signal is coming from a field device wired to an input on the controller the on and off duration of the incoming signal must not be more than twice the controller scan time assuming 50 duty cycle This condition is needed to enable the counter to detect false to true transitions from the incoming device Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 RES Reset R6 0 C RES gt Timer and Counter Instructions 177 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RES Instructions Controller When Run
172. stations in either Message based polling mode or Standard polling mode The pros and cons of each polling mode ate desctibed below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 507 Message Based Polling Mode Message based polling mode is best used in networks when communication with the slave stations is not time critical and where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station communicates with each slave station It is not recommended for larger systems that require time critical communication between the master and all the slave stations or for systems where slave station initiated messages are going to be used With Message Based polling mode the only time a master station communicates with a slave station is when a message MSG instruction in ladder logic is triggered to that particular slave station s address This polling mode gives the user complete control through ladder logic over when and how often to communicate with each slave station If multiple MSG instructions are triggered simultaneously they will be executed in order one at a time to completion i e the first MSG queued up will be transmitted and completed to done or error before the next queued up MSG is transmitted Any time a message is triggered to a slave station that cannot respond for instance if its modem fails the message will go through retries and time outs that will slow down the e
173. systems your controller 0011 EXECUTABLE FILE 2 IS Ladder File 2 is missing from the Non User e Re compile and reload the program MISSING program 0012 LADDER PROGRAM The ladder program has a memory Non User e Reload the program or re compile and ERROR integrity problem reload the program If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 494 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0015 1 0 CONFIGURATION The user program 1 0 configuration Non User Re compile and reload the program and enter FILE ERROR is invalid the Run mode If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program 0016 STARTUP The user fault routine was executed Recoverable e Either reset bit S 1 9 if this is consistent PROTECTION FAULT at power up prior to the main ladder with the application requirements and program Bit 1 13 Major Error change the mode back to RUN or Halted was not cleared at the end of e clear S 1 13 the Major Error Halted bit the User Fault Routine The User before the end of the User Fault Routine Fault Routine ran because bit 1 9 was set at power up 0017 NVRAM ME
174. the message from the system The controller resets the TO bit the next time the associated MSG rung goes from false to true Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 354 Communications Instructions An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 370 because it simplifies the user program This built in timeout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is non zero It defaults to 5 seconds for channel 0 so unless you change it the internal timeout control is automatically enabled When the internal timeout is used and communications are interrupted the MSG instruction will timeout and error after the set period of time expires This allows the control program to retry the same message or take other action if desired To disable the internal timeout control enter zero for the MSG instruction timeout parameter If communications are interrupted the processor waits indefinitely for a reply If an acknowledge ACK is received indicated by the ST bit being set but the reply is not received the MSG instruction appears to be locked up although it is actually waiting for a reply from the target device Enable EN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EN Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Enable Bit EN is set when rung conditions go true and the MSG is enabled The MSG is enabled when the command packet is built and put into one of th
175. the accumulated value the counter status bits are also retentive until reset as described below Is Set When the accumulated value wraps from 432 767 And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU indicator to 32 768 and continues to count up instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value gt preset value e accumulated value lt preset value or indicator ea RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 15 C5 0 CU CU countup rung state is true erung state is false enable ea RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 CTD Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 11 C5 0 UN UN underflow Is Set When the accumulated value wraps from 32 768 Timer and Counter Instructions 175 And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD indicator to 32 767 and continues to count down instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value preset value e accumulated value lt preset value or indicator ea RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 14 C5 0 CD CD count down enable rung state is true erung
176. the error persists TRANSFER ERROR transfer replace the memory module 0008 FATAL INTERNAL An unexpected software error Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then SOFTWARE ERROR occurred re download your program and re initialize any necessary data e Start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0009 FATAL INTERNAL An unexpected hardware error Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then HARDWARE ERROR occurred re download your program and re initialize any necessary data e Start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 000A OS MISSING OR The operating system required for Non User e Download a new OS using ControlFlash CORRUPT the user program is corrupt or e Contact your local Rockwell Automation MIssig representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 000B BASE HARDWARE The base hardware faulted or is Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash FAULT incompatible with the OS e Replace the Controller MicroLogix 1200 only e Replace the Base Unit MicroLogix 1500 only e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating
177. the string element where you want the characters stored Control is the control data file See page 313 e String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters will be read If you specify 0 characters LEN defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file e Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is updated during the execution of the instruction and is read only This is word 2 in the control data file e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ARD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files Mode 7 l Parameter a E o E 5 z ox i CRE Bis le k Bl m a S amp S ln jo 9 jo a lo E L lS le o E S o jw lo 2 z a B u E Z amp amp 2 E G amp G la Sj e la E j j l S a Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid
178. to describe current flow between two devices A sinking device provides a direct path to ground soutcing A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sourcing device or circuit provides a power status The condition of a circuit or system terminal A point on an I O module that external devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 603 throughput The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding output turns on or off Throughput consists of input delays program scan output delays and overhead true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage device watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault write To send data to another device For example the processor writes data to another device with a message write instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 604 Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 A ABL instruction 20 321 ABS instruction 10 195 absolute value instruction 10 195 ACB instruction 20 323 accuracy timer 8 169 ACI instruction 20 324 ACL instruction 20 314 ACN instruction 20 325 active nodes status B 480 B 481 ADD ins
179. to indicate which received packets it should re broadcast based on the packet s source and destination addresses Configuring the Store amp Forward Table The Store amp Forward Table can be configured to use any valid binary data table file B3 B9 through B255 of length 16 words Each bit in the file corresponds to a DF1 Radio Modem node address In order to configure a MicroLogix to Store amp Forward message packets between two other nodes the bits corresponding to the addresses of those two other nodes must be set For instance if node 2 is used to Store amp Forward message packets between nodes 1 and 3 then both bits Bx 1 and Bx 3 where x is the configured data table file number would have to be set in the Store amp Forward Table file see Figure You can set bit 255 to enable Store amp Forward of broadcast packets as well IMPORTANT Once Store amp Forward is enabled duplicate packet detection is also automatically enabled Whenever Store amp Forward is used within a radio modem network every node should have a Store amp Forward Table file configured even if all of the bits in the file are cleared so that duplicate packets will be ignored Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 521 Applying DF1 Radio Modem Protocol 2nd Rebroadcast Note 4 REPLY 1 1st Rebroadcast Note 3 REPLY 1 Node 1 Node 4 REPLY 1 DST 1 SRC 4 CMD 1 NoBit
180. to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later DF1 Radio Modem Protocol This driver implements a protocol optimized for use with radio modem netwotks that is a hybrid between DF1 Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex protocols and is not compatible with either protocol The primary advantage of using DF1 Radio Modem protocol for radio modem networks is in transmission efficiency Each read write transaction command and reply requires only one transmission by the initiator to send the command and one transmission by the responder to return the reply This minimizes the number of times the radios need to key up to transmit which maximizes radio life and minimizes radio power consumption It also maximizes communication throughput In contrast DF1 Half Duplex protocol
181. unless they are bit B and integer N Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 226 File Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FLL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level D Mode 3 Parameter 8 2 E e qu x pm S S 3 t 3 T E e g E ls le l2 e le l z E la l le l2 E e l e ls l Se elz kh b l z a k Ela amp is 2 le a E J 2 s la Source e o o e elele elele Destination e o o ele e Length e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO BSL Bit Shift Left BSL Bit Shift Left LI cCEN gt File B3 1 Control R6 0 CDN 5 Bit Address B32 0 0 Length 1 lt Controller MicroLogix 110 PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output 0 Execution Time for the BSL Instruction When Rung Is True 34 5 us 0 2 us word False 34 5 us The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted left through the array then unloaded one bit a
182. unused RI element number Each Channel 1 Ethernet MSG Instruction must have its own RIx y If the RIx y entered in the MSG setup screen does not yet exist then the programming software will automatically create it when the rung is verified Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 385 j MultiHop This Controller r Control Bits 4 Channel IntegraD Ignore if timed out TO 0 Communication Command Read Break Connection BK 0 Data Table Address Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Fea eni Ol Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote MultiHop Ves Routing Information File T Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors iE Description In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target s N7 file starting at word N7 50 using 500CPU Read command The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If 33 seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out If the target device is another MicroLogix 1100 a SLC 5 05 a PLC 5E or a controller connected to Ethernet via a 1761 NET ENI then simply enter in the device s IP address in the To Address c
183. 0 control read write 156 word UINT 0 to 40 000 OFS PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 000 status fread only 157 word UINT 0 to 40 000 DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1to 1000 control read write 157 DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to 1000 status read only 157 ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 158 ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2 to 5 status read only 158 1 OF and OFS are signed 16 bit 32768 32768 variables in MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller but they are unsigned 16 bit 0 65535 variables in MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller e 3 The variable range of OF OFS and JF is 0 20000 in Applies only to MicroLogix 1100 Series A Controller 4 Applies only to MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller icroLogix 1100 Series A controller and it is 0 40000 in MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller PWM Output OUT Element Address Description OUT PWM Output PWM 0 0UT Data Format word INT 20r3 Type Status read only User Program Access The PWM OUT Output vatiable defines the physical output that the PWM instruction controls This variable 1s set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program The outputs are defined as O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 as listed below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P Septembe
184. 0 ms 50 X RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 Error Detection CRC m RTS Off Delay 20 ms 0 Le Me een ATS Send Delay x20 ms Polling Mode Msg Allow Slaves to Initiate RTS Send Delay x20 ms IV Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries 3 v Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries 3 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cancel Apply Help Cancel Apply Help When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Master the following parameters can be changed DF1 Half Duplex Master Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on No Handshaking No Handshaking 485 Network Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are set greater than 0 RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deac
185. 00 20000 lt Dest PTO 0 0F 40000 lt Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 578 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 MUL Instruction Workaround Example PTO 0 OF 40000 PTO 0 OF 20000 X 2 MOV Move Source 20000 20000 lt Dest PTO 0 0F 40000 lt MUL EQU Equal Source A PTO 0 OF 40000 lt Source B 20000 20000 lt Multiply Source A PTO 0 0F 40000 lt Source B 2 2 lt Dest PTO 0 0F 40000 lt B3 mmc 0 SUB Instruction Workaround Example PTO 0 0F 20000 PTO 0 0F 40000 20000 EQU Equal Source A PTO 0 0F 20000 lt Source B 25536 25536 lt MOV Move Source 25536 25536 lt Dest PTO 0 0F 20000 lt 2 a 14 SUB Subtract Source A PTO 0 0F 20000 lt Source B 20000 20000 lt Dest PTO 0 OF 20000 lt Signed 16 bit 0x9C40 Hexadecimal 25536 Unsigned 16 bit 0x9C40 Hexadecimal 40000 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 0000 0001 0003 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller 579 e DIV SCP Instruction The operands of DIV and SCP instructions work as signed value but JF OF OFS of PTO PWM are unsigned 16 bit variable at MicroLogix 1100 Se
186. 00 MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 On Off Time Cycle Time On Off Time Cycle Time 4 0 0 010 0 020 0 0001 0 0002 84 1 0 020 0 040 0 0002 0 0004 S 4 2 0 040 0 080 0 0004 0 0008 S 4 3 0 080 0 160 0 0008 0 0160 S 4 4 0 160 0 320 0 0016 0 0320 S 4 5 0 320 0 640 0 0032 0 0640 S 4 6 0 640 1 280 0 0064 0 1280 S 4 7 1 280 2 560 0 0128 0 2560 S 4 8 2 560 5 120 0 0256 0 5120 S 4 9 5 120 10 240 0 0512 0 1024 S 4 10 10 240 20 480 0 1024 0 2048 S 4 11 20 480 40 960 0 2048 0 4096 S 4 12 40 960 81 92 0 4096 0 8192 4 13 81 92 163 84 0 8192 1 6384 4 14 163 84 327 68 1 6384 3 2768 S 4 15 327 68 655 36 3 2768 6 5536 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 477 For example if bit 4 7 is monitored in an SLC 500 then that bit will be on for 1 28 seconds and off for 1 28 seconds for a total cycle time of 2 56 seconds If bit S 4 7 is monitored in a MicroLogix 1100 then that bit will be on for 0 0128 seconds and off for 0 0128 seconds for a total cycle time of 0 0256 seconds Minor Error Bits Overflow Trap Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 0 binary 00r 1 status read write If this bit is ever set 1 upon execution of the END or TND instruction a major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG SCL TOD or FRD ta
187. 000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 o000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 o000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 gt PLS10 0 HIP Had zj Columns 4 v Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 PLS Data File Definitions Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 125 Data Format 32 bit signed integer Data Description HIP High Preset LOP Low Preset OHD Output High Data OLD Output Low Data 16 bit binary bit 15 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 bit 0 Once the values above have been entered for HIP and OHD the PLS is configured Configuring the HSC for Use with the PLS 1 Under Controller double click on Function Files 2 For HSC 0 configure the HSC MOD to use PLS10 and for the HSC to operate in mode 00 IMPORTANT PLS Operation for This Example The value for MOD must be entered in Hexadecimal For example PLS10 0A and HSC Mode 00 HPR High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction H UF Underflow OF Overflow HMD Mode Done H CD Count Down CU Count Up ACC Accumulator HIP High Preset H LOF Low Preset H DYF Overflow 0 2147483647 When the ladder logic first runs HSC ACC equals 0 therefore PLS10 0 OLD s data is sent through the HSC OMB mask and sets all the outputs off When HSC ACC equals 250 the PLS10 0 OHD is sent through the HSC OMB mask and energizes the outputs This will repeat as the HSC ACC reaches 500
188. 00ms T 1 Last Priority Poll List Scan 100ms 0 Max Priority Poll List Scan 100ms 1 Modem Lines RTS Gis Clear Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 64 Function Files DF1 Radio Modem Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 1 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13to 15 Reserved 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 No Buffer Space Received Packet Dropped 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19t022 Reserved E Channel Status 3 Channel 0 Channel 1 DF1 Radio Modem Messages Sent Undelivered Messages D Messages Received p Duplicate Messages Received p 1 Lack ofMem PktDropped Bad Packets Received J Modem Lines RTS CTS Clear Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 65 Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Data Link Layer Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 4 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received for This Slave 12 To
189. 011 216 Using Interrupts Ell User Interrupt Pending UIP User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIP User Interrupt Pending EIIO UIP binary bit status read only UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the pending bit Ell Event Interrupt Enable EIE User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EIl 0 EIE binary bit control read write EIE Event Interrupt Enabled allows the event interrupt function to be enabled or disabled from the control program When set 1 the function is enabled when cleared 0 default the function is disabled This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle Ell Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit control read only AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured wit
190. 01D EN P September 2011 DN 1 E oM EN 0 1 i I I 1 I ewo fo 1 i i ST 0 oo Li ER TO 0 esse 1 If there is room in any of the four active message buffers when the MSG rung becomes true and the MSG is scanned the EN and EW bits for this message are set If this is a MSG write instruction the source data is transferred to the message buffer at this time Not shown in the diagram If the four message buffers are in use the message request is put in the message queue and only the EN bit is set The message queue works on a first in first out basis that allows the controller to remember the order in which the message instructions were enabled When a buffer becomes available the first message in the queue is placed into the buffer and the EW bit is set D TIP The control program does not have access to the message buffers or the communications queue Once the EN bit is set 1 it remains set until the entire message process is complete and either the DN ER or TO bit is set 1 The MSG Timeout period begins timing when the EN bit is set 1 If the timeout period expires before the MSG instruction completes its function the ER bit is set 1 and an error code 37H is placed in the MG File to inform you of the timeout errot Communications Instructions 357 2 At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction the controller determines if it should examine the communications queue fot another instruct
191. 01D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 225 FLL Fill File Instruction Type output FLL Fill File Source Bile Execution Time for the FLL Instruction Length i Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 16 8 0 07 us word 0 9 us long word 17 18 0 2 us long word 0 9 us The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Destination Source Word to File This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is the address of the value or constant used to fill the destination The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word or any IEEE 754 32 bit value TIP A constant cannot be used as the source in a timer T counter C or control R file Destination The starting destination address where the data is written Length The length operand contains the number of elements The length can range from 1 to 128 word 1 to 64 long word or 1 to 42 3 word element such as counter TIP The source and destination operands must be of the same file type
192. 1 2 9 B 2 6 8 T ACC 2 6 8 L 3 1 B3 1 5 8 T4A 6 0 TA not supported B3 6 2 T4 6 2 TF not supported B 1 7 3 TET 73 T not supported B 7 5 T 7 5 T4 ACC 1 7 L8 2 55 T4 1 ACC 16 0 T 1 ACC 2 7 L 1 2 6 6 T4 ACC 16 2 TFLEFLACC 13 0 L 2 6 8 T 1 ACC 16 3 0 1 2 6 3 L8 1 5 8 TEFEEFLACC ES 7 5 0 0 2 6 3 L8 T 6 2 Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using an Indirect Address ADD Instruction Times ADD Instruction Addressing ADD Instruction 13 44 us Source A N7 Source A 1 7 us Source B T41 ACC Destination N Source B 1 7 us Destination 3 0 us Total 19 84 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 1 44 Us 5 5 Us 6 94 Us True case e XIC 1 44 us 5 5 Us 6 94 Us False case Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 462 MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1100 Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet Scan Time Worksheet Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 is used 53 ys Expansion Input Words X 3 us or X 7 5 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 10 us Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instructions in your pr
193. 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 Input Data Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Input Word File Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the input data file Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below IIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 1 3 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode o Parameter E Ss Elo s S E S lw gx __ BEC Rs LEE J j Z o 9 i S ja o E 9 is S eo g S 4 a o 2 S Sis i S is e o l m e Z lu B 2 amp amp t 2 EF IS 1G la se 9S9 8 S a e Ja 5 8 lu Slot e e e e Mask e e e e e e e e Length Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Input and Output Instructions 257 IOM Immediate Output Instruction Type output with Mask IOM TIP This instruction is used for embedded 1 0 only It is not designed to be Immediate Output w Mask used with expansion 0 Slot 0 0 0 Mask N7 0 Lengi Execution Time for the IOM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 43 59 us 0 87 us The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan This instruction uses the following operands
194. 100 115 Too Backplane Backplane Slot dec 6 1756 DHAIO or 1756 DH4E Channel B Remote Link ID dec 27 Remote DH DH DH 485 N A Remote Station oct dec 51o 41d Enter in the IP address of the 1756 ENET module select ControlLogix backplane press the Insert key and enter in the backplane slot numbers of the DHRIO module 0 16 under the To Addtess fields Click on the ControlLogix backplane to highlight it and press the Insert key on your computer s keyboard to add another hop Double click on the From Device under the ControlLogix backplane and select the 1756 DHRIO Make sure that the From Port for the DHRIO module is set for Channel B Enter in the destination Link ID DH address of target processor under the To Address Press the Insert key to add another hop Double click on the From Device and select Remote DH DH DH 485 Enter in the destination node address DH octal address of target processor under the To Address Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 404 Communications Instructions Note Make sure that the Target Device Data Table Address exists in the target device Network Message Example 3 MicroLogix 1100 Unsolicited Write Message to RSLinx via Ethernet 0S Series B FRN 4 or later Initiating an unsolicited write MSG to RSLinx via EtherNet IP requires sending a remote format message that includes Source Link ID and address as well as Destination Link ID and addtess The M
195. 10096 control read write 286 Limit CVL Control Variable Low Limit PD10 0 CVL word INT 0 to 100 control read write 287 1 The range listed in the table is for when scali ng is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 284 Process Control Instruction Setpoint SPS Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS The SPS Setpoint is the desired control point of the process variable Process Variable PV Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV Process user defined word INT Oto 16383 control read write Variable The PV Process Variable is the analog input variable Setpoint MAX MAXS Input Address Data Range Type User Parameter Format Program Descriptions Access MAXS Setpoint PD10 0 MAXS word 32 768 to 32 767 control read write Maximum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MAXS Setpoint Maximum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering un
196. 11 286 Process Control Instruction Output Limit OL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 0 disabled An enabled 1 value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD10 0 CVH Control Variable High and PD10 0 CVL Control Variable Low A disabled 0 value disables OL Output Limiting Control Variable High Limit CVH Output Parameter Address Data Format Range Type UserProgram Descriptions Access CVH Control PD10 0 CVH word INT Oto10096 control read write Variable High Limit When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVH Control Value High you enter is the maximum output in percent that the control variable attains If the calculated CV exceeds the CVH the CV is set overridden to the CVH value you entered and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVH value you enter determines when the upper limit alarm bit UL is set If CV exceeds the maximum value the output is not overridden and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Output Parameters Process Control Instruction 287 Control Variable Low Limit CVL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Acces
197. 11 0 0 1 HSC0 111 0 0 2 HSC0 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Bit Comments Function Count Up Count Down Not Used Not Used Example 1 on U off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example 2 on IU off f on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care rising edge Y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 5 Two Input Counter up and down with External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 5 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CEBit Comments Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 f on U off on off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on IU off f on off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on U off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care rising edge Y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 functions regardless of the HSC being used Count Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using the Quadrature Encoder 111 The Quadrature Encoder is used for d
198. 1100 Series B Controller for more information ATTENTION Only MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller supports 40kHz Within the PTO function file there are PTO element s An element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 on 1763 L16BBB or output 3 O0 0 3 on 1763 L16BBB The interface to the PTO sub system is accomplished by scanning a PTO instruction in the main program file file number 2 ot by scanning a PTO instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PTO instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PTO instruction is on is solved true 2 The PTO instruction is started and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate ACCEL parameters which define the number of ACCEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 129 3 The ACCEL phase completes 4 The RUN phase is entered and the number of pulses defined for RUN are output 5 The RUN phase completes 6 Decelerate DECEL is entered and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate parameters which define the number of DECEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 7 The DECEL phase completes 8 The PTO instruction is DONE While the PTO instruction is being executed status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PTO instruction is actually being executed by
199. 15 HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO word 16 bit binary 0 to 7 control read write 117 LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary 2to7 control read write 117 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 n a not applicable Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 HSC Function File Sub Elements Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 93 All examples illustrate HSCO Program File Number PFN Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access PFN Program HSC O PFN word INT 0to 7 control read only File Number 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The PEN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when HSCO counts to High Preset or Low Preset or through Overflow or Underflow The integer value of this variable defines which program file will run at that time A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 Error Code ER Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The ERs Error Codes detected by the HSC sub system are displayed in this word Errors include HSC Error Codes Error Code Name Mode Description Number less t
200. 18 0 2 0 90 word long word Convert from BCD FRD 29 87 0 87 1 4 None None None Gray Code GCD 29 06 0 87 1 4 None None None Greater Than or Equal To GEO 8 96 0 87 14 9 09 0 87 Greater Than GRT 8 96 0 87 14 9 09 0 87 High Speed Load HSL 82 37 0 87 32 84 37 0 87 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 51 76 0 87 2 0 None None None Interrupt Subroutine INT 0 74 0 74 0 2 None None None Immediate Output with Mask I0M 43 59 0 87 2 0 None None None Jump JMP 1 15 0 81 0 8 None None None Jump to Subroutine JSR 1 87 0 84 0 8 None None None Label LBL 0 78 0 78 0 8 None None None Lcd Display LCD 8 06 0 87 44 None None None Less Than or Equal To LEO 8 96 0 87 14 9 09 0 87 Less Than LES 8 96 0 87 14 9 09 0 87 LIFO Load LFL 39 93 38 09 2 0 39 96 38 06 LIFO Unload LFU 39 34 37 06 2 0 39 97 37 09 Limit LIM 38 96 0 87 2 0 38 96 0 87 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MicroLogix 1100 Controllers MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 459 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory True False Usage in True False Usage in Words Words Master Control Reset MCR Start 1 12 1 28 0 2 None None None MCR End 1 25 1 12 0 2 None None None Masked
201. 1D EN P September 2011 IMPORTANT See also RTC Battery Operation on page 52 Input Filter Selection Modified System Status File 479 Install a replacement battery immediately See your hardware manual for more information Address Data Format Type User Program Access 5 13 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 whenever the discrete input filter selection in the control program is not compatible with the hardware ASCII String Manipulation Error Address Data Format Type User Program Access 5 15 binary Oor1 status read This bit is set 1 whenever an invalid string length occurs When 8 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Major Error Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 6 word 0 to FFFF status read write This register displays a value which can be used to determine what caused a fault to occur SeeIdentifying Controller Faults on page 491 to learn more about troubleshooting faults Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 480 System Status File Suspend Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S7 word 32 768 to status read write 432 767 When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS code is wtitten to this locat
202. 1D EN P September 2011 Input Parameters r Tuning Parameters Controller Gain Ke ooo Reset Ti Rate Td Loop Update Control Mode PID Control Time Mode Limit Output CV Deadband 0 Feed Forward Bias 0 Process Control Instruction PID Setup Inputs ScaledSetPoinSPS 0 Setpoint MAX Smax U Setpoint MIN Smin fo Process VariablePV 0 m Output Control Output Cv 0 OutputMax C 0 DupuMin cv Zj 0 SealedEnorSE 0 Cancel Error Code fo Help 283 mo E The table below shows the input parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User For More Program Information Access SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS word INT 9 to 16383 control read write 284 PV Process Variable user defined word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 284 MAXS Setpoint Maximum PD10 0 MAXS word INT 32 768 to 432 767 control read write 284 MINS Setpoint Minimum PD10 0 MINS word INT 32 768 to 32 767 control read write 285 OSP Old Setpoint Value PD10 0 0SP word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only 285 OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 286 0 disabled CVH Control Variable High PD10 0 CVH word INT 0 to
203. 1D EN P September 2011 Math Instructions 191 Definitions Overflow occuts when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is greater than 254 Underflow occurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is less than one Floating Point Exception Values Zero represented by an exponent and a mantissa of zero Both positive and negative zero are valid Denormalized represented by an exponent of zero and a non zero mantissa part Since denormalized numbers have very small insignificant values they are treated as zero when used as source operand for most instructions This reduces execution time Denormalized numbers are not generated by the instructions but are propagated by some instructions Zero is generated on an underflow Infinity represented by an exponent of 255 and a mantissa part of zero Both positive and negative infinity are generated when operations overflow Infinity is propagated through calculations NAN not a number is represented by an exponent of 255 and a non zero mantissa part NANs are used to indicate results that are mathematically undefined such as 0 0 and adding plus infinity to minus infinity All operations given a NAN as input must generate a NAN as output LSB Round to Even Rule Floating point operations are rounded using the round to even rule If the bits of the result to the right of the least significant bit LSB represent a value less than one half of
204. 2 bit signed integer data words Message File MG 9 to 255 25 The Message File is associated with the MSG instruction See Communications Instructions on page 341 for information on the MSG instruction Programmable PLS 9 to 255 6 The Programmable Limit Switch PLS File allows you to configure the Limit Switch File High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS or rotary cam switch See Programmable Limit Switch PLS File on page 120 for information PID File PD 9 to 255 23 The PID File is associated with the PID instruction See Process Control Instruction on page 279 for more information Routing RI 9 to 255 20 The Routing Information File is associated with the MSG instruction See Information File Communications Instructions on page 341 for information on the MSG instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Name Extended Routing Information File File Identifier RIX File Number 9 to 255 Words per Element 25 Controller Memory and File Types m File Description The extended Routing Information File is associated with the MSG instruction See Communications Instructions on page 341 for information on the MSG instruction 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later 2 File Number in BOLD is the default Additional data files of tha type can be configured using the ramaining numbers Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 42 Controller Mem
205. 2011 98 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The HSC UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing The HSC sub system will clear 0 the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine User Interrupt Pending UIP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIP User HSC O UIP fbi Interrupt Pending t 0to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically User Interrupt Lost UIL Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIL User HSC O UIL bi Interrupt Lost t 0to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the
206. 3 RM001D EN P September 2011 112 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 7 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B With External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 7 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Comments Terminals Bit Function Count A Count B Z reset Hold Example 1 ili off 0 off 0 fon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 off 0 off 0 off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 off 0 on 1 Reset accumulator to zero Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 7 off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 Count input A leads count input B 2 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care tt rising edge y falling edge TIP Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 113 Accumulator ACC Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT control read write
207. 3356 211 8190 BO Record 10 01 11 2000 01 00 00 2310 03455 224 8195 4455 Record 11 01 11 2000 01 30 00 2295 03456 233 8190 4495 String Length of Record The size of a recotd 1s limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters For queue 0 the formatted string length is 59 characters as shown below Data Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 11 2 1 Characters 10 1 18 1 J6 1 1 1 J6 1 16 1 6 10 14 8 14 6 14 11 14 6 1 6 1 6 59 characters Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Recipe and Data Logging 435 Number of Records Using Queue 0 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Date 2 bytes Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes L14 0 4 bytes T4 5 ACC 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes B3 2 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 18 bytes In this example each record consumes 18 bytes So if one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 7281 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File S
208. 383 Signal conversions could be as follows Example Values Process limits 73 to 1156 C Transmitter output if used 4 to 20 mA Output of analog input module 0 to 16383 PID instruction MinS to MaxS 73 to 1156 C 2 Enter the setpoint word 2 and deadband word 9 in the same scaled engineering units Read the scaled process variable and scaled error in these units as well The control output percentage word 16 is displayed as a percentage of the 0 to 16383 CV range The actual value transferred to the CV output is always between 0 and 16383 When you select scaling the instruction scales the setpoint deadband process variable and error You must consider the effect on all these variables when you change scaling Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 302 Process Control Instruction Zero Crossing Deadband DB The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output DB SP Error range DB Time Zero crossing is deadband control that lets the instruction use the error for computational purposes as the process variable crosses into the deadband until it crosses the setpoint Once it crosses the setpoint error crosses zero and changes sign and as long as it remains in th
209. 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 379 Example 4 Configuring a Modbus Message This section describes how to configure a local message using the Modbus communication commands Since configuration options are dependent on which channel is selected the programming software has been designed to only show the options available for the selected channel Before configuring the MSG instruction open the Channel Configuration screen and set the Driver to Modbus RTU Master For mote information on Channel Configuration see Modbus RTU Master Configuration on page 525 Message Setup Screen B3 0 MSG 0000 J E Read Write Message 0 MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen l MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 0 General This Controller m Control Bits Channel Ignore if timed out TO J e Modbus Command 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxnx s Data Table Address N10 0 Awaiting Execution Ew D Size in Elements 1 Error ER e m Target Device Message done DN e Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST e MB Data Address 1 55535 Message Enabled EN 0 Slave Node Address dec r Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors Error Description Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500 message MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic 1 Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen 2 The RSLogix
210. 4 or later The controller supports a feature which allows you to select if future access to the User Program should be allowed or disallowed after it has been transferred to the controller This type of protection is particularly useful to an OEM original equipment manufacturer who develops an application and then distributes the application via a memory module or within a controller The Allow Future Access setting is found in the Controller Properties window as shown below Controller Properties x General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications Cancel Epp Help When Allow Future Access is deselected the controller requires that the User Program in the controller is the same as the one in the programming device If the programming device does not have a matching copy of the User Program access to the User Program in the controller is denied To access the User Program clear controller memory and reload the program TIP Functions such as change mode clear memory restore program and transfer memory module are allowed regardless of this selection Controller passwords are not associated with the Allow Future Access setting This allows selective disabling individual Data Files from Web View Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 48 Controller Memory and File Types Using RSLogix 500 V7 20 and higher you can disable individual data files from being viewed via any web browser by selectin
211. 499 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Table of Contents 11 Appendix D Protocol Configuration DH 485 Communication Protocol 444 454 614065 e uo ad ARS 502 DET Puli Duplex Protocol cao eer eR n PE MURS RC KE 505 DELHBHAEDubies PIOtoGol s por ees e Evan iden 506 DF1 Radio Modem Protocol i ad pacientes ora be S emat ead 517 Modb s RTU PPotocol coude trud rues eU apnd rt te 524 ASCILDHBVYGE iia oS Dun E MAES NER IV o Sd ex 535 Ethet DU Vi ies tits ve diate nolora tele eira egt edo Vaf ac bho diat 537 Appendix E Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17444 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO 541 17446 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM 544 17447 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC 546 17465 Quick Stare Message MSG css encore deci aks 550 17501 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI 553 17503 Quick Start Real Time Clock RIO eee 556 17558 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID 557 18465 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllefes ovo onere pea oe ven es vr ERN 558 18498 Quick Start Data Logging DLG 0 004 561 Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM Basic requirements to use 40K Hz PTO and PWM in MicroLogix Controller of MicroLogix 1100 Series B 571 Controller PTO and PWM function file changes in Series B Controller 571 RSLogix500 display T9SUe Sen 5e
212. 5 43 21 0 WordO JEN ITT DN internal Use Word 1 Preset Value Word2 Accumulated Value EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit ATTENTION Do not copy timer elements while the timer enable bit A EN is set Unpredictable machine operation may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page amp 2 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files 2 Mode 7 E Sg B Parameter E E o 8 I 5 le amp x a Gf amp RE Bisls 5ls S a E la lo l le j _ z E la a jw Iw JE e Is a S F 5 o _ lw Im e l lu IB 4 E l a e IF El 1 le E S 8 e la 6 e 2 jS la Timer Time Base Preset Accumulator 1 Valid for Timer Files only TIP Use an RES instruction to reset a timer s accumulator and status bits Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Timer and Counter Instructions 169 Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Timer Accuracy Time Base Accuracy 0 001 seconds 0 001 to 0 00 0 01 seconds 0 01 to 0 00 1 00
213. 50 RET Return from Subroutine Loc er eere Feud vade e aad 251 SUS SUSDERIC 4255 onc Be wh dade ag ns MA a PAG ied 251 TND Temporaty End most be n o RU RC A Dee na 251 END Propran End uns vetet pad eae PSU Ka tt ele 252 MCR Master Control Reset 061 069 ated RR om tecta 252 Chapter 17 IM Immediate Input with Mask reo cecercberetmRn s 255 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 257 REE I O Ree ster bee ERR vate ates 258 Chapter 18 Information About Using Interrupts eeeeeeeeeeesee 259 User Interrupt Instructions irises et Debo E wie dea 6a deer 263 INT Interrupt Subroutine 4 veeb ero err ER D E beo 263 DLScslcctablc Timed ITE do ep pra acd Mab e npe 264 UID User Interrupt Disable is xm Ela eb a em e Rn 265 UIE User Interrupt Enable i5 o dois eh d ree roba Sete eva 266 UIF User Interrupt Plushie qoos tec Mite e EUER ER 267 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File 268 Using the Event Input Interrupt EI Function File 212 Chapter 19 The PILOCOHOEDE n Fev vnnd mated Pea we etr vadam Cane ew wi 279 The PID Equations css iie a aeia E E er A A 280 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Table of Contents 9 PD D ta Porra nup vi Sh DEP IP ire e o xdi tel Ra E 281 PID Proportional Integral Derivative sees 282 Duc Parameters os esee cites ad cet tob RC s sU 283 Outpur Parattefefs sec bee Tope d doe tecto bank ivit 287 Tuning PatametetS ooo seo odit ongne ler
214. 500 Message Setup Screen appears This screen is used to setup or monitor message parameters for This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of these sections follow Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 380 Communications Instructions This Controller Parameters If a Channel configured for Modbus Master is selected in the Channel field of the Message Setup Screen the following Modbus Command options will become available e 01 Read Coil Status 0xxxx e 02 Read Input Status 1xxxx 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxxx e 04 Read Input Registers 3xxxx e 05 Write Single Coil 0xxxx e 06 Write Single Register 4xxxx e 15 Write Multiple Coils 0xxxx e 16 Write Multiple Registers 4xxxx Data Table Address Local file types must be Binary B or Integer N for Modbus commands Starting data table address for coil input bit commands 1 2 5 and 15 require a bit address Starting data table addresses for register commands 3 4 6 and 16 require a word address Size in Elements Size in elements defaults to 1 For coil input commands 1 2 5 and 15 elements are in bits For register commands 3 4 6 and 10 elements are in wotds Target Device Message Timeout Message timeout is specified in seconds If the target does not respond within this time period the message instruction will generate a specific error see MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 414
215. 500 V7 0 or V7 10 is used with the MicroLogix1100 Series B processor the processor type will be shown as MicroLogix1100 Series A in the software RSLogix500 V7 0 or V7 10 may not work normally with Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MicroLogix 1100 Firmware Changes in OS Series BFRN4 591 the Series B project Channel Configuration IO configuration RIX file PTO and PWM function file MSG instruction running in the Series B processor Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 592 MicroLogix 1100 Firmware Changes in OS Series B FRN 4 Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Glossary The following terms ate used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory addtess for data located in Input file word 1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides RS 232 isolation to an RS 485 Half Duplex communication link Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard for defining codes for information exchange between equipment produced by different manufacturers
216. 536 both because both NEG and ABS instruction recognize 9C40h as 25536 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 580 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller To solve this issue JE OF OFS of PTO PWM type should be changed to Long Type 32 bit by CPW instruction before the execution of these instructions as shown below 0000 CPW Copy Word Source PTO 0 JF Dest L9 0 Length 1 NEG Negate Source L9 0 40000 lt Dest L9 1 40000 lt ABS 0002 Absolute Value Source L9 0 40000 lt Dest L9 2 40000 lt 0003 CEND gt c Function Files 5j RTC LCD MMI BRA Description Hsc PTO PwM STI Ell Address Value _PTO O ER 0 PTO LOF EPTO 0 0PP RTO 0 ADP Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Binary Numbers Appendix G Number Systems This appendix covers binary and hexadecimal numbers e explains the use of a hex mask to filter data in certain programming instructions The processor memory stores 16 bit binary numbers As indicated in the following figure each position in the number has a decimal value beginning at the right with 2 and ending at the left with 215 Each position can be 0 or 1 in the processor memory A 0 indicates a value of 0 a 1 indicates the decimal value of the position The equivalent decimal value of the binary number is the sum of the position values
217. 6 Hexadecimal DE76 z 56950 negative number 8586 Hexadecimal number DE76 13x16 14x162 7x16 6x16 56950 We know this is a negative number because it exceeds the maximum positive value of 32767 To calculate its value subtract 16 the next higher power of 16 from 56950 56950 65536 8586 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Hex Mask Number Systems 585 This is a 4 character code entered as a parameter in SQO SQC and other instructions to exclude selected bits of a word from being operated on by the instruction The hexadecimal values are used in their binary equivalent form as indicated in the figure below The figure also shows an example of a hexadecimal code and the corresponding mask wotd Hex Binary Value Value 0000 0001 0010 0011 TH rr CJ C29 UJ 7 CO OO 4 O O1 4 CO P2 O c c c Hex Code OOFF 0000 0000 1111 1111 Mask Word Bits of the mask word that are set 1 will pass data from a source to a destination Reset bits 0 will not In the example below data in bits 0 7 of the source word is passed to the destination word Data in bits 8 15 of the source word is not passed to the destination word Source Word Mask Word Destination Word all bits 0 initially 1110 1001 1100 1010 0000 0000 1111 1111 0000 0000 1100 1010 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 586
218. 63 RM001D EN P September 2011 Instruction Description Page Instruction Description Page MSG Message 21 346 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt 18268 MUL Multiply 10 194 ES Ethernet Status 3 71 MVM Masked Move 13 219 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell A
219. 750 and 1000 Once completed the cycle resets and repeats Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 126 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 6 PTO Pulse Train Output Using High Speed Outputs The high speed output instructions allow you to control and monitor the PTO and PWM functions which control the physical high speed outputs Instruction Used To Page PTO Pulse Train Output Generate stepper pulses 128 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Generate PWM output 149 ATTENTION MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller does not support A 40kHz PTO and PWM Only MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller supports 40kHz PTO and PWM with any version of RSLogix500 Refer to Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller for more information IMPORTANT The PTO function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules IMPORTANT The PTO instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1100 BBB units Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Execution Time for the PTO Instruction Controller When Rung Is MicroLogix 1100 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 128 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output The MicroLogix 1100 1763 L16BBB controller supports two high s
220. 8 09 us long word 39 96 us 38 06 us On a false to true rung transition the LFL instruction loads words or long wotds into a user created file called a LIFO stack This instruction s counterpart LIFO unload LFU is paired with a given LFL instruction to remove elements from the LIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below LFL LIFO Load CEN 5 Source N7 0 LIFO ANZA CDND Controller Control R6 0 E aps Length 1 EM Position 0 lt MicroLogix 1100 LFL LIFO LOAD EN es uu DN L N7 1 Control R6 0 EMI Length 34 Position 9 LFU LIFO UNLOAD LEU LFO Ae L IDN est 7 11 EM Control R6 0 EMI Length 34 Position 9 LFL and LFU Instruction Pair This instruction uses the following operands Destination Position N7 11 N7 12 ms LFU instruction unloads data from stack N7 12 at position 0 N7 12 Source N7 13 N7 14 coc B5 WON c N7 10 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the LIFO stack The data size of the source must match th
221. 83 648 to status read only Derivative Term 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This long word is used internally to track the change in the process variable within the loop update time Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 298 Process Control Instruction Runtime Errors Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime error occurs Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions each of which has been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSB of the second word of the control block The error code is also displayed on the PID Setup Screen in RSLogix 500 Error Code Description of Error Condition or Conditions Corrective Action 11H 1 Loop update time Change loop update time 0 D 1024 D 1024 2 Loop update time Di 0 12H Proportional gain Change proportional gain K to 0 lt Ke Ke lt 0 13H Integral gain reset Change integral gain reset T to 0 lt T Ti lt 0 14H Derivative gain rate Change derivative gain rate Tyto 0 lt Ty Ty lt 0 15H Feed Forward Bias FF is out of range Change FF so it is within the range 16383 to 16383 23H Scaled setpoint min Change scaled setpoint min MinS to MinS gt Scaled setpoint max Maxs 32768 lt MinS lt Max lt 32767 31H If you are using setpoint scaling and If you are using setpoint scaling then change MinS gt setpoint SP gt MaxS or the setpoint SP to MinS lt SP lt Max
222. AN or infinity a saturated result 32768 or 32767 for word or 2 147 836 648 or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored e f Destination is an integer the rounded result is stored If an overflow occurs after rounding a saturated result is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored The saturated results are f Destination is an integer and the result is positive overflow Destination is 432767 word or 42 147 483 648 long word f Destination is an integer and the result is negative overflow Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 long word Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ADD Add SUB Subtract Math Instructions 193 Considerations When Using Floating Point Data Updates to Math Status Bits e Carry is reset e Overflow Is set if the result is infinity NAN or if a conversion to integer overflows otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if the lower 31 bits of the Floating Point Data result is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set bit 15 for word bit 31 for long word or floating point data otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions
223. C instruction does not accumulate counts and the Error Code ER shows a value of 1 Solution A file number was entered into PFN but the value entered was less then 3 or greater then 255 or the file number entered was correct however the file does not exist Create the NEW program file by Right mouse clicking on Program Files No Forces Forces Enabled 1 Controller Properties E Processor Status EA Function Files AML io Configuration D 53 BInary Di T4 TIMER Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 550 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17465 Quick Start Message MSG Problem 3 Some of my outputs will not turn On or Off when the ladder logic appears to indicate that they should Solution OMB Output Mask Bits Verify what the OMB has been configured for in the HSC function file If an output s has been assigned to the HSC for control then the output s will not be controlled anywhere else in the ladder program Only the HSC will have control over these outputs Communications Specifications The MicroLogix 1100 processors contain a total of 12 Message Buffers 8 Incoming Any incoming MSG s Communications and or responses to a command the ML1100 initiated 4 Outgoing Any outgoing MSG s Communications and or responses to incoming request for data The Outgoing queue also supports unlimited queuing This means that even if a buffer is not available
224. CD Keypad Trimpot A summary of the sub element is provided in the following table Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access CBS Customized Boot Message String File Address Offset LCD 0 CBS word INT control read write SCD Start with Customized Display LCD 0 SCD binary bit control read only TO Data Input Timeout of LCD instruction LCD 0 TO word INT control read only DN LCD Instruction Job Done LCD 0 DN binary bit status read only Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 448 LCD Information LCD Function File Feature JAddress DataFormat Type UserProgram Access ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bt LCDO ERR _ ibinary bit status readony ERN LCD Module Operation Error Number LCD 0 ERN word INT status read only TBF Target Bit File Number LCD 0 TBF word INT control read only TIF Target Integer File Number LCD 0 TIF word INT control read only JOG Jog data update Mode set LCD 0 JOG binary bit control read write TMIN Trimpotlowvalue CDOTMIN word INT control read ony TMAX Trimpot high value LCD 0 TMAX word INT control read only POTO TimpotOData TMIN TMAX LCDO POTO word INT status fread ony POT1 Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX LCD 0 POT1 word INT status read only WND Instruction Display Window LCD 0 WND binary bit status read onl
225. CL ASCII Clear Buffer Clear the receive and or transmit buffers 314 AIC Integer to String Convert an integer value to a string 316 AWA ASCII Write with Write a string with user configured characters 317 Append appended AWT ASCII Write Write a string 319 ABL Test Buffer for Line Determine the number of characters in the buffer up 321 to and including the end of line character ACB Number of Characters Determine the total number of characters in the 323 in Buffer buffer ACI String to Integer Convert a string to an integer value 324 ACN String Concatenate Link two strings into one 325 AEX String Extract Extract a portion of a string to create a new string 326 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Set or reset modem handshake lines 328 ARD ASCII Read Characters Read characters from the input buffer and place them 329 into a string ARL ASCII Read Line Read one line of characters from the input buffer and 331 place them into a string ASC String Search Search a string 333 ASR ASCII String Compare Compare two strings 334 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 310 ASCII Instructions Instruction Types and Operation There are two types of ASCII instructions ASCII string control and ASCII port control The string control instruction type is used for manipulating data and executes immediately The port control instruction type 1s used for transmitting data and makes use of the ASCII queue
226. CO Reserved S4 83 S82 S1 S0 5 UO 100 jU1 01 U2 102 U3 O3 U4 04 Reserved The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 SO through S3 and the CJC sensor S4 This bit is set 1 when an error over range under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program Refer to MicroLogix 1200 I O Thermocouple mV Input Module User Manual publication 1762 UM002 for additional details e OCx Open circuit indication for channels 0 through 3 OCO through OC3 and the CJC sensor OC4 e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 O0 through O3 and the CJC sensor O4 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 U0 through U3 and the CJC sensor U4 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 26 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Addressing Addressing Details The I O addressing scheme and examples are shown below Slot Number Data File Number i i tese Xs w o Input I or Output 0 3 9 nput I or Output 0 S W Pe Slot Delimiter Bit Delimiter Word Delimiter 1 1 0 located on the controller embedded 1 0 is slot 0 1 0 added to the controller expansion 1 0 begins with slot 1 Format Explanation Od s w b X File Type
227. Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 2 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 2 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Communications Mode Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 3 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 3 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Communications Active Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 4 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 4 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Scan Toggle Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 9 binary Oor1 status read write The controller changes the status
228. Comparison for Equal MEQ 36 00 0 90 2 0 36 65 0 90 Move MOV 9 18 0 87 1 4 9 21 0 87 Message Steady State MSG 10 14 5 62 1 4 None None None Message False to True MSG 59 58 5 62 1 4 None None None Transition for Reads Message False to True MSG 68 26 5 66 1 4 None None None Transition for Writes Multiply MUL 20 59 0 87 2 0 20 68 0 87 Masked Move MVM 12 90 0 87 2 0 13 18 0 87 Negate NEG 8 78 0 87 1 4 9 62 0 87 Not Equal NEQ 8 78 0 90 1 4 9 128 0 90 Not NOT 9 24 0 87 1 4 9 49 0 87 One Shot ONS 1 87 1 74 0 8 None None None Or OR 13 06 0 84 2 0 13 31 0 84 One Shot Falling OSF 9 03 9 03 14 None None None One Shot Rising OSR 9 12 9 12 14 None None None Output Enable OTE 1 43 1 50 0 8 None None None Output Latch OTL 1 46 1 43 0 8 None None None Output Unlatch OTU 1 46 1 43 0 8 None None None Proportional Integral Derivative PID 39 34 36 93 2 0 None None None Pulse Train Output PTO 51 28 31 94 0 8 None None None Pulse Width Modulation PWM 51 90 33 68 0 8 None None None Reset Accumulator RAC None None None 40 81 0 87 1 0 Refresh REF see p 462 0 84 0 2 None None None Reset RES 1 31 0 87 0 8 None None None Return RET 1 68 0 84 0 2 None None None Real Time Clock Adjust RTA 4 37 4 09 0 2 None None None Retentive Timer On RTO 2 74 DN 1 2 52 0 8 None None None 4 06 DN 0 Subroutine SBR 0 78 0 78 02 None None None Scale SCL 40 62 0 87 2 6 None None None Scale with Parameters SCP 331 27 0 87 3 8 337 2 0 87 Sequencer Compare sac 23 71 6 24 2 6 24 21 6 24
229. D ps mum laj x File Edt View Search Comms Tools Window Help DSM sae e D amp 59imm eanije eame OFFLINE E No Forces E EJ p a ae ceste ccs eee a ap N Yser KBt K TimeriCounter X input Output X Compare No Edits Driver AB_ETHIP 1 Node Od Project E Help B Controller Controler Properties Processor Status Function Files JUH 10 Configuration P Channel Configuration E Program Fies B svso B sys1 Lap2 S Data Fies Cross Reference D o0 output D n weur D s2 srarus E 83 BINARY E T4 Timer El c5 counter EI R6 CONTROL E v7 INTEGER DI F8 FLOAT Bi mcs D rno 3 C Data Logging E Configuration E Status G RCP Configuration Files E C3 Force Fies D prie 7 ETE wll Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 399 ix General MuliHop This Controller r Control Bits Chamek r nega Mineg Integral Ignore if timed out T0 o Communication Command ocru Read Break Connection ek 0 Data Table Address Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Size in Elements iy Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN o Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information File ss
230. D5H Connection not completed before user specified timeout D6H Connection timed out by the network D7H Connection refused by destination host D8H Connection was broken DSH Reply not received before user specified timeout DAH No network buffer space available DBH Multi hop messaging CIP message format error DCH Class 3 CIP connections are duplicated for same IP address DFH Multi hop messaging has no IP address configured for network EOH Expansion I O Communication Module Error The error code returned can be found in the upper byte of sub element 22 E1H PCCC Description Illegal Address Format a field has an illegal value E2H PCCC Description Illegal Address format not enough fields specified E3H PCCC Description Illegal Address format too many fields specified EAH PCCC Description Illegal Address symbol not found EBH PCCC Description Illegal Address Format symbol is 0 or greater than the maximum number of characters support by this device E6H PCCC Description Illegal Address address does not exist or does not point to something usable by this command E H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large E8H PCCC Description Cannot complete request situation changed file size for example during multi packet operation E9H PCCC Description Data or file is too large Memory unavailable EAH PCCC Description Request is too large transaction size plus word address is too large EBH Target node cannot respon
231. DN o Message Timeout BE o Message Transmitting ST J Data Table Address N50 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Bridge Addr dec 17 foctal 21 Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addi dec 0 m Remote Station Address deck 57 Remote Bridge Link ID 100 Specs dai m No errors Description Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 392 Communications Instructions DH 485 and DH Example Network BSESEBR nau pogl OO uU i i n SLC 5 03 DH 485 Network Node 5 Node 22 Link ID 1 Node 10 AIC Node 11 AIC Node 12 AIC Node 17 T ks FEBEEHEHERESES le le 7 E ne e Bs Go m E qu E Tog ds MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1100 SLC 5 04 DH Network Node 23 octal 19 decimal Link ID 100 Node 40 octal 32 decimal Node 63 octal 51 decimal BH e EB BB BB H EH c docs
232. Decel exceeds limit See page 142 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Pulse Train Output Error Codes Using High Speed Outputs 149 Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 5 No No Yes Jog Error PTO is in the idle state and two or more of the following are set e Enable EN bit set e Jog Pulse JP bit set e Jog Continuous JC bit set This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the error condition is removed 6 No Yes No Jog The jog frequency JF value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error Frequency faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Error 7 No Yes No Length The total output pulses to be generated TOP is less than zero This error Error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM IMPORTANT The PWM function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It Pulse Width Modulation i PWM Number cannot be used with expansion I O modules IMPORTANT The PWM instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit PWM Function A Instruction Type output Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations ATTENTION MicroLogix 1100
233. EEE OUENS 236 Unload SWP Swap Swap low byte with high byte in a 238 specified number of words Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 222 File Instructions CPW Copy Word Instruction Type output CPW Copy Word Source HSC 0 2 Execution Time for the CPW Instruction Dest N7 0 length 1 Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 16 8 us 0 27 us word 0 87 us The CPW instruction copies words of data in ascending order from one location Source to another Destination Although similar to the File Copy COP instruction the CPW instruction allows different source and destination parameters Examples include e integer to long word long word to floating point long word to integer e integer to PTO function file Observe the following restrictions when using the CPW instruction e The length of the data transferred cannot exceed 128 words e Function files can be used for Source or Destination but not both e When referencing either a PLS file or a function file addressing must be specified to the sub element level e You can reference a sub element of bits in a function file containing a combination of read only and read write bits e You cannot directly reference the high word of a long word as an operand in the CPW instruction A Major fault 003F is generated if the execution of the instruction exceeds the data table space e A Major fault 0044 is
234. Error Codes on page 337 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 336 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ABL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100 10 93 us character 11 43 us The ABL instruction is used to determine the number of characters in the receive buffer of the specified communication channel up to and including the end of line characters termination This instruction looks for the two termination characters that you configure via the channel configuration screen On a false to true transition the controller reports the number of characters in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 322 ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 Control is the control data file See page 313 e Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only and resides in wotd 2 of the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error code desctiptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown
235. FRN 4 ASCII driver This driver supports direct communication through RS485 Network using 1763 NCO01 cable without any additional devices Use No Handshaking 485 Network in the protocol control tab of the Channel Configuration File This driver also supports user selectable configurations of Stop Bits 1 1 5 and 2 and Data Bits 8 and 7 Ethernet The following features are supported in the OS Series B FRN 4 firmware Communications Related Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 e Supports Standard Keep Alive Packet method for the inbound and outbound connections MicroLogix 1100 sends Keep Alive Packets every 45 seconds If target node does not respond to the Keep Alive Packet for 4 times the session is closed Supports user settable Inactivity Timeout feature for the inbound and outbound connections If any packet does not exist on the Ethernet IP connection during the configured Inactivity Timeout the session is closed e Supports Execute DH Ethernet messaging for the outbound connections If Ethernet MSG instruction is configured as Remote DH message is generated This is also used as Unsolicited messaging via Ethernet Port Supports CIP Generic messaging through the Ethernet port e Supports the multiple CIP3 connection per a session connection The maximum CIP3 connection can be assigned up to 16 per a session connection for the inbound and outbound connections e Supports the connection break fe
236. Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode S8 Parameter E 8 E E e i z c px a S amp FE Bis E Sle m a ln jo 9 S a lf ln JE L Is e Js JE o a jm iz a h E z l E Ella la Ell e a l E s la Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 200 Math Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 11 Conversion Instructions The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values Instruction Used To Page DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning on the 202 corresponding bit in the 16 bit destination ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value 203 Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer FRD Convert From Binary Converts the BCD source value to an integer and 204 Coded Decimal stores it in the destination TOD Convert to Binary Coded Converts the integer source value to BCD format 208 Decimal and stores it in the destination Using Decode and Addressing Mode
237. Hop Ves Routing Information FileCRI RI51 0 Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors anii Offset LEN String Text Symbol Description 27 Rockwell Automation to ENBT NE E CE STSTLEN sds Symbol Columns 2 z Desc sts 4 Properties Usage Help The rcv_string tag on the ControlLogix controller is created as a string type and mapped PLC SLC mapping table to allow the controller to accept those messages Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 388 Communications Instructions SUD Browser rev_string E x Rockwell Automation to ENBT L N P R zl s Position 27 Count 27 of 82 Eros Cancel Help Z Remote Messages The controller is also capable of remote or off link messaging Remote messaging is the ability to exchange information with a device that is not connected to the local network This type of connection requires a device on the local network to act as a bridge or gateway to the other network Remote Networks DH 485 and DH Networks The illustration below shows two networks a DH 485 and a DH network The SLC 5 04 processor at DH 485 node 17 is configured for passthru operation Devices that are capable of remote messaging and are connected on either network can initiate read ot write data exchanges with devices on the other network based on each device s capa
238. Instruction Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Bulletin 1763 Controllers and 1762 Expansion 0 Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circu
239. Instructions FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FFU Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 38 87 Us 37 06 us long word 38 87 us 37 06 us On a false to true rung transition the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created file called a FIFO stack The data is unloaded using first in first out order After the unload completes the data in the stack is shifted one element toward the top of the stack and the last element is zeroed out Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFU FIFO Unload CEU 5 FIFO N7 0 Control Dest N71 lt DN gt ontrover Control R6 0 CMS Length 1 EM Position 0 lt MicroLogix 1100 FFL FIFO LOAD EN Source N7 10 DN FIFO N7 12 EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 FFU FIFO UNLOAD EU FIFO N7 12 DN Dest N7 11 EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair This instruction uses the following operands Destination N71 ERR N7 12 FFU instruction unloads data from stack N7 12 at position 0 N7 12 Source N7 13 N7 14 N7 10 FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 Position 0 1 2 3 4 5 34 words are al
240. Interrupt Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 260 Using Interrupts An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute When any one of the interrupts is configured and enabled and subsequently occurs the user program 1 suspends its execution 2 performs a defined task based upon which interrupt occurred 3 returns to the suspended operation Program File 2 Interrupt Operation Example rung 0 Program File 10 Program File 2 is the main control program Program File 10 is the interrupt routine rung 123 e An Interrupt Event occurs at rung I 123 e Program File 10 is executed rung 275 e Program File 2 execution resumes immediately after program file 10 is scanned Specifically if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event occurs 1 the controller stops its normal execution 2 determines which interrupt occurred 3 goes immediately to rung 0 of the subroutine specified for that User Interrupt 4 begins executing the User Interrupt subroutine or set of subroutines if the specified subroutine calls a subsequent subroutine 5 completes the subroutine s 6 resumes normal execution from the point where the controller program was interrupted When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted The Micrologix 1100 controllers only allow interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan They are e At the start of a ladder ru
241. Interrupt Pending TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled ED Error Detected SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts o x ATC DaT re mui BHI cso ios EI File Number Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the STI STI 0 PFN STI 0 AS STI 0 UIE STI 0 SPM Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Program File Number defines which subroutine is executed when the SPM value has timed out The Integer number entered must be a valid sub routine program file 3 to 255 Auto Start defines if the STI function will automatically start when the MicroLogix 1500 enters run or test User Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the STI subroutine from processing Setpoint in milliseconds defines the interval that the interrupt will scan the PFN sub routine Knowledgebase Quick Starts 555 Example The following example configures the STI to execute sub routine file 3 PFN 3 every 2 seconds SPM 2000 In the subroutine file there is an ADD instruction simply adding the value of 1 to N7 0 each time the sub routine is scanned This example also sets the User Interrupt Enable bit and the Auto Start bit allowing the STI to execute Function Files HSC PTO Pww STI RTC pat TPL MMI BHI cso jios amp STl 0 L PFN Program File Number ER Error Code H UIK User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrup
242. LDN Done DS Decelerating Status LRS Run Status L AS Accelerating Status L RP Ramp Profile CS Control Stop IS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status LNS Normal Operation Status JPS Jog Pulse Status JCS Jog Continuous Status L ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent HJP Jog Pulse L JC Jog Continuous EH Enable Hard Stop L EN Enable Status follows rung state L ER Error Code L OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz 0 L JF Jog Frequency Hz 0 TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Genere 10000 L OPP Output Pulses Produced 0 L ADP Accel Decel Pulses or File Elem 100 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 a a E a E E o E oa E oa A a E oa E oa E o E m A o E a E oa A o E ma E a A ps a ce e Knowledgebase Quick Starts 543 The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File 2 EIE By toggling Bit B3 0 the PTO can be activated Once running the PTO will generate the number of pulses entered into the PTO 0 TOP word and then stop To restart toggle B3 0 General Information on the PTO Once running the PTO will continue to generate pulses until all pulses have been generated or the PTO 0 EH Enable Hard Stop bit has been activated Once the EH bit is set the instruction will generate a PTO error of 1 hard stop detected In order to clear this error the PTO instruction must be scanned on a false rung of
243. MA eee oe Raat 50 Real Time Clock Function File llle eese 51 REA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction 123 ee rev th 53 Memory Module Information Function File esses 54 Base Hardware Information Function File 0 00005 56 Communications Status File 6 eens 57 Ethernet Communications Status File 71 Input Output Status Pile etes ed e e Saas es ORDER IER 79 Chapter 4 Programming Instructions Triste HOP Seb o5 icu neta See d SUIS Red desse 81 Overview Using the Instruction Descriptions costera do PETRA ERR ARTE 82 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 6 Table of Contents Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using High Speed Outputs Relay Type Bit Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions Compare Instructions Chapter 5 High Speed GounterXOvetviey coc eb Re Ee AS ed es 89 Programmable Limit Switch Overview vic eee e e 89 High Speed Counter HSC Function File oreet 90 High Speed Counter Function File Sub Elements Summary 92 HSC Function File Sub Elements 4 2 42 oa t t as 95 HSL High Speed Counter Load i ceeds esis XR rx 118 RAC Reset Accumulated Value ia cetur or e eed os 119 Programmable Limit Switch PLS File o ert 120 Chapter 6 PIO Pulse Train Outpilt o eX EPA Ope wou Ree peepee 127 Pulse Train Output Function o9 2 4 eve qe regarde e C aon 128 Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File a Stt 133 Pulse Train Output Fu
244. MORY Bit 2 9 is set in the controller and Non Recoverable Transfer the memory module program to the MODULE USER the memory module user program controller and then change to Run mode PROGRAM does not match the controller user MISMATCH program 0018 MEMORY MODULE The user program in the memory Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash to be USER PROGRAM module is incompatible with the OS compatible with the memory module ae WITH e Obtain a new memory module e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 001A USER PROGRAM The user program is incompatible Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash INCOMPATIBLE WITH with the OS e Contact your local Rockwell Automation OS AT POWER UP representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 0020 MINOR ERROR AT A minor fault bit bits 0 7 in S 5 was Recoverable e Correct the instruction logic causing the END OF SCAN set at the end of scan error DETECTED e Enter the status file display in your programming software and clear the fault e Enter the Run mode 0021 Reserved N A N A e 0022 WATCHDOG TIMER The program scan time exceeded the Non Recoverable Determine if the program is caught in a loop EXPIRED SEE S 3 watchdog timeout value S 3H and correct the problem e Increase the watchdog timeout value in the status file 0023 STI ERROR An error occurred in t
245. Message Retries 3 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms fo Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms fo Cancel Apply Help Cancel Apply Help DF1 Half Duplex Master MSG based Polling Mode Operation With MSG based Polling Mode the master device only initiates communication with a slave when a MSG instruction to that slave is triggered in ladder logic Once the read or write command has been transmitted the master waits the Reply MSG Timeout period and then polls that slave for a reply to its command The master can be configured either to ignore MSG based Polling don t allow slaves to initiate or to accept MSG based Polling allow slaves to initiate MSGs that may have been triggered and queued up in the slave Publication 1763 RMO001D EN P September 2011 g 512 Protocol Configuration General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Y Message Based Polling Mode Channel Configuration Channel Configuration E xi NETTE E General Channel 0 Node Address Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Y MELEE f decimal 1 decimal Baud 1200 hd Parity NONE hd r Protocol Control Baud 1200 v Parity NONE hod Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier Error Detection Polling Mode Reply Msg Timeout x20 ms f r Protocol Control Control Line nar Duplex without Continuous Carrier ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 Pre Transmit Delay 1 ms 0 Reply Msg Timeout 20 ms 1 ACK Timeout x2
246. Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table MEO Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 3 Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level gt Mode 3 Parameter E 88 E o zm z 3 i z _CRE Bisig 2l Oo o S a jo 9 jo l a JE e ls e S sz o l la lo e l lu B l E lz amp i e IE OG Ue e EIS 8 jS e e Je Ee FCS No Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Mask e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Compare e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 184 Compare Instructions LIM Limit Test LIM Limit Test Low Lim N7 0 0 Test 0 0 lt High Lim N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type input Execution Time for the LIM Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 38 96 us 0 87 us long word 38 96 us 0 87 us The LIM instruction is used to test for values within or ou
247. NG Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 406 Communications Instructions 2 Configure Remote Routing Configuration After selecting Remote Addressing and clicking on the Configure button select the 1785 K A5 Bridge 5130 KA for the Bridge Device Select DH for the Remote Network Type and Local ID is set to 15 dec Local KA5 is set to 63 dec The Remote ID should match the Network Link ID of the initiating ML1100 and must be unique between controllers initiating unsolicited messages to RSLinx axi Project Default Topic List Data Source Data Collection Advanced Communication ML1100_UNSOLICITEDMSG Reine era ene Communications Driver AB ETH 1 A B Ethernet RUNNING z A Bridge Device ii KA Cancel Remote Routing Details efaul Local ID 0 255 decimal 15 Remote ID 0 255 decimal 0 Hel el Local KAS 0 63 decimal 63 Remote Network Type Data Highway Plus DH x New Clone Delete Apply Done Help 3 Configure the DDE topic and Item in RSLinx 1 Connect to the RSLinx OPC Server RSI OPC Test Client xl File Server View Help TTE TT Select an OPC Server xi OPC Server Prog ID LK RSLinx OPC Server Cancel Located Servers Browse nx Remote erver e Name Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 2 Add a new group Add New Group O00
248. Number Systems Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Related Serial Communications Related Appendix H MicroLogix 1100 Firmware Changes in OS Series B FRN 4 OS FRN 1 2 and 3 are Series A firmware and OS FRN 4 is Series B firmware There are many changes in the OS Series B FRN 4 firmware In this chapter only new features of OS Series B FRN 4 firmware are summarized To use the newest features below the firmware in your existing Series A controllers must be upgraded to OS Series B FRN 4 In addition RSLogix 500 programming software must be version 7 20 00 or higher The latest firmware is FRN 9 See the latest FRN release note for details RTC information is still retained even when the firmware is upgraded Ethernet communication speed is improved compared to the earlier fitmware versions The following functionality is added to the OS Series B FRN 4 firmware DF1 Half Duplex Master driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave driver This driver supports direct communication through RS485 Network using 1763 NCO01 cable without any additional devices Use No Handshaking 485 Network in the protocol control tab of the Channel Configuration File Modbus Master RTU driver Modbus Slave RTU driver This driver supports user selectable configurations of Stop Bits 1 1 5 and 2 and Data Bits 8 and 7 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 588 MicroLogix 1100 Firmware Changes in OS Series B
249. O 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 136 RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bit Oor1 control read write 137 CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS bit 0 or 1 control read write 144 IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 137 ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED bit Oor1 status read only 138 NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only 138 JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only 146 JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only 147 ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent PTO 0 ADI bit 00r 1 control read write 141 JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP bit 00r 1 control read write 146 JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 0 or 1 control read write 147 EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH bit 0 or 1 control read write 138 EN Enable Status follows rung state PTO 0 EN bit 0 or 1 status read only 139 ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2 to 7 status read only 148 OF 2 Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT9 Q to 20 0006 control read write 139 word UINT 0 to 40 000 OFS Operating Frequency PTO 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 0008 status read only 140 Sashi word UINT 0 to 40 000 Jr a Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 3 0 to 20 0008 control read write 145 word UINT 0 to 40 000 TOP Total Output Pulses PTO 0 TOP long word 0 to control read write 140 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 To Be Generated OPP Output Pulses Produced PTO 0 0PP long word 0 to status read only 141
250. Only Modbus addresses 30001 to 30256 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 Must be Binary or Holding Registers Read Write Modbus addresses 40001 to 40256 range 3 to 255 0 no 0 Integer file type file RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from receive to transmit mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Stop Bits 1 5 2 1 Data Bits 7 8 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 530 Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave Memory Map The modbus Memory map is summarized in and detailed in Modbus to MicroLogix Memory Map Su
251. P September 2011 86 Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing of Bit B3 0 B3 0 0002 lE ED E25 0 10 0003 C END gt e Address B3 B25 0 Description In this example the element to be used for the indirection is B25 0 The data in B25 0 defines the bit within file B3 If the value of location B25 0 1017 the XIC instruction is processed using B3 1017 TIP If a number larger than 4096 or larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in B25 0 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed Exceeding the number of elements in the data file would cause the file boundary to be crossed These are only some of the examples that can be used others include e File and Element Indirection N N10 0 N25 0 Input Slot Indirection I1 N7 0 0 Each group of instructions may or may not allow indirection Please review the compatibility table for each instruction to determine which elements within an instruction support indirection IMPORTANT You must exercise extreme care when using indirect addressing Always be aware of the possibility of crossing file boundaries or pointing to data that was not intended to be used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Programming Instructions Overview 87 Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing In this section an indexed addressing example is shown first Then an equivalent indirect addressing exam
252. PM Output Current position is 37 at a speed of 5 RPM Invalid in line indirection Input Current position is N5 1 at a speed of L9 1 RPM Output Current position is N5 1 at a speed of 5 RPM TIP Truncation occurs in the output string if the indirection causes the output to exceed 82 characters The appended characters are always applied to the output control data file The following error codes indicate why the Error bit ER is set in the Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 0 0x00 No error The instruction completed successfully None Required 3 0x03 The transmission cannot be completed because the Check the modem and modem connections CTS signal was lost 5 0x05 While attempting to perform an ASCII transmission a Reconfigure the channel and retry operation conflict with the configured communications protocol was detected 7 0x07 The instruction cannot be executed because the Reconfigure the channel and retry operation communications channel has been shut down via the channel configuration menu 8 0x08 The instruction cannot be executed because another Resend the transmission ASCII transmission is already in progress 9 0x09 Type of ASCII communications operation requested is Reconfigure the channel and retry operation not supported by the current channel configuration 10 0x0A The unload bit UL is set stopping instruction None required execution
253. R B e EA EH E E Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always reset 0 1 Overflow set if the Gray code input is negative otherwise is reset 0 2 Zero Bit set if the destination is zero otherwise reset 0 3 Sign Bit always reset 5 0 Overflow Trap set if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise reset Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 12 Logical Instructions The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on individual wotds Instruction Used To Page AND Bit Wise AND Perform an AND operation 213 OR Logical OR Perform an inclusive OR operation 214 XOR Exclusive OR Perform an Exclusive Or operation 215 NOT Logical NOT Perform a NOT operation 216 Using Logical When using logical instructions observe the following Instructions e Source and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words ot all long wotds IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions e Source A and Source B can be a constant ot an address but both cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 212 Logical Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Logical I
254. RSLogix 500 programming software For each data file you want protected select the Static protection in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration To access this screen right mouse click on the desired data file Data File Properties x General File 7 Type N Name INTEGER Desc Elements e Last B5 Attributes fa Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global fecal Tires uz m Pratection Memory Module Download Cancel Apply Help MicroLogix controllers have a built in security system based on numeric passwords Controller passwords consist of up to 10 digits 0 9 Each controller program may contain two passwords the Password and the Master Password Passwords restrict access to the controller The Master Password takes precedence over the Password The idea is that all controllers in a project would have different Passwords but the same Master Password allowing access to all controllers for supervisory or maintenance purposes You can establish change or delete a password by using the Controller Properties dialog box It is not necessary to use passwords but if used a master password is ignored unless a password is also used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 46 Controller Memory and File Types Clearing the Controller Memory Controller Properties x General Compiler Passwords Controller Communication
255. Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller Communication Command Target Device r Control Bits 3 PLCS Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N70 Size in Elements to Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Channel 0 Error ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Timeout n Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address N7 50 Message Enabled ENT 0 Local Node Addr dec 2 octal 2 Local 7 Remote Local j Error Error Code Hex 0 Description No errors In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target device s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types o 0 B N L lt gt read write 0 1 S B NL T lt gt read write T C lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R sT lt gt read write ST 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN
256. S Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the STI Timed Interrupt Enable TIE bit when the controller enters any executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 272 Using Interrupts Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File STI Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the STI sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set the user should look at the error code in parameter STI 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts SPM Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access SPM Set Point STEO SPM word INT 0 to control read write Msec 65 535 When the controller transitions to an executing mode the SPM set point in milliseconds value
257. S GEQ and LEQ instructions Instruction Type input Execution Time for the MEQ Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is MicroLogix 1100 word long word 36 65 us 0 9 us The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value source is equal to a second value compare through a mask The source and the compare ate logically ANDed with the mask Then these results are compared to each other If the resulting values are equal the rung state is true If the resulting values are not equal the rung state 1s false Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Compare Instructions 183 For example Source Compare 1 1 11 11 10 1 10 10 JO JO JO 1 1 10 10 11 11 11 11 1 1 11 11 10 JO JO JO 0 10 0 J0 Mask Mask 1 1 10 0 11 12111 JO JO JO JO 1 1 1 1 JO JO 1 12 1 1 1 1 JO JO JO jo 1 1 Intermediate Result Intermediate Result 1 0O 10 11 10 f1 J0 JO JO O fO JO fO JO JO 1 11 JO JO 11 11 41 11 JO JO JO JO JO JO JO 10 Com parison of the Intermediate Results not equal The source mask and compare values must all be of the same data size either word or long word The data ranges for mask and compare are e 32 768 to 32 767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 to FFFF FFFE Addressing
258. S or If you are not using setpoint scaling and If you are not using setpoint scaling then change 0 gt setpoint SP gt 16383 the setpoint SP to 0 SP 16383 then during the initial execution of the PID loop this error occurs and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set However during subsequent execution of the PID loop if an invalid loop setpoint is entered the PID loop continues to execute using the old setpoint and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set 41H Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected 1 Deadband lt 0 or 1 Deadband lt 0 or Change deadband to Change deadband to 0 lt deadband lt 0 deadband 16383 2 Deadband gt 3 Deadband 16383 eee gt MaxS MinS MaxS MinS lt 16383 51H 1 Output high limit lt 0 or Change output high limit to 0 lt output high limit lt 100 2 Output high limit gt 100 52H 1 Output low limit lt 0 or Change output low limit to 0 lt output low limit lt output high limit lt 100 2 Output low limit gt 100 53H Output low limit gt output high limit Change output low limit to 0 lt output low limit lt output high limit lt 100 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Analog l 0 Scaling Process Control Instruction 299 To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters In the MicroLogix 1100 t
259. SP PV causes the control variable to decrease when the process variable is greater than the setpoint PV in Deadband DB Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DB PVin Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit 0 or 1 status read write This bit 1s set 1 when the process variable is within the zero crossing deadband range Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 294 Process Control Instruction PLC 5 Gain Range RG Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit Oor1 control read write When set 1 the reset TI and gain range enhancement bit RG causes the reset minute repeat value and the gain multiplier KC to be divided by a factor of 10 That means a reset multiplier of 0 01 and a gain multiplier of 0 01 When clear 0 this bit allows the reset minutes repeat value and the gain multiplier value to be evaluated with a reset multiplier of 0 1 and a gain multiplier of 0 1 Example with the RG bit set The reset term TT of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 01 minutes repeat 0 6 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 01 and applied to the PID algorithm Example with the RG bit clear The reset term TT of 1 indicates that the integral va
260. Sequencer Load SOL 19 27 6 18 2 0 19 65 6 18 Sequencer Output S00 23 78 6 21 2 0 24 40 6 21 Square Root SOR 109 21 0 87 1 4 109 77 0 87 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 27 18 0 84 0 8 None None None Subtract SUB 13 31 0 84 2 0 13 46 0 84 Suspend SUS None None None None None None Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 460 MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1100 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory True False Usage in True False Usage in Words Words Service Communications SVC channel 0 94 1 0 87 0 8 None None None S m 1 87 0 us both 203 1 us Swap SWP 9 15 0 43 0 87 1 4 None None None word Temporary End TND 1 00 0 78 0 2 None None None Convert to BCD TOD 29 31 0 87 1 4 None None None Off Delay Timer TOF 2 68 2 68 DN 1 10 8 None None None 4 03 DN 0 On Delay Timer TON 2 71 DN 1 12 59 0 8 None None None 4 06 DN 0 User Interrupt Disable UID 9 28 0 87 0 8 None None None User Interrupt Enable UIE 9 28 0 87 0 8 None None None User Interrupt Flush UIF 23 78 0 87 0 8 None None None Examine if Closed XIC 1 5 1 45 0 8 None None None Examine if Open XIO 1 5 1 50 0 8 None None None Exclusive Or XOR 13 09 0 87 2 0 13 31 0 87 Start Of Rung SOR 1 10 1 10 0 6 None Non
261. Series A controller does not support 40kHz PTO and PWM Only MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller supports 40kHz PTO and PWM with any version of RSLogix500 Refer to Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller for more information Execution Time for the PWM Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1100 When Rung Is True False 51 9 us 33 68 us The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form The PWM profile has two primary components Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 150 Using High Speed Outputs Frequency to be generated e Duty Cycle interval The PWM instruction along with the HSC and PTO functions are different than all other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these instructions The interface to the PWM sub system is accomplished by scanning a PWM instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PWM instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PWM instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PWM instruction is on is solved true the PWM is started 2 A waveform at the specified frequency is produced 3 The RUN phase is active A waveform at the specified frequency with the specified duty cycle 1s output 4 The rung tha
262. String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 328 ASCII Instructions AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AHL Ascii Handshake Lines Channel AND Mask 0002h OR Mask 0000h Control R6 2 Channel Status 0000h Error 0 lt lt EN gt e Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Number value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value greater than the length of the Source string The Destination string is not changed in any of the above error conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word 8 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AHL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100 14 56 us 15 06 us The AHL instruction is used to set or reset the RS 232 Request to Send RTS handshake control line for a modem The controller uses the two masks to determine whether to set or reset the RTS control line ot leave it unchanged The channel configuration must be set to ASCII TIP Make sure the automatic modem control used by the port does not conflict with this instruction Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 e AND Mask is the mask used to reset the
263. Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault Run False Last State REM Suspend or Suspend Suspend Any Mode except REM Suspend or Suspend Run Run Don t Care Run True Don t Care Don t Care Run w Fault 1 Run w Fault is a fault condition just as if the controller were in the Program w Fault mode outputs are reset and the controller program is not being executed However the controller enters Run mode as soon as the Major Error Halted flag is cleared See also MB Mode Behavior on page 56 Major Error Halted Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 13 binary Oor1 status read write The controller sets 1 this bit when a major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition and word S 6 contains the Fault Code that can be used to diagnose the condition Any time bit S 1 13 is set the controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 e turns all outputs off and flashes the FAULT LED or enters the User Fault Routine allowing the control program to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the User Fault Routine is able to clear S 1 13 and the fault condition the controller continues to execute the control program If the fault cannot be cleared the outputs are cleared and the controller exits its executing mode and the FAULT LED flashes System Status File 473 cont
264. TP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1m8 1500 SNMP Server Enable jv SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout x 1mS 3000 HTTP Server Enable Inactivity Timeout x 30 w Auto Negotiate Port Setting 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex X Contact Location 7 t lt XKMhCtCSOW The following is the message setup screen for the MicroLogix 1100 controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 403 MSG MG10 0 1 Elements ini x MultiHop This Controller Control Bits Channel T Integral Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command 500CPU Read Break Connection BK Data Table Address N70 Awaiting Execution EW Size in Elements L Error ER Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 33 Message Transmitting ST Data Table Address N7 0 Message Enabled EN Local Remote Remote MultiHop Routing Information File RD RI20 0 Error Remote Station Address eran Remote Bridge Link ID DEAS No errors Description A MSG route must be configured in the MultiHop tab of the MSG Setup Screen Click on the MultiHop tab MSG MG10 0 1 Elements 5 x Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port_ To Address Type To Address This MicroLogix Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device st UU
265. This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using Interrupts 271 STI User Interrupt Pending UIP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit STI Timed Interrupt Enabled TIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STEO TIE binary bit control read write The TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the timed interrupt mechanism When set 1 timing is enabled when clear 0 timing 1s disabled If this bit is cleared disabled while the timer is running the accumulated value is cleared 0 If the bit is then set 1 timing starts This bit 1s controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle STI Auto Start A
266. Transistor DC output capable of high speed operation FIFO First In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file file A collection of data or logic organized into groups full duplex A mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A mode of communication where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage device in a personal computer high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a wotd housekeeping The portion of the scan when the controller performs internal checks and setvices communications input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies an electrical signal to the controller input scan The controller reads all input devices connected to the input terminals Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 597 inrush current The temporary surge of current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of instructions available within a controller I O Input and Output jump Changes the normal sequence of program execution In ladder
267. UB MUL DIV NEG and SCP 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Instructions 189 After a math instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 1 Overflow sets when the result of a math instruction does not fit into the destination otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets 2 14 Math Overflow examines the state of this bit to determine the value of the Selected result when an overflow occurs S 5 0 Overflow Trap sets if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise resets 1 Control bits Overflow Trap Bit S 5 0 Minot error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement ot a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occuts you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction with address 5 0 in your program The
268. Z Ik Ib G la E JS S e ja j Jf la SIS ja Structure Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 178 Timer and Counter Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 9 Compare Instructions Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data Instruction Used To Page EQU Equal Test whether two values are equal 181 NEQ Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a 181 second value LES Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second 181 value LEQ Less Than or Equal To Test whether one value is less than or equal 182 to a second value lt GRT Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than a 181 second value gt GEO Greater Than or Equal To Test whether one value is greater than or 182 equal to a second value 2 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal Test portions of two values to see whether 182 they are equal LIM Limit Test Test whether one value is within the range of 184 two other values Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 180 Compare Instructions Using the Compare Most of the compare instructions use two parameters Source A and Instructions Source B MEQ and LIM have an additional parameter and are described later in this chapter Both sources cannot be immediate values The valid
269. a Logging functions Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RCP Instruction Controller Operation When Rung Is MicroLogix 1100 True False Load 23 7 us 1 7 us word 0 8 us 3 3 us long word or floating point Store 25 2 us 2 4 us word 0 8 us 4 4 us long word or floating point The RCP file allows you to save custom lists of data associated with a recipe Using these files along with the RCP instruction lets you transfer a data set between the recipe database and a set of user specified locations in the controller file system The recipe data is stored in Data Log Queue memory This section contains the following topics Recipe File and Programming Example on page 428 Example Queue 0 on page 434 Example Queue 5 on page 435 e Retrieval Tools on page 442 e Information for Creating Your Own Application on page 443 The following reasons may help you choose which type of memory to use All the recipe data is stored into the controller s memory module Because the recipe data is stored in Data Log Queue memory it does not consume user program space e If you are not using the data logging function it allows you more memoty up to 64K bytes for RCP files You can use the Data Log Queue for data logging and recipe data but the total cannot exceed 128K bytes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 428 Recipe and Data Logging See step 2 Create a RCP File
270. a total of 1536 Modbus Holding registers TIP A request to access a group of holding registers that span across two files is permitted Note that the maximum number of registers in a command does not allow for more than two files to be accessed during a single Modbus command Modbus RTU Master Configuration Select the Modbus RTU Master from the Channel Configuration menu as shown below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 526 Protocol Configuration Channel Configuration 7 xi Driver Modbus ATU Master Y Baud 19200 F Parity NONE x Stop Bits fi M Data Bits e 7 Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshak InterChar Timeout x1 ms O ATS Off Delay 20 ms o RTS Send Delay x20 ms o Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms o Cancel Apply Help The Baud defaults to 19200 The Control Line can be configured as No Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on e Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS handshaking No Handshaking 485 Network TIP In order to connect directly to an RS 485 Modbus network use a 1763 NCO01 cable and configure the Control Line setting for No Handshaking 485 network The Protocol Control defaults are No Handshaking e nterChar Timeout 0 e Pre Transmit Delay 0 When the system driver is Modbus RTU Master the following communication port parameters can be changed Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protoc
271. aced into the RUN mode Using the Full ASCII Instruction Set To use the full ASCII instruction set the communication channel must be configured for ASCII protocol as described below See on page 536 for the ASCII parameters that you set via the Channel 0 configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 Using ASCII Instructions with DFI Full Duplex However you can use the AWA and AWT instructions with DF1 Pull Duplex protocol This functionality is provided for backward compatibility with the legacy devices which are configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol to recetve ASCII data from a controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 312 ASCII Instructions String ST Data File When the channel is configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol the AWA and AWT instructions only are valid and can transmit an ASCII string out of the RS 232 port If the RS 232 port 1s configured for any protocol other than DFI Full Duplex and ASCII the AWA and AWT instructions will error out with an error code of 9 DF1 Full Duplex packets take precedence over ASCII strings so if an AWA or AWT instruction is triggered while a DF1 Full Duplex packet is being transmitted the ASCII instruction will error out with an error code of 5 See on page 505 for the DF1 Full Duplex protocol parameters that yo
272. ached condition 1s detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit High Preset Interrupt HPI Description Address Data Format WSC Modes Type User Program Access HPI High HSC 0 HPI bi Preset Interrupt t 0to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The HPI High Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator teaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 102 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Reached HPR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPR High HSC 0 HPR bi Preset Reached t 2to7 status read only
273. address in function file to see online values RTC Day of Week Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 53 word 0 to 6 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DOW SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 488 System Status File OS Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 57 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the Operating System in the controller 0S Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 58 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller OS FRN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 59 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the FRN of the Operating System in the controller Processor Catalog Number Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 60 ASCII A to ZZ statu
274. address in the processor which is to return data Valid file types are S B T C R N L and ST For a Write this is the address in the processor which receives data Valid file types are O S B T C R N L RTC and st Data Table Offset This is the word offset value in the common interface file byte offset for PLC device in the target processor which is to send the data 485CIF message types MB Data Address Specifies the Modbus address in the target device Valid range is from 1 to 65 536 Local Slave Node Specifies the node number of the device that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 to 31 Address for DH 485 protocol 0 to 254 for DF1 protocol 0 to 63 for DeviceNet or 0 to 247 for Modbus Local Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote Modbus messages are local only 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series A FRN3 485CIF write ST to 485CIF only 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only 3 MicroLogix 1100 Series B FRN 4 or later Example 1 Local Read from a 500CPU Message Instruction Setup za MSG Rung 234 MG11 0 This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO Data Table Address N7 Size in Elements 10 Awaiting Execution Ew Channel g Error ERE Message done DM Target Device Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting 5T
275. age If the master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave the master immediately re broadcasts the message so that it can be received by the intended slave This slave to slave transfer is a built in function of the master device and can also be used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 Half Duplex link Standard Mode Channel Configuration Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 511 General Channel 0 General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Node Address Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master x Mesa salB TES f decimal 1 decimal Baud 1200 Baud 1200 E Parity NONE Parity NONE E Polling Ranges Polling Ranges Priority High o Normal High 0 Normal Poll Fr Priority High o Normal High f0 Normal Poll m Priority Low 255 Normal Low 255 Bio Ss Priority Low 255 Normal Low 255 pope Protocol Control Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier x ACK Timeout x20 ms so Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier x ACK Timeout x20 ms so Error Detection CRC hs RTS Off Delay x20 ms fo Error Detection CRC ATS Off Delay x20 ms 0 Polling Mode Std single msg per scan RTS Send Delay 20 ms o Polling Mode Std multiple msgs per scan RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 IV Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries 5 I Duplicate Packet Detect
276. agram 20 336 ASCII write instruction 20 319 ASCII write with append instruction 20 317 ASR instruction 20 334 AWA and AWT timing diagram 20 336 AWA instruction 20 317 AWT instruction 20 319 base hardware information file 3 56 battery operation 3 52 battery low status bit B 478 baud rate G 593 baud rate status B 482 BHI Function File 3 56 bit G 593 bit instructions 7 159 bit shift left instruction 14 226 bit shift right instruction 14 228 bit wise AND instruction 12 213 block diagrams G 593 Boolean operators G 593 branch 6 594 BSL instruction 14 226 BSR instruction 14 228 C carry flag B 467 catalog number status B 488 channel 0 communications status B 483 CSO communications status file 3 57 channel configuration DF1 full duplex parameters D 505 DF1 half duplex parameters D 512 D 516 DF1 radio modem parameters D 519 DH485 parameters D 503 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 606 Modbus RTU Master parameters D 527 Modbus RTU Slave parameters D 528 clear instruction 10 194 clearing controller faults C 491 controller memory 2 46 clock free running B 476 CLR instruction 10 194 common techniques used in this manual P 13 communication instructions 21 341 communication protocols DF1 full duplex D 505 DF1 half duplex D 506 DH485 D 502 Modbus Slave RTU D 524 communication scan G 594 communications active status bit B 484 channel 0 status B 483 mode selection status bit B 484 status file 3 57 3 71 com
277. alid value is 100 to 109 for SMTP messaging Basically Data Table Offset in MSG configuration setup screen is used to direct the internal virtual offsets You can configure the listed parameter setting by sending a String File Data to these offsets Data Table Offset Addressing for SMTP messaging Data Affect to Description Comments Table Offset 100 Send email to SMTP TO address 0 Used to trigger the SMTP message configured in SMTP configuration File 101 Send email to SMTP TO address 1 Used to trigger the SMTP message configured in SMTP configuration File 102 Send email to SMTP TO address 2 Used to trigger the SMTP message configured in SMTP configuration File Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 424 Communications Instructions to he 108 Send email to SMTP TO address 8 Used to trigger the SMTP message configured in SMTP configuration File 109 Send email to SMTP TO address 9 Used to trigger the SMTP message configured in SMTP configuration File Local Remote Local Remote has no impact on the operation e MultiHop Cannot edit Routing Information File Routing Information File must be Routing Information File Break Connection BK If this bit is cleared for SMTP messaging the connection with the SMTP Server is not closed after the SMTP message is sent out to the SMTP Server If this bit is set the connection is closed IP Address of MultiHop
278. ameter 0x10 OxOF 1 Read Analog Input OxOE Ox0A 3 Write Analog Output 0x10 0x0B 3 Generic Get Attribute OxOE Single Generic Set Attribute 0x10 Single Generic Get Member 0x18 Generic Set Member 0x19 Reset Identity Object 0x05 0x01 N A Note 1 Everywhere there is a question mark this box is filled in by the user Note 2 Everywhere there is a value that box also has user edits disabled Note 3 All other fields not mentioned here are unaffected by the Service Type In this example a Get Attribute Single message reads a single attribute value The Class Code OxF5 indicates TCP IP Interface Object The TCP IP Interface Object provides an attribute that identifies the link specific object for the associated physical communications interface Each device shall support exactly one instance of the TCP IP Interface Object for each TCP IP capable communications interface on the module A request to access instance 1 of the TCP IP Interface Object shall always refer to the instance associated with the interface over which the request was received The attribute ID 5 identifies TCP IP network interface configuration parameters consist of IP address network mask gateway address DNS name The controller reads 30 elements for a single attribute value from the ControlLogix controller The 30 bytes are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 C
279. an be configured as the system mode driver for Channel 0 in MicroLogix 1100 Channel configuration appears as follows Figure shows Channel 0 configuration DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1100 Channel Configuration x General Channel 0 Channel 1 l Driver DF1 Radio Modem c besse fi decimal Baud 19200 Parity NONE Store and Forward File t JO r Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking hd Error Detection CRC Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 OK Cancel Apply Help When the system driver is DF1 Radio Modem the following parameters can be changed for Channel 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration Parameters 519 Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 0 Driver DF1 Radio Modem Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Store and Forward Store and Forward allows messages between two out of radio range nodes to be routed through 0 File Number one or more in radio range nodes This is the data table file number used for the Store amp Forward Table Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 to 65535 can be
280. an be used as shown in the following table S00 Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 S i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level D Mode P 3 Parameter E 2 E e s e c Tix a CFE Bisils k e g amp v jo j2 j l z 2 A a a 9 JE e qug S O j V M e Z u t a Ez 2 E Ez ui FA z 6 e a E a E 2 ta z 3 File e e e e e Mas 2 e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e Control 3 z p Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies 3 Control file only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO SQL Sequencer Load SQL Sequencer Load I EN 5 File N7 0 Source 0 0 lt DN gt Control R6 0 Length 1 Position 0 lt PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS LCD and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SOL Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1100 Data Size When Rung Is True False word 19 27 us 6 18 us long word 19 65 us 6 18 us On a false to true rung transition the SOL instruction loads wotds or long wotds into a sequencer file at each step of a
281. apability If the check box is unchecked communication throughput and scan time will increase When Communications Servicing Selection is checked at the next execution of a Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing whichever occurs first commands replies are processed as follows One incoming channel 0 or channel 1 command One incoming channel 0 or channel 1 message reply One outgoing channel 0 or channel 1 message on the overflow queue When the Communications Servicing Selection bit is unchecked at the next execution of a Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing whichever occurs first commands replies are processed as follows One incoming channel 0 or channel 1 command conditional If the Message Servicing Selection is clear not checked first all incoming channel 0 or channel 1 message replies then all outgoing channel 0 or channel 1 messages on the overflow queue If the Message Servicing Selection is set checked First the incoming channel 0 or channel 1 message reply then one outgoing channel 0 or channel 1 message on the overflow queue e All remaining incoming channel 0 or channel 1 commands Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 360 Communications Instructions MSG Instruction Ladder Logic Message Servicing Selection Use this chec
282. aracters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length LEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length LEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length LEN if the appended characters or inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length LEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters plus the number of append characters this number could be 82 83 or 84 depending on how many append characters are used Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error code desctiptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AWA Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles i i Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level P E Parameter E S g T E c i S lw 7 gk S E Ris h J c e 4 a jo l jo l _ l S la a v E e 5 F o L lv la 2 z 5 l S le a E 2 E Bala E82 S ja E l EEE Channel Source e e Control 1
283. as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 28 SeeActive Node Table Block on page 69 for more information Math Register Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 13 word 32 768 to status read write 132 767 low byte 114 word 32 768 to status read write 432 767 high byte These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL DIV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV FRD or TOD instruction is executed in the uset program Node Address Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 15 low byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 0 through CSx 0 5 7 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 482 System Status File Baud Rate Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 15 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from
284. ask Compare for Equal i222 recce rri ee Et xm 182 LIM imit Test EMT 184 Chapter 10 Math Instructions Using the Math Instructions i5 sois ceteebe o E se Cus te Eu 188 Updates to Math Status Bits suse kr o Rx ha e Rye 189 Using the Floating Point F Data File co Pera Rr eh 190 ADD Add SU Bu SUDI AE n a qa eir inae ka aa ate Sa M TR Reed mite 193 MUL Multiply DIV 2 Divides Lir e Pos cuin bep raped da A e 194 INE GS Nonio La cades t Mute Me upset s i eA 194 CLR Cleat aus taies d b RON HE e wr Se edd 194 ABS wd bsolute Value soror o ERE EPC ES ae e HEIN nee ar Reet 195 DOLE SCAG n eis ate ERR ee pes e t A eta ink g 196 SCP Scale with Parameters oed tet esr delet C A oh e os 197 SOK Square ROO cete Cadets etr eere b Ee stets 199 Chapter 11 Conversion Instructions Using Decode and Encode Instructions i sac dec be es 201 DED Decode 4 to 1 0f 16 ee eie so bere de ote are e ea cg 202 ENC Encode I OE DO tof D Cis Soy awed Vv t CROCI FE Ram AS Ice deg 203 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 204 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 208 GOD Gray COG vibe pt sala NALE eR EN Ne red 210 Chapter 12 Logical Instructions Using Logical Instructions ws fie sis d datei ee adeo de genet 211 Updates to Math Status Bits a9 xo on OLET Ee URS Para dete 212 AND BueWise NND o ouais toe ee Sends tape oto deca due 213 OR Looical OR eeii sta x ve EN ED a coe ace de ORE ORA 214 ROR Ezcusive OR
285. ata Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level 7 E g e T Parameter z E e l Dp S ec amp fx E LSFTPSSIEE fe Ble c o S la jo 9 jo l E ja o 1M JE LV pS le le le S m je Z ja 5h a e 2 E D ui Ei S 6 e a E s la S la Channel AND Mask e e OR Mask e e Control e 1 The Control data file is the only valid ARD ASCII Read ile type for the Control Element Instruction Operation This instruction executes on either a false or true rung However a false to true rung transition is required to set the EN bit to repeat the instruction Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ARD Instruction When Instruction Is True 13 96 us character False 14 25 us Characters ARD ASCII Read I CEN gt Channel 0 Controller Dest ST10 4 lt DN gt Control R6 3 String Length 10 lt CER gt MicroLogix 1100 Characters Read 0 lt Error 0 lt Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 330 ASCII Instructions Use the ARD instruction to tead characters from the buffer and store them in a string To repeat the operation the rung must go from false to true Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 Destination is
286. ata file is assigned to any operands except the Display With Input operand the number converted to signed range string automatically If the value is less than zero minus sign is attached to the head of converted string Long data file L is limited to the Line 4 Source A operand only If you need to get long range data 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 from the keypad use the L data file The largest string size of each line is 12 characters If there are more than 12 characters in the string file the remaining characters except the first twelve are ignored Special characters such as carriage return and new line ate invalid and have no effect on the next line Getting Value with Keypad Your application program can get value from user s keypad inputs if Display With Input bit is set 1 in LCD instructions User inputs can be obtained with arrow ESC and OK keys In this case Line 4 is used for Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 LCD Information 455 user input L4 Source A is used to specify the target file or element to store user input and the L4 Source B is not used Where the data value range for different file types are as follows Integer file word 32 768 to 32 767 e Bit file 0 or 1 Long file double word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When rung conditions go true the LCD instruction displays Line 2 and Line 3 strings and positions the cursor at Line 4 Then the user can input a de
287. ate For discrete inputs you can force an input on or off When an input is forced it no longer reflects the state of the physical input or the input LCD indicator For embedded inputs the controller reacts as if the force 1s applied to the physical input terminal TIP When an input is forced it has no effect on the input device connected to the controller Output Forcing When an output is forced the controller overrides the status of the control program and sets the output to the user defined state Discrete outputs can be forced on or off The value in the output file is unaffected by the force It maintains the state determined by the logic in the control program Howevet the state of the physical output and the output LCD indicator will be set to the forced state TIP If you force an output controlled by an executing PTO or PWM function an instruction error is generated The MicroLogix 1100 controllers allow users to configure groups of DC inputs for high speed or normal operation Users can configure each input group s response time A configurable filter determines how long the input signal must be on or off before the controller recognizes the signal The higher the value the longer it takes for the input state to be recognized by the controller Higher values provide more filtering and are used in electrically noisy environments Lower values provide less filtering and are used to detect fa
288. ate remains true Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 EQU Equal NEO Not Equal EQU Equal Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt NEQ Not Equal Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt GRT Greater Than LES Less Than GRT Greater Than A gt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Source A Source B N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type input Execution Time for the EQU and NEQ Instructions Controller MicroLogix 11 Compare Instructions 181 Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False 00 EQU word 8 8 us 0 8 us long word 9 09 us 0 87 us NEO word 8 78 us 0 9 us long word 9 128 us 0 9 us The EQU instruction is used to test whether one value is equal to a second value The NEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is not equal to a second value EQU and NEO Instruction Operation LES Less Than A B L N7 Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State FOU A B true A B false NEO A B false A B true Instruction Type input Execution Time for the GRT and LES Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 8 96 us 0 87 us long word 9 09 us 0 87 us The GRT instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than a second value The LES instruction is used to test whethe
289. ation DH 485 Communication The information in this section describes the DH 485 network functions Protocol netwotk architecture and performance characteristics It also helps you plan and operate the controller on a DH 485 netwotk DH 485 Network Description The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is vot a protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 netwotk offers interconnection of 32 devices e multi master capability token passing access control the ability to add ot remove nodes without disrupting the network maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 netwotk DH 485 Token Rotation A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a
290. ator character Accessing the Retrieval You can use a dedicated retrieval tool or create your own application File Retrieval Tools There are a number of retrieval tools designed for use with Palm OS Windows CE Windows 9x and Windows NT You can download these free tools from our web site Visit http www ab com micrologix Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Recipe and Data Logging 443 Information for Creating Your Own Application Controller Receives Communications Packet Command Structure Se No Field Function Description DST Destination Node SRC Source Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code Set to zero 0 TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes FNC Function Code Byte Size Number of bytes to be read Formatted string length see equation below File Number Always set to zero 0 File Type Must be A5 hex Element Number Queue number Determines the queue to be read 0 to 255 Sub Element Number Always set to zero 0 Equation Record Field 1 Record Field 2 Record Field 3 Record Field 7 Formatted String Length Record Field Sizes Data Type Maximum Size Word 7 bytes characters Long Word 12 bytes characters Date Field 11 bytes characters Time Field 9 bytes characters TIP The formatted string length cannot exceed 80 bytes in length TIP The last byte will be a zero value representing the terminator chara
291. ature for the outbound connections when the controller mode is changed When the controller mode is changed from Executing to Non executing the outbound CIP3 connection is closed as well as TCP IP connection session e Supports the unconnected Ethernet IP protocol for the inbound connection MicroLogix 1100 Firmware Changes in OS Series BFRN4 589 e Supports IP conflict detection mechanism MicroLogix 1100 checks to see if IP Address is conflicted on the same local network every 2 minutes periodically If IP confliction is detected MicroLogix 1100 notifies the MAC address of the conflicted node via LCD display Although user changes to a conflicted IP Address in the Ethernet Channel Configuration this IP Address is configured successfully Once IP conflict message is shown up via LCD display this message is not cleared except two cases below Case I Reconnect Ethernet Cable Case II Re configure with a unique IP address on the network e Supports SMTP feature by sending the 485CIF write messaging to a local IP address with ST file type e Supports MSG break bit feature MSG break bit can be set to MG file for Ethernet or SMTP messages If this bit 1s set basically CIP3 and socket connection is closed after the complete transmission of the message If this feature is used the restriction of the outbound connection number 16 for the outbound connection can be removed But Ethernet performance could be degraded Refer t
292. be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 HR SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 487 RTC Minutes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S4 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MIN SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Seconds Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 9 42 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 SEC SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor
293. bilities In this example node 12 on DH 485 is a MicroLogix 1100 The MicroLogix 1100 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH netwotk TIP The MicroLogix 1000 can respond to remote message requests but it cannot initiate them TIP The MicroLogix 1100 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 in this example Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 389 This functionality is also available on Ethernet by replacing the SLC 5 04 at DH 485 node 17 with an SLC 5 05 processor DH 485 and DH Networks PanelView NN O00 0 Bp SLC 5 04 m Ww PanelView 550 DH 485 Network AIC AlC Node 17 ESESESEHEHESES e AIC Node 12 O Ze H MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1100 SLC 5 04 DH Network Node 19 Node 51 EBESEHERBEBIESES g SLC 5 04 PLC 5 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 390 Communications Instructions DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks The illustration below shows a DeviceNet network using DeviceNet Interfaces 1761 NET DNTI connected to an Ethernet network using an SLC 5 05 In this configuration controllers on the DeviceNet network can reply to
294. bit indicates the speed of the link layer driver operating at Ethernet port e0 10 Mbps e 1 100 Mbps Reserved Always zero Duplex Mode This bit indicates the duplex mode of the Ethernet controller e 0 Half Duplex e 1 Full Duplex Auto Negotiate Status This bit is set 1 when the Auto Negotiation function is enabled 5to7 Reserved Always zero BOOTP Valid Flag Default 0 False This bit is set 1 when the appropriate BOOTP response has been received If BOOTP Enable Flag in Ethernet Port Communications Configuration File is set 1 Yes and this flag is cleared 0 False then network related information is invalid DHCP Valid Flag Default 0 False This bit is set 1 when the appropriate DHCP response has been received If DHCP Enable Flag in Ethernet Port Communications Configuration File is set 1 Yes and this flag is cleared 0 False then network related information is invalid BOOTP Status Flag This bit is set 1 if BOOTP is selected as configuration method DHCP Status Flag This bit is set 1 if DHCP is selected as configuration method Advertise 100 MB Full Duplex Flag This bit indicates advertisement status if Auto negotiate enabled e0 100 MB Full Duplex was not advertised during auto negotiation e 1 100 MB Full Duplex was advertised during auto negotiation Advertise 100 MB Half Duplex Flag This bit indicates advertisement status if Auto negotiate enabled
295. blication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 546 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17447 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC General Information The MicroLogix 1100 has one 20Khz high speed counter The counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from all other inputs on the unit The HSC can utilize inputs 0 through 3 Input device connection depends on the counter mode selected The MicroLogix 1100 uses a 32 bit signed integer for the HSC this allows for a count range of 2 147 483 647 Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 and select the HSC tab then select the next to HSC 0 See Below HSC PTO PWM STI Jel RTC LCD MMI E SCU E P PFN Program File Number ER Error Code UIX User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable HUIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled LAS Auto Start ED Error Detected CE Counting Enabled SP Set Parameters LPM Low Preset Mask I HPM High Preset Mask HFM LInderilnw Mask i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Enter the following parameters for the Minimum Configuration required for the HSC to count pulses Note There is no additional ladder logic required to enable the High Speed Counter In other words there is no HSC instruction needed for the ladder logic program HSC 0 PFN Program File Number defines which subroutine is executed when the HSC
296. blication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 72 Function Files General Channel Status Block 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller Once the request has been satisfied the bit is cleared 0 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced during end of scan SVC or REF this bit is cleared 0 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue This bit is cleared 0 when the queue is empty 3to5 Reserved Always zero HTTP Server Status This bit is set 1 when the internal web server is enabled The cleared bit 0 means that the internal web server is disabled 7t0 15 Reserved Always zero SMTP Client Status This bit is set 1 when the SMTP client for email is enabled The cleared bit 0 means that the SMTP client is disabled Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 73 General Channel Status Block 5 0 Ethernet Port Link Status This bit is set 1 when the Ethernet link is active Ethernet Port Connection Speed This
297. can Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input 3 mE Latched Status 1l Input File Value 4 ns TIP The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay IMPORTANT The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for falling edge behavior the input file value is normally on off for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 34 1 0 Configuration Configuring Expansion Expansion I O must be configured for use with the controller Configuring expansion I O can be done either manually or automatically 1 0 Using RSLogix 500 Using RSLogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 For manual configuration drag the Compact I O module to the slot For automatic configuration you must have the controller connected online to the computer either directly or over a network Click the Read I O Config button on the I O configuration screen RSLogix 500 will read the existing configuration of the controller s I O Some I O modules support or require configuration To configure a specific module double click on the module an I O configuration screen will open that is specific to the module Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Types This chapter describes controller m
298. cates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last highest bit position Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 229 e Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode P 2a Parameter E 8 g E e S t gx amp ENMENMEM e lz S a E ln le l jo l _ E la i ln a JE le S l S J2 15 o _ lm le le lu hL bl Ee le ES E OG e S 8 8 le la E j la z js la File e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Source e e e e e e e e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI
299. cation Hex 0084 MAX I 0 POWER The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so SUPPLIES EXCEEDED 1 0 power supplies allowed was that it has the correct number of power exceeded supplies 0085 MAX I O MODULES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so EXCEEDED 1 0 modules allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of modules e Cycle power xxg6l EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module could not Non User e Change the baud rate in the user program MODULE BAUD RATE communicate at the baud rate O configuration and ERROR specified in the user program 1 0 e Re compile reload the program and enter configuration the Run mode or e Replace the module e Cycle power xx87 I 0 CONFIGURATION eThe expansion 1 0 configuration in Non User e Either correct the user program 0 MISMATCH the user program did not match configuration to match the actual the actual configuration or configuration or e The expansion l O configuration in e With power off correct the actual 1 0 the user program specified a configuration to match the user program module but one was not found or configuration e The expansion 1 0 module configuration data size for a module was greater than what the module is capable of holding xxag EXPANSION 1 0 The number of input or output image Non User e Correct the user program I O configuration MODULE words configured in the user to
300. cation 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 316 ASCII Instructions ACL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address i 1 Data Files Function Files Mode Address Level Parameter DLS Data Log Immediate Transmit Buffer 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When Cleat Receive Buffer and Clear Transmit Buffer are both set to Yes all Receive and Transmit instructions ARL ARD AWA and AW T are removed from the ASCII queue When instructions are removed from the ASCII queue the following bits are set ER 1 RN 0 EU 0 and ERR OxOE AIC ASCII Integer to Instruction Type output String ue ua Execution Time for the AIC Instruction source yan Controller Data Size When Instruction Is Dest ST14 1 True False long word 157 34 us 0 87 us The AIC instruction converts an integer or long word value source to an ASCII string destination The source can be a constant or an address The source data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AIC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82
301. ce is positive the Destination is 32 767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word If the result is negative the Destination is 32 768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Sources can be constants or an address but both sources cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32 768 to 32 767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Math Instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i Address Data Files Function Files amp Address Level gt Mode 3 Parameter E 8 E e S t amp 2 lt n 3 t5 S 5 E G a E v jv lo jo l _ l B la ln W E Je siis sz o kw la z uw 2 jx a i 2 h 5 la aE s S aE la ls is ia Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source B e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions ADD S
302. cess IS Input Select EII O 1S word INT control read only The IS Input Select parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller Valid inputs are 0 to 7 which correspond to 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 218 Using Interrupts Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 The PID Concept Chapter 19 Process Control Instruction This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1100 Proportional Integral Derivative PID instruction The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature pressure liquid level or flow rate using process loops The PID instruction normally controls a closed loop using inputs from an analog input module and providing an output to an analog output module Fort temperature control you can convert the analog output to a time proportioning on off output for driving a heater or cooling unit An example appears on page 299 The PID instruction can be operated in the timed mode or the Selectable Time Interrupt STI mode In the timed mode the instruction updates its output periodically at a user selectable rate In the STI mode the instruction should be placed in an STI interrupt subroutine It then updates its output every time the STI subroutine is scanned The STI
303. ck N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the FIFO stack The address level of the source must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If FIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 231 e FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty e Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to rece
304. cks the sign bit 15 If bit 15 equals 1 the module sets the output value to OV or 0 mA Scaled for PID Format Bit Position spppeppp RN CR RR RN NN Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 380 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 380 Channel 2 Data 0 to 16 380 Channel 3 Data 0 to 16 380 Word oj oj oj CO ojl o oj CO w N 5D e oO CO CO O oO CO CO Words 0 through 3 contain the analog output data for channels 0 through 3 respectively The module ignores the don t care bits 0 and 1 but checks the sign bit 15 and bit 14 If bit 15 equals 1 the module sets the output value to OV or 0 mA If bit 15 equals zero and bit 14 equals 1 the module sets the output value to 10 5V dc or 21 mA Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 24 1 0 Configuration Specialty 1 0 Configuration 1762 IR4 RTD resistance Module Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs Words 4 and 5 provide sensor channel status feedback The input data file for each configuration is shown below Word 15 7 0 Bit Analog Input Data Channel 0 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Analog Input Data Channel 3 ol BS wy N gt Reserved 0C3 0C2 OC1 OCO Reserved S3 S 2 S1 ISO UO 100 U1 101 U2 02 U3 O3 Reserved The bits are defined as follows Publication 1763 RM001D EN
305. communicates with each slave station Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 508 Protocol Configuration Standard polling mode causes the master station to continuously send one ot more 4 byte poll packets to each slave station address configured by the user in the poll list s in round robin fashion as soon as the end of the polling list is reached the master station immediately goes back and starts polling slave stations from the top of the polling list over again This is independent and asynchronous to any MSG instructions that might be triggered in the master station ladder logic In fact this polling continues even while the master station is in program mode When a MSG instruction 1s triggered while the master station 1s in run mode the master station will transmit the message packet just after it finishes polling the current slave station in the poll list and before it starts polling the next slave station in the poll list no matter where it currently is in the poll list If multiple MSG instructions have been triggered simultaneously at least four message packets may be sent out between two slave station polls Each of these messages will have an opportunity to complete when the master polls the slave station that was addressed in the message packet as it comes to it in the poll list If each of the transmitted message packets is addressed to a different slave station the order of completion will be based upon whic
306. cted 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 266 Using Interrupts UIE User Interrupt Enable UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Types Instruction Type output Execution Time for the UIE Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 9 28 us 0 87 us The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 Reserved Reserved 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero To enable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to enable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UIE instruction For example to enabl
307. cter Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 444 Recipe and Data Logging Reply Structure Controller Responds with Reply RC Ger eNOS e OTT Field Function Description SRC Source Node DST Destination Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes DATA Formatted string Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File If the data integrity check fails the record is deleted and an error is sent with STS of OxFO and ext STS of OxOE For more information on writing a DF1 protocol refer to Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 DF Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual available from www theautomationbookstore com IMPORTANT The data in the retrieval file can only be read once Then it is erased from the processor The following conditions will cause previously logged data to be lost Program download from RSLogix 500 to controller Memory Module transfer to controller except for Memory Module autoload of the same program Full Queue when a queue 1s full new records are recorded over the existing records starting at the beginning of the file You can put the following rung in your ladder program to prevent this from happening B3 1 LEO DLG 4 E Less Than or Eql A lt B Data Log 1 Source A DLSO 5 RST queue number 5 Soure B DLSO 5 FSZ Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 LCD Overview
308. ction File Sub Elements STI Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only The PFN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when the timed interrupt times out A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller it is programmed and operates the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the STI set point STI Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code STI 0 ER word INT status read only Error codes detected by the STI sub system are displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 210 Using Interrupts STI Error Code Recoverable Fault Description Controller Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not Number exist STI User Interrupt Executing UIX Error Code Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Ex
309. ctions A 457 MEQ 9 182 MEQ instruction 9 782 message Quick Start example 550 message MG file 27 347 message errors 21 414 message instruction 21 346 message reply pending status bit B 483 messages local 21 361 local messaging examples 21 373 remote 21 388 messaging remote station to remote station D 509 messaging overview 21 341 minor error bits B 477 MMI function file 3 54 mnemonic G 598 Modbus definition G 598 Modbus RTU protocol D 524 Modbus to MicroLogix memory map D 530 D 531 0 532 D 533 mode behavior 8 472 mode status B 468 modem G 598 modes G 598 monitoring controller operation fault recovery procedure C 492 MOV instruction 13 217 move instructions 13 217 MSG Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 610 Quick Start example 550 MSG instruction 21 346 error codes 21 414 ladder logic 21 360 local messaing examples 21 373 timing diagram 21 356 MUL instruction 10 194 multiply instruction 10 194 MVM instruction 13 219 NEG instruction 10 194 negate instruction 10 194 negative logic G 598 NEQ instruction 9 187 network G 598 node address status B 481 nominal input current G 598 normally closed G 599 normally open G 599 not equal instruction 9 787 NOT instruction 12 216 number systems binary numbers 6 581 hex mask G 585 hexadecimal numbers 6 583 0 OEM lock 2 47 OEM lock status bit B 473 offline G 599 offset G 599 off state leakage current G 599 one shot 6 599 one shot falling instruction
310. d 5 ER Error Bit when set indicates that an error occurred while executing the instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 314 ASCII Instructions NOTE The RN bit is via the Control R file 6 UL Unload Bit when this bit is set by the user the instruction does not execute If the instruction is already not addressable 7 executing operation ceases If this bit is set while an instruction is executing any data already processed is sent to the destination and any remaining data is not processed Setting this bit will not cause instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue This bit is only examined when the instruction is ready to start executing RN Running Bit when set indicates that the queued instruction is executing FD Found Bit when set indicates that the instruction has found the end of line or termination character in the buffer only used by the ABL and ACB instructions Addressing Control Files The addressing scheme for the control data file is shown below Format Explanation R Control file R e s b f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 3 words in length as shown in Subelement delimiter S Subelement number The valid subelement number range is from 0 to 2 You can also specify LEN or POS Bit delimiter Bit number The
311. d because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable EDH PCCC Description Resource is already available condition already exists EEH PCCC Description Command cannot be executed EFH PCCC Description Overflow histogram overflow FOH PCCC Description No access F1H Local processor detects illegal target file type F2H PCCC Description Invalid parameter invalid data in search or command block F3H PCCC Description Address reference exists to deleted area FAH PCCC Description Command execution failure for unknown reason PLC 3 histogram overflow F5H PCCC Description Data conversion error Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 416 Communications Instructions Error Code Description of Error Condition F6H PCCC Description The scanner is not able to communicate with a 1771 rack adapter This could be due to the scanner not scanning the selected adapter not being scanned the adapter not responding or an invalid request of a DCM BT block transfer F7H PCCC Description The adapter is not able to communicate with a module F8H PCCC Description The 1771 module response was not valid size checksum etc F9H PCCC Description Duplicated Label FAH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access FBH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files
312. dbus RTU Slave Messages Sent Bo Messages Received This Slave 0 Messages Received n Link Layer EnorCount no Link Layer Eror Code 0 Modem Lines RTS EJES Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Data Link Layer Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 7 8 Format Code always 9 9 CTS RTS Reserved Reserved co n c to 15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Reserved Total Message Packets Received Link Layer Error Count Link Layer Error Code a a N a N a on AI wi NI 1 to22 Reserved Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 67 Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer Word Bit Description 52 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 ERR 1 Illegal Function 56 Last Device Reporting ERR 1 57 ERR 2 Illegal Data Address 58 Last Device Reporting ERR 2 59 ERR 3 Illegal Data Value 60 Last Device Reporting ERR 3 61 ERR 4 Slave Device Failure 62 ERR 5 Acknowledge 63 ERR 6 Slave Device Busy 64 ERR 7 Negative Acknowledgement 65 ERR 8 Memory Parity Error 66 Non Standard Response 67 Last Device Reporting ERR 4 to ERR 8 or Non Standard Response 68 and 69
313. dder program The above example uses the DF1 Full Duplex protocol This is a point to point or One Device to One Device protocol using this protocol no other devices can be connected To create a network of multiple processors or devices use the DH485 protocol and 1761 NET AIC devices Note This example was written using a ML1100 communicating to a ML1000 however any DF1 or DH485 device could have been substituted for the ML1000 i e MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix1500 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 PLC 5 Bar Code Scanners etc What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the processor to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspend task at the point where it suspended Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 554 Knowledgebase Quick Starts STI Definition The STI provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example A Block of logic that needs to be scanned mote often then the rest of the ladder program Getting Started Locate the Function Files undet Controller ia RSLOGIX 500 v7 00 00 ot later and select the STI tab See Below Function Files L PFN Program H AS Auto Start ER Error Code H UIX User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User
314. ddress bits 7 to 0 Starting Element bits 15 to 8 File Number Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 Channel 1 only Refer to the Routing Information File on page 383 Communications Instructions 349 2 User access refers to user program access MSG File word or bit used as an operand for an instruction in a ladder program or access via Comms while in any mode other than download via Programming Software or Memory Module The Target file information contained in Sub Elements 12 through 15 of the MSG File Element depend upon the message type as shown in the tables below Message File Target Location Information Target Device 485 CIF Sub Name Description Paramete Size User Element r Program Access 12 Reserved Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number M Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Offset in elements into CIF Y Word read write 15 Reserved y Word read only Message File Target Location Information Target Device 500CPU or PLC Sub Address Description Paramete Size User Eleme r Program nt Access 12 Target File Type Word read only 13 MG11 0 1F Target File Numb Word read write N 14 MG11 0 ELE Target File Element Number for Y Word read write B S N F T C R L ST and RTC files or Target File Slot Number for O and files 15 Target File Element Number for Y Word read only O and files Set to zer
315. defined See the ladder rung below 0000 PID PID PID File PD10 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 288 Process Control Instruction Control Variable Percent CVP Output Parameter Address Data Range Type _ User Program Descriptions Format Access CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT Oto 100 control status read CVP Control Variable Percent displays the control variable as a percentage The range is 0 to 100 If the PD10 0 AM bit is off automatic mode CVP tracks the control variable CV output being calculated by the PID equation If the PD10 0 AM bit is on manual mode CVP tracks the value that can be manipulated in the Control Variable CV data word The only way fot a programmer to have control of the PID CV is to place the PID instruction in manual mode and write to the CV word via the control program or programming software If no change is made to CV while in manual mode the CVP will display the last value calculated by the PID equation Scaled Process Variable SPV Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT O to 16383 status read only The SPV Scaled Process Variable is the analog input variable If scaling is enabled the range is the minimu
316. dgebase Quick Starts on page 541 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 344 Communications Instructions SVC Service Communications SVC Service Communications Channel Select Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SVC Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 channel 0 94 1 us 0 8 us channel 1 87 0 us 0 8 us both 203 1 us 0 8 us 1 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file Under normal operation the controller processes communications once every time it scans the control program If you require the communications port to be scanned mote often or if the ladder scan is long you can add an SVC Service Communications instruction to your control program The SVC instruction is used to improve communications performance throughput but also causes the ladder scan to be longer Simply place the SVC instruction on a rung within the control program When the rung is scanned the controller services any communications that need to take place You can place the SVC instruction on a rung without any preceding logic or you can condition the rung with a number of communications status bits The table on page 345 shows the available status file bits TIP The amount of communications servicing performed is controlled by the Communication Servicing Se
317. dle Status LED Error Detected Status LNS Normal Operation Status JPS Jog Pulse Status JCS Jog Continuous Status L ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent LJP Jog Pulse HJC Jog Continuous LEH Enable Hard Stop EN Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code L OF Output Frequency Hz L OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz JF Jog Frequency Hz TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Gener L OPP Output Pulses Produced L ADP Accel Decel Pulses or File Elern PTO 1 coOoooooooooooooooooooooi F4 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 542 X Knowledgebase Quick Starts Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the PTO to generate pulses PTO 0 OUT Select Destination Output for pulses Output O 0 2 or PTO 0 0F PTO 0 TOP PTO 0 ADP Example O 0 3 Output Frequency Frequency of pulses 0 to 20 000 Hz Data less then zero and greater then 20 000 generates a PTO error Total Output Pulses Determines total number of pulses to be generated by the controller Accel Decel Pulses How many of the total pulses will be used for the Accel Decel component The following example will generate 10 000 pulses on Output O 0 2 at a frequency of 500Hz and 100 pulses will be used for Accelerating and 100 pulses will be used for Decelerating x Hsc PTO PWM STI JE RTC LCD MM BH cso 4 Description m PIO QUT Output
318. dress Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 3 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes Controller Mode User Application Mode Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 0 to 1 4 binary 0to11110 istatus read only Bits 0 through 4 function as follows 1 0 to 1 4 Mode Controller Mode Use by MicroLogix Controller S 1 4 1 3 S 1 2 8 1 1 8 1 0 u 1100 0 0 0 0 0 0 remote download in progress e 0 0 0 0 1 1 remote program mode 0 0 0 1 1 3 remote suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 0 0 1 1 0 6 remote run mode e 0 0 1 1 1 7 remote test continuous mode 0 1 0 0 0 8 remote test single scan mode e 1 0 0 0 0 16 download in progress 1 0 0 0 1 17 program mode 1 1 0 1 1 27 suspend mode e operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 1 1 1 1 0 30 run mode 1 Valid modes are indicated by the symbol N A indicates an invalid mode for that controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 469
319. dressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode P E Parameter E 2 E e s amp x i 85rT 5s3s ke c g S jv jo lo l L E la Ii la a JE e s Je Is Je o lv m e z Ja o a E a E J2 E5 E a S 8 e a E j Z ls z S u Low Limit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Test e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e High Limit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 186 Compare Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Math Instructions General Information Chapter 10 Before using math instructions become familiar with the following topics at the beginning of this chapter e Using the Math Instructions Updates to Math Status Bits e Using the Floating Point F Data File Instructions Use these output instructions to perform computations using an expression of a specific arithmetic in
320. during the Input Scan Status File S 2 1 The contents of the Status File are determined by the functions which utilize the Status File See System Status File on page 465 for a detailed description Bit File B 3 9 to 255 1 The Bit File is a general purpose file typically used for bit logic Timer File T 49to255 3 The Timer File is used for maintaining timing information for ladder logic timing instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 167 for instruction information Counter File b 5 9t0255 3 The Counter File is used for maintaining counting information for ladder logic counting instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 167 for instruction information Control File R 6 910255 3 The Control Data file is used for maintaining length and position information for various ladder logic instructions See Control Data File on page 313 for more information Integer File N 7 9 to 255 1 The Integer File is a general purpose file consisting of 16 bit signed integer data words Floating Point F 8 9 to 255 2 The Floating Point File is a general purpose file consisting of 32 bit File IEEE 754 floating point data elements See Using the Floating Point F Data File on page 190 for more information String File ST 9 to 255 42 The String File is a file that stores ASCII characters See String ST Data File on page 312 for more information Long Word File L 9 to 255 2 The Long Word File is a general purpose file consisting of 3
321. e Do not press the ENTER KEY Your modem will respond OK Type ATH Press Enter This will send the disconnect command to modem Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 570 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Basic requirements to use 40KHz PTO and PWM in MicroLogix Controller PTO and PWM function file changes in Series B Controller Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller The PTO and PWM function files of MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller are changed to support 40kHz PTO Pulse Train Output and PWM Pulse Width Modulation In addition a newer version of RSLogix 500 is released to support the changes To guarantee seamless operation of MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller special cares are required in handling some of PTO and PWM function file elements in user programs In this section detailed information regarding changes in PTO and PWM function files of MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller and how to handle PTO and PWM function file elements are described MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller does not support 40kHz PTO and PWM Only MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller supports 40kHz PTO and PWM with any version of RSLogix500 IMPORTANT When a user uses a prior version of RSLogix 500 version 7 10 or lower with MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller maximum operating frequency of PTO and PWM is still 32767Hz In ord
322. e c A oo NJ So 1 0 0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved S1 S0 5 U0 J00 JUT JOT reserved The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 and 1 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 0 Configuration 21 Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1762 IF20F2 Output Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the channel output data Raw Proportional Format T Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 0 10 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 768 0 0 1 0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 768 0 0 0 Scaled for PID Format T Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 0 0 10 ChannelO Data 0 to 16 383 0 1 0 J0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 l0 1762 IF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data ot scaled for PID data The input data file for either configuration is shown below 1762 IF4 Inp
323. e action DA bit causes the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated on the error instead of the process variable PV When clear 0 this bit allows the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated where the derivative is performed on the PV CV Upper Limit Alarm UL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit Oor1 status read write The control variable upper limit alarm bit 1s set when the calculated CV output exceeds the upper CV limit Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 296 Process Control Instruction CV Lower Limit Alarm LL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit Oor1 status read write The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set 1 when the calculated CV output is less than the lower CV limit Setpoint Out Of Range SP Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the setpoint exceeds the maximum scaled value ot e is less than the minimum scaled value PV Out Of Range PV Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV PVOutofRa
324. e destination is a long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ACI Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 ASCII Instructions 325 F Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode o Parameter z E s Im E a 5 e is j 3 S E ox a SFE Ris kE S g El le g el l E Ell la Ele fs e 5 F IE od moll AD j mI 7 amp o co 2 ja lo a B Eri a la B la E IS 2 ja E a la FS IS oa Source Destination e o e o e o 1 The Control data file is the only valid ACN String Concatenate ACN String Concatenate Source A Source B Dest ST10 11 ST10 12 ST10 10 ile type for the Control Element Instruction Operation The controller searches the source file type ST for the first character between 0 and 9 All numeric characters are extracted until a non numeric character or the end of the string is reached Action is taken oz y if numeric characters are found The string length is limited to 82 characters Commas and signs are allowed in the string However only the minus sign is displayed in the data table This instruction sets the following math flags in t
325. e 1 off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example 2 I on on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 3 Counter with External Direction Reset and Hold HSC Mode 3 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CEBit Comments Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 I off on off off lon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 1 0 0 Example 2 f on on off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 1 0 0 Example3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on U Toff on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 110 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 4 Two Input Counter up and down HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO
326. e EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an A OTL OTE or UIE this instruction mustbe the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 UIF User Interrupt Flush UIF User Interrupt Flush Interrupt Types Using Interrupts 267 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the UIF Instruction Controller When Rung Is MicroLogix 1100 True False 23 78 us 0 87 us The UIF instruction is used to flush remove pending interrupts from the system selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding flush bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 Reserved Reserved 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero To flush interrupt s 1 4 Select which interrupts you want to flush Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s
327. e False True False MicroLogix 1100 11 46 us 1 43 us 1 46 us 1 43 us The OTL and OTU instructions are retentive output instructions OTL turns on a bit while OTU turns off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both instructions addressing the same bit A Since these are latching outputs once set or reset they remain set or reset regardless of the rung condition A A ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION In the event of a power loss any OTL controlled bit including field devices energizes with the return of power if the OTL bit was set when power was lost ATTENTION Under error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the data table value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Relay Type Bit Instructions 163 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OTL and OTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Functi
328. e HSC 0 ACC IMPORTANT Ladder Logic Subroutine file 3 must be created in order for this example to work If the subroutine is not created the CPU will fault due to an HSC Error Code 1 Invalid File Number for PFN has been entered HSC PTO PwWM STI El I RTC LCD MM BHI c D i H u BAR k PEN Program File Number L ER Error Code LPM Low Preset Mask HPM High Preset Mask UFM Underflow Mask L OFM Overflow Mask L LPI Low Preset Interrupt L HPI High Preset Interrupt L CD Count Down L CU Count Up L MOD PLS file bits 15 8 HSC Mode bits 7 05 ACC Accumulator omoooooo o T J I 7 1 I a 7 vu T rj t 0 pl a a a 8 OVE Overflow 2147483647 UNF Underflow 2147483548 5 Project OV amp Gg Hep Move ea ptos Source HSC 0 ACC Controller Properties Processor Status 0 lt L6 Function Files Dest Au IO Configuration be Channel Configuration B Program Files svso SYS1 Lap2 amp LAD 3 HSC_SUB Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 548 X Knowledgebase Quick Starts Proper wiring of a single ended encoder Typical Allen Bradley 845TK when configuring HSC MOD for Mode 6 Quadrature Counter The following diagram illustrates connecting an encoder to the MicroLogix 1100 The minimum configuration required for Mode 6 operation is to enter a file number for the PFN parameter set the AS and CE bits to a 1 and
329. e HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Low Preset Output LPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary control read write The LPO Low Preset Output defines the state 1 on 0 off of the outputs on the controller when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 115 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the low preset being reached The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 118 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSL High Speed Counter Load Instruction Type output HSL 1 High Speed Counter Load HSC Number HSCO High Preset N7 0 Low Preset N7 1 Output High Source N7 2 Output Low Source N7 3 Controller Data Size Execution Time When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 82 37 us 0 87 us long word 84 37 us 0 87 us The HSL High Speed Load instruction allows the high and low presets and high and low output source to be applied to a high speed counter These parameters are described below Counter Number Specifies which high sp
330. e Instruction Descriptions on page 82 1 Data Files Function Files Address Address Level 2 Mode r T S m Ez Parameter E Bo 55 M 5 le e T ix z _ S7C E kE c cg S ja jo 9 jo j l B Aa lnm M JE e si l E lo o la e a E E a je lilo la la E JS 8 ie ja El a 5 S ja Source e e e e e e e e e Rate e e e e e e e e e Offset e e e e e e e e e e Destination ele e jo jo e o 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the SCL instruction SCP Scale with Instruction Type output Parameters SCP Execution Time for the SCP Instruction _ Scale w Parameters Input MD Controller Data Size When Rung Is Input Min N7 1 True False Input Max N72 MicroLogix 1100 Ru d us m us 0 lt ong wor 2 US S Scaled Min N7 3 9 H H 0 Scaled Max hl The SCP instruction produces a scaled output value that has a linear Output Mi relationship between the input and scaled values This instruction solves the following equation listed below to determine scaled output y 61 yo 6 amp xol xo yo Addressing Modes and File
331. e LIFO stack If LIFO is a wotd size file soutce must be a wotd value or constant If LIFO is a long wotd size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 235 Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 wotds Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates that LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the LIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The p
332. e MSG buffers or the request is put in the MSG queue It remains set until the message transmission is completed and the rung goes false You may clear this bit when either the ER or DN bit is set in order to re trigger a MSG instruction with true rung conditions on the next scan IMPORTANT Do not set this bit from the control program Enabled and Waiting EW Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EW Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Enabled and Waiting Bit EW is set after the enable bit is set and the message is in the buffer not in the queue and waiting to be sent The EW bit is cleared after the message has been sent and the processor receives acknowledgement ACK from the target device This is before the target device has processed the message and sent a reply Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 355 Error ER Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access M61 1 0 ER Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Error Bit ER is set when message transmission has failed An error code is written to the MSG File The ER bit and the error code ate cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Done DN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 DN Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Done Bit DN is set when the message is transmitted successfully
333. e None End END 0 10 0 10 0 2 None None None End Of Rung EOR 0 00 0 00 0 0 None None None MicroLogix 1100 Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the MicroLogix 1100 processor The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types e Input I and Output O e Bit B Integer N e Timer T Counter C and Control R Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 461 Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses Fort most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted MicroLogix 1100 Controllers Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address perand Address perand Address perand Form Time ys Form Time ps Form Time ys 011 2 6 TALIS I 2 6 6 LEI 13 0 0 2 6 0 1 0 6 8 L EEFIS 7 5 0 2 9 OV 7 2 T4 DN 5 5 B3 1 7 0 0 7 1 T 1 DN 6 6 B 1 2 7 OS V 74 TIFEEF DN 6 8 BI 3 0 B3 2 5 5 T4 ACC 2 5 5 L8 2 0 B 1 2 6 6 T 1 ACC 2 16 6 L
334. e deadband the instruction considers the error value zero for computational purposes Select deadband by entering a value in the deadband storage word word 9 in the control block The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value you enter A value of zero inhibits this feature The deadband has the same scaled units as the setpoint if you choose scaling Output Alarms You may set an output alarm on the control variable at a selected value above and or below a selected output percent When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded either value it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit in the PID instruction Alarm bits are reset by the instruction when the control variable comes back inside the limits The instruction does not prevent the control variable from exceeding the alarm values unless you select output limiting Select upper and lower output alarms by entering a value for the upper alarm CVH and lower alarm CVL Alarm values ate specified as a percentage of the output If you do not want alarms enter zero and 100 respectively for lower and upper alarm values and ignore the alarm bits Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 303 Output Limiting with Anti Reset Windup You may set an output limit percent of output on the control variable When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit it sets an
335. e number of DLS file elements depends upon the number of queues specified in the application The status bits and words are described below Data Log Status DLS File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 J12 j 1 10 09 os 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 ENU 0 paoa fo o o jp jo jo jo jo jo fo jo o 1 FSZ File Size number of records allocated 2 RST Records Stored number of records recorded 1 EN Enable Bit 2 DN Done Bit 3 OV Overflow Bit Data Logging Enable EN When the DLG instruction rung is true the Data Logging Enable EN is set 1 and the DLG instruction records the defined data set To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLS0 Q EN where Q is the queue number Data Logging Done DN The Data Logging Done DN bit is used to indicate when the associated queue is full This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when the queue becomes full This bit is cleared when a record is retrieved from the queue To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLS0 Q DN were Q is the queue number Data Logging Overflow OV The Data Logging Overflow OV bit is used to indicate when a record gets overwritten in the associated queue This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when a record is overwritten Once set the OV bit remains set until you clear 0 it To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLS0 Q OV
336. e overflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Underflow UNF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF llong word 32 bit INT control read write The UNF Underflow defines the lower count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable an underflow interrupt is generated When the underflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 115 overflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the underflow position provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the underflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred
337. e switch When SMTP is enabled MicroLogix 1100 is capable of 0 disabled Enable Series transmitting e mail messages generated by a 485CIF write message with a string element There B only must be a SMTP server on the network capable of processing e mail service This provides an extremely versatile mechanism to report alarms status and other data related functions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 539 Ethernet Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default HTTP Server enabled disabled 1 enabled Enable Check this box to enable HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Disable HTTP to guarantee better security since it prevents access to the processor using a web browser Note that disabling HTTP will prevent you from viewing the extended diagnostics available through a web browser Any change to this function does not take effect until the system is restarted This function can be changed through online modification of the channel configuration or through offline modification followed by downloading it to the processor Once changed the function will be operational in the processor after the system is restarted Auto enabled disabled 1 enabled Negotiate Check this box to enable Auto Negotiation Auto Negotiation allows the processor to negotiate with switches routers and modems for optimal performance When Auto Negotiation is enabled the por
338. e type contains information about the controller s hardware See Base Hardware Information Function File on page 56 for the file structure Communications Status CS This file type contains information about the Communications with the controller See File Communications Status File on page 57 for the file structure O Status File 10S This file type contains information about the controller I 0 See Input Output Status File on page 79 for the file structure Ethernet Status File ES The file type contains information about the Ethernet Communications with the controller LCD Information File LCD This file type is associated with the LCD screen keypads and trimpot Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 51 Real Time Clock The real time clock provides year month day of month day of week hour minute and second information to the Real Time Clock RTC Function File Function File in the controller The Real Time Clock parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below Real Time Clock Function File Feature Address DataForma Rang lype UserProgram Access YR RTC Year RTC O YR word 1998 to 2097 status read only MON RTC Month RTC 0 MON word 1 to 12 status read only DAY RTC Day of Month RTC 0 DAY word 1 to 31 status read only HR RTC Hours RTC 0 HR word 0 to 23 military time status read only MIN RTC Minutes RTC 0 MIN word 0 to 59 status read o
339. e with the target device Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 368 Communications Instructions The maximum amount of data that can be transferred via a MSG instruction is 103 words 120 words for Modbus commands and is determined by the destination data type The destination data type is defined by the type of message read or write For Read Messages When a read message is used the destination file is the data file in the local or originating processor TIP Input output string and RTC file types are not valid for read messages For Write Messages When a write message is used the destination file is the data file in the target processor The maximum number of elements that can be transmitted or received are shown in the following table You cannot cross file types when sending messages For example you cannot read a timer into an integer file and you cannot write counters to a timer file The only exceptions to this rule are that long integer data can be read from or written to bit or integer files and RTC files can be written to integer files TIP The table below is not intended to illustrate file compatibility only the maximum number of elements that can be exchanged in each case Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message A85CIF 0 1 B N 1 word 103 L 2 word 51 T C R 3 word 34 sr 42 word 2 write only 500CPU 0 1 B N 1 word 103 F3
340. ecel is negative The total pulses for the acceleration and deceleration phases is greater than the total output pulses to be generated TOP Acceleration and deceleration values can either be identical ADI 0 or a unique value for each ADI 1 In the example below when ADI 0 e TOP total output pulses 12 000 e ADP accelerate decelerate pulses 6 000 This is the maximum ADP value that may be entered without causing a fault The run portion will equal 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 143 pe Accel Run Decel 4g 12 000 3 Accel Run Decel 6 000 0 6 000 In this example the maximum value that could be used for accelerate decelerate is 6000 because if both accelerate and decelerate are 6000 the total number of pulses 12 000 The run component would be zero This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0 to 6000 At 6000 the output frequency OF variable is generated and immediately enters the deceleration phase 6000 to 12 000 At 12 000 the PTO operation would stop output frequency 0 If you need to determine the ramp period accelerate decelerate ramp duration e 2 x ADP OF duration in seconds OF output frequency The following formulas can be used to calculate the maximum frequency limit for both profiles The maximum frequency the integer which is less than or
341. ecuting bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI PEN The UIX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine The STI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an STI interrupt is executing STI User Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable STI subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the STI subroutine at the configured time interval If you need to restrict when the STI subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and STI subroutine processing resumes STI User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost STIEO UIL binary bit status read write The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that indicates an interrupt was lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit
342. edet tie etr Enn oec dre atin 289 Runtit e Errors i sea Rer de RE RC Oe SER as 298 Analog 1 0 Scaling a eid noue vacet el ERE ec date xg 209 Application Notes aserria DUI SPOUSE RR T ENEE OTE ERRER 300 Application Examples 4s eras ea ere rer eR bar torbdbes 304 Chapter 20 ASCII Instructions General Information qoos accede ebd VOR De ERE POR 309 JASCITEISEERCUDOEIS e voe ROC Rr E Uso DW e eds 309 Instruction Types and Operations EE Ya eb vati ien 310 Protocol Ovefview ise eh uec bobo e re 311 Stino COD HD AEN JOH e carcer e Neto oro ton Ptr ipti do 312 Control Data File eR PE OER OI 313 AGE ASGI Cleat DULTGRS zo ppp Td ERR eae oe Mak Baa RT RR 314 AIC ASCII Integer to SUITS us os cot et odqueR Ux ma D eere 316 AWA S ASCII Witte with Append 424 5257 4er npe tpe n 317 AWT ASCIU Write rise n enora hia E e ae Cie edicit 319 ABL Lest Butter for Ane oos etuer RR Rep d cese dre eg 321 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 2 s VI ane ER 323 ACT String to Integer issis idie Save ki uii wna n e OP eos 324 ACN String Concatenate Lone tahoe dated wee so ido e eeu 325 AEX trito Extrat oos cr eed Ane eee ru ex bee edo 326 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines uoce 9 ceo re eats 328 ARD ASCII Read Characters 55 Tutor oT oa nen Rd 329 ARE ASCIIRead ane is y dote e te ke m Y AUS 331 SUE Sting SEAECH ere e ica ede c aen eet are dsl nical t 333 ASK e ASCII String Compate Soiree Deis ota ades 334 Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions
343. edium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The typical amount of current seen at nominal input voltage Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 599 normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or deactivated They are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized ot the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any applied filter offline When a device is not scanning controlling or when a programming device is not communicating with the controller offset A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage current When a mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches have a small current flow when they are in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating must be
344. eed counter is being used 0 HSCO and 1 Not support e High Preset Specifies the value in the high preset register The data ranges for the high preset are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Low Preset Specifies the value in the low preset register The data ranges for the low preset are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Output High Source Specifies the value in the HPO high preset output register The data range for the output high source is from 0 to 65 535 Output Low Source Specifies the value in the LPO low preset output register The data range for the output low source is from 0 to 65 535 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below HSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page amp 2 r Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode 7 E so T Parameter B le t S c amp x a SFE isis k Z G d Z la lo j ie _ I B la lm a JE IS Is Ie ls J S o o e jz lu Bh S a ot 2 Eu m Ei 9 8 2 la E J jm z S Counter Number High Preset e o e o o e e e o o ele Low Preset ele e o o e e elele ele Output High Source e e e o o elele ele Output Low Source e e e e e e o o ele
345. efore it executes the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change TIP To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The BCD value 32 760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7 0 The maximum source value is 32767 BCD Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 206 Conversion Instructions FRD From BCD Source 13 00032760 lt Dest N7 0 32760 lt 14 13 0000 0000 0000 0011 0010 0111 0110 0000 15 0 15 0 5 digit BCD 0 0 0 3 2 7 6 M N7 0 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program If you do not convert the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost TIP If the math register S 13 and S 14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed four digits be sure to clear word S 14 before executing the FRD instruction If 5 14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal value is placed in the destination word Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Conversion Instructions 207 Clearing S 14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below
346. el will error out with an error code of 0x0C However this functionality is not applied if DCOMM Default communication setting is selected This instruction executes immediately upon the rung transitioning to a true state Any ASCII transmissions in progress are terminated when the ACL instruction executes TIP The ASCII queue may contain up to 16 instructions that are waiting to run Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 e Receive Buffer clears the Receive buffer when set to Yes and removes the Receive ASCII port control instructions ARL and ARD from the ASCII queue Transmit Buffer clears the Transmit buffer when set to Yes and removes the Transmit ASCII port control instructions AWA and AWT from the ASCII queue Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 p Address Hec Data Files Function Files g Mode Address Level N 3 Parameter 5 E o e S z amp x a SF Bis is le Ele e g S la jo 18 l Je k E 18 a le 14 IE JE Is Je 5 le o l e lof lel ib l E z E El EEEE 8 ie a E e 2 fa 8 fo Channel Receive Buffer Publi
347. elow summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing as publication 1763 RM001C EN P October 2009 To help you locate new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades See the latest release notes 1763 RN003 to be sure that your controller s firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features See Firmware Upgrades below Enhanced features are added to the controllers through a firmware upgrade This firmware upgrade is not required except to allow you access to the latest features To use the newest features be sure your controller s firmwate is at the following level Programmable Firmware Revision Catalog Numbers Controller MicroLogix 1100 Series B Revision C FRN 9 1763 L16AWA 1763 L16BWA 1763 L16BBB and 1763 L16DWD controllers To upgrade the firmware for a MicroLogix controller visit the MicroLogix web site at http www ab com micrologix To use all of the latest features RSLogix 500 programming software must be version 7 20 00 or higher Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 4 Summary of Changes i Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Table of Contents Summary of Changes Firmware Revision Histofy sisi oss o beso Ee eve ey lE Ros 3 Firmware Ube
348. ember 2011 90 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Speed Counter Within e E 500 Function File dd you i a A Function File This file provides access to HSC configuration data and also allows HSC Function File the control program access to all information pertaining to the High Speed Counter TIP If the controller is in the run mode the data within sub element fields may be changing HSC pto sm Jen atc em ww par tr Jall 4 L PFA Program File Number LER Error Code UI User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled AS Auto Start ED Error Detected CE Counting Enabled SP Set Parameters LPM Low Preset Mask HFM High Preset Mask UFR Underflow Mask OFM Overflow Mask LFI Low Preset Interrupt HFI High Preset Interrupt UFI Underflow Interrupt OFI Overflow Interrupt LPR Low Preset Reached HFF High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction LIF Underflow OF Overflow MD Mode Done CD Count Down CU Count Up MOD HSC Mode ACC Accumulator HIP High Preset 2147483547 LOP Low Preset 2147483648 OVE Overflow 2147483547 UNF LInderflow 2147483648 OMB Output Mask Bits HPO High Preset Output LPO Low Preset Output ee ee ee ee a E E E E E E E m E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E m E E E E The HSC function
349. emory and the types of files used by the MicroLogix 1100 controller The chapter 1s organized as follows Controller Memory on page 36 Data Files on page 40 e Protecting Data Files During Download on page 42 e Static File Protection on page 44 e Password Protection on page 45 Clearing the Controller Memory on page 46 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 47 e Web View Disable OS Series B FRN 4 or later on page 47 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 36 Controller Memory and File Types Controller Memory File Structure MicroLogix 1100 user memory is comptised of Data Files Function Files and Program Files TIP The file types shown below for data files 3 through 8 are the default file types for those file numbers and cannot be changed Data files 9 through 255 can be added to your program to operate as bit timer counter or other files shown below eT Specialty Files Output File Input File Status File High Speed Counter System File 0 Data Log Queue 0 Pulse Train Output 1 System File 1 Data Log Queue 1 Pulse Width 2 Program File 2 Data Log Queues 2 to Modulation 259 Selectable Timed 3 to 255 Program Files 3 to 255 0 Recipe File 0 Interrupt Bit File Timer File Event Input Interrupt Recipe File 1 4 5 Counter File RTC Real Time Clock 2 to 255 Recipe Files 2 to 255 6 Control File Integer File Memory Module Information Floating Point
350. ented CTU or decremented CTD on each false to true rung transition The accumulated value is retained when the rung condition again becomes false and when Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 174 Timer and Counter Instructions power is cycled on the controller The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter TIP The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 2 z Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E s 2 B a z E o s 9 ie e amp px S FERS le Elz S g SE a e a e le l lz EB la 2 a E E S S S o ja le u e lo S E la e Elb i a FS 18 e ia E aje ja SIS la Counter e e Preset e e Accumulator e e 1 Valid for Counter Files only CTU Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 12 C5 0 0V OV overflow Using Counter File Control and Status Bits Like
351. ently modified 05H Local processor is off line possible duplicate node situation 06H Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available 07H Target node does not respond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has been lost OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset one possible source is from the DF1 master OFH DCOMM button was activated while an ASCII instruction was waiting to execute 10H Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command 12H Local channel configuration protocol error exists 13H Local MSG configuration error in the Remote MSG parameters 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 16H Target or Local Bridge address is higher than the maximum node address 17H Local service is not supported 18H Broadcast is not supported 20H PCCC Description Host has a problem and will not communicate 21H Bad MSG file parameter for building message 30H PCCC Description Remote station host is not there disconnected or shutdown 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Local communication channel reconfigured while MSG active 3AH STS in the reply from target is invalid 40H PCCC Description Host could not complete function due to hardware fault 45H MSG reply cannot be processed Either Insufficient data in MSG read reply or bad network address parameter 50H Tar
352. equencer Compare Compare 16 bit data with stored data 240 S00 Sequencer Output Transfer 16 bit data to word addresses 243 SOL Sequencer Load Load 16 bit data into a file 246 Use the sequencer compare instruction to detect when a step is complete use the sequencer output instruction to set output conditions for each step Use the sequencer load instruction to load data into the sequencer file The primary advantage of sequencer instructions is to conserve program memory These instructions monitor and control 16 word or 32 long word discrete outputs at a time in a single rung You can use bit integer or double integer files with sequencer instructions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 240 Sequencer Instructions S0C Sequencer Compare Sac Sequencer Compare CEN gt File B3 0 Mask N70 lt DN gt Source I 0 0 Control R6 0 CFD 5 Length 1 lt Position 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SQC Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 23 us 6 24 us long word 24 21 us 6 24 us On a false to true rung transition the SQC instruction is used to compare masked source words or long words with the masked value at a reference address the sequencer file for the control of sequential machine operations When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the correspond
353. equency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during all Jog phases This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved In the MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller the data less than zero or greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error However in the MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller the data less than zero or greater than 40 000 generates a PTO error A ATTENTION In order to use 40kHz PTO and PWM with a prior version of RSLogix 500 version 7 10 or lower variable type change process is required unsigned integer to signed integer Refer to PTO and PWM function file changes in Series B Controller on page 571 in Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller for more information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 146 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Jog Pulse JP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP bit 00r 1 control read write The PTO JP Jog Pulse bit is used to instruct the PTO sub system to generate a single pulse The width is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Pulse operation is only possible under the following conditions e PTO sub system in idle Jog continuous not active e Enable not active The JP bit operates as follows e Set 1
354. er ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 port channel 0 for ASCII driver When configured for ASCII all received data is placed in a buffer To access the data use the ASCII instructions in your ladder program See ASCII Instructions on page 309 for information on using the ASCII instructions You can also send ASCII string data to most attached devices that accept ASCII data characters TIP Only ASCII instructions can be used when a channel is configured for ASCII If you use a Message MSG instruction that references the channel an error occurs The channel configuration screen is shown below Channel Configuration X jj Channel 1 Driver jsa g Baud 1209 z Parity NONE v Stop Bits hn sz Data Bits B sl Termination Characters Termination 1 m Termination 2 Sff General r Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking Delete Mode Ignore haa Echo XON XOFF Cancel Apply Help The controller updates changes to the channel configuration at the next execution of a Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing whichever comes first Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 536 Protocol Configuration When the driver is set to ASCII the following parameters can be changed
355. er to use 40kHz PTO and PWM with a prior version of RSLogix 500 variable type change process is required unsigned integer to signed integer In a prior version of RSLogix500 version 7 10 or lower the frequency elements PTO OF PTO OFS PTO JF PWM OF pWM OFS of PTO and PWM function files are treated as signed 16 bit 32768 32767 and MicroLogix 1100 Series A firmware didn t support values above 20000 20kHz However these values are changed to unsigned 16 bit and 40000 40kHz respectively to implement 40kHz PTO and PWM functions in Series B controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 572 Howto Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller Changes made in PTO and PWM function files of MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller and RSLogix 500 version 7 2 RSLogix500 version 7 10 or lower RSLogix500 version7 2 or higher ML1100 Series A ML1100 Series B ML1100 Series A ML1100 Series B PTO OF Signed 16 bit value 32768 32767 Unsigned 16 bit value 0 65535 F F W generates fault when it exceeds 20000 F W generates fault when it exceeds 40000 PWM IOF OFS The newer version of RSLogix 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Series B handles PTO and PWM frequencies as unsigned 16 bit integer Therefore if an older version of RSLogix 500 is used with MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller or the newer version of RSLogix 500 is used with Series A controller there occur compatibility is
356. erand Time This is the amount of time in milliseconds which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt A value of zero disables the STI function The time range is from 0 to 65 535 milliseconds The STS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows e If a zero set point is specified the STI is disabled and STI 0 TIE is cleared 0 e If the STI is disabled not timing and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI 0 TIE is set 1 e If the STI 1s currently timing and the set point 1s changed the new setting takes effect immediately and the STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point Note that if the new setting is less than the current accumulated time the STI times out immediately For example if the STI has been timing for 15 microseconds and the STI set point is changed from 20 microseconds to 10 microseconds an STI user interrupt occurs at the next start of rung Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below STS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 CS Comms 10S 1 0 DLS Data Log m Address Address Level Mode e T Z S 298 i5 E e js 5 F E j
357. ered in the SMTP server According to the SMTP server Username must be written as an email style e Password Password registered in the SMTP server e TO Address 0 as an email style e TO Address 1 as an email style e TO Address 2 as an email style e TO Address 3 as an email style e TO Address 4 as an email style TO Address 5 as an email style e TO Address 6 as an email style TO Address 7 as an email style TO Address 8 as an email style TO Address 9 as an email style email TO address 0 To Address must be written email TO Address 1 To Address must be written email TO Address 2 To Address must be written email TO Address 3 To Address must be written email TO Address 4 To Address must be written email TO Address 5 To Address must be written email TO Address 6 To Address must be written email TO Address 7 To Address must be written email TO Address 8 To Address must be written email TO Address 9 To Address must be written A user can not edit LEN Length fields in the SMTP Configuration File If String Text is entered RSLogix500 updated the Length fields automatically These parameters are non editable in RUN mode You can change them in offline or in online PROGRAM mode Maximum of the characters for the string parameters are 62 bytes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 422 Communications Instructions Con
358. error Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 140 Using High Speed Outputs A ATTENTION In order to use 40kHz PTO and PWM with a prior version of RSLogix 500 version 7 10 or lower variable type change process is required unsigned integer to signed integer Refer to PTO and PWM function file changes in Series B Controller on page 571 in Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller for more information PTO Operating Frequency Status OFS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type UserProgram Access Controller Series OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz PTO O OFS word INT Oto 20 000 status read only A word UINT 10 to 40 000 B The PTO OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency being produced by the PTO sub system TIP The value displayed may not exactly match the value entered in the PTO 0 0F This is because the PTO sub system may not be capable of reproducing an exact frequency at some of the higher frequencies For PTO applications this is typically not an issue because in all cases an exact number of pulses are produced PTO Total Output Pulses To Be Generated TOP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Description Format Program Access TOP Total Output PTO 0 TOP long word 0 to 2 147 483 647 contr
359. errupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information STI File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 31 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 PFN SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information Channel 0 Communications Incoming Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 0 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 0 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Message Reply Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 1 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 1 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 58 for more information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 484 System Status File Outgoing Message
360. es be made in the MANUAL mode followed by a return to AUTO Output limiting is applied in the MANUAL mode TIP e This method requires that the PID instruction controls a non critical application in terms of personal safety and equipment damage e The PID tuning procedure may not work for all cases It is strongly recommended to use a PID Loop tuner package for the best result i e RSTune Rockwell Software catalog number 9323 1003D Procedure 1 Create your ladder program Make certain that you have properly scaled your analog input to the range of the process variable PV and that you have properly scaled your control variable CV to your analog output Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 305 2 Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules Download your program to the processor Leave the processor in the program mode ATTENTION Ensure that all possibilities of machine motion have been A considered with respect to personal safety and equipment damage It is possible that your output CV may swing between 0 and 100 while tuning TIP If you want to verify the scaling of your continuous system and or determine the initial loop update time of your system go to the procedure on page 306 3 Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Ty of 0 a gain K of 1 and a loop update of 5 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder
361. es its processing of the EI subroutine The EII UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an EII interrupt is executing Ell User Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable EII O UIE binary bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable EI subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the EII subroutine when an EII event occurs If you need to restrict when the EII subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is 1f a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and EII subroutine processing resumes Ell User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost EII 0 UIL binary bit status read write UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track and clear the lost condition Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2
362. eserved N bit read write 7 0 MG11 0 0 BK Break Connection N bit read write For Channel 1 1 MSG Connection closed by user 0 MSG Connection not closed by user MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later The Status Bits Sub Element 17 of the MSG File Element are defined below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 352 Communications Instructions Message File Sub Element 17 Status Bits Bit Address Description Paramete Size User r Program Access 15 Reserved bit read only 14 MG11 0 0 ST Start bit read only 1 MSG transmitted and acknowledged by target device 0 MSG has not been received by target 13 MG11 0 0 Done N bit read only DN 1 MSG completed successfully 0 MSG not complete 12 MG11 0 0 ER Error N bit read only 1 error detected 0 no error detected 11 Reserved bit read only 10 MG11 0 0 Enabled and Waiting bit read only EW 1 MSG Enabled and Waiting O MSG not Enabled and Waiting 1 to Reserved N bit read only 9 0 MG11 0 0 R For PCCC Messaging Y bit read only Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Range 1 Local 0 Remote For Modbus Messaging Range 1 Local Communications Instructions Control Bits Parameters Channel 0 Setup Screen 353 MSG MG10 0 1 Elements lolx This Controller Channel 0 Integral 500CPU Read Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements
363. esses 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts Noze When configuring a message instruction set the target node address to 1 for broadcast messages Broadcast messages are handled as follows DF1 Half Duplex Master Driver Broadcast Messages A broadcast write command initiated by the DF1 half duplex master is received and executed by all DF1 half duplex slaves A broadcast write command received by the DF1 half duplex master after polling a DF1 half duplex slave is received acknowledged and re broadcast without being executed by the DF1 half duplex master It is treated like any other slave to slave command except that no acknowledgement is expected after re broadcast DF1 Half Duplex Slave Driver Broadcast Messages When a broadcast write command is initiated by a DF1 half duplex slave it is queued up just like any other MSG command until it receives a poll from the DF1 half duplex master After transmitting the broadcast write command the DF1 half duplex slave receives an acknowledgement that the DF1 half duplex master received the packet without error When the DF1 half duplex master re broadcasts the broadcast write command the initiating DF1 half duplex slave receives and executes the command along with all of the other slave nodes receiving the broadcast packet No acknowledgement or reply is returned Choosing a Polling Mode for DF1 Half Duplex Master A master station can be configured to communicate with slave
364. etermining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution Quadrature Encoder o Input 0 Forward Rotation A Input 1 Reset input Input 2 Reverse Rotation HSC Mode 6 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments Function Count A Count B Not Used Not Used Example 1 fl off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 27 y off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 Count input A leads count input B 2 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge Publication 176
365. ew 85 Indirect Addressing of a File LIM B3 0 COP 0001 Limit Test J Copy File Low Lim 10 0 Source N N50 100 10 10 lt Dest N7 0 Test N50 100 Length 15 10 lt High Lim 25 25 lt e Address N N50 100 10 Description In this example the source of the COP instruction is indirected by N50 100 The data in N50 100 defines the data file number to be used in the instruction In this example the copy instruction source A is defined by N N50 100 10 When the instruction is scanned the data in N50 100 is used to define the data file to be used for the COP instruction If the value of location N50 100 27 this instruction copies 15 elements of data from N27 10 N27 10 to N27 24 to N7 0 N7 0 to N7 14 TIP If a number larger than 255 is placed in N50 100 in this example a controller fault occurs This is because the controller has a maximum of 255 data files In addition the file defined by the indirection should match the file type defined by the instruction in this example an integer file TIP This example also illustrates how to perform a limit check on the indirect address The limit instruction at the beginning of the rung is monitoring the indirect element If the data at N50 100 is less than 10 or greater than 25 the copy instruction is not processed This procedure can be used to make sure an indirect address does not access data an unintended location Publication 1763 RM001D EN
366. ey after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys There are three ways to change JOG bit Editing the LCD Function File with your RSLogix 500 programming tool Manipulating this bit using a ladder program Using the Advance Set and KeyIn Mode menus on the LCD Trimpot 0 Data TMIN TMAX POTO Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX POT1 Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access POTO Trimpot 0 Data LCD 0 POTO word INT status read only TMIN TMAX POT1 Trimpot 1 Data LCD 0 POT1 word INT status read only TMIN TMAX Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 452 LCD Information The Data resident in POTO represents the position of trim pot 0 The Data resident in POT1 corresponds to the position of trim pot 1 Those valid data range for both is from TMIN to TMAX POTO and POT1 value is evaluated on valid value when a new program is downloaded If the previous Trimpot value is out of the new Trimpot range Trimpot value is changed to the nearest bound For example old POTO 1000 new TMIN 0 and TMAX 250 controller changes the POTO from 1000 to 250 after downloading program You can check the ERR and ERN to see if the POT value is modified or not The POTO operation described above is identical to POT1 Instruction Display Window WND Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access WND Instruction Display LCD 0 WND binary bit status read only Window
367. figure MSG Setup nu ros ae provides an example of how the MSG Instruction Screen to send SMTP would be configured to be used to send SMTP message message General MSG Setup Screen for SMTP messaging S3 MSG MG50 0 1 Elements The picture below shows MultiHop setup screen and configured e mail subject and Body using ST file MultiHop Setup Screen for SMTP messaging MSG MG50 0 1 Elements Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 423 Setup String Data File i3 Data File ST70 Offset LEN String Text Symbol Description S T 70 0 Radix z Symboli e O Tm zl Properties Usage Help Channel Channel must be 1 Integral e Communication command Communication command must be 485 CIF Write Data Table Address Data Table Address must be a String file and the String file must contain Email Subject and Email Body If Data Table Address is not a String File the contents of email subject is filled to No Subject and that of email body is filled to No Body e Size in Elements Size in Element must be 1 or 2 To send SMTP message Size in Elements must be 1 or 2 The first string element Offset 0 of String File is a subject and the second string element Offset 1 of String File is an email body If Size in Element is 1 the contents of email body is filled to No Body Message Timeout Cannot edit Data Table Offset V
368. forms a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the OR Instruction Destination A OR B Source A 141 41 41 41 JO 41 10 10 JO I0 0 1 1 0 0 Source B gt gt gt 1110 Jo 1 1 11 1 1 JO JO JO JO 1 1 Destination IMAM IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Logical Instructions 215 XOR Exclusive OR Instruction Type output XOR Bitwise ExclusiveOR Sauces aut Execution Time for the XOR Instruction SUD sane Controller Data Size When Rung ls Dest N7 2 DDR True False MicroLogix 1100 word 13 09 us 0 87 us long word 13 31 us 0 87 us The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the XOR Instruction Destination A XOR B Source A 1 1 11 11 11 JO 11 10 JO JO JO JO 1 11 JO JO SouceB gt 111 0 0 1 1 51 01 1 1 0 0 00 1 11 Destination olppnpnmjnjpnnnuplonnnn IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 211 and Updates to Math Status B
369. from The user fault routine executes when this type of fault occurs However the fault cannot be cleared Note You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Non User Fault Non User Faults are caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution The user fault routine does not execute when this type of fault occurs The Arithmetic Flags Status File word S 0 are saved on entry to the user fault subroutine and re written upon exiting the subroutine Creating a User Fault Subroutine To use the user fault subroutine 1 Create a subroutine file Program Files 3 to 255 can be used 2 Enter the file number in word S 29 of the status file Controller Operation The occurrence of recoverable ot non recoverable faults causes the controller to read S 29 and execute the subroutine number identified by 8 29 If the fault is recoverable the routine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit 1 13 The controller then continues in its current executing mode The routine does not execute for non user faults Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 User Interrupt Instructions INT Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 Interrupt Using Interrupts 263 Instruction Used To Page INT Interrupt Subroutine Use this instruction to identify a program file as an 263 interrupt subroutine INT label vers
370. g Is True False MicroLogix 1100 11 3 us 0 87 us The RES instruction resets timers counters and control elements When the RES instruction is executed it resets the data defined by the RES instruction The RES instruction has no effect when the rung state is false The following table shows which elements are modified RES Instruction Operation When using a RES instruction with a Timer Element Counter Element Control Element The controller resets the The controller resets the The controller resets the ACC value to 0 ACC value to 0 POS value to 0 DN bit OV bit EN bit TT bit UN bit EU bit EN bit DN bit DN bit CU bit EM bit CD bit ER bit UL bit ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated A value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 E 7 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode o Parameter s e p s lt a l z t E e x aS zh Fl a l ZEI Ese le 3 eiui l 2 ln Z S ls e S 5 s o e lz lu 2 le la E
371. g element and cannot cross a string element boundary Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SWP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 1 Data Files Function Files Address Address Level gt Mode 7 Parameter E Ei 2 E e S E t c amp x a _ SFE ils 3 Ble c g S v j jo l B a lt ln 1M JE 8 S le ls Je o ele ub ls fe a zi ala JE S8 a e Je 2 a xs Source e e e Length e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Example SWP Swa Length p Source S710 1 DATA O 13 Source Value before executing SWP instruction abcdefghijkImnopqrstuvwxyzabcdefg Source Value before executing SWP instruction badcfehgjilknmporgtsvuxwzyabcdefg The underlined characters show the 13 words where the low byte was swapped with the high byte Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 15 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines of processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation They are typically time based or event driven SOC S
372. g last in first out order the data in the stack is not cleared after unloading Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below LFU LIFO Unload cEU 5 LIFO N7 0 Dest N71 CDN Controller Control R6 0 Length 1 lt EM5 Position 0 lt MicroLogix 1100 LFL LIFO LOAD EN nee Nea DN L N7 1 Control R6 0 PEM Length 34 Position g LFU LIFO UNLOAD HEU LFO sc DN est 7 11 EM Control R6 0 EMI Length 34 Position g LFL and LFU Instruction Pair This instruction uses the following operands Destination Position N71 hy N7 12 LFU instruction unloads data from stack N7 12 at position 0 N7 12 Source N7 13 N7 14 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N7 10 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 e LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads this value from the last location on the LIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size fi
373. g sequence 1 The user selects a time interval 2 When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured the controller monitors the STI value 3 When the time period has elapsed the controller s normal operation is interrupted 4 The controller then scans the logic in the STI program file 5 When the STI file scan is completed the controller returns to where it was prior to the interrupt and continues normal operation Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using Interrupts 269 Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function File Sub Elements Summary Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File STI 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only 269 ER Error Code STI O ER word INT status read only 269 UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only 270 UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write 270 UIL User Interrupt Lost STEO UIL binary bit status read write 270 UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only 271 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STEO TIE binary bit control read write 271 AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only 271 ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only 272 SPM Set Point Msec STI 0 SPM word INT control read write 272 STI Fun
374. g the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Files Function Files Anton Address Level gt Mode a o 3 Parameter E E E lo s z S z E os oie e le E g E E T PA _ Qj o fis e S S o Z ju 5 a S ja E 2 amp b uu E zg 6 e a Ela E a S S iu Line 4 Source Al e eje aimee t t Line 4 Source B s SNES ee 28 s Display With Input 1 L4 Source A L Data File is only available when Display With Input is set to 1 2 L4 Source B operand is not available when Display With Input is set to 1 If Display With Input is set to 0 and the address mode of L2 Source A L2 Source B L3 Source A L3 Source B L4 Source A L4 Source B are immediate mode these value shall be 0 Default Values e 2 Source A L2 Source B L3 Source A L3 Source B L4 Source A L4 Source B 0 Zero means Address not assigned Display With Input 0 Zero means Display Only mode On a true rung status the LCD instruction operation depends on how to set the Display With Input operand value If Display With Input operand is clear 0 LCD instruction mode is set to String or and number display If Display With Input operand is set 1 LCD instruction mode is set to String ot and number display and value input User can use two operands per line message to display the two different data If Integer or Bit or Long d
375. g the data file s properties page and checking the Web View Disable check box as shown below Any data file property changes must be made offline and downloaded to the processor Data File Properties General File 3 Type B Name BINARY Desc el Elements ho Last 0 7 Attributes r Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Protection C Constar C Static Memory Module Download Cancel Apply Help Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter J Function Files This chapter describes controller function files The chapter is organized as follows Overview on page 50 Real Time Clock Function File on page 51 e Memory Module Information Function File on page 54 Base Hardware Information Function File on page 56 e Communications Status File on page 57 e Ethernet Communications Status File on page 71 e Input Output Status File on page 79 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 50 Function Files Overview Function Files Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1100 controller Program Files and Data Files are the others Function Files provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources Controller resources are resident permanent features such as the Real Time Clock and High Speed Counter The features are available to the control program through either instructions that are dedicated to a specif
376. g this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 Destination is the string element where you want the string stored Control is the control data file See page 313 e String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters are read and moved to the destination A length of 0 defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 332 ASCII Instructions Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ARL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files 2 Mode 7 E cs o T Parameter ELER E S a amp o S ja j3 o z S S d E o lo o e EIE HESE e o l Qu o 53 e S S S ms A z a
377. ge Valid types are e01 Read Coil Status e 02 Read Input Status e 03 Read Holding Registers e 04 Read Input Registers e 05 Write Single Coil e 06 Write Single Register e15 Write Multiple Coils e 16 Write Multiple Registers Data Table Address For a Read this is the starting address which receives data Valid file types are B T C R ST N and L for Modbus commands B and N only For a Write this is the starting address which is sent to the target device Valid file types are 0 1 B T C R N L ST 9 ang RTCUY2 for Modbus commands B and N only Size in elements Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Defines the length of the message in elements e 1 word elements valid size 1 to 103 e 2 word elements valid size 1 to 51 e 8 word RTC elements valid size 1 e 42 word String elements valid size 1 to 2 e Timer 500CPU and 485CIF Counter and Control elements valid size 1 to 34 e PLC 5 Timer elements valid size 1 to 20 e Modbus bit elements 1 to 1920 e Modbus register elements 1 to 120 Communications Instructions 315 Parameter Target Device Message Timeout Description Defines the amount of time the controller waits for the reply before the message errors A timeout of 0 seconds means that the controller waits indefinitely for a reply Valid range is from 0 to 255 seconds Data Table Address 500CPU and PLC5 message types For a Read this is the
378. ge 336 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AWT Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False 13 99 us character 14 21 us Use the AWT instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device MicroLogix 1100 Programming AWT Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCH instruction with conditional logic that either detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater IMPORTANT Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction executes on a true rung Once started if the rung goes false the instruction continues to completion If you want to repeat this instruction the rung must transition from false to true Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 320 ASCII Instructions When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 336 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 e Source is the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 313 e String Length
379. ge 61 e DF1 Half Duplex Slave on page 62 e DF1 Half Duplex Master on page 63 e DF1 Radio Modem on page 64 e Modbus RTU Slave on page 65 Modbus RTU Master on page 67 e ASCII on page 68 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 60 Function Files DH 485 Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 0 9 Total Message Packets Received 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 0 to 7 Message Packet Retries 8to15 Retry Limit Exceeded Non Delivery 12 0to7 INAK No Memories Sent 8to 15 NAK No Memories Received 13 0to7 Total Bad Message Packets Received 8to15 Reserved 14 to 22 Reserved Channel Status E 2 0 xl TU Channel 1 DH 485 Messages Received Messages Sent 1 Total Bad Packets Received D ent J Messages Retried od D Retry Limit Exceeded Sent NAK No Memory Received NAK No Memo Active Nodes 0 10 20 30 olojo 010100 to 0900 10 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 ojo fo 100 0 loojo foo Clear Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 61 DF1 Full Duplex Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 7 8 Format Code always 1 9 CTS RTS 0 1
380. get node is out of memory 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected 70H PCCC Description Processor is in Program Mode 80H PCCC Description Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem 81H Modbus Error 1 Illegal Function 82H Modbus Error 2 Illegal Data Address 83H Modbus Error 3 Illegal Data Value 84H Modbus Error 4 Slave Device Failure 85H Modbus Error 5 Acknowledge 86H Modbus Error 6 Slave Device Busy 87H Modbus Error 7 Negative Acknowledge 88H Modbus Error 8 Memory Parity Error 89H Modbus Error Non standard reply Actual code returned can be found in the upper byte of sub element 22 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 415 Error Code Description of Error Condition 90H PCCC Description Remote station cannot buffer command BOH PCCC Description Remote station problem due to download COH PCCC Description Cannot execute command due to active IPBs DOH No IP address configured for the network or Bad command unsolicited message error or Bad address unsolicited message error or No privilege unsolicited message error or Multihop messaging cannot route request D1H Maximum connections used no connections available D2H Invalid internet address or host name D3H No such host exists D4H Cannot communicate with the name server
381. gh word 157 Low word 158 High word Total Commands Received Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Channel Status Channel 0 Channel 1 General f Replies Connections Port Ethernet Status IP Address 0 0 0 0 Sent Received J Ethernet Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Function Files 71 Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block continued Word Bit Description 159 Low word Total Replies Sent 160 High word 161 Low word Total Replies Received 162 High word 163 Low word Total Replies Sent with Error High word 64 165 Low word Total Replies Received with Error 166 High word 167 Low word Total Replies Timed Out 168 High word 3 Channel Status Bl x Channel 0 Channel 1 Ethernet Status IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 General Commands H pli S Connections Port Sent T Received D 1 Sent with error D Received with error J od Timed Out Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 78 Function Files Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block continued Word Bit Description 169 Low word Total Message Connections 170 High word 171 Low word Total Incoming Messages 172 High word 173 Low word Total Outgoing Messages 14 High word 175 Low word Maximum Connections Allowed 176 High word 3 Channel Status Channel 0 Channel 1
382. gister The maximum BCD source values permissible are e 9999 if the source is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the source is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S 13 and the high order digit in 8 14 If the source is the math register it must be directly addressed as 8 13 8 13 is the only status file element that can be used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Conversion Instructions 205 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow sets if non BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always resets TIP Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non BCD digit S1 EQU FRD L JgMp 3 EQUAL FROM BCD 15 Source A N7 1 Source 1 0 0 0 0 Source B I 0 0 Dest N72 0 0 MOV MOVE Source 1 0 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value 1 0 remains the same for two consecutive scans b
383. guration Analog Input Configuration Generic Extra Data Contig ward O ford 1 Filter Filter V Enable on Hz V Enable eo Hz Input Range Input Range Oto 10 voc 4 to 20 mA Data Format Data Format Engineering Units fs caled for PID m word 2 ea r wand m Enable eo Hz z Enable jo Hz zi Input Range Input Range 10 10 VOC zj 1 lo 10 vDE s Data Format Data Format F aw Proportional F Raw Prenortional E Lom joe __ Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 300 Process Control Instruction Application Notes The following paragraphs discuss e Input Output Ranges e Scaling to Engineering Units e Zero crossing Deadband Output Alarms Output Limiting with Anti reset Windup e The Manual Mode e Feed Forward ATTENTION Do not alter the state of any PID control block value A unless you fully understand its function and how it will affect your process Unexpected operation could result with possible equipment damage and or personal injury Input Output Ranges The input module measuring the process variable PV must have a full scale binary range of 0 to 16383 If this value is less than 0 bit 15 set then a value of zero is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set bit 12 of word 0 in the control block If the process variable is greater than 16383 bit 14 set then a value of 16383 is used for PV and the Process var out of
384. h Speed Outputs 155 PWM Error Detected ED Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM ED Error Detected bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PWM 0 ER e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in an error state Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in an error state PWM Normal Operation NS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access NS PWM Normal Operation PWM O NS fbit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM NS Normal Operation bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM is in its normal state A normal state is defined as ACCEL RUN or DECEL with no PWM errors e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in its normal state Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in its normal state PWM Enable Hard Stop EH Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM O EH bit 00r 1 control read write
385. h file 5 120 programming device G 601 programming instructions 4 81 proportional integral derivative application notes 19 300 PID instruction 19 282 PID tuning 79 304 runtime errors 19 298 the PID concept 19 279 the PID equation 19 280 protocol G 601 DF1 full duplex D 505 DF1 half duplex D 506 DF1 radio modem D 517 DH485 communication D 502 Modbus RTU D 524 protocol configuration D 501 E 541 F 571 PTO function file 6 133 instruction 6 127 Quick Start example E 541 publications related P 14 pulse train output function file 6 133 instruction 6 127 Quick Start example F 547 pulse width modulation function file 6 150 instruction 6 149 Quick Start example E 544 Purpose of this Manual P 13 PWM function file 6 150 instruction 6 149 Quick Start example E 544 0 quadrature encoder 5 177 queue 22 427 RAC instruction 5 779 RCP instruction 22 427 read G 601 real time clock accuracy 3 52 battery low indicator bit 3 52 disabling 3 52 function file 3 57 real time clock Quick Start example 556 real time clock adjust instruction 3 53 recipe 22 427 recipe instruction 22 427 611 REF instruction 17 258 refresh instruction 17 258 related publications P 14 relay G 601 relay logic G 601 relay type instructions 7 159 remote messages 21 388 remote packet support D 504 RES instruction 8 177 reserved bit G 607 reset accumulated value instruction 5 779 reset instruction 8 177 restore G 601 RET instruc
386. h slave station address comes up next in the poll list not the order in which the MSG instructions were executed and transmitted When a slave station receives a poll packet from the master station if it has one or more message packets queued up to transmit either replies to a command received earlier or MSG commands triggered locally in ladder logic the slave station will transmit the first message packet in the transmit queue If the standard mode selection is 577g e message per poll scan then the master station will then go to the next station in the poll list If the standard mode selection is multiple messages per poll scan the master station will continue to poll this slave station until its transmit queue is empty The master station knows the slave station has no message packets queued up to transmit when the slave station responds to the master poll packet with a 2 byte poll response Every time a slave station responds or fails to respond to its poll packet the master station automatically updates its Active Node Table again even if it s in program mode In this list one bit is assigned to each possible slave station address 0 to 254 If a slave station does not respond when it is polled its Acttve Node Table bit is cleared If it does respond when it is polled its Active Node Table bit is set Besides being an excellent online troubleshooting tool two common uses of the Active Node Table are to
387. h the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the EII Event Interrupt Enable EIE bit when the controller enters any executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using Interrupts 277 Ell Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the EII sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set look at the specific error code in parameter EII 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller Ell Edge Select ES Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only The ES Edge Select bit selects the type of trigger that causes an Event Interrupt This bit allows the EII to be configured for rising edge off to on 0 to 1 or falling edge on to off 1 to 0 signal detection This selection is based on the type of field device that is connected to the controller The default condition is 1 which configures the EI for rising edge operation Ell Input Select IS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Ac
388. half the value needed to cause the output to oscillate when the reset and rate terms below are set to zero Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 290 Process Control Instruction TIP Controller gain is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 294 Reset Term T Tuning Parameter Address X Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access Tl Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word 0 to 32 767 control read write INT Reset T word 4 is the Integral gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 327 67 when RG 1 minutes per repeat Set the reset time equal to the natural period measured in the above gain calibration A value of 1 adds the maximum integral term into the PID equation TIP Reset term is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 294 Rate Term T Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TD Rate Term T PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Rate T4 word 5 is the Derivative term The adjustment range is 0 to 327 67 minutes Set this value to 1 8 of the integral gain T TIP This word is not effected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 294 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Inst
389. han 3 greater than 255 or does not exist 2 Invalid Mode n a Invalid Mode 3 Invalid High 0 1 High preset is less than or equal to zero 0 Preset 2to7 High preset is less than or equal to low preset 4 Invalid Overflow 0 to 7 High preset is greater than overflow 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 94 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Function Enabled FE Description Address Data Format Hsc Modes Type User Program Access FE Function HSC O FE bi Enabled t Oto7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The FE Function Enabled is a status control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt 1s enabled and that interrupts generated by the HSC are processed based on their priority This bit can be controlled by the user program or is automatically set by the HSC sub system if auto start is enabled See also Priority of User Interrupts on page 261 Auto Start AS Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access AS Auto Start HSC O AS bit 0 to 7 control read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The AS Auto Start is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the HSC function automatically star
390. hannel Status Channel 0 Channel 1 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Messages Sent Messages Received Messages Retried Undelivered Messages Received NAK Lack of Memory Bad Packets Received 1 Polls Received Duplicate Messages Received z J D D D Modem Lines RTS CTS Clear Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 63 DF1 Half Duplex Master Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 3 g 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13 Message Packets Retried 14 Reserved 15 Polls Sent 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 No Buffer Space Received Packet Dropped 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19 Last Normal Poll List Scan 20 Max Normal Poll List Scan 21 Last Priority Poll List Scan 22 Max Priority Poll List Scan O x Channel Status E f Channel 1 DF1 Half Duple Master Messages Sent Las Messages Retried m Messages Received Undelivered Messages Polls Sentz 1 Duplicate Messages Received Lackofmemory 1 Bad Packets Received 9 Last Normal Poll List Scan 100ms J Max Normal Poll List Scan 1
391. has no impact on the operation Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 419 e MultiHop Cannot edit Routing Information File Routing Information File must be Routing Information File Break Connection BK This bit has no impact on the operation IP Address of MultiHop IP Address of MultiHop must be local IP Address 127 0 0 1 or its own IP Address TIP If you sent a message with Data Table Offset 0 1 or 3 to change IP Address Subnet Mask or Gateway Address respectably these addresses will be applied after power cycle If you want to change IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address right away you must send another Ethernet message to the local IP Address with Data Table Offset 10 WARNING If you sent an Ethernet message to the local IP Address A with Data Table Offset 10 and the different IP Address has been configured all the Ethernet connection is broken Email Functionality This section describes how to configure a SMTP email message when you use Ethernet communication channel 1 of the MicroLogix 1100 Setup SMTP Configuration File While the processor is selected to MicroLogix 1100 Series B SMTP Client Enable check box is shown in the Ethernet Channel Configuration tab If this check box is checked SMTP configuration page will be appeared Otherwise SMTP configuration page will not be appeared You must setup SMTP configuration before sending SMTP mes
392. he STI Recoverable See the Error Code in the STI Function File for configuration the specific error 0028 INVALID OR e A fault routine number was Non User e Either clear the fault routine file number NONEXISTENT USER entered in the status file number S 29 in the status file or FAULT ROUTINE 8 29 but either the fault routine o create a ta ltroutine tor the T Te RURDSE VALUE was not physically created or reference in the status file S 29 The file ethe fault routine number was less number must be greater than 2 and less than 3 or greater than 255 than 256 0029 INSTRUCTION An indirect address reference in the Recoverable Correct the program to ensure that there are INDIRECTION ladder program is outside of the no indirect references outside data file space OUTSIDE OF DATA entire data file space SPACE Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Fault Messages and Error Codes 495 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 002E Ell ERROR An error occurred in the Ell Recoverable See the Error Code in the Ell Function File for configuration the specific error 0030 SUBROUTINE The JSR instruction nesting level Non User Correct the user program to reduce the NESTING EXCEEDS exceeded the controller memory nesting levels used and to meet the LIMIT space restrictions for the JSR instruction Then reload t
393. he accumulator of a tetentive timer use an RES instruction See RES Reset on page 177 How Counters Work Timer and Counter Instructions 173 The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 732 767 the counter status overflow bit OV is set 1 If the count goes below 32 768 the counter status underflow bit UN is set 1 A reset RES instruction is used to reset 0 the counter 32 768 0 132 767 Count Up Counter Accum lator Value Count Down Underflow Overflow Using the CTU and CTD Instructions Counter instructions use the following parameters e Counter This is the address of the counter within the data file All counters are 3 word data elements Word 0 contains the Control and Status Bits Word 1 contains the Preset and Word 2 contains the Accumulated Value Word Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Word 0 U CD DN OV UN Not Used Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value CU Count Up Enable Bit CD Count Down Enable Bit DN Count Done Bit OV Count Overflow Bit UN Count Underflow Bit Preset When the accumulator reaches this value the DN bit is set The preset data range is from 32768 to 32767 e Accumulator The accumulator contains the current count The accumulator data range is from 32768 to 32767 The accumulated value is increm
394. he attached memory module At power up ot on Information Function detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series File revision and type are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program If a memory module is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file The memory module function file programming screen is shown below 7 2 Function Files HSC PTO PwM sr e hRrC LcD wg SSS HE CN 4 Catalog Number Integer H SRS Series H REV Revision H FT Functionality Type H MP Module Present WP Write Protect Indicator H LPC Load Program Compare HLE Load On Error L Load Always L MB Mode Behavior 0 0 0 0 0 H FO Fault Override 0 0 0 0 0 The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below MMI Function File Parameters Access MP Module Present MMI 0 MP binary bit status read only FO Fault Override MMI 0 FO binary bit control read only LE Load On Error MMI 0 LE binary bit control read only lA LoadAlways MMEO LA binay bit control read only MB Mode Behavior MMI 0 MB binary bit control read only FT Functionality Type The LSB of this word identifies the type of module installed Memory Module MM1 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 55 MP Module Present The MP Module Present bit can be used in the user program to determine when a
395. he controller immediately scans the configured subroutine Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Sub Elements Summary Event Input Interrupt Function File EII 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number EII 0 PFN word INT control read only 274 ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read only 274 UIX User Interrupt Executing EII 0 UIX binary bit status read only 275 UIE User Interrupt Enable EII 0 UIE binary bit control read write 275 UIL User Interrupt Lost EIl 0 UIL binary bit status read write 275 UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only 276 EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EIlO EIE binary bit control read write 276 AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit control read only 276 ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only 277 ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only 277 IS Input Select EIL 0 1S word INT control read only 277 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 274 Using Interrupts Ell Function File Sub Elements Ell Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number EIlO PFN word INT control read only PEN Program File Number defines which subroutine is called executed when the input terminal assigned to EII 0 detects a signal A
396. he controller status file Math Flag Description S 0 1 Overflow V Flag is set if the result is outside of the valid range 0 2 Zero Z Hag is set if the result is zero 0 3 Sign S Flag is set if the result is negative S 5 0 Overflow Trap Flag is set when the Overflow flag S 0 1 is set S 5 15 ASCII String Flag is set if the Source string exceeds 82 characters Manipulation Error When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code S 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACN Instruction Controller When Instruction Is MicroLogix 1100 True 50 15 us 0 11 us character False 0 87 us Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 326 ASCII Instructions The ACN instruction combines two ASCII strings The second string 1s appended to the first and the result stored in the destination Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source A is the first string in the concatenation procedure e Source B is the second string in the concatenation procedure e Destination is where the result of Source A and B is stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACN Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Files Func
397. he process variable PV in the PID instruction is designed to work with a data range of 0 to 16 383 The 1769 Compact I O analog modules 1769 IF4 and 1769 OF2 are capable of on board scaling Scaling data is required to match the range of the analog input to the input range of the PID instruction The ability to perform scaling in the I O modules reduces the amount of programming required in the system and makes PID setup much easiet The example shows a 1769 IF4 module The IF4 has 4 inputs which are individually configurable In this example analog input 0 is configured for 0 to 10V and is scaled in engineering units Word 0 is not being used in a PID instruction Input 1 word 1 is configured for 4 to 20 mA operation with scaling configured for a PID instruction This configures the analog data for the PID instruction Field Device Input Signal Analog Register Scaled Data 20 0 mA 16 384 to 17 406 20 0 mA 16 383 4 0 mA 0 4 0 mA 819 to 1 The analog configuration screen is accessed from within RSLogix 500 Simply double click on the I O configuration item in the Controller folder and then double click on the specific I O module The configuration for the analog output is virtually identical Simply address the PID control variable CV to the analog output address and configure the analog output to Scaled for PID behavior Module 1 1769 IF4 Analog 4 Channel Input Module x Expansion General Confi
398. he program and Run 0031 UNSUPPORTED The program contains an Non User e Modify the program so that all instructions INSTRUCTION instruction s that is not supported are supported by the controller DETECTED by the controller e Re compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode 0032 S00 SQC SOL A sequencer instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA position parameter references length and position parameters do not point FILE SPACE outside of the entire data file space outside data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0033 BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL The length position parameter of a Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the LFU CROSSED DATA BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL or LFU length and position parameters do not point FILE SPACE instruction references outside of the outside of the data space entire data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0034 NEGATIVE VALUE IN A negative value was loaded toa Recoverable e f the program is moving values to the TIMER PRESET OR timer preset or accumulator accumulated or preset word of a timer ACCUMULATOR make certain these values are not negative e Reload the program and enter the Run mode 0035 ILLEGAL The program contains a Temporary Non Recoverable e Correct the program INSTRUCTION IN End TND Refresh REF or Service INTERRUPT FILE Communication instruction in
399. he rung marked LBL label number Jamps can be forward or backward in ladder logic within the same program file Multiple JMP instructions may cause execution to proceed to the same label The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 250 Program Control Instructions LBL Label 02 0 iB Tr JSR Jump to Subroutine JSR _ Jump To Subroutine SBR File Number U 255 SBR Subroutine Label SBR Subroutine Instruction Type input Execution Time for the LBL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 10 78 us 0 78 us The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump JMP instruction to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL abe number The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Instruction Type output Execution Time for the JSR Instruction When Rung Is Controller MicroLogix 1100 The JSR instruction causes the controller to start executing a separate subroutine file within a ladder program JSR moves program execution to the designated subroutine SBR e number After executing the SBR control proceeds to the instruction following the JSR instruction The immediate data range for the JSR file is from 3 to 255 I
400. hes through mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R6 21 FD is set in the example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and compared to the masked value stored in source TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 242 Sequencer Instructions e Mask The mask operand contains the mask constant word or file which is applied to both file and source When mask bits are set to 1 da ta is allowed to pass through for comparison When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to for co Ox mpatison The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to FEFF or 0 to OXFFFFFFFE TIP If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file e Source This is the value that is compared to file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length an co Word 0 d the position value are stored in this element The control element nsists of 3 words Word 1 Length contains the number of steps in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Ena
401. hift Right EN File B3 3 icons Execution Time for the BSR Instruction Control R6 0 CDN 5 Bit Address 0 15 Controller When Rung Is Length 1 True False MicroLogix 1100 34 5 us 0 2 us word 34 5 us If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted right through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction Unload Bit R6 0 10 47 46 45 J44 43 42 41 M40 439 38 37 136 35 34 33 2 38Bit Array 63 62 61 J60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 4B3 2 INVALID 69 68 67 66 65 64 j l i dl 3 Data block is shifted one bit at Source Bit a time from bit 69 to bit 32 23 06 This instruction uses the following operands e File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated Control The control operand is the address of the BSR s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Word 2 Size of bit array number of bits not used 1 2 3 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position ER Error Bit when set indi
402. ic function file or via standard instructions such as MOV and ADD The Function File types are File Name File File Description Identifier High Speed Counter HSC This file type is associated with the High Speed Counter function See Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 89 for more information Pulse Train Output PTO This file type is associated with the Pulse Train Output Instruction See Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File on page 133 for more information Pulse Width Modulation PWM This file type is associated with the Pulse Width Modulation instruction See Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File on page 150 for more information Selectable Timed Interrupt STI This file type is associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information Event Input Interrupt Ell This file type is associated with the Event Input Interrupt instruction See Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File on page 272 for more information Real Time Clock RTC This file type is associated with the Real Time Clock time of day function See Real Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Memory Module MMI This file type contains information about the Memory Module See Memory Module Information Information Function File on page 54 for more information Base Hardware Information BHI This fil
403. icroLogix 1100 OS Series B can only send remote ethernet messages using EtherNet IP messages The local version of EtherNet IP messages use the Ox4B Execute PCCC service code whereas the remote version needs to use the Ox4C Execute DH service code The remote Ethernet message setup screen works the same as for a remote DH 485 message Selecting remote in the selectable local remote field shows two new fields Remote Station Address and Remote Bridge Link ID Also following set up is needed in RSLinx side for MicroLogix 1100 unsolicited MSG communication with OPC client Remote Bridge Link ID 15 dec e Remote Station Address 63 dec e Chan 1 Network Link ID 0 e Source Station Address 0 always There are four steps required to send unsolicited message to RSLinx DDE OPC client applications via EtherNet IP e Configure a new DDE OPC topic in RSLinx for unsolicited data Configure Remote Routing Configuration Configure the DDE topic and Item in RSLinx e Configure the ML1100 MSG instruction 1 Configure a new DDE OPC topic in RSLinx for unsolicited data Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 405 In RSLinx select DDE OPC menu then select Topic Configuration Click new enter a topic name and click OK The DDE OPC Topic Configuration dialog will appear DDE OPC Topic Configuration DDE OPC Topic Configuration MLI100_UNSOLICITEDMSG AB_ETH 1 A B Ethernet RUNNI
404. ient Temperature Accuracy 0 C 32 F 13 to 121 seconds month 25 C 77 F 54 to 54 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 to 78 seconds month 55 C 131 F 43 to 150 seconds month 1 These numbers are worst case values over a 31 day month RTC Battery Operation The real time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the controller uses The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which shows the status of the replacement battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery wire connector could be disconnected or if the battery is connected the battery may be ready to fail in the next two days In the latter case the replacement battery needs to be replaced with a new one When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more than 14 A days or 8 hours without the battery may result in invalid RTC data if power is removed from the controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Function Files 53 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RTA Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 4 37 us 4 09 us The RTA instruction is used to synchronize the controllers Real Time Clock RTC with an external source The RTA instruction
405. iles 3 R6 CONTROL Right click and select Nem E N7 INTEGER Ei F8 FLOAT S E Data Logging 2 Create a RCP File E Configuration E Status m FRCP Configuration Files E rg Force Files E 00 ouTPUT Paste E n input a Custom Data Monitors Fi CDM 0 Untitled Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Create RCP File Recipe and Data Logging 429 File 0 Number of Recipes fl Name United Description Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files User Program Cancel FEE Help Data Log Queue e File This is the number identifying the RCP file It is the Recipe File Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program and identifies the recipe database e Number of Recipes This is the number of recipes contained in the RCP file This can never be more than 256 This is the Recipe Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program e Name This is a descriptive name for the RCP file Do not exceed 20 characters Description This is the file description optional Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files This allows you to designate a memory location for your RCP files User Program Cannot be used Data Log Queue Recipe data is stored in the data log memory space max 64K bytes IMPORTANT All the recipe data is stored into the cont
406. ing reference wotd the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The mask can be fixed or variable If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you entet an element addtess or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step it is variable When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step wotd in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is set in the SQCs control counter Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Sequencer Instructions 241 The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works Word B10 11 B10 12 B10 13 B10 14 B10 15 Sac Sequencer Compare CEN 5 File B10 11 Mask FFF CDN Source 3 0 Control R6 21 cCFD gt Length 4 lt Position 2 lt Input Word 1 3 0 0010 0100 1001 1101 v Mask Value FFFO 1111 1111 1111 0000 v Sequencer Ref File B10 11 Step 0010 0100 41001 0000 rods SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matc
407. ing the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the first lowest bit position Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The valid data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table BSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 X Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode a Parameter E 2 E e S z male z L SREE le Ble e o S kv jo 9 GS l l ja a E g sil sz o l l lo le le h b l E le le EIS EF GI mls jS a e E e e lsa File ele e e e e ele ele Control 2 Length Source e o e o o e e o e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 228 File Instructions BSR Bit Shift Right Instruction Type output BSR Bit S
408. ion S 7 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Suspend File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 word 0 to 255 status read write When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS file is written to this location S 8 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 9 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 27 SeeActive Node Table Block on page 69 for mote information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 481 Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 10 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such
409. ion The controller bases its decision on the state of the channel s Communication Servicing Selection CSS and Message Servicing Selection MSS bits the network communication requests from other nodes and whether previous message instructions are already in progress If the controller determines that it should not access the queue the message instruction remains as it was Either the EN and EW bits remain set 1 or only the EN bit is set 1 until the next end of scan REE or SVC instruction If the controller determines that it has an instruction in the queue it unloads the communications queue entries into the message buffers until all four message buffers are full If an invalid message is unloaded from the communications queue the ER bit in the MG file is set 1 and a code is placed in the MG file to inform you of an error When a valid message instruction is loaded into a message buffer the EN and EW bits for this message are set 1 The controller then exits the end of scan REF or SVC portion of the scan The controller s background communication function sends the messages to the target nodes specified in the message instruction Depending on the state of the CSS and MSS bits you can service up to four active message instructions per channel at any given time 3 If the target node successfully receives the message it sends back an acknowledge ACK The ACK causes the processor to clear 0 the EW bit and set 1 the ST bi
410. ion Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Mask Example Word Addressing Level Word Value in Value in Binary Hexadecimal 15114113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value in Destination FFFF 1 11 11 1 1 117 5 1 11 11 1111 Before Move Source Value 5555 O J1 JO 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Mask FOFO 1 11 1 11 JO JO 100 1111111 0 0 0 0 Value in Destination 5F5F O 1 JO 1 1 1 11 10 10 41 41 141 1 After Move e Valid constants for the mask are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFE Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 gt Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level D Mode vi S Parameter E 2 E e s amp 2s Bc m F 3 ls 2 T E e GE ln lo l jo _ E la ln Im JE e Je IS JE o l v lm e le lu b lo S f le EF IE OG Ie ie ES 8 S a E 6 2 e e 8 lo Source ele e o o ele e lt lt e Mask o e o o ele e e o o o Destination e o elele ele e wil wie 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect add
411. ite Multiple Holding Registers 16 1 Broadcast is supported for this command Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Master Command FunctionCode SubfunctionCode decimal decimal ReadColStats hh FE Read Input Status 2 Read Holding Registers 3 Read Input Registers 4 Write Single Coil 9 Write Single Holding Register 6 Write Multiple Coils 15 Write Multiple Holding Registers 16 1 Broadcast is supported for this command Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 533 Modbus Error Codes Upon receiving a Modbus command that is not supported or improperly formatted the controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave will respond with one of the exception codes listed in below Modbus Error Codes Returned by Modbus RTU Slave Error Error Description Transmitted Code Exception Code 0 No error none 1 Function Code cannot Broadcast The function does not support Broadcast nothing transmitted 2 Function Code not supported The controller does not support this Modbus function or 1 subfunction 3 Bad Command Length The Modbus Command is the wrong size 3 4 Bad Length The function attempted to read write past the end of a data file 3 5 Bad parameter The function cannot be executed with these parameters 1 6 Bad File Type The file number being referenced is not the proper file type 2 7 Bad File Number The file number doe
412. its equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures PPP gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation MicroLogix and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Firmware Revision History Firmware Upgrades Summary of Changes The information b
413. its on page 212 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 216 Logical Instructions NOT Logical NOT Instruction Type output NOT NOT Soung I Execution Time for the NOT Instruction pest e Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 9 24 us 0 87 us long word 9 49 us 0 87 us The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit by bit one s complement and then place the result in the destination Truth Table for the NOT Instruction Destination A NOTB Source 1 1 11 1 11 10 11 10 JO 10 10 10 1 11 10 10 Destination O JO JO JO JO 1 JO 1 1 1 1 11 JO JO 1 1 For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 211 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 212 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 13 Move Instructions The move instructions mod ify and move words Instruction Used to Page MOV Move Move the source value to the destination 217 MVM Masked Move Move data from a source location to a selected 219 portion of the destination MOV Move Instruction Type output MOV Move somite ee Execution Time for the MOV Instruction nes NEI Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 9 18 us 0 87 us long word 9 21 us 0 87 us The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to
414. its when the control input is at its maximum value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 285 Setpoint MIN MINS InputParameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access MINS Setpoint PD10 0 MINS word 32 768 to 32 767 control read write Minimum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MINS Setpoint Minimum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value TIP Mins MaxS scaling allows you to work in engineering units The deadband error and SPV are also displayed in engineering units The process variable PV must be within the range of 0 to 16383 Use of MinS MaxS does not minimize PID PV resolution Scaled errors greater than 32767 or less than 32768 cannot be represented If the scaled error is greater than 32767 it is represented as 32767 If the scaled error is less than 32768 it is represented as 32768 Old Setpoint Value OSP Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access OSP Old PD10 0 0SP word 32 768 to 32 67 status read only Setpoint Value INT The OSP Old Setpoint Value is substituted for the current setpoint if the current setpoint goes out of range of the setpoint scaling limiting parameters Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 20
415. ive 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1100 PID range when Reset and Gain Range RG bit is set to 1 For more information on reset and gain see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 294 The derivative term rate provides smoothing by means of a low pass filter The cut off frequency of the filter is 16 times greater than the corner frequency of the derivative term Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 PD Data File instruction set H55 C x E ES Project E I E Help E Controller E Program Files 3 Data Files J Cross Reference E co OUTPUT E 1 INPUT STATUS BINARY TIMER COUNTER CONTROL INTEGER PD file created by RSLogix 500 Process Control Instruction 281 The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1100 controllers is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 and higher processors Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology The major difference is that the PID instruction now has its own data file In the SLC family of processors the PID instruction operated as a block of registers within an integer file The Micrologix 1100 PID instruction utilizes a PD data file You can create a PD data file by creating a new data file and classifying it as a PD file type RSLogix automatically creates a new PD file or a PD sub element whenever a PID instruction is programmed o
416. ive the value ot constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load e Position This is the current location pointed to in the FIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value ot constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long wotd Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 7 i 7 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode o E Parameter E 2 E e E S a oo S z n E amp z E z 2 a E mr A ja 2 Lis le 5 E S o l lo lm le lz bl S le ae le IIE b 1G fe E8 le ja le le 2 S lo Source e e e e e e e e e e e e FIFO e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers or Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 232 File
417. ize Record Size 128K bytes 18 bytes 128 1024 18 7281 records Example Queue 5 Queue 5 Time v Delimiter TAB Time N7 11 11 3 0 11 2 1 Record 0 20 00 00 TAB 12315 TAB 8790 TAB 4465 Record 1 20 30 00 TAB 2400 TAB 8210 TAB 4375 Record 2 21 00 00 TAB 2275 TAB 8150 TAB 4335 Record 3 21 30 00 TAB 2380 TAB 8195 TAB 4360 Record 4 22 00 00 TAB 2293 TAB 8390 TAB 4375 Record 5 22 30 00 TAB 2301 TAB 8400 TAB 4405 Record 6 23 00 00 TAB 2308 TAB 8100 TAB 4395 String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 436 Recipe and Data Logging Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters For queue 5 the formatted string length is 29 characters as shown below Data Time N7 11 11 3 0 1122 1 Characters 8 1 6 1 6 1 J6 2841464146416 289characters Number of Records Using Queue 5 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes 11 2 1 2 bytes Integrity
418. k box to enhance communication capability If this 1s checked and the Communication Servicing Selection check box is not checked the MSG functionality throughput and scan time will increase e When this check box is checked the controller services one outgoing channel 0 or channel 1 MSG instruction at the next Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing When this check box is clear unchecked the controller services all outgoing channel 0 or channel 1 MSG instructions at the next Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing e The Message Servicing Selection Channel 0 or channel 1 bit is applied by the controller when the Communications Servicing Selection Channel 0 or channel 1 bit is clear unchecked Enabling the MSG Instruction for Continuous Operation The message instruction is enabled during the initial processor program scan and each time the message completes For example when the DN or ER bit is set MSG 0000 Read Write Message C MSG File MG11 0 lt Setup Screen I CER 5 Message Done Bit Message Enable Bit MG11 0 G11 0 0001 JE U gt DN EN Message Error Bit MG11 0 JE e da ER 0002 CEND gt Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 uM CICER iE i MicroLogix 1100 Local
419. ke appropriate action and then clear bit 5 0 using an OTU instruction with S 5 0 Control Register Error Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 2 binary 00r 1 status read write The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit 5 2 is set 1 it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit 5 2 using an OTU instruction with S 5 2 Major Error Detected in User Fault Routine Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 3 binary Oor1 status read write When set 1 the major error code S 6 represents the major error that occurred while processing the User Fault Routine due to another major error Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 478 System Status File Memory Module Boot Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 8 binary 00r 1 status read write When this bit 1s set 1 by the controller it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to 1 10 Load Memory Module on Error or Default Program
420. ked Move MVM Masked Move Source N7 0 0 lt Mask N7 1 0000h lt Dest N7 2 0 lt Move Instructions 219 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MVM Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 12 8 us 0 87 us long word 13 18 us 0 87 us The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination allowing portions of the destination to be masked The mask bit functions as follows Mask Function for MVM Instruction Source Bit Mask Bit Destination Bit 1 0 last state 0 0 last state 1 1 1 0 1 0 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the Destination that correspond to zeros in the Mask are not altered Using the MVM Instruction When using the MVM instruction observe the following e Source Mask and Destination must be of the same data size ie all words or all long words To mask data set the mask bit to zero to pass data set the mask bit to one The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address TIP Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered as shown in the shaded areas in the following table Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 220 Move Instructions MVM Instruct
421. kplane Link Undefined H 1756 DHRIO Slot 6 Channel DH Link Undefined Channel B DH Link Undefined LoadFromFile SavetoFile Restore Defaults Refresh Right click on the Backplane and left click on Edit Module Make sure that the Back plane Link ID is set to 20 Right click on the 1756 DHRIO module and left click on Edit Module Make sure that CH A s Link ID is set for 7 and CH B s Link ID is set for 2 Select OK Channel B is actually not necessary Right click on the Backplane and left click on Add Module Left click on 1756 ENET Enter the correct slot number 2 and Link ID 16 for the ENET module Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 398 Communications Instructions Right click on the 1756 ENET Link ID and left click on Add Module Left click on AB PLC Enter the IP address 100 100 115 1 for the destination Ethernet processor and its Link ID 24 The Configuration should now look like the following 1756 DHRIO Configuration 2 x General DHRIO Routing Table Channel Configuration 1756 DHRIO Slot 6 Channel DH Link 7 Channel B DH Link 2 f 1756 ENET Slot 2 ENET Link 16 zB AB PLC LP Address 100 100 115 1 AB PLC Link 24 Load From File SavetoFile Restore Defaults Refresh The following is the logic necessary for the MicroLogix 1100 processor RSLogix 500 Pro UNTITLE
422. l DFT Full Duplex 11 39 1 20 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 00 DF1 Half Duplex 1 18 1 12 1 09 1 08 1 07 1 07 1 06 1 06 1 01 DH 485 N A 1 14 1 10 N A N A N A N A N A 1 06 at 19 2K 1 09 at 9 6K Modus 121 172 H0 X8 08 08 H0 H0 T Asc 1 52 1 33 1 24 1 20 1 18 1 18 1 18 1 17 1 00 ut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not connected to a network 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 Series B Processors only Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 464 MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Appendix B System Status File The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information IMPORTANT Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to status file data it is imperative that you first understand the function fully Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 466 Status File Overview System Status File The status file S contains the following words Address Function Page S0 Anthmetcrlags M6
423. l queues The memory used for data logging is independent of the rest of the processor memory and cannot be accessed by the User Program Each recotd is stored as the instruction is executed and is non volatile battery backed to prevent loss during power down Data Files Function Files Specialty Files 0 Q0 1 a 2 02 3 Q3 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 434 Recipe and Data Logging Example Queue 0 This queue is used to show how to calculate the string length of each record and maximum numbet of records Queue 0 Date v Time v Delimiter Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 B3 2 Record 01 10 2000 20 00 00 2315 03457 200 8190 4465 Record 01 10 2000 20 30 00 2400 03456 250 8210 4375 Record2 01 10 2000 21 00 00 2275 03455 225 8150 4335 Record3 01 10 2000 21 3000 2380 03455 223 8195 4360 Record4 01 10 2000 22 00 00 2283 03456 218 8390 4375 Record 01 10 2000 2230 00 2301 03455 231 8400 4405 Record6 01 10 2000 23 00 00 2308 03456 215 8100 4395 Record 01 10 2000 23 3000 2350 03457 208 8120 4415 Record8 01 11 2000 00 00 00 2295 03457 209 8145 4505 Recordg 01 11 2000 00 30 00 2395 0
424. lator value 1 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 1 Up Counter with External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 1 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSC0 111 0 0 3 HS C0 CE Bit Comments Function Count Not Used Reset Hold Example 1 on off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 0 Example 2 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example3 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 4 on U off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 5 I Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 3 are available for use as inputs to other Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 functions regardless of the HSC being used Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 2 Counter with External Direction 109 HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HS C0 CEBit Comments Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used Exampl
425. le destination must be a word size file If LIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 237 Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or double words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates LIFO is empty e Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the LIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word ot 1 to 64 long word Position This is the next location in the LIFO stack where data will be unloaded Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload LFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62
426. le 9 The CIF in the MicroLogix 1000 controller is Integer File 7 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 366 Communications Instructions Modbus Command 3 MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 1 General r This Controller Channel Modbus Command oi Read Coil Status Oxxxx Data Table Address 01 Read Coil Status sxxx Size in Elements 02 Read Input Status 19x x 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxxx 04 Read Input Registers 3 xxx 05 Write Single Coil Oxxxx DE Write Single Register 4xxxx 15 Write Multiple Coils Oxxxx m Target Device Message Timeout MB Data Address 1 655536 m Control Bits Message Transmitting ST o 10 x Ignore if timed out TO o Awaiting Execution EW 8 Error ER fo Message done DN 8 Message Enabled EN e Slave Node Address dec 15 Write Multiple Registers 4xxxx 1 1 r Error Error Code Hex 0 r Error Description No errors The controller supports eight Modbus commands If the target device supports any of these Modbus command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported Modbus commands include Modbus Command Types Modbus Command Used For 01 Read Coil Status reading bits 02 Read Input Status reading bits 03 Read Holding Registers reading words
427. le open up RSLinx and under Communication select RSWho Select a dtiver that will allow you to see and connect up to the DHRIO module ay Linx Gateways Ethemet gs AB_DF1 1 DH 485 00 ge AB ETH l Ethemet RSLink 1756DHRI gs AB KT 1 DH 485 00 Workstation RSLinx ali B 01 1756 DHRIO B 1756 DHRIO B 75 75 PLC 5 20E LAB1 520 LAB1_520 H a AB_KTC 1 ControlNet For Help press F1 E s n E E EZ Publication 1763 RMO001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 397 Right Click your mouse on top of the DHRIO module and a drop down box will open RSLinx Gateway RSWho 1 File Edi View Communications Station DDE OPC Security Window Help 2 S18 lle X EI RSWho 1 Iv Autobrowse Browsing node 0 found Workstation zm Linx Gateways Ethernet d AB_DF1 1 DH 485 00 a za AB_ETH 1 Ethernet RSlins 1756 DHRI zu AB KT 1 DH 485 a s ii 01 1756 DHBID B A756 OEIC J 75 75 PLC 5 Remove LAB1 520 ss AB_KTC 1 CE Driver Diagnostics Configure Driver Device Properties Module Statistics For Help press F1 Module Configuration Select Module Configuration by clicking with the left mouse button Select DHRIO Routing Table tab If no routing table has been created the following should appear 1756 DHRIO Configuration 2 x General DHRIO Routing Table Channel Configuration 93 Bac
428. lection Bits CSS and Message Servicing Selection Bits MSS in the Channel Communication Configuration File Refer to Communication Servicing Selection and Message Servicing Selection on page 359 for more information For best results place the SVC instruction in the middle of the control program You may not place an SVC instruction in a Fault DII STI or I O Event subroutine Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Channel Select Communications Instructions 345 When using the SVC instruction you must select the channel to be serviced The channel select vatiable is a one word bit pattern that determines which channel 1s serviced Each bit corresponds to a specific channel For example bit 0 equals channel 0 When any bit is set 1 the corresponding channel is serviced Controller MicroLogix 1100 Channel Select Setting Channel s Serviced 1h 0 2h 1 3h both Communication Status Bits The following communication status bits allow you to customize or monitor communications servicing See General Channel Status Block on page 58 for additional status information Communication Status Bits Address Description Channel 0 Channel 1 CS0 4 0 ES 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending CS0 4 1 ES 4 1 MPP Incoming Message Reply Pending CS0 4 2 ES 4 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending CS0 4 4 CAB Communications Active Bit Application Example The SVC instruction is used when you wan
429. les Hsc PTO PwM sti Ell Day of Week Sunday 2 DD AMMA YvYY TYR vea Daes p p U FMON Month HH MM SS ED Day IM HR Hour Time o 0 fo C MIN Minute l SEC Second Set Date amp Time H DOW Day Of The Week LDS Disabled Disable Clock L BL RTC Battery is Low cOocooooooo Values can be entered for the Year Month Day Hour Minute and Seconds offline once downloaded the values will take effect immediately Note The Day of the week is calculated by the RTC Online Set Date amp Time Pressing will set the ML1100 clock to the same Date amp Time as the PC connected online Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 17558 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID 3 Function Files Knowledgebase Quick Starts 557 Hsc Pro PwM sti jen ATC par re MMi BHI cso uos Day of Week Gaudy DD MM YYYY Date 1 1 HH MM SS Time 0 0 p Set Date amp Time Disable Clock H MON Month DAY Day r HR Hour H MIN Minute SEC Second DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled BL RTC Battery is Low Disable Clock E a Pressing will disable the RTC from functioning and decrease the drain on the battery during storage RTC 0 BL The Battery Low bit will be set 1 when the battery is low This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 Days after which the RTC data may beco
430. ll wait for an acknowledgement to a message it has transmitted before it retries the message or errors out the message instruction This timeout value is also used for the poll response timeout Reply MSG Timeout 0 to 255 can be set in 20 ms increments only with MSG based Polling Modes 1 x 20 ms Specifies the amount of time the master will wait after receiving an ACK to a master initiated MSG before polling the slave station for its reply Priority Polling Select the last slave station address to priority poll only with Standard Polling Modes 0 Range High Priority Polling Select the first slave station address to priority poll Entering 255 disables priority polling only 255 Range Low with Standard Polling Modes Normal Polling Select the last slave station address to normal poll only with Standard Polling Modes 0 Range High Normal Polling Select the first slave station address to normal poll Entering 255 disables normal polling only 255 Range Low with Standard Polling Modes Normal Poll Group Enter the quantity of active stations located in the normal poll range that you want polled during a 0 Size scan through the normal poll range before returning to the priority poll range If no stations are configured in the Priority Polling Range leave this parameter at 0 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 514 Protocol Configuration
431. located 6 for FIFO stack starting 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions 233 Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If FIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words aa a e a a CR RR E not used 15 Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word
432. logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port IMPORTANT If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction will execute on either a false or true rung However if you want to repeat this instruction the rung must go from false to true When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 336 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 e Source is the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 313 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 318 ASCII Instructions e String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is wtitten This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 84 The number of ch
433. lowing table summarizes possible display issues for each different combination of a RSLogix 500 version and MicroLogix 1100 Series Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller 573 MicroLogix 1100 compatibility with RSLogix500 ML1100 Project of RSLogix500 ML1100 Series A Project of ML1100 Series B Project of version 7 10 or lower RSLogix500 version 7 2 or higher RSLogix500 version 7 2 or higher ML1100 Series A v v 1 ML1100 Series B Display issues may occur Display issues may occur v 1 During Donwload If OF or JF value is set over 20000 then MicroLogix 1100 Series A will report an error before running the PTO or PWM instruction 2 During Upload To set the OF or JF value over 32767 a negative decimal value or hex value should be entered For example to set OF value as 40000 OF 25536 dec or 9C40H hex should be entered OFS value will be also displayed as a negative decimal value if an OFS value is over 32767 No problem with the operation although negative values are displayed New RSLogix500 compatibility with Old RSLogix500 ML1100 Project of ML1100 Series A Project of ML1100 Series B Project of RSLogix500 version 7 10 or RSLogix500 version7 2 or higher RSLogix500 version7 2 or higher lower Upload using RSLogix500 w v Display issues may occur version 7 10 or lower Upload using RSLogix500 v v version
434. lows the control program access to all information pertaining to LCD screen keypad Trimpot Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 LCD Function File Sub Elements Summary LCD Function File LCD Information 447 TIP If the controller is in the run mode TBF TIF TMIN TMAX may not be changing those values can be available of changing only when program is downloaded Function Files HSC PTO PWM sT JE ATC ECU m Mnal ing SCD Start with Customized Display 0 TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 DN LCD Instruction Job Done 1 ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 0 ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 0 TBF Target Bit File Number 0 TIF Target Integer File Number 0 JOG Jog data update Mode Set 0 TMIN Trimpot Low vele 0 L TMAX Trimpot High V 2 POTO Trimpot 0 Data GMIN TMAX 0 POTI Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX 0 WND Instruction Display Window 0 OK OK key in Customized Diepiay 0 ESC ESC key in Customized 0 isplay The LCD Function File contains status information and control configurations for LCD Trimpot and keypad such as e Information about whether to use a customized display at power up e Keypad key in mode and timeout settings e Bit and Integer data files to monitor Current Trimpot values and Trimpot value range settings LCD function file is comprised of 12 sub elements These sub elements are either bit word structures that are used to provide control over L
435. lt Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 2 74 DN 1 2 52 us 4 06 DN 0 us Use the RTO instruction to delay turning on an output The RTO begins to count time base intervals when the rung conditions become true As long as the rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The RTO retains the accumulated value when the following occur rung conditions become false you change the controller mode from run or test to program e the processor loses power e a fault occurs When you return the controller to the RUN or TEST mode and or the rung conditions go true timing continues from the retained accumulated value RTO timers are retained through power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Counter Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When accumulated value gt preset value And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs the appropriate RES instruction is enabled bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated value preset value erung state goes false or e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false To reset t
436. lt is valid at overflow TIP To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The integer value 9760 stored at N7 3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7 0 The maximum BCD value is 9999 TOD 1 ToBCD Source N7 3 The destination value is 9760 lt displayed in BCD format Dest N10 0 sid 9760 MSB LSB Y Y 9 7 6 0 N73 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 9 7 6 0 N70 4 digitBCD 1001 0111 0110 0000 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 210 Conversion Instructions GCD Gray Code GCD Gray Code Source 11 2 0 225 Dest N71 190 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the GCD Instructions Controller MicroLogix 1100 When Rung Is True False 29 06 us 0 87 us The GCD instruction converts Gray code data Source to an integer value Destination If the Gray code input is negative high bit set the Destination is set to 32767 and the overflow flag is set Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table GCD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Data Files Function Files or Address Level a 5 Parameter E i Zg e S 8 S gea E EISE DEOR Eden SE
437. lue is reached When the accumulator equals the preset timing stops The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out TON timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When accumulated value preset value And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs rung state goes false bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated value lt preset value erung state goes false e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 TOF Timer Off Delay TOF Timer Off Delay EN 5 Timer T4 0 Time Base 1 0 CDN gt Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TOF Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions 171 Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 12 68 us 7 08 DN 1 4 03 DN 0 us Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output The TOF instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become false As long as rung conditions remain false the timer increments its accumulator until the p
438. lue of 0 1 minutes repeat 6 0 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 1 and applied to the PID algorithm TIP The rate multiplier TD is not affected by this selection Setpoint Scaling SC Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The SC bit is cleared when setpoint scaling values are specified Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 295 Loop Update Too Fast TF Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TF Loop Update Too PD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write Fast The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations If this bit is set correct the problem by updating your PID loop at a slower rate or move the PID instruction to an STI interrupt routine Reset and rate gains will be in error if the instruction operates with this bit set Derivative Action Bit DA Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit 0or1 control read write When set 1 the derivative rat
439. ly the faster the filter setting the less immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise The less immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise the faster the inputs will be to update Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 0 Configuration 29 Programmable Filter Characteristics Ist Notch Freq Hz Filter Bandwidth 3 Settling Time Resolution Bits dB Freq Hz mSec 10 2 62 100 00 10 50 13 10 20 00 10 60 15 72 16 67 10 250 65 50 4 10 TIP 10 Hz is the default setting eThe total update time is one ladder scan time plus the settling time EXAMPLE If a 250 Hz filter is selected the maximum update Time ladder scan time 4ms Input Channel Filtering The analog input channels incorporate on board signal conditioning to distinguish AC power line noise from normal variations in the input signal Frequency components of the input signal at the filter frequency are rejected Frequency components below the filter bandwidth 3 dB frequency are passed with under 3 dB of attenuation This pass band allows the normal variation of sensor inputs such as temperature pressure and flow transducers to be input data to the processor Noise signals coupled in at frequencies above the pass band are sharply rejected An area of patticular concern is the 50 60 Hz region where pick up from power lines can occur Converting Analog Data The analog input circuits are able to monitor voltage signals a
440. m scaled value MinS to maximum scaled value MaxS If the SPV is configured to be read in engineering units then this parameter corresponds to the value of the process variable in engineering units See Analog I O Scaling on page 299 for more information on scaling Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 289 Tuning Parameters The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parametet Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User For More Descriptions Program Information Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 289 TI Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 290 TD Rate Term T PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 290 TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary Dor 1 control read write 291 LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write 291 ZCD Zero Crossing Deadband PD10 0 7CD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 292 FF Feed Forward Bias PD10 0 FF word INT 16 383 to 416 383 control read write 292 SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only 292 AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit 0or1 control read write 293 CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bi
441. mber The valid subelement number range is from 0 to 41 You can also specify LEN for word 0 and DATA 0 through DATA 40 for words 1 to 41 The subelement represents a word address Examples ST9 2 String File 9 Element 2 ST17 1 LEN String File 17 Element 1 LEN Variable ST13 7 DATA 1 String File 13 Element 7 word 2 characters 2 and 3 Control Data File File Description The control data element is used by ASCII instructions to store control information required to operate the instruction The control data element for ASCII instructions includes status and control bits an error code byte and two character wotds as shown below ASCII Instructions Control Data File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 0605 04 03 02 01 00 0 EN EUZ IDN EM JeR ur 6 gU ppf8 Error Code Byte 1 Number of characters specified to be sent or received LEN 2 Number of characters actually sent or received POS 1 EN Enable Bit indicates that an instruction is enabled due to a false to true transition This bit remains set until the instruction completes execution or generates an error 2 EU Queue Bit when set indicates that an ASCII instruction was placed in the ASCII queue This action is delayed if the queue is already filled 3 DN Asynchronous Done Bit is set when an instruction successfully completes its operation 4 EM Synchronous Done Bit not use
442. mber from 0 to 16383 and written to the Control Variable address If your ladder program sets the manual output level design your ladder program to write to the CV address when in the MANUAL mode Remember that the new CV value is in the range of 0 to 16383 not 0 to 100 Writing to the CV percent CVP with your ladder program has no effect in the MANUAL mode PID Rung State If the PID rung is false the integral sum IS is cleared and CV remains in its last state Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 304 Process Control Instruction Application Examples Feed Forward or Bias Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance This bias can be accomplished using the processor by writing a value to the Feed Forward Bias element word FF See page 292 The value you write is added to the output allowing a feed forward action to take place You may add a bias by writing a value between 16383 and 416383 to word 6 with your programming terminal or ladder program PID Tuning PID tuning requires a knowledge of process control If you are inexperienced it will be helpful if you obtain training on the process control theory and methods used by your company There are a number of techniques that can be used to tune a PID loop The following PID tuning method is general and limited in terms of handling load disturbances When tuning we recommend that chang
443. me five to ten times faster than the natural period of the load The natural period of the load 1s determined by setting the reset and rate parameters to zero and then increasing the gain until the output begins to oscillate When in STI mode this value must equal the STI time interval value loaded in STI 0 SPM The valid range is 0 01 to 10 24 seconds Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 292 Process Control Instruction Zero Crossing Deadband ZCD Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access ZCD Zero Crossing PD10 0 2ZCD word INT O to 32 767 control read write Deadband The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered The deadband is entered at the zero crossing of the process variable and the setpoint This means that the deadband is in effect only after the process variable enters the deadband and passes through the setpoint The valid range is 0 to the scaled maximum or 0 to 16 383 when no scaling exists Feed Forward Bias FF Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access FF Feed Forward PD10 0 FF word 16 383 to 16 383 control read write Bias INT The feed forward bias is used to compensate for disturbances that may affect the CV output Scaled Error SE Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Forma
444. me invalid At this time replace battery The RTC uses the same battety that the controller uses The UID instruction can be used as an output instruction to disable selected user interrupts Once a uset interrupt is disabled the User Interrupt Enable bit UIE for the selected interrupt will be cleared or reset to a zero 0 This stops the interrupt from executing To re enable an interrupt the UIE bit must be set to a one 1 or a UIE instruction must be used The following table indicates the types of interrupts disabled by the UID Interrupt Element Decimal Value Corresponding Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 558 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Interrupt Element Decimal Value Corresponding Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 Reserved N A 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed STI 1 bit 0 Interrupts Note Bits 7 to 115 must be set to zero 18465 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers To disable interrupt s follow these steps 1 Select which Interrupt s to disable from the above table 2 Locate the decimal value for each Interrupt s 3 Add the decimal values together if more then one Interrupt was selected 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction
445. memory module is present on the controller This bit is updated once per scan provided the memory module is first recognized by the controller To be recognized by the controller the memory module must be installed prior to power up or when the controller is in a non executing mode If a memory module is installed when the controller is in an executing mode it is not recognized If a recognized memory module is removed during an executing mode this bit is cleared 0 at the end of the next ladder scan WP Write Protect When the WP Write Protect bit is set 1 the module is write protected and the user program and data within the memory module cannot be overwritten IMPORTANT Once the WP bit is set 1 it cannot be cleared Only set this bit if you want the contents of the memory module to become permanent FO Fault Override The FO Fault Override bit represents the status of the fault override setting of the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the FO bit without actually loading the program from the memory module IMPORTANT The memory module fault override selection in the Memory Module Information MMI file does not determine the controller s operation It merely displays the setting of the user program s Fault Override bit S 1 8 in the memory module See Fault Override At Power Up on page 470 for more information LPC Load Program Compare The LPC Load Program Compare bit
446. ming the slave station monitors its own inputs for a change of state or data which triggers a block of data to be written to the master station when the master station polls the slave About Slave to Slave Messaging If one slave station has a message to send to another it simply includes the destination slave station s address in the message instruction s destination field in place of the master station s address when responding to a poll The master station checks the destination station address in every packet header it recetves from any slave station If the address does not match the slave s own station address the entire message is forwarded back onto the telemetry network to the appropriate slave station without any further processing Addressing Tips Each station on the network including the master station must have a unique address The address range is 0 to 254 so you can have a maximum of 255 stations on a single telemetry network Station address 255 1s the broadcast address which you cannot select as a station s individual address Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 510 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Master Standard Polling Mode With standard polling mode the master device initiates all communication by polling each slave address configured in the priority and normal polling ranges The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master Based on a slave s inclu
447. mmary Modbus Description Valid MicroLogix Addressing Addressing File Type Data File Number Address 0001 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 30001 to 30256 Read Only Modbus Input Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 30501 to 30532 Modbus Communication Parameters Communication Status File 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 40257 to 41280 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 of four Holding Register files 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 41793 to 420480 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 of the last Holding Register file 1 These addresses only become active when specially configured for expanded holding registers Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map Detail Protocol Configuration 531 Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Functi
448. mments Offset 0 Ethernet IP Addres Writable by an element of String File Changes IP Address in Ethernet Communication File Disables BOOTP DHCP flags in Ethernet Communication File Power cycle is required 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask Writable by an element of String File Changes Subnet Mask in Ethernet Communication File Disables BOOTP DHCP flags in Ethernet Communication File Power cycle is required 2 Ethernet Gateway Address Writable by an element of String File Changes Default Gateway Address in Ethernet Communication File Disables BOOTP DHCP flags in Ethernet Communication File Power cycle is required 3 Ethernet Default Domain Name Writable by an element of String File Used for DNS naming in SMTP subsystem 4 Ethernet Primary Name Server Writable by an element of String File Used for DNS naming in SMTP subsystem 5 Ethernet Secondary Name Server Writable by an element of String File Used for DNS naming in SMTP subsystem 10 Apply IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Applies IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address Gateway Address right away configured by Offset 0 1 and 2 right away These parameters are updated to the Ethernet Status File also if they are applied String File configured in MSG instruction will be ignored 40 Flush DNS Cache Flushes all DNS names in DNS Cache before TTL Time to Live timeout String File configured in MSG instruction will be ignored Local Remote Local Remote
449. modem handshaking This setting is critical as the system will not communicate if full duplex modem handshaking isn t applied to the comms channel connected to the modem 3 Configure HyperTerminal for direct connection to the PC COMM port the modem is connected to Make sure the HyperTerminal connection is configured for 9600 baud 4 Save configuration as DataLog 5 Send the following dial out string using HyperTerminal to dial the modem and establish the connection AT amp C1IDT Phone number of destination Modem then press enter your modem will respond CONNECT 9600 Once the connection is established exit HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit from the pull down menu When asked Do you want to close connection select Yes This will only close the connection from HyperTerminal to the RS 232 port The connection will remain active FYI It will appear as though HyperTerminal has disconnected It has not the connection is still established only HyperTerminal is no longer running 6 Open the Data Logging Utility 7 Select in the DLG Utility the COMM pott that the PC modem is configured for 8 Click Connect Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 569 DISCONNECTING MODEM 1 2 1 Ensure the DLG Utility has been shutdown 2 Start HyperTerminal Do not re connect 3 Open the previously configured Datalog Type to place modem in command mod
450. monitor on the LCD When a valid bit file is specified the Monitoring and Bit menus are available Up to the first 48 bits 3 words of the specified bit file can be monitored and modified For more information refer to Using Trim Pots described in the MzerolLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763 UMO01 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 LCD Information 451 Target Integer File Number TIF Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access TIF Target Integer File LCD 0 TIF word INT control read only Number Target Integer File Number TIF specifies the integer file to monitor on the LCD When a valid bit file is specified the Monitoring and Integer menus are available Up to the first 48 words of the specified integer file can be monitored and modified For more information refer to Using Trim Pots described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763 UM001 Jog data update Mode set JOG Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access JOG Jog data update LCD 0 J0G binary bit control read write Mode set Jog data update Mode set JOG determines how the value changes are applied when you press the Up and Down keys to change the data value for a trim pot When this bit is set 1 the changes are applied immediately whenevet you press the Up and Down keys When it is clear 0 the changes are applied only when you press the OK k
451. mp t 2 Eo FA 9 8 e a ia m 2 S j Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer all characters including the Termination characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is stored in the POS word of the control data file The number in the Characters Read field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters have been read Exception If the controller finds termination characters before done reading the Done bit DN is set and the number of characters found is stored in the POS word of the control data file TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 336 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 333 ASC String Search ASC String Search Source ST10 6 Index 5 String Search ST10 7 Result N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ASC Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100r
452. mp DHRIO The following illustrates the MicroLogix 1100 CH1 Ethernet sending a remote message to a SLC5 04 processor DH Node 51 The remote message will s an ENET module a ControlLogix chassis Gateway and a DHRIO module In order for the message to pass through the network a MultiHop MSG must be setup and a DHRIO Routing table must exist MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet Hub ED E 61 0 C3 SLC5 04 Backplane Link Id 20 Link ID 16 Belden 9463 Blue Hose cable is used to connect the DH devices on the network Ethernet cable and an Ethernet hub are used to connect the ENET module and the MicroLogix 1100 CH1 Ethernet ports together MicroLogix 1100 CH1 Configuration xi General Channel Channel 1 Driver Etheinet z Hardware Address Joo 00 00 00 00 00 D pe IPAddress 100 100 115 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Default Domain Name E Primary Name Server E ey Secondary Name Server o 0 0 r Protocol Control I BootpEnable DHCP Enable Msg Connechian Timeout x Imaj 15000 T SNMP Server Enable Msg Reply Timeout x 1m5 3000 I HTTP Server Enable v Auto Negotiate Port Setting 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Y Contact Location Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 396 Communications Instructions DHRIO Routing table creation To create a DHRIO Routing tab
453. mplement of 40000 25536 or 9C40h hexadecimal value to source operand as shown below MOV Move Source 25536 25536 Dest PTO O JF 0 lt e EQU NEQ MEQ Instruction When comparing the JF OF OFS of PTO PWM with a specific value using the EQU NEQ or MEQ instruction a user can not put the specific value over 32767 because these variables are unsigned 16 bit value in this instruction To solve this issue 2 s complement notation or hexadecimal value should be used For example when a user wants to check if the PTO 0 OF is equal EQU 35000 or not equal NEQ a user should put 2 s complement of 35000 30536 or 88B8h hexadecimal value as a specific value as shown below EQU NEQ MEQ Equal Not Equal Masked Equal Source A PTO 0 OF Source A PTO 0 OF Source PTO 0 OF 35000 35000 35000 Source B 30536 Source B 30536 Mask OFFFFh 30536 30536 1 Compare 30536 30536 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller 575 Otherwise variable type should be changed to Long Type 32 bit by CPW instruction before the execution of these instructions as shown below CPW Copy Word Source PTO 0 0F Dest L9 0 Length 1 EQU B3 0 Equal Source A L9 0 0 35000 lt Source B 35000 35000 lt NEQ B3 0 No
454. n PTO Enable Status EN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access EN Enable Status PTO 0 EN ibit 0 or 1 status read only follows rung state The PTO EN Enable Status is controlled by the PTO sub system When the rung preceding the PTO instruction is solved true the PTO instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set If the rung preceding the PTO instruction transitions to a false state before the pulse sequence completes its operation the enable status bit resets 0 The EN bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO is enabled Cleared 0 PTO has completed or the rung preceding the PTO is false PTO Output Frequency OF Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access Controller Series OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 0to20 000 control read write A word UINT 0 to 40 000 B The PTO OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during the RUN phase of the pulse profile This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved In the MicroLogix 1100 Series A controller the data less than zero or greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error However in the MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller the data less than zero or greater than 40 000 generates a PTO
455. n Indirect ADD Add Source A N7 N7 3 Source B 25 Dest N15 N7 3 Working ADD Add Source A N7 20 Source B 25 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in N7 3 Working Address Source A N7 0 N7 20 Destination N7 0 N15 20 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 High Speed Counter Overview Programmable Limit Switch Overview Chapter 5 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch All MicroLogix 1100 except the 1763 L16AWA have one 20 kHz 40 kHz high speed counter The counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from other inputs on the controller HSCO utilizes inputs 0 through 3 TIP HSCO is used in this document to define how any HSC works IMPORTANT The HSC function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules This chapter describes how to use the HSC function and also contains sections on the HSL and RAC instructions as follows e High Speed Counter HSC Function File on page 90 e HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 118 e RAC Reset Accumulated Value on page 119 The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotaty cam switch See page 120 for more information 1 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P Sept
456. n If the problem persists call your local distributor or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following ways Phone 1 440 646 3434 United States Canada Outside United States Canada You can access the phone number for your country via the Internet 1 Go to http Awww ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com 3 Under Support Centers click on Contact Information Internet 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 1 1 0 Configuration This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the MicroLogix 1100 controllers Each controller comes with a certain amount of embedded I O which is physically located on the controller The controller also allows for adding expansion I O This section discusses the following I O functions e Embedded I O on page 15 e MicroLogix 1100 Expansion I O on page 17 MicroLogix 1100 Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 17 e I O Addressing on page 26 e I O Forcing on page 27 e Input Filtering on page 27 e Latching Inputs on page 30 Embedded 1 0 The MicroLogix 1100 provide discrete I O and analog input that is built into the controller as listed in the following table These I O points are referred to as Embedded I O Controller Family Inputs Outputs Quantity Type Quanti
457. n a rung The PD file then appeats in the list of Data Files as shown in the illustration Each PD data file has a maximum of 255 elements and each PID instruction requires a unique PD element Each PD element is composed of 20 sub elements which include bit integer and long integer data All of the examples in this chapter use PD file 10 sub element 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 282 Process Control Instruction PID Proportional Instruction Type output Integral Derivative pp p Execution Time for the PID Instruction DE Variable je Controller When Rung Is Control Variable N7 1 True False Setup Screen MicroLogix 1100 139 34 us 36 93 us It is recommended that you place the PID instruction on a rung without any conditional logic If conditional logic exists the Control Variable output remains at its last value and the CVP CV term and integral term are both cleared when the rung is false TIP In order to stop and restart the PID instruction you need to create a false to true rung transition The example below shows a PID instruction on a rung with RSLogix 500 programming software B3 0 PID 0047 jt PID 0 PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen When programming the setup screen provides access to the PID instruction configuration parametets The illustration below shows the RSLogix 500 setup screen Publication 1763 RM00
458. n set for the lower priority interrupt the currently executing interrupt routine continues to completion Then the lower priority interrupt runs before returning to normal processing The priorities from highest to lowest are User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 1 High Speed Counter Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 2 Event Interrupt 3 Selectable Timed Interrupt lowest priority Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 262 Using Interrupts User Fault Routine The user fault routine gives you the option of preventing a controller shutdown when a specific user fault occurs The fault routine is executed when any recoverable or non recoverable user fault occurs The fault routine is not executed for non user faults Faults are classified as recoverable non recoverable and non user faults A complete list of faults is shown in Fault Messages and Error Codes on page 491 The basic types of faults are described below Recoverable Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and may be recovered from by executing logic in the user fault routine The user can attempt to clear the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 Note You may initiate a MSG instruction from the controller to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Status File Data Saved Non Recoverable Non Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and cannot be recovered
459. n the queue is empty 3 SSB Selection Status Bit This bit indicates that the controller is in the System Mode It is always set 4 CAB Communications Active Bit This bit is set 1 when at least one other device is on the DH 485 network If no other devices are on the network this bit is cleared 0 5to14 Reserved 15 Communications Toggle Push Button Communications Defaults Active This bit is set 1 whenever Channel 0 is in the default communications mode The bit is cleared 0 when Channel 0 is in user configured communications mode 5 Oto7 Node Address This byte value contains the node address of your controller on the network 8to 15 Baud Rate This byte value contains the baud rate of the controller on the network Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 59 Diagnostic Counter Block of Communications Status File With RSLogix 500 version 7 00 00 and later formatted displays of the diagnostic counters for each configured channel are available under Channel Status These displays include a Clear button that allows you to reset the diagnostic counters while monitoring them online with the programming software TIP Clicking on the Clear button while online monitoring Channel Status of either channel 0 or channel 1 will reset all of the channel status diagnostic counters for both channels to zero Diagnostic Counter Blocks are shown for e DH 485 on page 60 e DF1 Full Duplex on pa
460. n to execute the service communications 344 part of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction MSG Transfer data from one device to another 346 Messaging Overview The communication architecture is comprised of three primary components Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 342 Communications Instructions e Ladder Scan e Communications Buffers e Communication Queue These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller For a message to transmit it must be scanned on a true rung of logic When scanned the message and the data defined within the message if it is a write message are placed in a communication buffer The controller continues to scan the remaining user program The message is processed and sent out of the controller via the communications port after the ladder logic completes during the Service Communications part of the operating cycle unless an SVC is executed If a second message instruction is processed before the first message completes the second message and its data are placed in one of the three remaining communication buffers This process repeats whenever a message instruction is processed until all four buffers are in use When a buffer is available the message and its associated data are placed in the buffer immediately If all four buffers for the channel are full when the next fifth message is proces
461. n unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults are FFOO to FFOF Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 492 Fault Messages and Error Codes Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable user faults can cause the user fault subroutine to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in the Run or test mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults See User Fault Routine on page 262 for information on creating a user fault subroutine Fault Messages This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 11 programmable controller Each table lists the error code description the probable cause and the recommended corrective action Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0001 NVRAM ERROR The default program is loaded to the Non User e Re download or transfer the program controller memory This occurs e Verify battery is connected eif a power down occurred during e Contact your local Rockwell Automation program download or transfer representative if the error persists from the memory module e RAM integrity test failed 0002 UNEXPECTED RESET eThe controller was unexpectedly
462. nction File Sub Elements Summary 134 PWM Pulse Width Modula otn 24125 or ERA e e 149 PWM PONCHO S caet tere tee eat Da ea A CS E 149 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File 150 Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summaty 152 Chapter 7 XIC Examine if Closed XlO Eximineif ODETESS ente qe dei o o e sk 159 OTE Ot tput Energizers ssi oet I ER EC Ced Ru Ea anii ees 161 OTL Output Latch OTU Output U lateh Lo uh RH opea an et aite te Rugs a pte el 162 ONS Ole Shot ceres cy ad ROO RIVE EEARE MEE SIEG 163 OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Balls yepodtesereba ve ty ena ties pd 164 Chapter 8 Timer Instructions Overview oscsexo e Er EROR e ner doce vd pes 167 TON S Tuner One Delay eoi ud e SORORE PAG CU 170 TOF Titer O Delays di opes pond Cete loris e teta 171 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay ias cette tem ee ences 172 How Co ntets Workin oseng si i a eso Rees E aaa 173 CTU Count Up CID Count DOW 2545 i rietan EE aed ho eRe ONDER RENIER 176 RES Resets Seahorse ena ae aid a xxr E EER 177 Chapter 9 Using the Compare Insttuclions vr vd eho ree Pe ERR RR 180 EQU Equal NEGQ Not Equal ii iocus OH epe Eo Oo eL steels 181 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Table of Contents 7 GRT Greater Than LES Less That o evade Sero eoa iot es eet rd e ad 181 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEO Less Than ort Equal TO veas yate aree whan eis 182 MEQ M
463. nctionality can be especially useful for certain types of applications recipe management batch processing and many others Indirect addressing can also be difficult to understand and troubleshoot It is recommended that you only use indirect addressing when it is required by the application being developed The MicroLogix 1100 supports indirection indirect addressing for Files Words and Bits To define which components of an address are to be indirected a closed bracket is used The following examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing Indirect Addressing of a Word B3 0 ADD 0000 J E Add 0 Source A N7 N10 1 0 lt Source B 1234 1234 lt Dest N11 33 0 lt e Address N7 N10 1 e In this example the element number to be used for source A in the ADD instruction is defined by the number located in N10 1 If the value of location N10 1 15 the ADD instruction operates as N7 15 Source B e In this example the element specified by N10 1 must be between 0 and 255 because all data files have a maximum individual size of 256 elements TIP If a number larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in N10 1 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed because a file boundary will be crossed This may not generate a controller fault but the data location is invalid unknown Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Programming Instructions Overvi
464. nd convert them to digital data There are three terminals assigned to the input channels that provide two voltage inputs and a return signal commons Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 30 1 0 Configuration Latching Inputs The following table shows sample Analog Signal and Data Word values using the nominal transfer function formula N Vin x 1023 10 where Vin analog signal is in volts V Analog Signal Data Word OV 0 5V 512 10V 1023 Converting Analog Input Data Analog inputs convert voltage signals into 10 bit values To determine an approximate voltage that an input value represents use the equations shown below 10V ET 1023 xinputvalue inputvoltage V For example if an input value of 300 is in the input image the calculated value is 10V 1023 x300 2 9326 V The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides the ability to individually configure inputs to be latching inputs sometimes referred to as pulse catching inputs A latching input 1s an input that captures a very fast pulse and holds it for a single controller scan The pulse width that can be captured is dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input The following inputs can be configured as latching inputs Controller MicroLogix 1100 DC Inputs 0 through 3 You enable this feature with RSLogix 500 programming software With an open project 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration
465. ng Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using Interrupts 261 e Anytime during End of Scan The interrupt is only serviced by the controller at these opportunities If the interrupt is disabled the pending bit is set at the next occurrence of one of the three occasions listed above ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an A OTL OTE or UIE this instruction OTL OTE or UIE must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Priority of User Interrupts When multiple interrupts occur the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt s has already occurred but has not been serviced the new interrupt is scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced all the interrupts are executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority If an interrupt occurs while a lower priority interrupt is being serviced executed the currently executing interrupt routine is suspended and the higher priority interrupt is serviced Then the lower priority interrupt is allowed to complete before returning to normal processing If an interrupt occurs while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced executed and the pending bit has bee
466. ng 2 0 General This Controller Channel integral Communication Command eqgCPU Read Data Table Address paymssmgsremi Size in Elements SUDCPU Write 485CIF Read 485CIF Wri PLC5 Read PLCS Write Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Node Addr dec D Local Remote The controller supports six different types of communications commands If the target device supports any of these command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported commands include Communication Command Types Communication Description Used For Command 500CPU Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers 500CPU Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers 485CIF Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data A85CIF PLC2 485CIF Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data A85CIF PLC2 PLC5 Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data PLC5 command set PLC5 Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data PLC5 command set 1 See Important note below IMPORTANT The Common Interface File CIF in the MicroLogix 1100 1200 1500 and SLC 500 processors is Fi
467. ng Software refer to Example 5 Configuring an Ethernet IP Message on page 381 Ethernet Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Driver Ethernet Ethernet Hardware The processor s Ethernet hardware address This value cannot be changed Ethernet Hardware Address Address IP Address 1 to 254 zero and 255 are reserved for broadcast purposes 0 0 0 0 The processor s internet address You must specify the IP address to enable the processor to connect to the TCP IP network You can specify the address manually or enable BOOTP or DHCP located in the Protocol Control section of this dialog to provide the address Subnet Mask 0 to 255 in each field 0 0 0 0 Used by the processor to interpret IP addresses when the Internet is divided into subnets The subnet mask must be specified You can do this either manually or by enabling BOOTP or DHCP The processor compares and screens addresses using the mask to identify its own address to see if it should listen to corresponding messages The comparison occurs in binary Any address position for which the mask is set to a binary 1 will be compared any address position for which the mask is set to a binary 0 will be ignored For example if the mask is 255 255 255 0 the processor will listen to all addresses whose first three segments match its own address regardless of the value in the last segment 255 in decimal equals to 1111 1111 in binary Gateway
468. nge PD10 0 PV binary bit 0 or 1 status read write The process variable out of range bit is set 1 when the unscaled process variable exceeds 16 383 or e is less than zero Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 297 Done DN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0 or 1 status readonly The PID done bit is set 1 for one scan when the PID algorithm is computed It resets 0 whenever the instruction is scanned and the PID algorithm was not computed applies to timed mode only Enable EN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only The PID enabled bit is set 1 whenever the PID instruction is enabled It follows the rung state Integral Sum IS Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access IS Integral Sum PD10 0 S long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This is the result of the integration Bc dr I Altered Derivative Term AD Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type UserProgram Descriptions Access AD Altered PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 4
469. nk of this as simply messaging to the LCD These lines can consist of combinations of Bits Integers and String characters So now the control program can send alert alarm messages I O data values simple text messages or combinations of these messages to the operator These messages can be triggered by events Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 446 LCD Information input sensors timer done bits message from another controller etc ot based on a scheduled action using the embedded real time clock or free running timers The second mode of operation again allows for output from the ladder logic to the display but adds input from the operator back to the controller hereafter called Display With Input mode Up to two lines of up to 12 characters each can still be sent to the LCD for display but the third line in this mode is used to obtain numeric input from the user Bit integer or long integer file types can be used to provide this input The user can select User Display from the LCD menu The User Display screen will show the specified output data when the LCD Instruction is energized If DISPLAY WITH INPUT is set to YES the user can enter input using the LCD keypad to enter Bit Integer or Long Integer data LCD Function File Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a LCD Function File This file provides access to LCD and Trimpot configuration data and also al
470. nly SEC RTC Seconds RTC 0 SEC word 0 to 59 status read only DOW RTC Day of Week RTC 0 DOW word 0 to 6 Sunday to Saturday status read only DS Disabled RTC 0 DS binary 0 or 1 status read only BL RTC Battery Low RTC 0 BL binary Oor1 status read only Writing Data to the Real Time Clock The programming screen is shown below HSC PTO PwM sti Jel ATC ico ww BHI cso Jes lios Day of Week 0 vv ERE NENNEN LS NN Dae p p I MON Month HH MM S8 are Day Time OF p B FEMIN Minute L SEC Second Set Date amp Time DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled Disable Clock BL RTC Battery is Low cocooooooo When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take effect immediately In RSLogix 500 click on Set Date Time in the RTC Function File screen to set the RTC time to the current time on your PC Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 52 Function Files The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data TIP Use the Disable Clock button in your programming device to disable the real time clock before storing a module This decreases the drain on the battery during storage Real Time Clock Accuracy The following table indicates the expected accuracy of the real time clock for various temperatures Real Time Clock Accuracy at Various Temperatures Amb
471. nput values They are read only Holding registers are general purpose and can be both read and written to Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 525 The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix and does not get entered into the Modbus Data Address field when configuring the message instruction When the message is sent the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4 character hex number to be transmitted via the network with a range of 0 FFFFh the slave increments the address by 1 and selects the appropriate memory group based on the Modbus function TIP Modbus protocol may not be consistently implemented in the field The Modbus specification calls for the addressing range to start at 1 however some devices start addressing at 0 The Modbus Data Address in the Message Setup Screen may need to be incremented by one to properly access a Modbus slave s memory depending on that slave s implementation of memory addressing Modbus RTU Slave The coil and contact files can contain up to 4096 coils or contacts in each register when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words Each input register and holding register file can contain up to 256 registers when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words With the Expanded box checked the controllers can be specifically configured to use up to six 256 word data table files for
472. ns FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD FRD From BCD Source 0 0000h Dest N7 0 0 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FRD Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 29 87 us 0 87 us The FRD instruction is used to convert the Binary Coded Decimal BCD source value to an integer and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FRD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page amp 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode o 7 Parameter E Ei 2 E e w e amp x a 97E 258 Bie e g S v jo 2 S j siz IS A ja iw JE e Is Je S si od e e o jz e zh o lI v lo je Z ja o la S le la e a la m ma S 9S j 8 ja j ja S iu Source e o e o o o e e o e 2 Destination eje e o jo 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See FRD Instruction Source Operand on page 204 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files FRD Instruction Source Operand The source can be either a word address or the math re
473. nstruction Type input Execution Time for the SBR Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 10 78 us 0 78 us The SBR instruction is a label which is not used by the processor It is for user subroutine identification purposes as the first rung for that subroutine This instruction is the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 RET Return from Subroutine RET Return SUS Suspend SUS Suspend Suspend ID 1 TND Temporary End CTND gt Program Control Instructions 251 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RET Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 11 68 us 0 84 us The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction user interrupt or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute Instruction Type output The SUS instruction is used to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting This instruction causes the processor to enter the suspend idle mode causing all outputs to be de energized The suspend ID and the suspend file program file number ot subroutine file number identifying where the suspend instruction resides are placed in the
474. nstructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level D Mode a 3 Parameter s 2 E o S S c x i SFe lt Ble m o S iw jo 18 jo I I B a lt ln 1M JE e ls e Js le o _ la le le lu b h IS lJE REE E I ie S S 8 S la E 6 Eis 8 la Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source Bl3 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are valid for MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note abo t indirect addressing 3 Source B does not apply to the NOT instruction The NOT instruction only has one source value Updates to Math Status Bits IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files After a logical instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if
475. nt down 176 RES Reset Reset the RTO and counter s ACC and status 177 bits not used with TOF timers For information on using the High Speed Counter output s see Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 89 Timers in a controller reside in a timet file A timer file can be assigned as any unused data file When a data file is used as a timer file each timer element within the file has three sub elements These sub elements are e Timer Control and Status Preset This is the value that the timer must reach before the timer times out When the accumulator reaches this value the DN status bit is set TON and RTO only The preset data range is from 0 to 32767 The minimum required update interval is 2 55 seconds regardless of the time base Accumulator The accumulator counts the time base intervals It represents elapsed time The accumulator data range is from 0 to 32767 Timers can be set to any one of three time bases Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 168 Timer and Counter Instructions Timer Base Settings Time Base Timing Range 0 001 seconds 0to32767seconds 0 01 seconds 0 to 327 67 seconds 1 00 seconds 0 to 32 767 seconds Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control and status word word 1 stores the preset value and word 2 stores the accumulated value Timer File Word Bit 15 14 173 12 71 10 9 8 7 6
476. nterrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine processing This bit must be set 1 if the user wants the controller to process the HSC subroutine when any of the following conditions exist Low preset reached High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value Underflow condition count down through the underflow value If this bit is cleared 0 the HSC sub system does not automatically scan the HSC subroutine This bit can be controlled from the user program using the OTE UIE or UID instructions ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an A OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung User Interrupt Executing UIX Description Address Data HSC Modes Type User Program Format Access UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC O UIX bit 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set 1 whenever the HSC sub system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions Low preset reached e High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value Underflow condition count down through the underflow value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September
477. ntroller faults and does not enter an executing mode Program the User Fault Routine logic accordingly TIP When executing the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code contains the value 0016H Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 10 binary 0 or 1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program when the control program is corrupt or a default program exists in the controller TIP If you clear the controller memory the controller loads the default program The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 471 See also LE Load on Error on page 56 Load Memory Module Always Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 11 binary 0 or 1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit is set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program The mode
478. nts Bit positions 0 15 together with word 0 1 correspond to output terminals 0 31 T Bit Position 15 1n 1 12m jo a s8 7 e 5 J B 2 J Jo O rw Ir w Ir w r w Aw Ir w ir w r w r w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w 1 r w Ir w r w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w r w read and write Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 20 1 0 Configuration Analog 1 0 Configuration The following table shows the data ranges for 0 to 10V dc and 4 to 20 mA Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range Raw Proportional Data Scaled for PID 0 0V dc 0 0 4to 20 mA 210 mA 32 760 16 380 20 0 mA 31 200 15 600 40 mA 6240 3120 0 0 mA 0 0 1762 IF20F2 Input Data File For each input module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data file for each configuration is shown below Raw Proportional Format it Position 15 14 13 12 1 1 10 9 anne ata U to 32 Word oo Lo e c gt C3 NI O 1 0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 768 0 0 0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved ST S0 5 U0 00 UT OT reserved Scaled for PID Format Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 110 9 anne ata to d Wor oo ba
479. number This is the queue number to use in the DLG instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 DLG Data Log Instruction DLG Data Log queue number 0 Recipe and Data Logging 439 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the DLG Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 35 9 us 2 5 us data stamp 7 5 us 1 9 us time stamp 1 9 us word logged 4 3 us long word logged IMPORTANT You must configure a data log queue before programming a DLG instruction into your ladder program The DLG instruction triggers the saving of a record The DLG instruction has one operand Queue Number Specifies which data log queue captures a record The DLG instruction only captures data on a false to true rung transition The DLG rung must be reset scanned false before it will capture data again Never place the DLG instruction alone on a rung It should always have preceding logic as shown below DLG Data Log queue number 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 440 Recipe and Data Logging Data Log Status File There 1s a Data Log Status DLS file element for each Data Log Queue The DLS file does not exist until a data log queue has been configured The Data Log Status file has 3 word elements Word 0 is addressable by bit only through ladder logic Words 1 and 2 are addressable by word and ot bit through ladder logic Th
480. o 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 3000 x20 ms Poll timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to re queue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero is not used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero c RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 517 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts
481. o for any file other than O or l 1 The file number for RTC function files is set to 0 by the programming software Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions Message File Target Location Information Target Device Modbus Device Sub Name Description Paramete Size User Element r Program Access 12 starting bit address for coils Y Word read only and inputs 13 MG11 0 TFN Modbus Target Data Y Word read write Address 1 14 Reserved Word read write 15 Reserved Word read only Message File Target Location Information Target Device CIP Generic The MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B only Sub Name Description Paramete Size User Element r Program Access 12 Target Class Y Word read only 13 Target Instance Y Word read write 14 CIP Send Data Count X Word read write 15 Internal Physical Address of Y Word read only CIP Send Data Table Address operand The Control Bits Sub Element 16 of the MSG File Element are defined below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Message File Sub Element 16 Control Bits Communications Instructions 351 Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 15 MG11 0 0 EN Enable N bit read write 1 MSG enabled 0 MSG not enabled 9 to Reserved N bit read write 14 8 MG11 0 0 TO Time Out N bit read write 1 MSG time out by user O no user MSG time out 1 to R
482. o s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data e Carry Is reset e Overflow Is set if the signed result is infinity NAN or cannot fit in the Destination otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if Destination is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 196 Math Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table ABS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Address Data Files Function Files Model Address Level ode gt i o a Parameter a IS s l5 E 5 s S o a o S a 3 o eig a c E ala z ly BENE zije E e g S joe z a ceo e S E o Lr i E o E E e S o v lam fe z lu 6 a E Za la la 1 a e S 6 e a E amp a 5 jS lez la Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e
483. o the following working cases for Ethernet messages Case I If there is any other message for the same connection on the Ethernet buffer CIP3 connection and session are not closed Case II If there is any other CIP3 Connection on the same session the relevant CIP3 connection is closed Case III Any other case gt CIP3 connection and session are closed Refer to the following working cases for SMTP messages Case I If BK bit is not set the connection with SMTP server is retained Case II If BK bit is set the connection with SMTP server is closed e Supports the restore of Ethernet channel configuration into MicroLogix 1100 from Memory module e Supports the communication by cabling between MicroLogix 1100 and PC directly without Switching Hub e Supports DNS query when E mail feature is used User can write the string of the DNS name in the E mail Server IP entry in the SMTP Configuration File User also should set Primary Name Server and Secondary Name Server in the Ethernet Channel Configuration Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 590 MicroLogix 1100 Firmware Changes in OS Series B FRN 4 Application Layer Related Embedded 10 Configuration Related Web Server Related RSLogix500 compatibility e Supports the change of IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Default Domain Name Primary Name Server and Secondary Name Server using Ethernet MSG instruction This can be done by sending
484. oating point value Source and Destination do not have to be the same data type However if the signed result does not fit in Destination the following will occur ABS Result Does Not Fit in Destination When Both Operands Are Integers e f the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in the Destination e f the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the result is stored in the Destination When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data e he ABS instruction clears the sign bit No operation is performed on the remaining bits e f Destination is an integer and Source is NAN or infinity a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored e f Destination is an integer the rounded result is stored If an overflow occurs after rounding a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored The following table shows how the math status bits ate updated upon execution of the ABS instruction Updates to Math Status Bits When Both Operands Are Integers e Carry Is set if input is negative otherwise resets e Overflow Is set if the signed result cannot fit in the Destination otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if Destination is all zer
485. octal receives data from the MicroLogix 1100 controller at node 12 on Link ID 1 Remote Bridge Link ID This variable is a user assigned value that defines the remote network as a number This number must be used by any device initiating remote messaging to that network In the example any controller on Link ID 1 sending data to a device on Link ID 100 must use the remote bridge link ID of the passthru device In this example the SLC 5 04 on Link ID1 node 17 is the passthru device Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 394 Communications Instructions Network Link ID Set the Network Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen The Link ID value is a user defined number between 1 and 65 535 All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local network must have the same number for this variable Channel Configuration A X Channel 1 General i Driver DH485 Node Address f decimal Bad fiso sj Network Link ID i decimal Protocol Control Token Hold Factor 2 Max Node Address I Cancel Apply Help Configuring a Multi hop A uset can configure a multi hop remote message in the RSLogix500 Remote Message on Message Setup screen EtherNet IP Communication Channel Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 395 Network Message Example 1 MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet to SLC5 04 DH via ENET a
486. odes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 504 Protocol Configuration Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 to 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Configure the node address via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel 0 tab Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix devices on the DH 485 netwotk All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Configure the baud rate via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel 0 tab Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance pe
487. of the following e Toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 114 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 118 The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSC 0 UNF parameter or an HSC error is generated If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers the low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value Overflow OVF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT control read write The OVF Overflow defines the upper count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable an overflow interrupt is generated When the overflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value and the counter continues counting from the underflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the overflow position provided it is greater than the underflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into th
488. of this bit at the end of each scan It is reset upon entry into an executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 485 Last 100 Sec Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 35 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This register indicates the elapsed time for the last program cycle of the controller in 100 us increments Data File Overwrite Protection Lost Address Data Format Type User Program Access 36 10 binary Oor1 status read write When clear 0 this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller protected data files in the controller were not overwritten or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded When set 1 this bit indicates that data has been overwritten SeeUser Program Transfer Requirements on page 43 for more information SeeSetting Download File Protection on page 42 for more information RTC Year Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 37 word 1998 to 2097 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 YR SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value
489. ofile Cleared 0 Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile PTO Idle Status IS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO IS Idle Status 1s controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used in the control program by an input instruction The PTO sub system must be in an idle state whenever any PTO operation needs to start The IS bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO sub system is in an idle state The idle state is defined as the PTO is not running and no errors are present Cleared 0 PTO sub system is not in an idle state it is running Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 138 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Error Detected ED Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED lbi t 0 or 1 status read only The PTO ED Error Detected Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PTO 0 ER The ED bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in an error state Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in
490. ogram when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 used 29 us Expansion Output Words X 2 us or X 6 5 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1100 us Typical Case 400 us Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 150 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode 0 us Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 0 Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 1 Communications Overhead Sub Total System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1764 RTC 1764 MM1RITC or MM2RTC 80 us Add this number if your system includes a 1764 DAT 530 us Housekeeping Overhead 240 us 240 System Overhead Sub Total Totals Sum of all Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X Time Tick Multiplier X1 02 Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 463 Communications Multiplier Table Multiplier at Various Baud Rates 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K 2 4K 12K 600 300 Inactive Protoco
491. ol read write Pulses To Be Generated 32 bit INT The PTO TOP Total Output Pulses defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile accel run decel inclusive Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 141 PTO Output Pulses Produced OPP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access OPP Output PTO 0 0PP long word 0to2 147 483 647 status read only Pulses Produced 32 bit INT The PTO OPP Output Pulses Produced is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor how many pulses have been generated by the PTO sub system PTO Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ADI Accel Decel PTO 0 ADI bit 00r 1 control X read write Pulses Independent The PTO ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent bit is used to define whether the acceleration and deceleration intervals will be the same or if each will have a unique value When this bit is set 1 separate profiles are used When this bit is clear 0 the PTO will operate with the deceleration profile as a mirror of the acceleration profile If separate acceleration and deceleration profiles are desired you must choose a long integer file number and a starting element There must be fout long elements available in the file
492. ol Configuration Modbus RTU Master Communications Configuration Parameters 527 Parameter Options Programming Software Default hannel hannel 0 0 Driver Modbus RTU Master Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even odd none Control Line No Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS handshaking No Handshaking No Handshaking 485 Network Inter character 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times 0 Timeout x1 ms Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end of a message packet RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from receive to transmit mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f D
493. ol file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 2 3 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set e Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to be masked and moved to the destination Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Position is incremented on each false to true transition Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 246 Sequencer Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types c
494. oller You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1100 controller It describes the procedures you use to program and troubleshoot your controller This manual gives you an overview of the file types used by the controllers e provides the instruction set for the controllers contains application examples to show the instruction set in use The following conventions are used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Change bars appear beside information that has been changed or added since the last revision of this manual Change bars appear in the margin as shown to the right of this paragraph Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 14 Preface Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributot For Read this Document Document Number Information on understanding and applying micro controllers MicroMentor 1761 MMB Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 1763 IN001 Controller including a mo
495. oller Information Function a description of the g File Base Hardware Information Function File BHI Address Description BHI 0 CN CN Catalog Number BHI 0 SRS SRS Series BHI 0 REV REV Revision BHI 0 FT FT Functionality Type Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Status File Function Files 57 The Communications Status CS File is a read only file that contains information on how the controller communication parameters are configured and status information on communications activity The communications status file uses Communications Status File Size Controller Number of Word Elements MicroLogix 1100 71 1 word elements There is one Communications Status File for each communications port Communications Status File CSO corresponds to Channel 0 on the controller Ethernet Communications Status File ES corresponds to Channel 1 on the controller TIP You can use the Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for communications issues The data file is structured as shown below Communications Status File Word Description Applies to Controller Details on Page to5 General Channel Status Block Microgx1l00 58 6 to22 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1100 60 23 to 42 DLL Active Node Table Block MicroLogix 1100 69 words 43 to 70 when using DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex DH 465 or ASCII 43 End of List Category
496. olumn as shown below under the MultiHop tab MSG Rung 2 0 2 General MultiHop Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address Type To Address This Processor EtherNet IP Device str 192 168 1 20 For more information on routing through a ControlLogix gateway refer to Configuring a Multi hop Remote Message on EtherNet IP Communication Channel on page 394 If the target device is a ControlLogix FlexLogix or CompactLogix controller with an Ethernet interface then enter in the interface s IP address in the first row of the To Address column press the computer s Insert key to add a hop Select ControlLogix Backplane and enter in the Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 386 Communications Instructions backplane slot number for the controller always 0 for FlexLogix and CompactLogix 0 16 for ControlLogix in the second row of the To Address column as shown below under the MultiHop tab 3 MSG Rung 2 0 General MultiHop Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device str 192 168 1 20 ControlLogix Backplane N A 1756 Backplane Slot dec 0 If the target device is a ControlLogix controller with an ControlNet interface then enter in the interface s IP address of the 1756 ENET module in the first row of the To Address column press the computer s Insert key to add a hop Select ControlLogix Backplane and enter in the backplane sl
497. ommunications Instructions 413 When the message is replied successfully a user can check configuration parameters in Receive Data tab F MSG MG50 0 1 Elements ini xl General MultiHop Send Data Decimal x Radix Refresh CIP Generic Error Codes Internal Fail Codes When CIP Generic sub system cannot send a message due to some reason or reply contains error code error code is shown via MSG instruction Error Code OxEO is stored in Word 18 of MG file Internal Fail Code is stored in Word 22 of MG file When messaging through CIP communication and the low byte is OxEO the high byte of this sub element contains detailed Fail Code returned by the CIP sub system Status Code Reference CIP Common Specification Appendix B Status Codes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 414 Communications Instructions MSG Instruction Error When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data Codes the processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can monitor from your programming software Error Code Description of Error Condition 02H Target node is busy NAK No Memory retries by link layer exhausted 03H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04H Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvert
498. on Each MSG File Element consists of Sub Elements 0 through 24 as shown in the following table Sub Name Description Paramet Size User Program Element er Access 0 to 1 Reserved Word read only 2 Messaging Type 0 for PCCC 1 for CIP 2 for Modbus Master Word read only 3 for PCCC Messaging bits 07 00 CMD code bits 15 08 FNC code derived Word read only for CIP bits 07 00 Service Code bits 15 08 Supplemental Object Path Data Count for Modbus Master bits 07 00 Function Code bits 15 08 reserved 4 Internal Physical Address Word read only 5 MG11 0 RBL PCCC Remote Bridge Link ID Y Word read only Modbus Master not used 6 MG11 0 LBN PCCC Local Bridge Node Address Y Word read only Modbus Master not used Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 348 Communications Instructions Message File Elements Sub Name Description Paramet Size User Program Element er Access 7 MG11 0 RBN PCCC Remote Bridge Node Address Y Word read only Modbus Master not used 8 MG11 0 CHN Channel bits 07 00 0 for Channel 0 1 for Channel 1 Y Word read write Slot bits 15 08 Not used 9 MG11 0 NOD Target Node Number Word read write 10 MG11 0 MTO Message timeout setting or preset in seconds Y Word read write 11 PCCC Number of bytes to read write Word read only Modbus Master Number of Modbus elements to
499. on Use the DIV instruction to divide one value by another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination If the Sources are single words and the Destination is directly addressed to S 13 math register then the quotient is stored in S 14 and the remainder is stored in S 13 If long wotds ate used then the results are rounded Instruction Type output Execution Time for the NEG Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 8 78 us 0 87 us long word 9 62 us 0 87 us Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result in the Destination Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CLR Instruction Controller Data Size MicroLogix 1100 word long word When Rung Is True False 5 29us 0 87 us 5 46 us 0 87 us Use the CLR instruction to set the Destination to a value of zero Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ABS Absolute Value Math Instructions 195 Instruction Type output ABS Absolute Value Source N7 0 Exeution Time for the ABS Instruction 0 lt z Dest N74 Controller Data Size When Rung Is 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1100 fword 9 62 us 0 87 us long word 9 71 us 0 87 us The ABS instruction takes the absolute value of the Source and places it in the Destination The data range for this instruction is 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 or IEEE 754 fl
500. on 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 116 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub system The mask defines which outputs can be controlled The high preset output or low preset output values HPO or LPO define if each output 1s either ON 1 or OFF 0 Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask with the output mask acting like a filter The bits in the gray boxes are unused The first 6 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits are not functional because they do not correlate to any physical outputs on the base unit The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 117 High Preset Output HPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HPO High Preset Output HSC O HPO word 16 bit binary control read write The HPO High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 115 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use th
501. on Code decimal 0001 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space 1 5 15 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space 2 30001 to 30256 Read Modbus Input Register space 4 30501 Modbus Data Table Coil File Number 4 30502 Modbus Data Table Contact File Number 4 30503 Modbus Data Table Input Register File Number 4 30504 Modbus Data Table Holding Register File Number 4 30506 Pre Send Delay 4 30507 Modbus Slave Address 4 30508 Inter character Timeout 4 30509 RTS Send Delay 4 30510 RTS Off Delay 4 30511 Parity 4 30512 Presentation Layer Error Code 4 30512 Presentation Layer Error Code 4 30513 Presentation Layer Error Count 4 30514 Executed Function Code Error 4 30515 Last Transmitted Exception Code 4 30516 File Number of Error Request 4 30517 Element Number of Error Request 4 30518 Function Code 1 Message Counter Read Single Output Coil 4 30519 Function Code 2 Message Counter Read Discrete Input Image 4 30520 Function Code 3 Message Counter Read Single Holding Register 4 30521 Function Code 4 Message Counter Read Single Input Register 4 30522 Function Code 5 Message Counter Set Clear Single Output Coil 4 30523 Function Code 6 Message Counter Read Write Single Holding Register 4 30524 Function Code 8 Message Counter Run Diagnostics 4 30525 Function Code 15 Message Counter Set Clear for Block of Output Coils 4 30526 Function Code 16 Message Counter Read Write for Block of Holding Registers 4 30527 Modem Status 4 30528 Total message
502. on Files 2 Address Level 2 Mode S8 Parameter E 8 8 E B x Riil iE Lies G a Z la lg le l _ l E la lb la jw JE e 15 l Js 8 o l l lm le le ju b lo S l le EIS IE IG IE im S S 18 e Ia E j la 8 a Operand Bit e ele e e e ele e e e e e e e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing ONS One Shot N7 1 d ONS 0 IMPORTANT ATTENTION You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS LCD and DLS files Instruction Type input Execution Time for the ONS Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 11 87 us 1 74 us TIP The ONS instruction for the MicroLogix 1100 provides the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time After the false to true rung transition the ONS instruction remains true for one program scan The output then turns OFF and remains OFF until the logic preceding the ONS instruction is false this re activates the ONS instruction The ONS Storage Bit is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan This bit is used to remember the false to true rung transition Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 164 Relay Type Bit Instructions ONS Inst
503. one operand For example 1 XIC instruction which has 1 operand consumes 1 user word 1 EQU instruction which has 2 operands consumes 2 user words 1 ADD instruction which has 3 operands consumes 3 user words e Function files do not consume user memory TIP Although the controller allows up to 256 elements in a file it may not actually be possible to create a file with that many elements due to the user memory size in the controller 1 These are approximate values For actual memory usage see the tables in Appendix A of this manual Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 38 Controller Memory and File Types MicroLogix 1100 User Memory The MicroLogix 1100 controller supports 8K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below 4 0K Data Words e o A OK Program Words 4 0K 4 7K See MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 457 to find the memory usage for specific instructions The MicroLogix 1100 controller also supports 64K bytes of battery backed memory for Data Logging or Recipe operations See Chapter 22 for Data Logging and Recipe information See System Status File on page 465 to find the memory usage for specific instructions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Controller Memory and File Types 39 Viewing Controller Memory Usage 1 Highlight and open Controller Prope
504. onfigured as Node 1 and the other processor as node 4 The processor at node 1 will contain the ladder logic below and transfer data from it s N7 0 Integer file to the processor at node 4 s N7 0 Integer file Since N7 0 is the source file for this example data must be entered into this register for node 1 For this example Locate N7 0 in the ML1500 Node 1 and enter the value 63 icroLogix 1000 aA MicroLogix 1100 HN IT Node 1 ae MicroLogix 1100 Node 1 Ladder Logic MSG 0000 Read VVrite Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen MG11 0 DN MG11 0 EN 0001 MG11 0 ER Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 552 Knowledgebase Quick Starts MSG Setup Screen MSG MG11 0 1 Elements SODCPU Write Micrologix 1000 Node 4 Ladder Logic No ladder logic is required in the destination processor however the communications channel must be configured to match the source processor Since the default settings for the ML1500 communications channel is DF1 protocol 19 200 Kbaud the ML1000 must be configured to match See Below Micrologix 1000 Channel Configuration DF1 485 Configuration x CD EIN m m o cme o n Important Note Do not connect to ML1000 directly using a 1761 CBL AMOO cable Important Note After the ladder logic has been entered into the ML1100 and the ML1000 channel configuration has been changed in order fo
505. only AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS lbi The PWM AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the acceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PWM Profile Parameter Select PP Element Description Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Access PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP Ibit Oor1 control read write The PWM PP Profile Parameter Select selects which component of the waveform is modified during a ramp phase e Set 1 selects Frequency Cleared 0 selects Duty Cycle The PWM PP bit cannot be modified while the PWM output is running enabled See PWM ADD on page 158 for more information PWM Idle Status IS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access IS PWM Idle Status PWM O IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM IS Idle Status is controlled by the PWM sub system and represents no PWM activity It can be used in the control program by an input instruction e Set 1 PWM sub system is in an idle state Cleared 0 PWM sub system is not in an idle state it is running Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using Hig
506. ontroller also supports an extended character set decimal 128 to 255 Howevet the extended character set may display different characters depending on the platform you are using Decimal values 0 through 31 are also assigned Ctrl codes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 340 ASCII Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 2 1 Communications Instructions This chapter contains information about the Message MSG and Service Communications SVC communication instructions This chapter provides information on e Messaging Overview on page 341 e SVC Service Communications on page 344 e MSG Message on page 346 The Message Element on page 347 e Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction on page 356 e MSG Instruction Ladder Logic on page 360 Local Messages on page 361 Configuring a Local Message on page 363 Local Messaging Examples on page 373 e Remote Messages on page 388 e Configuring a Remote Message on page 391 Configuring a Multi hop Remote Message on EtherNet IP Communication Channel on page 394 e Configuring a MicroLogix 1100 CIP Generic Message via Ethernet OS Series B FRN 4 or later on page 21 62 e MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 414 e Special Function with MSG instruction OS Series B FRN 4 or later on page 416 The communication instructions read ot write data to another station Instruction Used To Page SVC Interrupt the program sca
507. or 1 11 Load Memory Module Always being set in an attached memory module user program This bit is not cleared 0 by the controller Your program can examine the state of this bit on the first scan using bit 8 1 15 on entry into an Executing mode to determine if the memory module user program has been transferred after a power up occurred This information is useful when you have an application that contains retentive data and a memory module has bit S 1 10 or bit S 1 11 set Memory Module Password Mismatch Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 9 binary 00r 1 status read write At power up if Load Always is set and the controller and memory module passwords do not match the Memory Module Password Mismatch bit 1s set 1 SeePassword Protection on page 45 for more information STI Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 10 binary 00r 1 status read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIL SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information Processor Battery Low Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 11 binary 0 or 1 status read only This bit 1s set 1 when the battery 1s low Publication 1763 RM00
508. or 1 to 64 long word Position Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload Data is unloaded at position zero Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 m Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o a Parameter E 8 s E e S z x a e m t E 5 F a IE In jo l le _ E la ln le E 9 1S e le B UE O v n e zo amp 4 S z amp t 2 E t m Ei 9 8 2 a l m z jS ja FIFO e e e e e e e e ele Destination e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 234 File Instructions LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Instruction Type output Execution Time for the LFL Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 39 93 us 3
509. ory and File Types Protecting Data Files During Download Data File Download Protection Once a uset program is in the controller there may be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying user configured variables in one or more data files in the controller This situation can occur when an application needs to be updated but the data that is relevant to the installation needs to remain intact This capability is referred to as Data File Download Protection The protection feature operates when e A User Program is downloaded via programming software e A User Program is downloaded from a Memory Module Setting Download File Protection Download File Protection can be applied to the following data file types Output O e Input T e Binary B e Timer T e Counter C Control R e Integer N e Floating Point F e String ST Long Word L Proportional Integral Derivative PD e Message MG Programmable Limit Switch PLS e Routing Information RT Extended Routing Information RIX TIP The data in the Status File cannot be protected Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Controller Memory and File Types 43 Data File Properties x General File Type M Name INTEGER Desc Elements je Last N 5 Attributes Jo Debug I Skip When Deleting Unu Scope s Global Local Tinte Lan 25 z
510. osition can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long wotd Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table LFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode P a Parameter 2 gx E 5 E a g i lk s E la lo lg le l _ Ie E la ks lo la IE e l IB JE IE o m z bns Zla ER Elb OG la S 8 je a 6 e jz S la Source e e e e e e e e e e e e LIFO e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 236 File Instructions LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload Instruction Type output Execution Time for the LFU Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 39 34 us 37 06 us long word 39 97 us 37 09 us On a false to true rung transition the LFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created file called a LIFO stack The data is unloaded usin
511. ot number of the ControlNet Interface module 0 16 for ControlLogix in the second row of the To Address column as shown below under the Mult Hop tab Double click on the From Device under the ControlLogix Backplane and select the 1756 ControlNet Interface Enter the address of the ControINet Interface using 1747 KFC15 MSG MG9 6 1 Elements lolx General i Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address Type This MicroLogix Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 100 TUU 115 Logix Backplane N A Backplane Slot dec 3 ControlNet Interface N A ControlNet Node dec 2 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions Configuring Local Write message with ST file 387 The MicroLogix 1100 can use a message instruction to transfer string file data to target device SLC5 0x 1756 L1 The following message setup screen is used to send local PLC5 write to the 1756 L1 via 1756 ENBT module A message read will also work MSG MG50 7 1 Elements edel xl MultiHop This Controller r Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore if timed out 70 0 Communication Command PLCS Write Break Connection BK 0 Data Table Address S79 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements uj Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN D Message Timeout 33 7 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote Multi
512. ounter A device that counts the occurrence of some event CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O status and files where user data such as bit integer timers and counters is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 595 DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your devices download The transfer of program or data files to a device DTE Data Terminal Equipment EMI Electromagnetic interference embedded I O Embedded I O is the controllers on board I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 0 expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1200 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O MicroLogix 1500 controllers use Bulletin 1769 expansion I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 1 and higher encoder A device that detects position and transmits a signal representing that position executing mode Any run or test mode false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 596 FET Field Effect
513. our controller display LCD instructions or get keypad inputs from the user at powet up without additional operations Data Input Timeout of LCD instruction TO Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access TO Data Input Timeout of LCD 0 TO word INT control read only LCD instruction Data Input Timeout of LCD instruction TO specifies timeout period for data input when key inputs are obtained from the user using the LCD instruction in the ladder program When this wotd is set to zero 0 it means no timeout is used When set to a positive value the LCD exits U MSG mode and continues to the upper menu if there is no keypad input for more than the specified timeout petiod in seconds LCD Instruction Job Done DN Feature Data Format Type User Program Access DN LCD Instruction Job LCD 0 DN binary bit status read only Done LCD Instruction Job Done DN is set 1 when an LCD instruction is completed If the Display With Input bit of the LCD instruction is clear 0 No DN bit is set 1 immediately after its execution result is displayed on the LCD If the Display With Input bit is set 0 Yes DN bit is set 1 when the OK or ESC key is pressed LCD Display Operation Error Bit ERR LCD Function File Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access ERR LCD Display LCD 0 ERR binary bit status read only Operation Error Bit LCD Display Operation Error Bit ERR bit indicates
514. pare instructions 9 179 compiler revision build number status B 489 release status B 489 contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance C 499 control profile G 594 control program G 594 control register error status bit B 477 controller definition G 594 fault messages C 492 mode B 472 mode status B 468 overhead A 462 G 594 status file B 465 controller properties 2 39 conversion instructions 11 201 convert from binary coded decimal BCD instruction 11 204 convert to binary coded decimal BCD instruction 11 208 COP instruction 14 223 copy file instruction 14 223 copy word instruction 14 222 count down instruction 8 176 count up instruction 8 176 counters counter file 8 173 counter file and status bits 8 174 definition G 594 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 how counters work 8 173 CPU central processing unit definition G 594 CPW instruction 14 222 CS function file 3 57 3 71 CTD instruction 8 176 CTU instruction 8 176 D data file download protection 2 42 data file overwrite protection lost status bit B 485 data files 2 36 2 40 bit B 2 40 control R 2 40 counter C 8 173 floating point F 2 40 10 190 I O images for expansion modules MicroLogix 1200 1 17 input I 2 40 input and output addressing examples 1 26 integer N 2 40 long word L 2 40 message MG file 21 347 organization and addressing 20 312 output 0 2 40 PID PD 19 281 programmable limit switch PLS 5 120 protecting data files
515. peed Function outputs These outputs can be used as standard outputs not high speed ot individually configured for PTO or PWM operation The PTO functionality allows a simple motion profile or pulse profile to be generated directly from the controller The pulse profile has three primary components e Total number of pulses to be generated e Accelerate decelerate intervals e Run interval The PTO instruction along with the HSC and PWM functions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions In this implementation the user defines the total number of pulses to be generated which corresponds to distance traveled and how many pulses to use for each acceleration deceleration period The number of pulses not used in the acceleration deceleration period defines how many pulses are generated during the run phase In this implementation the accelerate decelerate intervals are not required to be the same Independent values can be defined for these intervals The ADI bit in the PTO function file is used to enable this feature See page 134 PTO and PWM with any version of RSLogix500 However special cares are required in handling some of PTO and PWM function file elements in user programs Refer to Appendix F How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix
516. ple is shown Indexed addressing is supported by SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers The MicroLogix 1100 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing This example is shown for comparison purposes Indexed Addressing Example The following ADD instruction uses an indexed address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indexed offset value is 20 stored in 8 24 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indexed offset to perform the operation Indexed ADD Working ADD Add Add Source A N7 0 Source A N7 20 Source B 25 Source B 25 Dest N15 0 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in S 24 Working Address Source A N7 0 20 N7 20 Destination N15 0 20 N15 20 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 88 Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing Example An equivalent example using indirect addressing is shown below In place of using the index register S 24 the user can designate any other valid word address as the indirect address Multiple indirect addresses can be used within an instruction The following ADD instruction uses an indirect address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indirect offset value is 20 stored in N7 3 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indirect offset to perform to instructio
517. point the next preset High HIP or Low LOP defined in the PLS file becomes active Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 121 When the HSC counts to that new preset the new output data is written through the HSC mask This process continues until the last element within the PLS file is loaded At that point the active element within the PLS file is reset to zero This behavior is referred to as circular operation TIP The Output High Data OHD is only written when the High preset HIP is reached The Output Low Data OLD is written when the low preset is reached TIP Output High Data is only operational when the counter is counting up Output Low Data is only operational when the counter is counting down If invalid data is loaded during operation an HSC error is generated within the HSC function file The error will not cause a controller fault If an invalid parameter is detected it will be skipped and the next parameter will be loaded for execution provided it is valid You can use the PLS in Up high Down low or both directions If your application only counts in one direction simply ignore the other parameters The PLS function can operate with all of the other HSC capabilities The ability to select which HSC events generate a user interrupt are not limited Addressing PLS Files The addressing format for the PLS file is shown below
518. r ger BSESEBEHEHESES HEESEHEHEHEUEE E UN g g rol Wow 9 MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1100 Slave 1500 Slave SLC 5 04 Slave SLC 5 03 with 1747 KE Configuring a Local Message Message Setup Screen Interface Module Slave The rung below shows a MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen B3 0 MSG 0000 Read Write Message CEN 2 0 MSG File MG11 0 c DN d Setup Screen ER gt The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below This screen is used to setup This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of the elements follow Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 364 Communications Instructions e B30 0000 e JE Read Write Message CEN 10 MSGF e MGlll N TIE CER 0 Integr 0 500CPU Read ETT This Controller Parameters Channel The MicroLogix 1100 supports Channel 0 and Channel 1 messaging Channel 0 is the RS 232 RS 485 port and Channel 1 is the Ethernet port Z MSG Rung 2 0 i If Channel 0 is selected with that channel configured for Modbus RTU Master then the next line will display Modbus Command Otherwise the next line displays Communication Command Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 365 Communication Command MSG Ru
519. r 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 153 e O0 0 0 2 PWM modulates output 2 of the embedded outputs e O0 0 0 3 PWM modulates output 3 of the embedded outputs PWM Decelerating Status DS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access t Qor1 status read only DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bi The PWM DS Decel bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the deceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PWM Run Status RS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access RS PWM Run Status PWM O RS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program e Set 1 Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 154 Using High Speed Outputs PWM Accelerating Status AS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access t Oor1 status read
520. r one value is less than a second value GRT and LES Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State RT A gt B true Ax B false LES AB false A B true Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 182 Compare Instructions GEO Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal To GEQ _ Grtr Than or Egl A gt B L Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt LEQ Less Than or Eq A B L Source A N7 0 0 Source B N7 1 0 lt MEQ Mask Compare for Equal MEQ Masked Equal L Source N7 0 0 lt Mask N7 1 0000h lt Compare N7 2 0 lt IMPORTANT Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEO and LEQ instructions Instruction Type input Execution Time for the GEO and LEO Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 word 8 96 us 0 87 us long word 9 09 us 0 87 us The GEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value The LEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value GEO and LEO Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GEQ AB true A B false LEQ A gt B false A lt B true IMPORTANT Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LE
521. r the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers use the ONS instruction Use the OSR and OSF instructions to trigger an event to occur one time These instructions trigger an event based on a change of rung state as follows e Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the false to true rising edge change of state of the rung Use the OSF instruction when an event must statt based on the true to false falling edge change of state of the rung These instructions use two parametets Storage Bit and Output Bit Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Relay Type Bit Instructions 165 OSR and OSF Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types e Storage Bit This is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan Output Bit This 1s the bit address which is set based on a false to true OSR or true to false OSF rung transition The Output Bit is set for one program scan To re activate the OSR the rung must become false To re activate the OSF the rung must become true OSR Storage and Output Bit Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit false to true one scan bit is set bit is set true to true bit is set bit is reset true to false and false to false bit is reset bit is reset OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit true to false one
522. r this example to function connect the controllers using a 1761 CBL PM02 cable leave connected until the COMM 0 LED on the ML1100 starts to blink Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 17501 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Knowledgebase Quick Starts 553 Verifying data has been sent To verify the data has been sent to node 4 disconnect the PM02 cable and connect the PC running RSLogix 500 to the ML1000 Node 4 Go to N7 0 and view the data this should match the data in N7 0 of node 1 Another way to verify the data is being sent to node 4 is to replace the Target Device Data Table Address with an output modules address In this example the output module is a ML1000 the address would be O 0 0 This will display in binary on the output LEDS what ever number that was entered into N7 0 of the ML1100 IMPORTANT NOTE By addressing O 0 0 the outputs of the destination processor will be energized upon successful transmission of data Verify that nothing is connected to the outputs to ensure safe operation of the controller If a 16 Point MicroLogix 1000 is being used as the destination processor Node 1 and the number 63 is entered into the above example all the outputs will be energized or turn If the number entered is greater then 63 then a fault may occur with an error stating that the extended I O bit S 0 8 was not set In this case clear the fault go offline set bit S 0 8 and re download the la
523. rades i o tote x RE E SGH EET OLEO 3 Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use this Manual leen 13 Purpose or this Manual susitars yen Sache tote a eee 13 Common Techniques Used in this Manual 0 000040 13 Related Documentation 0 0 0 ccc cent ees 14 Rockwell Automation Support 2122 22 es comi epe io oxeapnbare ed 14 Chapter 1 1 0 Configuration Exabeddedel oru 4r tid ore VS ar tron UO o ASH GR od 15 MicroLogix 1100 Expansion I O eor cete Pes 17 MicroLogix 1100 Expansion I O Memory Mapping 17 DO GPEC cus auge tuor Eee aa rw ERI de Vau sea ihv 26 T Forcing ssec der ptr Veg dan ue india Cu 27 Taput ESCOGER 9 add eve se ere REEE E AE e Hee O e cise 27 Analog VANES oe ote ba eit tuse pane dtque rati dicto bes 28 Latchitio Inpul sa ieree wine deett tip e manie Dee e rri 30 Configuring Expansion TO Usine RSLOpix 5005 tco edo t e dob t 34 Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Controller Memory 0 eect I 36 Types Daa Piles toc giro LAS PUE be RHET beo HET M FREE ERN 40 Protecting Data Files During Download 000000 42 Static Pile Protection s eL e t UU ARR n i UI Ds 44 Passwotd P otection ios se mets CD PUT WP NE E eh 45 Clearing the Controller Memoty i uui a etes e IN ohn ee pb 46 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock eee 47 Web View Disable OS Series B FRN 4 or later 1 0 00 47 Chapter 3 Function Files OVERVIEW aihena Y Voce his Leona Se nea
524. ramming instructions listed within their functional group Functional Group Description Page High Speed Counter HSL RAC The high speed counter instructions along with the HSC function file allow you to monitor and control the high speed outputs Generally used with DC inputs 89 High Speed Outputs PTO PWM The high speed output instructions along with the PTO and PWM function files allow you 1 to monitor and control the high speed outputs Generally used with FET outputs BBB units Relay Type Bit Timer and Counter XIC XIO OTE OTL OTU OSR ONS OSF The relay type bit instructions monitor and control the status 1 of bits TON TOF RTO CTU CTD RES The timer and counter instructions control operations based on time or 1 the number of events keypad Compare EQU NEQ LES LEQ GRT GEQ MEQ LIM The compare instructions compare values by using a specific 179 compare operation Math ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR ABS SOR SCL SCP SWP The math instructions perform arithmetic 187 operations Conversion DCD ENC TOD FRD GCD The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform 201 conversions between binary and decimal values Logical AND OR XOR NOT The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on words 211 Move MOV MVM The move instructions modify and move words
525. range bit is set The Control Variable calculated by the PID instruction has the same range of 0 to 16383 The Control Output word 16 of the control block has the range of 0 to 100 You can set lower and upper limits for the instruction s calculated output values where an upper limit of 100 corresponds to a Control Variable limit of 16383 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 301 Scaling to Engineering Units Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero crossing deadband values in engineering units and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units Remember the process variable PV must still be within the range 0 to 16383 The PV is displayed in engineering units howevet Select scaling as follows 1 Enter the maximum and minimum scaling values MaxS and MinS in the PID control block The MinS value corresponds to an analog value of zero for the lowest reading of the process variable MaxS corresponds to an analog value of 16383 for the highest reading These values reflect the process limits Setpoint scaling 1s selected by entering a non zero value for one or both parameters If you enter the same value for both parameters setpoint scaling is disabled For example if measuring a full scale temperature range of 73 C PV 0 to 1156 C PV 16383 enter a value of 73 for MinS and 1156 for MaxS Remember that inputs to the PID instruction must be 0 to 16
526. rd INT 2105 status read only PWM ER Error Codes detected by the PWM sub system are displayed in this register The table identifies known errors Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 2 Yes No No verlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PWMO and PWM1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected This error does not Error fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed 2 No No Yes Output The configured PWM output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PWM to operate This error does not fault the Error controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 Yes Yes No Frequency The frequency value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error faults Error the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 4 Reserved 5 Yes Yes No Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is either le
527. re NAN not a number Infinity or De normalized then the result is NAN If y4 yo Of x xo result in an overflow then the result is NAN Other Considerations If y4 yo 0 the Result becomes the Scaled Start value If x xy 0 and x xg the Result becomes the Scaled Start value If x4 xy 0 and x does not equal xp The Result becomes a negative overflow for integer values or a negative NAN for floating point values Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Math Instructions SOR Square Root SOR Square Root Source N7 0 0 lt Dest N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SOR Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1100 199 Data Size When Rung Is True False word 109 21 us 0 87 us long word 109 77 us 0 87 us The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination The data ranges for the source is 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The Carry Math Status Bit is set if the source is negative See Updates to Math Status Bits on page 189 for more information SOR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 2 1 z Address Data Files
528. read write 12 Target Location information See tables on page 349 for options Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Y Word read write 15 Y Word read only 16 Control bits See Control Bits table on page 351 for details N 16 bit read write S 17 Status bits and Range parameter See table on page 352 for details Mixed 16 bit read only S 18 MG11 0 ERR Error code See Error Codes on page 414 Word read only 19 Time since message started in seconds Word read only 20 Reserved Word read only 21 Internal message start time in seconds Word read only 22 bits 15 08 Internal ERR Error Code Word read only bits 07 00 Internal Fail Code Note When CIP sub system cannot send a message due to some reason or reply contains error code error code is displayed via MSG instruction When messaging through CIP communication and non zero Status Code was received the low byte is OxE0 and the high byte of this sub element contains detailed Status Code returned by CIP reply for MicroLogix 1100 Series B Note When SMTP sub system cannot send an email due to some reason error code is shown via MSG instruction When messaging through SMTP communication and the low byte is OxDD the high byte of this sub element contains detailed Fail Code returned by the SMTP sub system for MicroLogix 1100 Series B 23 Extended Status Error Code from expansion I O communications module 2401 Supplemental Routing Path Data A
529. reater Than A gt B um Source A L9 0 2 35000 Source B 100 100 GEQ B3 0 Grtr Than or Egl A gt B Source A L9 0 3 35000 lt Source B 100 100 lt LIM Limit Test Low Lim 100 100 lt Function Files Test L9 0 HSC PTO PWM sm El RTC LCD MMi Bt 35000 ie value Description High Lim 40000 EREE 40000 E PWM O ER 0 0 gau 0 T e ADD SUB MUL Instruction CEND To get an unsigned result without Math Overflow Error from ADD SUB MUL instructions S 2 14 Math Overflow Selected bit should be set and the 5 0 Math Overflow Trap bit should be cleared after the execution of these instructions Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller 577 For example assume the PTO 0 OF value is 20000 and a user wants to set that value to x2 twice using the MUL instruction If S2 14 is cleared and S 5 0 bit is not cleared after execution of the MUL instruction then the result will be 32767 and Math Overflow Error will be reported at the End of Scan ADD Instruction Workaround Example PTO 0 OF 40000 PTO 0 OF 20000 20000 EQU Equal Source A PTO 0 0F 40000 lt Source B 20000 20000 lt MOV Move Source 20000 20000 lt Dest PTO 0 0F 40000 lt 2 L 14 Source A PTO 0 0F 40000 lt Source B 200
530. red 0 by the control program and is also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e High Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 100 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Low Preset Reached LPR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPR Low HSC 0 LPR bit 2 to 7 status read only Preset Reached 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The LPR Low Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is less than or equal to the low preset variable HSC 0 LOP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 101 High Preset Mask HPM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPM High HSC 0 HPM bi Preset Mask t 0to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The HPM High Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a high preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a High Preset Re
531. requests from devices on the Ethernet network but cannot initiate communications to devices on Ethernet DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks DNI DNI BBF BBHBBB 7 O PanelView I m LEI m SLC 5 03 DeviceNet Network LC 5 05 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet Network H g SLC 5 05 PLC 5E Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 391 Configuring a Remote Remote capability is configured through the RSLogix 500 Message Setup Message screen Example Configuration Screen and Network The message configuration shown below is for the MicroLogix 1100 at node 12 on the DH 485 network This message reads five elements of data from the SLC 5 04 node 51 on the DH network starting at address N 50 0 The SLC 5 04 at Node 23 of the DH network is configured for passthru operation TIP The MicroLogix 1100 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 in this example za MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller m Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N7 0 Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel p Error ERE 0 Target Device Message done
532. requires five transmissions for the DF1 Master to complete a read write transaction with a DF1 Slave three by the master and two by the slave IMPORTANT The DF1 Radio Modem driver should only be used among devices that support and are configured for the DF1 Radio Modem protocol DF1 Radio Modem protocol is currently supported by SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 controllers MicroLogix 1100 1200 and 1500 controllers and Logix controllers at Version 16 1 firmware or higher Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 518 Protocol Configuration Like DF1 Full Duplex protocol DF1 Radio Modem allows any node to initiate to any other node at any time if the radio modem network supports full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance Like DF1 Half Duplex protocol up to 255 devices are supported with unique addresses from 0 to 254 A node ignores any packets received that have a destination address other than its own with the exception of broadcast packets A broadcast write command initiated by any DF1 radio modem node is executed by all of the other DF1 radio modem nodes that receive it No acknowledgement or reply is returned Unlike either DF1 Full Duplex or DF1 Half Duplex protocols DF1 Radio Modem protocol does not include ACKs NAKs ENQs or poll packets Data integrity is ensured by the CRC checksum Using the DF1 Radio Modem Using RSLogix 500 version 7 00 00 or higher the DF1 Radio Modem driver c
533. reset value is reached The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer is timed out TOF timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When rung conditions are true And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung conditions are false and accumulated value is less than the preset value rung conditions go true or when the done bit is reset bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung conditions are true rung conditions go false A ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation may occur Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 172 Timer and Counter Instructions RTO Retentive Timer On Delay Instruction Type output RTO Retentive Timer On CEN gt Timer T4 0 ine ae 4 I CDN2 Execution Time for the RTO Instructions rese lt Accum 0
534. ressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MVM instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit 0 0 Carry The Controller always resets S 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if destination is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the MSB of the destination is set otherwise resets Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 File Instructions Chapter 14 The file instructions perform operations on file data Instruction Used To Page CPW Copy Word Copy words of data from one location to 222 another COP Copy File Copy a range of data from one file 223 location to another FLL Fill File Load a file with a program constant ora 225 value from an element address BSL Bit Shift Left Load and unload data into a bit array one 226 bit at a ti BSR Bit Shift Right eS 278 FFL First In First Out HFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 230 th der first in first out FFU First In First Out FIFO Sameno SLIN MANN 232 Unload LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 234 der last in first out LFU Last In First Out LIFO
535. rformance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used IMPORTANT All devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix 1 100 Remote Packet Support These controllers can respond and initiate with device s communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH 485 and DH networks Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 DF1 Full Duplex Protocol Protocol Configuration 505 DF1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The MicroLogix controllers support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DF7 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both direc
536. rget node s reply the controller examines the message from the target device If the reply is successful the DN bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 If it is a successful read request the data is written to the data table The message instruction function is complete If the reply is a failure with an error code the ER bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 The message instruction function is complete 6 If the DN or ER bit is set 1 and the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared 0 the next time the message instruction is scanned See MSG Instruction Ladder Logic on page 360 for examples using the message instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 359 Communication Servicing Selection and Message Servicing Selection The following screen shows the channel configuration window for Communication Servicing Selection and Message Servicing Selection xl General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 0 Driver A IV Comms Servicing Selection Memory Module Over Write Protected Iv Message Servicing Selection ist AWA Append Character Ytd Edit Resource Owner Timeout x 60 2nd AWA Append Character Wa Channel 1 Driver Ethernet v Comms Servicing Selection Memory Module Over Write Protected Iv Message Servicing Selection Edit Resource Owner Timeout x 60 Communication Servicing Selection Use the check box to enhance communication c
537. ries B controller Therefore these instructions could cause undesired results when JF OF and OFS of PTO PWM values are greater than 32767 For example assume the PWM 0 OF value is 40000 9C40h and a user wants to divide it by 2 The expected result is 20000 but the actual return value is 12768 because DIV instruction recognize 9C40h as 25536 To solve this issue JE OF OFS of PTO PWM type should be changed to Long Type 32 bit by CPW instruction before the execution of these instructions as shown below CPW Copy Word Source PWM 0 OF Dest L9 0 Length 1 DIV Divide Source A L9 0 40000 lt Source B 2 2 Dest N7 0 20000 lt SCP Scale w Parameters Input H 40000 lt Function Files Eek Input Min 0 0 lt HSC PTO PWM sm En RTC LCD MMI t l As wan l cis l Input Max 40000 E PUMHER A 40000 lt EPWM WES Scaled Min 0 aS ULI i PWM Outpt equency 0 oun ss E M Scaled Max 20000 EPWM 0 20000 lt Output N7 2 20000 lt CEND e NEG ABS Instruction The operands of NEG and ABS instructions work as signed value but JF OF OFS of PTO PWM are unsigned 16 bit variable at MicroLogix 1100 Series B Therefore these instructions could cause undesired results when JE OF and OFS of PTO PWM values are greater than 32767 If PTO 0 JF is 40000 the expected NEG result is 40000 and the expected ABS result is 40000 However the actual results are 25
538. rmal Operation NO and maintains its logic state until after the PTO instruction completes its operation With this type of logic status bit behavior is as follows The Done DN bit becomes true 1 when the PTO completes and remains set until the PTO rung logic is false The false rung logic re activates the PTO instruction To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output monitor the done DN bit is y ute spo n5 00 00 i8 3M pde ung State Sub Elements Relative Timing Normal Operation NO Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle ID Weide oak lee a r Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC A A Start of PTO Start of PTO Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 133 Pulse Train Outputs Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a PTO Function File with two elements PTOO and PTO1 These elements provide access PTO Function File to PTO configuration data and also allow the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the Pulse Train Outputs TIP If the controller mode is run the data within sub element fields may be changing loxi Hsc PTO pwm sti jen RTC par re MM alel E PTO 0 m OUT Output DN Done DS Decelerating Status RS Run Status
539. roller MicroLogix 1100 Use the XIC instruction to determine if the addressed bit is on Use the XIO instruction to determine if the addressed bit is off Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 160 Relay Type Bit Instructions When used on a rung the bit address being examined can correspond to the status of real world input devices connected to the base unit or expansion I O or internal addresses data or function files Examples of devices that turn on or off e a push button wired to an input addressed as 11 0 4 e an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 2 e a timer controlling a light addressed as T4 3 DN e a bit in the bit file addressed as B3 16 The instructions operate as follows XIO and XIC Instruction Operation Rung State Addressed XIC Instruction XIO Instruction Bit True Off Returns a False Returns a True True On Returns a True Returns a False False Instruction is not evaluated Instruction is not evaluated Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table XIC and XIO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 T Address Data Files Function Files j Address Level 2 Mode A S8 Parameter E 2 E e amp T x
540. roller mode switch is in the RUN position the controller immediately enters the RUN mode ATTENTION If you clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 when the Future Access OEM Lock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 14 binary 0 or 1 status read only When this bit is set 1 it indicates that the programming device must have an exact copy of the controller program SeeAllow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 47 for more information First Scan Dit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 15 binary Oor1 status read write When the controller sets 1 this bit it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following entry into an executing mode The controller clears this bit after the first scan TIP The First Scan bit S 1 15 is set during execution of the start up protection fault routine Refer to S 1 9 for more information STI Mode STI Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 0 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIP SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 474 Sy
541. roller s memory module 1763 MM1 3 Enter the RCP file parameters as shown below When finished click Create RCP File on OK x File 0 Number of Recipes 3 Name Paint Colors Description RCP Quick Start example for mixing paint colors Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files User Program Cancel ox renes He Help Data Log Queue Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 430 Recipe and Data Logging 4 A new window will appear In this window enter the values as shown below told Dade ean rwb Desin Red Pigment Green Pigment Blue Pigment Mixing Time LEGERE ee Current Recipe b H 5 Change the Current Recipe from 0 to 1 Notice the addresses were duplicated but the data was not 6 Enter the data for Recipe 1 as shown below EIITTIESITOHENE a Address Length Initial Data Description N70 Red Pigment N7 1 Green Pigment N7 2 Blue Pigment T4 0 PRE Mixing Time Current Recipe zb 7 Change from Recipe 1 to Recipe 2 and enter the following data imi RCP File 0 RCP Example EU ici xj ERG 0 5 Hed N 1 333 Green Pigment N 2 1 333 Blue Pigment T4 0 PRE 1 1000 s Time Current Recipe The Recipes are now configured 8 Create the following ladder logic Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Recipe and Data Logging 431 EIE Yellow Paint Recipe
542. rror Code L OF Output Frequency Hz 0 L OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz LDC Duty Cycle e d 456 45 6 LDCS Duty Cycle Status Os 456 45 60 L ADD Accel Decel Delay 10ms wry Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 152 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Width Modulated The variables within each PWM element along with what type of Function File Elements Summary Pulse Width Modulated Function File PWM 0 behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed individually below Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information OUT PWM Output PWM 0 0UT word INT 20r3 status read only 152 DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only 153 RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 153 AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 154 PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP bit 00r 1 control read write 154 IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 154 ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED hit Dor 1 status read only 155 NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only 155 EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit 00r 1 control read write 155 ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit 0 or 1 status read only 156 or 0 2 PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 O0F word INTJ9 0 to 20 000
543. rties 1500 LRP oj x Project a amp z Help E Controller i Controller Properties L3 Processor Status L3 Function Files Au IO Configuration p Channel Configuration Program Files sSYS0 SYS1 4 Lap2 Data Files Cross Reference E 00 output El n input El s2 status E 83 BINARY E T4 TIMER 2 The amount of Memory Used and Memory Left will appear in the Controller Properties window once the program has been verified Controller Properties B X General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications Processor Type Bul 1763 Micrologix 1100 Series A E Processor Name UNTITLED Program Checksum 8515 Program Files 3 Data Files 9 Memory Used 93 Instruction Words Used 43 Data Table Words Memory Left 6563 Instruction Words Left OK Cancel Apply Help Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 40 Controller Memory and File Types Data Files Data files store numeric information including I O status and other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines The data file types are File Name File File Words per File Description Identifier Number 2 Element Output File 0 0 1 The Output File stores the values that are written to the physical outputs during the Output Scan Input File l 1 1 The Input File stores the values that are read from the physical inputs
544. ruction e Source A is the location of the first string used for comparison e Source B is the location of the second string used for comparison Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 335 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ASR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files 2 Mode o Er E c o T Parameter A E os 2 S jg ec a x a a 8 Z is ls s m a IE la jo 9 le j _ B la ln lnm JE e l s8i 5 o _ lw la le l lu b l S E le e 2 El IE le S S 8 e Ia E 6 2 ia lf S la Source A Source B 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation If the string length of Source A or Source B exceeds 82 characters the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the rung goes false Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 336 ASCII Instructions Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions Rung Condition ON OFF 74 Enable Bit EN ON OFF 7j Queue Bit EU ON OFF 14 Running Bit RN ON OFF Done Bit Error Bit ON DNorER OFF
545. ruction 291 Time Mode TM Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary Dor 1 control read write The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode 1 or STI mode 0 This bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When set for timed mode the PID updates the CV at the rate specified in the loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT When set for STI mode the PID updates the CV every time the PID instruction is scanned in the control program When you select STI program the PID instruction in the STI interrupt subroutine The STI routine should have a time interval equal to the setting of the PID loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT Set the STI period in word STI 0 SPM For example if the loop update time contains the value 10 for 100 ms then the STI time interval must also equal 100 for 100 ms TIP When using timed mode your processor scan time should be at least ten times faster than the loop update time to prevent timing inaccuracies or disturbances Loop Update Time LUT Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1to 1024 control read write The loop update time word 13 is the time interval between PID calculations The entry 1s in 0 01 second intervals Enter a loop update ti
546. ruction Operation Rung Transition Storage Bit Rung State after Execution false to true one scan storage bit is set true true to true storage bit remains set false true to false false to false storage bit is cleared false Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table ONS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 7 npe Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode o Er Parameter E s e T a Ele IS z g e A SiS zk Si a EIE IE e g S amp S a jo So j j j a n o 53 S S o e lij a le Eis o 2 o a le Z lu lo a B E le le a la m lm S S Sf a J la FS IS ja Storage Bit OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling OSR One Shot Rising Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 OSF One Shot Falling Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OSR and OSF Instructions Controller OSR When Rung Is OSF When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1100 9 12 us 9 12 us 9 12 us 9 12 us TIP The OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1100 does not provide the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers Fo
547. rue the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one If the position is equal to zero at start up when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode the instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 244 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Sequencer Instructions Word B10 1 B10 2 B10 3 B10 4 B10 5 e If the rung is true the instruction transfers the value in step zero e If the rung is false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be fixed or variable It is fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code It is variable if you enter an element address or a file address direct ot indirect for changing the mask with each step The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works
548. rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement The following illustration shows the rung you can use to unlatch the overflow trap bit Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 190 Math Instructions Using the Floating Point File Description F Data File Floating point files contain IEEE 754 floating point data elements One floating point element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in each floating point file Floating Point Data File Structure Floating Point Element 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 gl Exponent Value Mantissa High Word Low Word 1 S Sign Bit Floating point numbers are represented using the IEEE 754 format whete e Bit 31 is the sign bit This bit is set for negative numbers note that negative zero is a valid value Bits 23 to 30 are the exponent e Bits 0 to 22 are the mantissa The value represented by a 32 bit floating point number not one of the exception values defined on page 191 is given by the following expression Note the restoration of the suppressed most significant bit of the mantissa C1 x2 7 x 1 y where sis the sign bit 0 or 1 eis the exponent 1 to 254 m is the mantissa 0 f 1 The valid range for floating point numbers is from 3 4028 x 10 to 3 4028 x 10 5 Publication 1763 RM00
549. s r Password Mew l Rengse r Master Password New Rengse Cancel Apply Help TIP If a password is lost or forgotten there is no way to bypass the password to recover the program The only option is to clear the controller s memory If the Memory Module User Program has the Load Always functionality enabled and the controller User Program has a password specified the controller compares the passwords before transferring the User Program from the Memory Module to the controller If the passwords do not match the User Program is not transferred and the program mismatch bit is set S 5 9 If you are locked out because you do not have the password for the controller you can clear the controller memory and download a new User Program You can clear the memory when the programming software prompts you for a System or Master Password to go on line with the controller To do sO 1 Enter 65257636 the telephone keypad equivalent of MLCLRMEM MicroLogix Clear Memory 2 When the Programming Software detects this number has been entered it asks if you want to clear the memory in the controller 3 If you reply yes to this prompt the programming software instructs the controller to clear Program memory Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Controller Memory and File Types 47 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock Web View Disable 0S Series B FRN
550. s read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the processor Processor Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 61 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series of the processor Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Status File 489 Processor Revision Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 62 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the revision Boot FRN of the processor User Program Functionality Type Address Data Format Type User Program Access 63 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller Compiler Revision Build Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 to 255 8 64 low byte byte status read only This register identifies the Build Number of the compiler which created the program in the controller Compiler Revision Release Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 64 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only This register identifies the Release of the compiler which created the program in the controller Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 490 System Status File Notes P
551. s DST 4 SRC 1 1 3 4 1st Rebroadcast No Bits Note 2 2nd Rebroadcast Note 1 The link layer of Node 1 blocks the re transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte equal to the receiving node s station address Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re transmitted Note 2 To prevent Node 2 from re transmitting a duplicate packet the link layer of Node 2 updates the duplicate packet table with the last 20 packets received Note 3 The link layer of Node 4 blocks the re transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte equal to the receiving node s station address Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re transmitted Note 4 To prevent Node 3 from re transmitting a duplicate packet the link layer of Node 3 updates the duplicate packet table with the last 20 packets received If you are using RSLogix 500 version 7 00 00 or higher you can view the store amp forward table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the DF1 Master channel Example Store amp Forward Table nix Debug Errors Protection Men gt DF1 Radio Modem Store And Forward T able 16 olololo jofo o o olo o o ojolojo ojojo o ololo o olololo olojo folo 73 Data File 52 STATUS Radix Structured Help i i Properties Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September
552. s CVL Control PD10 0 CVL word 0 to 10096 control read write Variable Low Limit INT When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVL Control Value Low you enter is the minimum output in percent that the Control Variable attains If the calculated CV is below the minimum value the CV 1s set overridden to the CVL value you entered and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVL value you enter determines when the lower limit alarm bit LL is set If CV is below the minimum value the output is not overridden and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set The table below shows the output parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information V Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control read write 28 CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT 0 to 100 control read write 288 SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only 288 Control Variable CV Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control read write The CV Control Variable is user
553. s running the accumulated value is held if the bit is then set counting resumes This bit can be controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle This bit must be set for the high speed counter to operate Set Parameters SP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type X User Program Access SP Set HSC O SP bit Oto7 control read write Parameters 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The SP Set Parameters control bit is used to load new variables to the HSC sub system When an OTE instruction with the address of HSC 0 SP is solved true off to on rung transition all configuration variables currently stored in the HSC function are checked and loaded into the HSC sub system The HSC sub system then operates based on those newly loaded settings This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit SP can be toggled while the HSC is running and no counts are lost Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 97 User Interrupt Enable UIE Description Address Data HSC Type User Program Format Modes Access UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC O UIE bi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 t Oto7 control read write The UIE User I
554. s and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Encode Instructions Conversion Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 y A Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode sS Parameter E 2 E e S E e x a SFERSi8 ele n a S ja je 9 2 z 2 A l a 9 JE e j je SE o l la lo e le lu Bln S ele lE E lala S 8 le la E J je l jz S a Source ele e o o e ele e Destination e o e o jo eje 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 202 DCD Decode 4 to Conversion Instructions 1 of 16 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Source N7 0 0000h st N71 0000000000000000 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the DCD Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1 100 When Rung Is True False 25 68 us 0 8 us The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source wotd to set one bit of the destination wotd All other bits in the destination word are cleared The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table
555. s not exist 2 8 Bad Modbus Address The function attempted to access an invalid Modbus address 3 9 Table Write protected The function attempted to write to a read only file 3 10 File Access Denied Access to this file is not granted 2 11 File Already Owned Data file is already owned by another process 2 1 If Modbus Command is sent with a valid Broadcast address then no exception reply will be sent for Error Codes 2 through 11 2 See on page 530 for valid Modbus memory mapping The following table lists the possible error codes and error descriptions for the Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction Error Error Description Received Exception Code Code 81 Illegal Function The function code sent by the Master is not supported by the slave 1 or has an incorrect parameter 82 Illegal Data Address The data address referenced in the Master command does not exist 2 in the slave or access to that address is not allowed 83 Illegal Data Value The data value being written is not allowed either because it is out 3 of range or it is being written to a read only address 84 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred while the slave was attempting to 4 perform the requested action 85 Acknowledge The slave has accepted the request but a long duration of time will 5 be required to process the request 86 Slave Device Busy The slave is currently processing a long d
556. s responded to by this slave 4 30529 Total messages to this Slave 4 30530 Total Messages Seen 4 30531 Link Layer Error Count 4 30532 Link Layer Error 4 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File 4 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 1st Holding Register file 3 6 16 40257 to 40512 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 2nd Holding Register file 3 6 16 40513 to 40768 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 3rd Holding Register file 3 6 16 40769 to 41024 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 4th Holding Register file 3 6 16 41025 to 41280 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 5th Holding Register file 3 6 16 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File 3 6 16 41793 to 42048 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 6th Holding Register file 3 6 16 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 532 Protocol Configuration Modbus Commands The controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave responds to the Modbus command function codes listed in below Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Slave Command FunctionCode SubfunctionCode decimal decimal Read Coil Status 1 Read Input Status 2 Read Holding Registers 3 Read Input Registers 4 Write Single Coil 5 Write Single Holding Register 6 Echo Command Data 8 0 Clear Diagnostic Counters 8 10 Write Multiple Coils 15 Wr
557. s sz o l l lo e l ju Ib lo S l le IE 2 Elala IE IS 8 e eS e Z 8 E 3 u Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e 3 3 3 3 e e e 1 PTO and PWM files are valid for MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressing 3 Some elements can be written to Consult the function file for details IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MOV instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 to 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets when an overflow infinity or NAN not a number condition is detected otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets 5 0 Math Overflow Trap sets Math Overflow Trap minor error if the Overflow bit is set Bit otherwise it remains in last state 1 Control bit TIP If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MVM Mas
558. s the execution times and memory usage for the Instructions Mem ory programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using E word ot long word as the data format usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1100 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory True False Usage in True False Usage in Words Words ASCH Test Buffer for Line ABL 1093 11143 14 Noe Noe Noe ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 10 93 11 43 14 None None None Buffer Absolute Value ABS 9 62 0 87 14 9 71 0 87 ASCII String to Integer ACI 39 06 0 87 14 41 99 0 87 ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 61 46 0 87 2 0 None None None ASCII String Concatenate ACN 50 15 0 11 0 87 2 0 None None None char Add ADD 13 44 0 87 2 0 13 34 0 87 ASCII String Extract AEX 51 9 0 11 char 0 87 2 6 None None None ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 14 56 15 06 2 6 None None None ASCII Integer to String AIC 48 96 0 87 14 57 34 0 87 And AND 13 06 0 87 2 0 13 24 0 87 ASCII Read Characters ARD 13 96 14 25 2 0 None None None ASCII Read Line ARL 13 96 14 25 2 0 None None None ASCII String Search ASC 45 18 1 62 0 87 2 6 None None None matching char ASCII String Compare ASR 127 27 0 65 090 14 None Noe Noe matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 13
559. sages Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 420 Communications Instructions SMTP Client Enable Bit Setup Screen Channel Configuration M m v M SMTP Configuration Setup Screen romaddress ml1100 com Enabled sername ToaddressO ml1100 com Toaddress ml1100 com Toaddress2 ml1100 com Toaddress3 ml1100 com Toaddress4 ml1100 com Toaddress5 ml1100 com Toaddress6 ml1100 com oaddress ml1100 com Toaddress8 ml1100 com The following is an explanation of parameters to be configured Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 421 Email Server email Server IP Address or DNS name As for the input of DNS name you should make sure if the Default Domain Name has been configured in the Ethernet Channel Configuration If it was configured in the Ethernet Channel Configuration DNS Sub system will query total DNS name to DNS server For example you entered dnsname on this entry and default com is configured in the Default Domain Name of the Ethernet Channel Configuration DNS sub system will query dnsname default com to the DNS server e FROM Address email From Address From Address must be written as an email style e Authentication Disable or Enable Disable is a default value If this flag is disabled User Name and Password tab is changed to non editable e User Name User Name regist
560. second rate Set the gain K value to 1 2 the gain needed to obtain the natural period of the process For example if the gain value recorded in step 9 was 80 set the gain to 40 Set the reset term T to approximate the natural period If the natural period is 20 seconds as in out example you would set the reset term to 3 0 3 minutes per repeat approximates 20 seconds Now set the rate T4 equal to a value 1 8 that of the reset term For out example the value 4 is used to provide a rate term of 0 04 minutes per repeat Place the process in the AUTO mode If you have an ideal process the PID tuning is complete To make adjustments from this point place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode enter the adjustment then place the PID instruction back in the AUTO mode This technique of going to MANUAL then back to AUTO ensures that most of the gain error is removed at the time each adjustment is made This allows you to see the effects of each adjustment immediately Toggling the PID rung allows the PID instruction to restart itself eliminating all of the integral buildup You may want to toggle the PID rung false while tuning to eliminate the effects of previous tuning adjustments Verifying the Scaling of Your Continuous System To ensure that your process 1s linear and that your equipment is properly connected and scaled do the following 1 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Place the PID instr
561. sed the message request not the data is placed in the channel s communications queue The queue is a message storage area that keeps track of messages that have not been allocated a buffer The queue operates as a first in first out FIFO storage area The first message request stored in the queue is the message that 1s allocated a buffer as soon as a buffer becomes available The queue can accommodate all MSG instructions in a ladder program When a message request in a buffer is completed the buffer is released back to the system If a message is in the queue that message is then allocated a buffer At that time the data associated with the message is read from within the controller TIP If a message instruction was in the queue the data that is actually sent out of the controller may be different than what was present when the message instruction was first processed The buffer and queue mechanisms are completely automatic Buffers are allocated and released as the need arises and message queuing occurs if buffers are full The controller initiates read and write messages through available communication channels when configured for the following protocols e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Communications Instructions 343 e DF1 Half Duplex Master e DF1 Half Duplex Slave e DF1 Radio Modem e Modbus RTU Master e Ethernet For a description of valid communication protocols see Knowle
562. sed for a 500CPU and PLC5 type messages A valid address is any valid configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the controller Valid combinations are shown below Message Type Local File Type Target File Type 500CPU and PLC5 0 I B N FUL 0 1 S B N FL T T C C R R RTEZ N RTC 500CPU PLC5 and 485 CIF sql gr 1 Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only 3 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later The data table offset is used for 485CIF type messages A valid offset 1s any value in the range 0 to 255 and indicates the word or byte offset into the target s Common Interface File CIF The type of device determines whether it is a word or byte offset MicroLogix controllers and SLC processors use word offset PLC 5 and Logix processors use byte offset Modbus MB Data Address 1 65536 Modbus addressing is limited to 16 bits per memory group each with a range of 1 to 65 536 There are four memory groups one for each function coils generally addressed as 0xxxx contacts 1xxxx input registers xxxx holding registers 4xxxx Coils and contacts are addressed at the bit level Coils are outputs and can be read and written Contacts are inputs and are read only Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 372 Communications Ins
563. sequencer operation This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents are received on an element by element basis from the source TIP Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words Sequencer Instructions 247 e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file The address level of the source must match the sequencer file If file is a word type then source must be a word type If file is a long word type then source must be a long word type The data range for the source is from 32 768 to 32 767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to rue rung transition after the rung goes false
564. shows the status of the load program compare selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Memory Module Program Compare on page 474 for more information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 56 Function Files LE Load on Error The LE Load on Error bit represents the status of the load on error setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program on page 470 for more information LA Load Always The LA Load Always bit represents the status of the load always setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module Always on page 471 for more information MB Mode Behavior The MB Mode Behavior bit represents the status of the mode behavior setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Power Up Mode Behavior on page 471 for more information Base Hardware i base EE information BHI file is a read only file that contains i i ipti MicroLogix 1100 Contr
565. sion in the priority and or normal poll ranges the master polls each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate During a polling sequence the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit standard polling mode multiple messages per scan or just one time per polling sequence standard polling mode single message per scan depending on how the master is configured The polling algorithm polls all of the priority slave addresses each poll scan priority low to priority high and a subset of the normal slave address range The number of normal slave addresses to poll each poll scan is determined by the Normal Poll Group Size configuration parameter In order to poll all of the slave addresses each poll scan with equal priority you may define the entire slave address range in either the Priority Poll Range or the Normal Poll Range and leave the other range disabled The Polling Range is disabled by defining the low address as 255 An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol in Standard Polling Mode operation is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from the master or another slave When the initiating slave is polled the message command is sent to the master If the message is addressed to the mastet then the master replies to the mess
566. sired value using the LCD keypad User input is applied when the OK key is pressed If the ESC key is pressed user input is cancelled and no operation is followed During user s input with the LCD keypad Line 2 and Line 3 displays are not updated Displaying Special Characters With the LCD instruction the LCD screen can display the characters of A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and special characters in the range of ACCII 0x00 to OxFE Be careful that some special characters are substituted with the corresponding embedded characters in the LCD The table below shows the available character set on the LCD For information on how to manipulate a string file for display of special characters refer to your RSLogix 500 Online Help Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 SRSBIEGESRBODNLG Ld i iHdaat DETABCE Hi zBEDCEAGTIDB AER HTitoDb5cscvrDP i2 Hami okt kin oz Ess5ELeuE T ne i EMEP UU OTE Be H FaWaw i emer OS USHSNEE E US Die Peed a Backs JEJE CP Ea ub HT SERE a Sho Hd zLolcteetin ESM ie HW N ndz nsp Tur HE SUS oaHsag ou Appendix A MicroLogix 1100 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1100 programming instructions The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided Programming The tables below list
567. ss subnet mask gateway address etc via BOOTP request You can not manually change the IP address if BOOTP is enabled If you disable BOOTP make sure that you have an IP address specified If you change this field from enabled to disabled the change will take effect only when the system is restarted If BOOTP is enabled DHCP will be automatically disabled Note If BOOTP is enabled you must have the BOOTP server running at all times because the processor requests its address to the BOOTP server at any time during its power up DHCP Enable enabled disabled 0 disabled DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network There is no need to manually assign permanent IP parameters DHCP is only available when BOOTP is disabled SNMP Server enabled disabled 0 disabled Enable Check this box to enable SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Disable SNMP to guarantee better security since it prevents anyone from obtaining information about the processor or network using SNMP Any change to this function does not take effect until the system is restarted This function can be changed through online modification of the channel configuration or through offline modification followed by downloading it to the processor Once changed the function will be operational in the processor after the system is restarted SMTP Client The SMTP Client service enabl
568. ss than zero or greater than 1000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter XIC Examine if Closed XI0 Examine if Open Relay Type Bit Instructions Use relay type bit instructions to monitor and or control bits in a data file or function file such as input bits or timer control word bits The following instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To Page XIC Examine if Closed Examine a bit for an ON condition 159 XIO Examine if Open Examine a bit for an OFF condition 159 OTE Output Enable Turn ON or OFF a bit non retentive 161 OTL Output Latch Latch a bit ON retentive 162 OTU Output Unlatch Unlatch a bit OFF retentive 162 ONS One Shot Detect an OFF to ON transition 163 OSR One Shot Rising Detect an OFF to ON transition 164 OSF One Shot Falling Detect an ON to OFF transition 164 These instructions operate on a single bit of data During operation the processor may set or reset the bit based on logical continuity of ladder rungs You can address a bit as many times as your program requires Instruction Type input Execution Time for the XIC Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100 11 5 us 1 45 us Execution Time for the XIO Instruction When Instruction Is Cont
569. st instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION Never use an output address at more than one place in your logic program Always be fully aware of the load represented by the output coil Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 162 Relay Type Bit Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OTE Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Fil Function Files CUTS Address Level ata Files t ress Leve unction Files E Mode s e E S gg E Parameter a E e g Ly 5 ec gt lt a E e fo S 3 c E c Bg E uv eeo l _ es pb eo E e 5 le le E s O vV m e Z a BLE A a E 2 cw t i fo S 6 a Eel a ES iG Destination Bit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e g 1 PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1100 BBB unit 2 See Important note about indirect addressi ng OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch B3 0 b IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI LCD CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OTL and OTU Instructions Controller OTL When Rung Is OTU When Rung Is Tru
570. st or narrow pulses You typically set the filters to a lower value when using high speed counters latching inputs and input interrupts Input filtering is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software To configure the filters using RSLogix 500 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 28 1 0 Configuration Analog Inputs 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 Open slot 0 controller 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab The input groups are pre arranged Simply select the filter time you require for each input group You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the input groups Controller MicroLogix 1100 Input Groups e and 1 e2 and 3 e4 and 5 e6 and 7 e8 and above The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found in your controller s User Manual The MicroLogix 1100 has two 10 bit resolution analog input channels These channels are single ended unipolar circuits and accept 0 10V dc Input words 4 5 contain the value of analog inputs Word 4 analog input channel 0 Word 5 analog input channel 1 Analog Input Filter and Update times The MicroLogix 1100 analog input filter is programmable The slower the filter setting the more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise The more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise the slower the inputs will be to update Similar
571. stance controller type series letter and revision letter of the base unit series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the processor on bottom side of processor unit TIP You can also check the FRN by looking at word S 59 Operating System FRN in the Status File e controller LED status controller error codes found in S2 6 of status file or LCD screen Rockwell Automation phone numbers are listed on the back cover of this manual To contact us via the Internet go to http www rockwellautomation com Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 500 Fault Messages and Error Codes Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Appendix D Protocol Configuration Use the information in this appendix for configuring communication protocols The following protocols are supported from any RS 232 communication channel e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex e DF1 Radio Modem e Modbus RTU e ASCII This appendix is organized into the following sections e DH 485 Communication Protocol on page 502 e DF1 Full Duplex Protocol on page 505 e DF1 Half Duplex Protocol on page 506 e DF1 Radio Modem Protocol on page 517 Modbus RTU Protocol on page 524 e ASCII Driver on page 535 Ethernet Driver on page 537 See your controller s User Manual for information about required network devices and accessories Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 502 Protocol Configur
572. status file S 7 and 8 8 The immediate data range for the suspend ID is from 32768 to 32767 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TND Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 0 78 us The TND instruction is used to denote a premature end of ladder program execution The TND instruction cannot be executed from a STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine This instruction may appear more than once in a ladder program On a true rung within the main program file 2 TND will stop the processor from scanning the rest of the main program and go directly to the end of scan aspects of the processor scan cycle On a true rung within a subroutine program TND will return from the subroutine and continue to scan the rest of the main program file 2 If this instruction is executed in a nested subroutine it terminates execution of all nested subroutines Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 252 Program Control Instructions END Program End Instruction Type output CEND gt Execution Time for the END Instruction When Rung Is True Instruction Controller False MicroLogix 1100 The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program For the main program file file 2 this instruction ends the program scan For a subroutine interrupt or user fault file the END instruction causes a return from subroutine
573. stem Status File STI Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 1 binary Oor1 control read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 TIE SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information STI Executing Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 2 binary Oor 1 control read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIX SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information Memory Module Program Compare Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 9 binary 0 or 1 control read only When this bit is set 1 in the controller its user program and the memory module user program must match for the controller to enter an executing mode If the user program does not match the memory module program or if the memory module is not present the controller faults with error code 0017H on any attempt to enter an executing mode See also LPC Load Program Compare on page 55 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 System Stat
574. struction Instruction Used To Page ADD Add Add two values 193 SUB Subtract Subtract two values 193 MUL Multiply Multiply two values 194 DIV Divide Divide one value by another 194 NEG Negate Change the sign of the source value and place it 194 in the destination CLR Clear Set all bits of a word to zero 194 ABS Absolute Value Find the absolute value of the source value 195 SOR Square Root Find the square root of a value 199 SCL Scale Scale a value 196 SCP Scale with Parameters Scale a value to a range determined by creating 197 a linear relationship Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 188 Math Instructions Using the Math Most math instructions use three parameters Source A Source B and Instructions Destination additional parameters are described where applicable later in this chapter The mathematical operation is performed using both Source values The result is stored in the Destination When using math instructions observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes Sources are evaluated at the highest precision word or long word of the operands Then the result is converted to the size of the destination If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow shall be handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Sour
575. struction 15 243 SOR instruction 70 199 square root instruction 70 199 startup protection fault bit B 470 static file protection 2 44 Station addresses defining D 509 Station list viewing D 515 status G 602 status file B 465 STI enabled bit B 474 executing bit B 474 file number status B 483 function file 18 268 lost status bit B 478 mode status B 473 pending status bit B 473 Quick Start example 553 set point status B 483 string data file 20 312 STS instruction 18 264 SUB instruction 10 193 subroutine label instruction 76 250 subtract instruction 10 193 SUS instruction 16 251 suspend code status B 480 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 suspend file status B 480 suspend instruction 16 251 SVC instruction 21 344 swap instruction 14 238 SWP instruction 14 238 T temporary end instruction 16 251 terminal G 602 throughput G 603 timer accuracy 8 169 timer and counter instructions 8 167 timer files 8 167 timer off delay instruction 8 177 timer on delay instruction 8 770 timing diagrams ASCII 20 336 AWA and AWT instructions 20 336 latching inputs 7 30 MSG instruction 27 356 PTO relative timing 6 730 quadrature encoder 5 771 TND instruction 16 251 TOD instruction 11 208 changes to the math register 11 209 example 11 209 TOF instruction 8 171 TON instruction 8 770 troubleshooting C 492 C 499 automatically clearing faults C 491 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance C 499 identifying controller
576. struction 9 182 LES instruction 9 181 less than instruction 9 181 less than or equal to instruction 9 782 LFL instruction 14 234 LFU instruction 14 236 LIFO Last In First Out G 597 LIFO load instruction 14 234 LIFO unload instruction 14 236 LIM instruction 9 184 limit instruction 9 184 load memory module always bit B 471 load memory module on error or default program bit B 470 local messages 21 361 logic G 598 logical instructions 12 211 logical NOT instruction 72 216 logical OR instruction 12 214 low byte G 598 major error code status B 479 major error detected in user fault routine status bit B 477 major error halted status bit B 472 manuals related P 14 mask compare for equal instruction 9 182 masked move instruction 13 219 master control relay MCR G 598 master control reset instruction 16 252 math instructions 10 187 math overflow selection bit B 475 math register status B 481 maximum scan time status B 482 MCR instruction 16 252 609 memory 2 36 clearing controller memory 2 46 memory mapping MicroLogix 1200 1 0 1 17 memory module boot status bit B 478 memory module compare bit B 474 memory module information function file 3 54 fault override 3 55 functionality type 3 54 load always 3 56 load on error 3 56 mode behavior 3 56 module present 3 55 program compare 3 55 write protect 3 55 memory module password mismatch status bit B 478 memory usage checking controller memory usage 2 39 MicroLogix 1500 instru
577. structs the PTO sub system to generate continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 The PTO sub system does not generate Jog Pulses When the Jog Continuous bit is cleared the current output pulse is truncated PTO Jog Continuous Status JCS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JCS Jog Continuous Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is generating continuous Jog Pulses The JCS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 148 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Error Codes PTO Error Code ER Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 3 to 7 status read only PTO ER Error Codes detected by the PTO sub system are displayed in this register The error codes are shown in the table below Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 3 No Yes Yes Undefined Acceleration Count and Deceleration not defined during going to
578. sues e RSLogix 500 display issues Since an older version of RSLogix 500 treats PTO PWM frequencies as signed integers if a user uploads a program from MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller into the software a negative frequency value may be displayed For example 40kHz is 0x9C40 in hexadecimal The 0x9C40 is 40000 in unsigned integer but 25536 in signed integer e Instruction issues All the instructions in MicroLogix controller treats integer as signed integer Therefore unsigned integers in PTO PWM function file elements need to be carefully treated when they are used in the variables for instructions An undesired result may be returned or math overflow may be detected during instruction executions Workaround should be used such as copying PTO PWM frequencies to long integer before manipulation RSLogix500 display The difference of PTO PWM between Series A and Series B is the maximum output frequency The Series A supports up to 20kHz for ISSUES PTO PWM output frequency and the Series B supports up to 40kHz In other words Series A PTO PWM output frequency range is in signed 16 bit range 32768 32767 and Series B PTO PWM output frequency range is in unsigned 16 bit range 0 65535 For this reason there may be a display issue when displaying output frequency in RSLogix500 However since an output frequency can not be a negative value MicroLogix 1100 controller works properly although the displayed value looks weird The fol
579. t True False MicroLogix 1100 10 93 us 11 43 us Use the ACB instruction to determine the number of characters in the buffer On a false to true transition the controller determines the total number of characters and records it in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 Control is the control data file See page 313 Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 337 for error descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACB Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 2 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode P Er z E e Parameter 2 S E e 8 z Ph 5 le c x E FE Bis is le Els m g S la lo jS jo j Z S Aa lo E tS e le E 16 o lv a je z j a E zZ la je 2 a a E iS 2 e la j s ie z 3 ia Channel Control 1 The Control da
580. t 0 or 1 control read write 293 DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 293 RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 294 SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 294 TF Loop Update Too Fast PD 10 0 TF binary bit Oor1 status read write 295 DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit Oor1 control read write 295 UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit Oor1 status read write 295 LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 296 SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 296 PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 296 DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 297 EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 297 IS Integral Sum PD10 0 1S long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 297 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 AD Altered Derivative Term PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only 297 32 bit INT 12 147 483 647 Controller Gain K Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Gain K word 3 is the proportional gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 0 to 327 67 when RG 1 Set this gain to one
581. t The target node has not yet examined the packet to see if it understands your request Once the ST bit is set 1 the controller waits for a reply from the target node The target node is not required to respond within any given time frame TIP If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the message transaction you will never receive a reply This is why you should use a Message Timeout value in your MSG instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 358 Communications Instructions 4 Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive an ACK step 3 does not occur Instead either no response or a negative acknowledge NAK is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear 0 No response may be caused by the target node is not there the message became corrupted in transmission the response was corrupted in response transmission A NAK may be caused by target node is busy target node received a corrupt message the message is too large When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ER bit is set 1 indicating that the message instruction failed 5 Following the successful receipt of the packet the target node sends a reply packet The reply packet contains one of the following responses successful write request successful read request with data failure with error code At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction following the ta
582. t speed selections will list the available options When two settings are shown for port speed Auto Negotiation will choose the optimal setting When one setting is shown that setting will be used if possible If the attached device does not support 100 Mbps full duplex then the default setting will be 10 Mbps half duplex Port Setting Auto Negotiate is enabled 10 100Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex 10 100Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full or 100 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex or 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex or 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex Only Auto Negotiate is disabled 100 Mbps Full Duplex Forced 100 Mbps Half Duplex Forced 10 Mbps Full Duplex Forced 10 Mbps Half Duplex Forced Select the port setting from the drop down list The selections will vary depending on whether you are online or offline and whether Auto Negotiation is enabled or disabled Msg 250 to 65 500 ms 15000 Connection Timeout x The number of milliseconds allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the 1ms destination node Msg Reply 250 to 65 500 ms 3000 Timeout x ms The number of milliseconds the Ethernet interface waits for a reply from a command it initiated through a MSG instruction Inactivity The amount of time in minutes that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is terminated 30 minutes Timeout The Inactivity Timeout
583. t Access SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only Scaled error is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint The format of the difference E SP PV or E PV SP is determined by the control mode CM bit See Control Mode CM on page 293 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Process Control Instruction 293 Automatic Manual AM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The auto manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When off 0 it specifies automatic operation When on 1 it specifies manual operation In automatic operation the instruction controls the control variable CV In manual operation the user control program controls the CV During tuning set this bit to manual TIP Output limiting is also applied when in manual Control Mode CM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit 00r 1 control read write Control mode or forward reverse acting toggles the values E SP PV and E PV SP Forward acting E PV SP causes the control variable to increase when the process variable is greater than the setpoint Reverse acting E
584. t Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled HAS Auto Start ED Error Detected SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts m0 co0oo0o coccoco 000 IMPORTANT Ladder Logic Subroutine file 3 must be created in order for this example to work If the subroutine is not created the CPU will fault due to a STI Error Code 1 Invalid File Number for PFN has been entered E LAD 3 STI B x ADD Add m Source A Source B Dest Notes on using Interrupt bits If the Auto Start bit AS is set this will start the interrupt on power up and set the Timed Interrupt Enabled bit TIE automatically allowing the interrupt to execute Shown in the example above Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 556 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17503 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC If the AS bit is not set then the TIE bit must be set through the ladder logic in order for the interrupt to execute The User Interrupt Enable bit UIE determines if the interrupt executes or not General Information The RTC provides Yeat Month Day Day of Month Day of Week Hour Minute and Second information to the RTC Function file in the controller The MicroLogix 1100 has a built in real time clock Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v7 00 00 or later and select the RTC tab See Below ea Function Fi
585. t Equal C Source A L9 0 1 35000 lt Source B 35000 35000 lt MEQ 3 0 Masked Equal 0 Source L9 0 3 Function Files 35000 lt Hsc PTO PwWM sm El ATC LCD MMI ale Mask FFFFH Address Value l l l l a 65535 lt FPTO n Compare 35000 EPTQU EN 35000 lt PTO 0 ER CEND gt e LES LEQ GRT GEQ LIM Instruction The operands of LES LEQ GRT GEQ and LIM instruction work as signed value but JF OF OFS of PTO PWM are unsigned 16 bit variable at MicroLogix 1100 Series B controller Therefore these instructions could cause undesired results when JF OF and OFS of PTO PWM values are greater than 32767 For example assume the PWM 0 OF value is 35000 and the value to compare is 100 Actually PWM 0 OF is greater than 100 but the executed result of this instruction is just the opposite Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 576 How to Use 40kHz PTO PWM of MicroLogix 1100 Series B Controller To solve this issue variable type should be changed to Long Type 32 bit by CPW instruction before the execution of these instructions as shown below 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 CPW Copy Word Source PWM 0 0F Dest L9 0 Length 1 LES B3 0 Less Than A lt B 6 Source A L9 0 0 35000 Source B 100 100 LEQ B3 0 Less Than or Eq A lt B C Source A L9 0 1 35000 Source B 100 100 GRT B3 0 G
586. t Mask HSC 0 HPM bit 0to7 control read write 101 UFM Underflow Mask HSC 0 UFM bit 2t07 control read write 102 OFM Overflow Mask HSC 0 0FM bit 0 to 7 control read write 105 LPI Low Preset Interrupt HSC 0 LPI bit 2to7 status read write 99 HPI High Preset Interrupt HSC 0 HPI bit 0to 7 status read write 101 UH Underflow Interrupt HSC 0 UFI bit 2to7 status read write 103 OFI Overflow Interrupt HSC 0 OFI bit 0to 7 status read write 105 LPR Low Preset Reached HSC 0 LPR bit 2to7 status read only 100 HPR HighPresetReached HSC O HPR bit 2to7 status readonly 102 DIR Count Direction HSC 0 DIR bit 0to 7 status read only 106 UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit Oto7 status read write 102 OF Overflow HSC 0 0F bit 0to 7 status read write 103 MD Mode Done HSC 0 MD bit 0 or 1 status read write 106 CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2to7 status read only 106 CU Count Up HSC 0 CU bit 0 to 7 status read only 107 MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT 0to 7 control fread only 107 ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT Oto7 control read write 113 HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT 0to 7 control read write 113 LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT 2to7 control read write 113 OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT 0to 7 control read write 114 UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit INT 2t07 control read write 114 OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary 0 to 7 control fread only 1
587. t a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSL instruction 3130 29 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 Source Bit 22 12 19 18 17 16 47 46 45 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 51 50 149 148 58 Bit Array B3 1 RESERVED 73 72 71 70 69 67 66 65 64 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Un oad Bit R6 0 10 File Instructions 227 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions This instruction uses the following operands e File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated e Control The control operand is the address of the BSL s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Size of bit array ne of me Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid us
588. t as any input of ladder logic when you program with several LCD instruction TIP ESC bit is presented for handy interface to LCD instruction and keypad so it is just updated in U MSG screen Instruction Type output Execution Time for the LCD Instruction Controller When Rung Is MicroLogix 1100 The LCD instruction is used to display string or number get value with keypad isplay area on the LCD Line 2 Operand 1 Operand 2 Line 3 Operand 3 Operand 4 Line 4 Operand 5 Operand 6 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table LCD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 E g y Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode P Er E g je p Parameter 4 E o 8 e 5 le ie FE Bis El c o a je S jo j lilt eal jw a JE e ls le S Je o o m e u e io S a le 2 E ejisJjSjej a j sjm S S ja Line 2 Source A e elelelele e Line 2 Source B e e elelelele e Line 3 Source A e e e elelelele e Line 3 Source B e e elelelele e Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 454 LCD Information LCD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Usin
589. t e y e o 414 Special Function with MSG instruction OS Series B FRN 4 or later ep ed don dere ted ead Ea E ee ahr eite es aio ir Eur a Rt 416 Configure MSG Setup Screen to send SMTP message 422 Chapter 22 PRR CC us ado bern sert op cte ME E tr Ma ee 427 Data Looping ues vate Rede AMER SW ev 433 Qu cucs and Records erea aca ppp EI ORA ain THER ECCE RUE 433 Configuring Data Log Oue esc ossa tote ne Pe aoa beep 437 DLG Data Log Instt etoncs actu beak Quer er a C Rh 439 Data Los Status Bile qs oce pee sace eR Ed E Peers 440 Retrieving Reading Records su e cu een Yer es ee e de 442 Accessing th Retrieval Piles veo a sacer pos top pice Duo tid d 442 Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File 444 Chapter 23 LCD Overviews soon api i ai xad ee ES Maa esi ade at 445 ECD F ncion Pers os ca cash EL AEE WES EN IUE euren 446 LCD Function File Sub Elements Summary usus 447 LCD Function File SubsETeriefit sus uuu Gi oU eA TI Se Ye reet 448 LCISECI Instruction sens een eee tO oet rea es 453 Appendix A Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time 457 MicroLogix 1100 SCAIY Time Worksheets ose e busca eee Ua eerte edet 462 Appendix B otatus Pile Over iene ahs oc e E EE nen ny stub ace pathy e 466 Stat s File Details 5 Deor do e ota edat boe dn us e 467 Appendix C Identifying Controller Paults 2e a Pese ees 491 Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance liess
590. t from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit 1s controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Underflow Interrupt UFI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFI Underflow HSC 0 UFI bi Interrupt t 2107 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The UFI Underflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Overflow OF Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OF Overflow HSC 0 0F Ibit Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The OF Overflow stat
591. t the PWM is on is solved false 5 The PWM instruction is IDLE While the PWM instruction is being executed status bits and data are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PWM instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system the status bits and other information are updated each time the PWM instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PWM status while it is running TIP PWM status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PWM instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PWM instructions to your program to increase how often a PWM instruction is scanned j j Within the PWM function file are two PWM elements Each element can Pulse Width Modulation E e set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 or output 3 00 0 3 Function PWM Function File file element PWM 0 is shown below Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using High Speed Outputs 151 Z Function Fies T HSC PTO PWM sm jel ATC LCD MMI BHI cso L gt I U H OUT Output LDS Decelerating Status RS Run Status LAS Accelerating Status LPP Profile Parameter Select HIS Idle Status l ED Error Detected Status LNS Normal Operation Status LEH Enable Hard Stop LES Enable Status follows rung state ER E
592. t to execute a communication function such as transmitting a message prior to the normal service communication portion of the operating scan CS0 4 SVC 0000 3t Service Communications MCP Channel Select 0001h Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 346 Communications Instructions MSG Message MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG9 0 Setup Screen EN DN ER You can place this rung after a message write instruction CS0 4 MCP is set when the message instruction is enabled and put in the communications queue When CS0 4 MCP is set 1 the SVC instruction is evaluated as true and the program scan is interrupted to execute the service communication s portion of the operating scan The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction The example rung shows a conditional SVC which is processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue TIP You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instruction Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MSG Instruction Controller Rung Condition When Rung Is True False 1100 False to True Transition for Reads 59 58 us 5 62 us Any preceding logic on the message rung must be solved true before the message instruction can be processed The example below shows a message instruction B3 0 MSG 0000 JE
593. t w Mask Slot 0 0 used with expansion I 0 Mask N7 0 Length 1 Execution Time for the IIM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1100 51 76 us 0 87 us Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 256 Input and Output Instructions The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan This instruction uses the following operands e Slot This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file The location specifies the slot number and the word where data is to be obtained For example if slot I 0 input data from slot 0 starting at word 0 is masked and placed in input data file I 0 starting at word O for the specified length If slot I 0 1 word 1 of slot 0 is used and so on IMPORTANT Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IIM cannot be used with expansion 0 Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied to the slot If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data from slot is passed to the input data file A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data in slot from being passed to the input data file The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFE Bit 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Real Input Input Word Mask 0
594. ta file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 324 ASCII Instructions ACI String to Integer ACI String to Integer Source Dest ST10 0 N7 0 0 lt Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The Done bit DN is set on completion of the instruction The controller determines the number of characters in the buffer and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no characters were found The Found bit FD is set when the POS filed is set to a non zero value Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACI Instruction Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False long word 141 99 us 0 87 us Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer word or long word value Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source The contents of this location are converted to an integer value Destination This is the location which receives the result of the conversion The data range is from 32 768 to 32 767 if the destination is a word and from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 if th
595. table SQC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode B 3 Parameter E Ei E 2 2 s amp s is ils m e amp ln o ojo J z a I a N E T 29 2 5 ja e Z u 5 a t 2 E D ui FA 9S 6 e a E a ja S ja File e e e e e e e e e Mask e e e e e e e e e e Source e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only S00 Sequencer Output Sao File Mask Dest Control Length Position Sequencer Output B3 0 N7 0 N7 1 R6 0 1 0 lt cmn gt lt n gt IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI CS IOS LCD and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SQO Instruction Controller Data Size When Rungis 7 True False MicroLogix 1100 word 23 8 us 6 21 us long word 244 us 6 21 us On a false to true rung transition the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination for the control of sequential machine operations When the rung goes from false to t
596. tal Message Packets Received 13 Link Layer Error Count 14 Link Layer Error Code 15to 22 Reserved Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer Word Bit Description 43 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 10 44 Length always 14 45 Format Code always 0 46 Pre Send Time Delay 47 0to7 Node Address 8to15 heserved 48 Inter Character Timeout 49 RTS Send Delay 50 RTS Off Delay 51 0to7 Baud Rate 8and9 Parity 10to 15 lReserved 52 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 Presentation Layer Error Code 56 Presentation Layer Error Count 57 Execution Function Error Code 58 Last Transmitted Exception Code 59 Data File Number of Error Request 60 Element Number of Error Request 61 Function Code 1 Message Counter 62 Function Code 2 Message Counter 63 Function Code 3 Message Counter 64 Function Code 4 Message Counter 65 Function Code 5 Message Counter Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 66 Function Files Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer Word Bit Description 66 Function Code 6 Message Counter 67 Function Code 8 Message Counter 68 Function Code 15 Message Counter 69 Function Code 16 Message Counter ini x Channel 0 Channel 1 Mo
597. tant no waveform e DC 750 75 Output ON 25 output OFF e DC 500 50 Output ON 50 output OFF e DC 250 25 Output ON 75 output OFF e DC 0 0 Output OFF constant no waveform PWM Duty Cycle Status DCS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to 1000 status fread only The PWM DCS Duty Cycle Status provides feedback from the PWM sub system The Duty Cycle Status variable can be used within an input instruction on a rung of logic to provide PWM system status to the remaining control program Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 158 Using High Speed Outputs PWM Accel Decel Delay ADD Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0to 32 767 control read write PWM ADD Accel Decel Delay defines the amount of time in 10 millisecond interval to ramp from zero to 20kHz frequency Also specifies the time to ramp down to zero The PWM ADD value is loaded and activated immediately whenever the PWM instruction is scanned on a true rung of logic This allows multiple steps of stages of acceleration or deceleration to occur PWM Error Code ER Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ER PWM Error Codes PWIM O ER wo
598. tatus E 83 BINARY E T4 TIMER E cs COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER 1 F8 FLOAT El Data Logging E Configuration E status FYI Every time Configuration above is double clicked a new queue is added To delete queues simply select the queue with the mouse and press the delete key on the keyboard 4 Double Click on Data Log configuration to open the Configuration window Data Log Queue Configuration xi Data Log Configuration Cancel Help 5 Complete the Data Log Queue as shown below The Number of recotds and Addresses selected were arbitrary for this example Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 563 Data Log Queue E r Configuration Number of Records fi 00 Separator Character Space x Cancel li C Comma C Tab IV Date Stamp IV Time Stamp Address to Log D Delete Current Address List IMPORTANT NOTE Integer file N10 must be created with a length of 5 or the software will not compile the ladder program Also an embedded RTC must be enabled and configured if the Date and Time stamp ate to be used If an RTC module is disabled the data for these fields will contain zeros Click OK when completed Click OK and accept the Data Log Queue window Once the N10 file has been created enter the following values for each 4 Data File N10 dec DATA N10 0 Radix Decimal Sybi 7 0 0
599. te Messages CSx 18 The number of times the processor received a message packet identical Received to the previous message packet Bad Packet Received CSx 16 The number of data packets received by the processor that had bad checksum or were truncated RTS Request to Send CSx 9 1 The status of the RTS handshaking line asserted by the processor CTS Clear to Send CSx 9 0 The status of the CTS handshaking line received by the processor DCD Data Carrier Detect CSx 9 3 Reserved 1 x equals Channel number Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 523 DF1 Radio Modem System Limitations The following questions need to be answered in order to determine if you can implement the new DF1 Radio Modem driver in your radio modem netwotk 1 Do all of the devices support DF1 Radio Modem protocol In order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 6 0 or higher MicroLogix 1200 controllers must be at FRN 7 ot higher and MicroLogix 1500 controllers must be at FRN 8 or higher SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processors must all be at FRN C 6 or higher in order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 500 version 5 50 or higher All MicroLogix 1100 controllers support DF1 Radio Modem protocol RSLogix 500 version 7 0 or higher is required to configure the MicroLogix 1100 Starting with Version 16 1 all Logix controllers can be configured for DF1 Radio Modem protocol
600. ter is encountered the controller echos three characters to the device backspace space and backspace This erases the previous character on the terminal e n Printer Mode when a delete character is encountered the controller echos the slash character then the deleted character Enable the Echo parameter to use Delete Mode Echo When Echo Mode is enabled all of the characters received are echoed back to the remote device This Disabled allows you to view characters on a terminal connected to the controller Toggles between Enabled and Disabled XON XOFF Allows you to Enable or Disable XON XOFF software handshaking XON XOFF software handshaking Disabled involves the XON and XOFF control characters in the ASCII character set When the receiver receives the XOFF character the transmitter stops transmitting until the receiver receives the XON character If the receiver does not receive an XON character after 60 seconds the transmitter automatically resumes sending characters Also when the receive buffer is more than 8096 full an XOFF character is sent to the remote device to pause the transmission Then when the receive buffer drops to less than 8096 full an XON character is sent to the remote device to resume the transmission RTS Off Delay Allows you to select the delay between when a transmission is ended and when RTS is dropped 0 x20 ms Specify the RTS Off Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 RTS Send Allows you
601. the destination As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Using the MOV Instruction When using the MOV instruction observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes The source is converted to the destination size when the instruction executes If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the ovetflow is handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination 1s 32767 word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Source can be a constant or an address Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 218 Move Instructions e Valid constants are 32 768 to 32 767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table MOV Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level a 8 Mode Parameter E 2 E e amp z T ox B SFe IEI E e oe S in jo 9 l S Aa av 1M JE sil
602. the Communications Status Function File words CSx 27 to CSx 42 where xis the channel number x 0 for MicroLogix 1100 Each bit in the table represents a station on the link from 0 to 254 starting with CSx 27 0 for address 0 and CSx 42 14 for address 254 The bit for address 255 CSx 42 15 is never set since it is the broadcast address which never gets polled When valid Normal and or Priority Poll Ranges ate defined e if a slave responded the last time it was polled by the master the bit corresponding to its address is set 1 active e if a slave didn t respond the last time it was polled by the master the bit corresponding to its address is cleared 0 inactive TIP The bit corresponding to the address configured for the DF1 Master is always cleared because the master address never gets polled If you are using RSLogix 500 version 7 00 00 or higher you can view the active node table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the DF1 Master channel Example Active Node Table 4Data File 52 STATUS Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 ebug Errors Pratection Mem DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node T able Node 0 0 1000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 9000 9000 00 Ooooo oooo oooo oo 9000 0000 9000 900 O0000 0000 0000 00 Properties 16 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00
603. the LSB then the result remains as is If the bits to the right of the LSB represent a value greater than one half of the LSB the result is rounded up by adding one LSB If the bits to the right of the LSB represent a value of exactly one half LSB the result is rounded up ot down so that the LSB is an even number Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 192 Math Instructions Addressing Floating Point Files The addressing format for floating point data files is shown below Format Explanation Ff e F Floating Point file f File number The valid file number range is from 8 default to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Examples F8 2 Floating Point File 8 Element 2 F10 36 Floating Point File 10 Element 36 Programming Floating Point Values The following table shows items to consider when using floating point data IMPORTANT These rules do not apply to the SCP instruction See page 198 for the rules for that instruction Considerations When Using Floating Point Data When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value e f either Source is NAN then the result is NAN e All overflows result in infinity with the correct sign e All underflows result in plus zero e All denormalized Source values are treated as plus zero e Results are always rounded using the Round to Even rule e f Destination is an integer and the result is N
604. the MSG will simply wait until one of the outgoing buffers becomes available and then transmit NOTE If a message has been waiting in the queue at the moment of buffer availability the most current data will be sent not the data that was available at the time the message instruction was first scanned true How quickly a message is actually sent or received to by a destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channels communication protocol baud rate of the communications port number of retries destination devices readiness to receive ladder logic scan time etc Definition of the Message MSG instruction The message instruction MSG is an output instruction which when configured correctly allows data to be sent or received to other compatible devices The MSG instruction in the MicroLogix 1100 controller uses a Data File MG to process the message instruction All message elements are accessed using the MG prefix example MSG done bit MG11 0 DN Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 551 Continuous Message Example The following example illustrates how by using the MSG Done DN and Error ER bits to unlatch the Enable EN bit the MSG instruction can be configured for continuous execution This example uses MG11 0 for the MSG file and will require two MicroLogix controllers one a ML1100 and the other either a ML1000 or ML1100 The ML1100 will need to be c
605. the actual base attached hardware 0052 MINIMUM SERIES The hardware minimum series Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified in ERROR selected in the user program the user program or configuration was greater than the e Reconfigure the program to match the series on the actual hardware attached hardware x1 EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non Recoverable eCheck connections HARDWARE ERROR _ with an expansion I O module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power x9 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non Recoverable Refer to the 1 0 Module Status IOS file MODULE ERROR A SMON e Consult the documentation for your specific 1 0 module to determine possible causes of a module error xxg1 EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non User e Check connections HARDWARE ERROR with an expansion 1 0 module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power 0083 MAX I 0 CABLES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion 1 0 system so EXCEEDED 1 0 cables allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of cables e Cycle power Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Fault Messages and Error Codes 497 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classifi
606. the filename about to be created and the directory it is being saved to for later reference Save As bxl Save in Am Documents x ef 5s E3 9v My eBooks a nape ly Music History My Pictures Desktop 2 My Documents aum NH My Computer File name My_DLG_Data m My Network P Save as type csv Files csv hd Cancel I A 9 Using Microsoft Excel open the data file that was created FYI If you are unable to locate your file in Excel remember Files of type must be changed to Text Files or All files in order to locate your saved file The headings for each column are not stored in the data file these were added for readability Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 QUE Queue 0 Queue 0 Queue 0 Queue 0 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 567 Date Time N10 0 N10 1 N10 2 N10 3 N10 4 511 2000 8 00 00 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 02 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 05 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 07 5 10 15 20 25 Each time the DLG instruction receives a false to true transition another entty is saved in the Data Logging queue The above data reflects that the DLG instruction was executed 5 times The above data also reflects that no data points had changed during each DLG execution Frequently Asked Questions Q1 Can I write my own software application to retrieve the data stored in the Data Logging queue A1 Yes In the MicroLogix 1100 Instruction Set Reference
607. ther Function File bit word or long word structures that are used to provide control over the HSC function or provide HSC status information for use within the Sub Elements Summary control program Each of the sub elements and their respective functions are described in this chapter A summary of the sub elements is provided in the following table All examples illustrate HSCO High Speed Counter Function File HSC 0 or HSC 1 Sub Element Description Address DataFormt HSC Function User Program For More Modes Access Information PFN Program File Number HSC 0 PFN word INT 0 to 7 control fread only 93 ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT 0to7 status read only 93 UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bit 0to 7 status read only 97 UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC O UIE bit 0to 7 control read write 97 UIL User Interrupt Lost HSC 0 UIL bit 0to7 status read write 98 UIP User Interrupt Pending HSC 0 UIP bit 0 to 7 status read only 98 FE Function Enabled HSC 0 FE bit Oto7 control read write 94 AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit 0 to 7 control read only 94 ED Error Detected HSC 0 ED bit 0to 7 status read only 94 CE Counting Enabled HSC 0 CE bit Oto7 control read write 96 SP Set Parameters HSC 0 SP bit 0to7 control read write 96 LPM Low Preset Mask HSC 0 LPM bit 2to7 control read write 99 HPM High Prese
608. time interval and the PID loop update rate must be the same in order for the equation to execute properly See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 268 for more information on STI interrupts PID closed loop control holds a process variable at a desired set point A flow rate fluid level example is shown below Feed Forward Bias Set Point Error PID py g Equation py Flow Rate Process Control Variable Output Level CN Detector pon Control Valve The PID equation controls the process by sending an output signal to the control valve The greater the error between the setpoint and process variable input the greater the output signal Alternately the smaller the Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 280 Process Control Instruction error the smaller the output signal An additional value feed forward or bias can be added to the control output as an offset The PID result control variable drives the process variable toward the set point The PID Equation The PID instruction uses the following algorithm Standard equation with dependent gains z d d PV Output Kf r bs Tp S 4 bias Standard Gains constants ate Term Range Low to High Reference Controller Gain Ke 0 01 to 327 67 dimensionless Proportional Reset Term 1 T 327 67 to 0 01 minutes per repeat Integral Rate Term Tp 0 01 to 327 67 minutes Derivat
609. tion 1756 DHRIO Configuration 2x General Routing Table Channel Configuration E Backplane Link Undefined Eg 1756 DHRIO Slot 6 Channel DH Link 33 Channel B DH Link 27 SM DH Bridge Node 37 Bridge Link 13 Load From File Save to File Restore Defaults Refresh Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 402 Communications Instructions Go to the routing table configuration tab Right click on the DHRIO channel being used and select Add Module Select the DH Bridge Enter the DH node number of the KA5 37 in this example and the Link ID of the DH485 13 in this example Click Apply You can now browse through the KA5 module from RSWho E Backplane 1755 AT A o 1756 L61 LoGtrx5551 MLTIOD MSG TEST Channel 0 DFI f 00 1756 L6 LOGIXS561 3 0G rTms DHHIO C T758 DHRIO C xm CH A Data Highway Plus 00 1 55 DHRIO C FIEG DHRIO C EI I2 SLC 5 T4 PROC gg Channel D DH 485 ER 10 SLC 5 04 a CH B Data Highway Plus 02 1758 DHRID C 1755 DHRIO AC E M 31 1785 K A5 i Be DH4B5 DH 4B5 ML1100 Channel Configuration General Channel 0 Channel 1 Chan 1 SMTP Driver Ethernet Hardware Address 000F 73FF 0058 Wero Ene g IP Address 100 100 115 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 1 Default Domain Name Primary NameSemer Secondary Name Server 7 Protocol Control BOO
610. tion 16 257 retentive data G 601 retentive data lost status bit B 478 retentive timer on delay instruction 8 172 return from subroutine instruction 16 257 RS 232 definition G 601 RTA instruction 3 53 RTC day of month status 8 486 day of week status 5 487 function file 3 57 hours status B 486 minutes status B 487 month status B 486 Quick Start example F 556 seconds status B 487 year status B 485 RTC Synchronization Quick Start example 558 RTC synchronization Quick Start example 558 RTO instruction 8 172 RTU definition G 602 run mode G 601 rung 6 602 S save G 602 SBR instruction 16 250 scale instruction 10 196 scale with parameters instruction 10 197 scan G 602 scan time G 602 last 100 uSec scan time status B 485 maximum scan time status B 482 scan time worksheet Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 612 MicroLogix 1500 A 462 scan toggle status bit B 484 SCL instruction 10 196 SCP instruction 10 197 selectable timed interrupt Quick Start example 553 selectable timed interrupt STI function file 18 268 selectable timed start instruction 18 264 sequencer compare instruction 15 240 sequencer instructions 15 239 sequencer load instruction 15 246 sequencer output instruction 15 243 service communications instruction 21 344 sign flag B 468 sinking G 602 SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 Active stations monitoring D 515 Channel Status D 514 sourcing G 602 SQC instruction 15 240 SQL instruction 15 246 SQO in
611. tion Files eee Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E be 8 M E a x Loe EL Cel eke EE mis o elz l 5l S zel 2E amp is amp le is ij a ibis leis ls ic Source A Source B Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element AEX String Extract AEX _ String Extract Source ST10 0 Index 1 Number 5 Dest ST10 3 Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a false to true rung transition Source B is appended to Source A and the result is put in the Destination Only the first 82 characters 0 to 81 are written to the destination If the string length of Source A Source B or Destination is greater than 82 the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AEX Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100 51 9 us 0 11 us character 0 87 us Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 327 The AEX instruction creates a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and storing it in a new string Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the existing string The Source
612. tions DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected When the system driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1100 Controller Parameter Options Programming Software Default Driver DHWDulhex e Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Source ID Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 1 Control Line no handshaking Full Duplex modem no handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Embedded Responses auto detect enabled auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled enabled ACK Timeout x20 ms 1 to 65535 counts 20 ms increments 50 counts NAK retries 0 to 255 3 retries ENQ retries 0 to 255 3 retries Stop Bits not a setting always 1 1 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 506 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex DF1 Half Duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple Protocol slave netwotk In contrast to the DF1 Full Duplex protocol communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix controller as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex peer to peer messaging port MicroLogix 1100controller supports Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices addr
613. tivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 513 DF1 Half Duplex Master Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion ACK Timeout 0 to 255 can be set in 20 ms increments 50 x20 ms Specifies the amount of time the master wi
614. to select the delay between when RTS is raised and the transmission is initiated Specify 0 Delay x20 ms the RTS Send Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 Stop Bits 1 9 2 1 Data Bits 7 8 1 MicroLogix 110 0 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Ethernet Driver Protocol Configuration 537 The MicroLogix1100 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet communication channel 1 Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between a variety of network devices at 10 100 Mbps TCP IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages The MicroLogix1100 processor uses TCP IP to establish sessions and to send MSG commands Connections can be initiated by either a client program INTERCHANGE or RSLinx application or a processor Refer to Communications Instructions on page 341 for the MSG instruction operation to see how connections are established using the MSG instruction The MicroLogix1100 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO IEC 8802 3 STD 802 3 and utilizes 10 100Base T media Connections are made directly from the MicroLogix1100 to an Ethernet hub or switch The netwotk setup is simple and cost effective There are two ways to configure the MicroLogix1100 Ethernet channel 1 The configuration can be done via a BOOTP or DHCP request at processor power up or by manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 Programmi
615. truction 10 193 address 6 593 Addressing considerations D 509 addressing direct addressing 4 83 immediate addressing 4 63 indirect addressing 4 84 indirect addressing of a bit 4 86 indirect addressing of a file 4 85 indirect addressing of a word 4 84 modes 4 83 using in line indirection 20 336 AEX instruction 20 326 AHL instruction 20 328 AIC instruction 20 316 AIC Advanced Interface Converter G 593 Allen Bradley contacting for assistance C 499 allow future access setting 2 47 AND instruction 12 213 application G 593 ARD instruction 20 329 20 330 arithmetic flags B 467 ARL instruction 20 331 ASC instruction 20 333 ASCII definition G 593 ASCII character set 20 339 ASCII clear buffers instruction 20 314 ASCII control data file 20 313 ASCII file 20 312 ASCII handshake lines instruction 20 328 ASCII instruction error codes 20 337 ASCII instructions 20 309 error codes 20 337 Status bits 20 312 20 313 timing diagram 20 336 ASCII integer to string instruction 20 316 Index ASCII number of characters in buffer instruction 20 323 ASCII protocol parameters 20 311 ASCII read characters instruction 20 329 20 330 ASCII read line instruction 20 331 ASCII string compare instruction 20 334 ASCII string concatenate 20 325 ASCII string extract 20 326 ascil string manipulation error B 479 ASCII string search instruction 20 333 ASCII string to integer instruction 20 324 ASCII test buffer for line instruction 20 321 ASCII timing di
616. truction Set Reference Manual publication 1747 RM001 for more passthru details and limitations when using the DF1 Radio Modem driver Modbus RTU Protocol This section shows the configuration parameters for Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit transmission mode protocol For more information about the Modbus RTU protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specification available from http www modbus org The driver can be configured as Modbus RTU Master or Modbus RTU Slave The Modbus RTU Slave driver maps the four Modbus data types coils contacts input registers and holding registers into four binary and or integer data table files created by the user Modbus RTU Master Message instructions are used to transfer information between the data files in the Modbus RTU Master and the Modbus RTU Slaves Refer to Chapter 21 for detailed information about configuring a MSG instruction for Modbus Communications Modbus addressing is limited to 16 bits per memory group each with a range of 1 to 65 536 There are four memory groups one for each function coils generally addressed as 0xxxx contacts Ixxxx input registers 3xxxx holding registers 4xxxx Coils and contacts are addressed at the bit level Coils are like outputs and can be read and written to Contacts are like inputs and are read only Input registers and holding registers are addressed at the word level Input registers are generally used for internally storing i
617. truction appears on page 53 following the Real Time Clock Function File information Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 82 Programming Instructions Overview Using the Instruction Throughout this manual each instruction or group of similar Des cripti ons instructions has a table similar to the one shown below This table provides information for all sub elements or components of an instruction or group of instructions This table identifies the type of compatible address that can be used for each sub element of an instruction or group of instructions in a data file or function file The definitions of the terms used in these tables are listed below this example table Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Example Table Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level PX Parameter E 2 E e m e amp x 7585 s J je ja o O O S e og EIE e g E Aje E a2 i 9 9 S Jor eo re fe fue Oo a S ee fem ee e I lea S IS SG SJ Ela S lo S S la Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source B e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination elelelelelelelelele elelelelele ele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell
618. tructions Input registers and holding registers are addressed at the word level Input registers are generally used for internally storing input values They are read only Holding registers are general purpose and can be both read and written The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix and does not get entered into the MB Data Address field when configuring the message instruction When the message is sent the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4 character hex number to be transmitted via the network with a range of 0 FFFFh the slave increments the address by 1 and selects the appropriate memory group based on the Modbus function TIP Modbus protocol may not be consistently implemented in all devices The Modbus specification calls for the addressing range to start at 1 however some devices start addressing at 0 The Modbus Data Address in the Message Setup Screen may need to be incremented by one to properly access a Modbus slave s memory depending on that slave s implementation of memory addressing Local Slave Node Address This is the destination device s node number if the devices are on a DH 485 DeviceNet using 1761 NET DNI DF1 or Modbus network TIP To initiate a broadcast message on a DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex or DF1 Radio Modem network set the local node address to 1 To initiate a broadcast message on a Modbus network set the slave node address to 0 Do not initiate more than
619. tructions note that e You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction e You cannot nest one MCR zone within another Do not jump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone TIP The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency O power shutdown ATTENTION If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical operations outside the zone if necessary Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 254 Program Control Instructions Notes Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Chapter 17 Input and Output Instructions The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans Instruction Used To Page IIM Immediate Input with Mask Update data prior to the normal input scan 255 IOM Immediate Output with Update outputs prior to the normal output scan 257 Mask REF 1 0 Refresh Interrupt the program scan to execute the 258 1 0 scan write outputs service communications read inputs IIM Immediate Input Instruction Type output with Mask IM TIP This instruction is used for embedded 1 0 only It is not designed to be Immediate Inpu
620. ts specified within the operands of the instruction By supporting these three addressing methods the MicroLogix 1100 allows incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated Each of the addressing modes are described below Immediate Addressing Immediate addressing is primarily used to assign numeric constants within instructions For example You require a 10 second timet so you program a timer with a 1 second time base and a preset value of 10 The numbers 1 and 10 in this example are both forms of immediate addressing Direct Addressing When you use direct addressing you define a specific data location within the controller Any data location that is supported by the elements of an operand within the instruction being programmed can be used In this example we ate illustrating a limit instruction where Low Limit Numeric value from 32 768 to 32 767 entered from the programming software e Test Value LCD 0 POTO This is the current position value of trim pot 0 High Limit N7 17 This is the data resident in Integer file 7 element 17 The Test Value LCD 0 POTO and High Limit N7 17 are direct addressing examples The Low Limit is immediate addressing Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 84 Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing Indirect addressing allows components within the address to be used as pointers to other data locations within the controller This fu
621. ts whenever the controller enters any run or test mode The CE Counting Enabled bit must also be set to enable the HSC Error Detected ED Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ED Error HSC O ED bi Detected t 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents 1s a configuration error When this bit is set 1 you should look at the specific error code in parameter HSC 0 ER Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 95 This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 96 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Counting Enabled CE Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CE Counting HSC O CE bi Enabled t 0to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the High Speed Counter When set 1 counting is enabled when clear 0 default counting is disabled If this bit is disabled while the counter i
622. tside of a specified range The LIM instruction is evaluated based on the Low Limit Test and High Limit values as shown in the following table LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit Test and High Limit Values When a J RugSttte Low Limit High Limit Low Limits Tests High Limit true Low Limit High Limit Test Low Limit or Test High Limit false High Limit Low Limit High Limit Test Low Limit false High Limit Low Limit Test 2 High Limitor Test Low Limit true The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants restricted to the following combinations e If the Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word or long word addresses e If the Test parameter is a word or long word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant a word or a long wotd address But the Low Limit and High Limit parameters cannot both be constants When mixed sized parameters are used all parameters are put into the format of the largest parameter For instance if a word and a long word are used the word is converted to a long word The data ranges ate e 32 768 to 32 767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Compare Instructions 185 LIM Instruction Valid Ad
623. ty Type MicroLogix 1100 1763 L16BWA 10 24V de 6 relay Controllers discrete 2 0 10V de analog 1763 L16AWA 10 120V ac 6 relay 2 0 10V de analog 1763 L16BBB 10 24V de 2 relay 2 0 10V de analog 2 24V de FET 2 high speed 24V de FET 1763 L16DWD 10 12 24Ndc 6 relay 2 0 10V dc analog Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 16 1 0 Configuration AC embedded inputs have fixed input filters DC embedded inputs have configurable input filters for a number of special functions that can be used in your application These are high speed counting event input interrupts and latching inputs The 1763 L16BBB has two high speed outputs for use as pulse train output PTO and or pulse width modulation PWM outputs Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 MicroLogix 1100 Expansion l 0 MicroLogix 1100 Expansion l 0 Memory Mapping 1 0 Configuration 17 If the application requires more I O than the controller provides you can attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion I O Expansion I 0 Modules For the MicroLogix 1100 Bulletin 1762 expansion I O is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and specialty modules You can attach up to four expansion I O modules in any combination Addressing Expansion 1 0 Slots The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1100 and its I O The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 4 the controller s
624. u set via the Channel 0 configuration screens in your programming softwate Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 File Description The string data file is used by the ASCII instructions to store ASCII character data The ASCII data can be accessed by the source and destination operands in the ASCII instructions The string data file can also be used by the copy COP and move MOV MVM instructions String files consist of 42 word elements One string file element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in the string file String Data File Structure String Element Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word upper byte lower byte 0 String Length number of characters range is from 0 to 82 1 character 0 character 1 2 character 2 character 3 AD 40 character 78 character 79 41 character 80 character 81 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 313 Addressing String Files The addressing scheme for the string data file is shown below Format Explanation ST String file STf e s f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 42 words in length as shown in Subelement delimiter s Subelement nu
625. ublication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Identifying Controller Faults Appendix C Fault Messages and Error Codes This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include e identifying controller faults contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance While a program is executing a fault may occur within the operating system or your program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault by cycling power to the controller when the Fault Override at Power Up bit S 1 8 is set in the status file You can also configure the controller to clear faults and go to RUN every time the controller is power cycled This is a feature that OEMs can build into their equipment to allow end users to reset the controller If the controller faults it can be reset by simply cycling power to the machine To accomplish this set the following bits in the status file e 2 1 8 Fault Override at Powet up e S2 1 12 Mode Behavior If the fault condition still exists after cycling powet the controller re enters the fault mode For mote information on status bits see System Status File on page 465 TIP You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing your ow
626. uction in MANUAL and enter the following parameters type 0 for MinS type 100 for MaxS 10 11 Process Control Instruction 307 type 0 for CO Enter the REM RUN mode and verify that PV 0 Type 20 in CO Record the PV Type 40 in CO Record the PV Type 60 in CO Record the PV Type 80 in CO Recotd the PV The values you recorded should be offset from CO by the same amount This proves the linearity of your process The following example shows an offset progression of fifteen CO 20 PV 35 CO 40 PV 55 CO 60 PV 75 CO 80 PV 95 If the values you recorded are not offset by the same amount e Either your scaling is incorrect or e the process is not linear or your equipment is not properly connected and or configured Make the necessary corrections and repeat steps 2 10 Determining the Initial Loop Update Time To determine the approximate loop update time that should be used for your process perform the following 1 Place the normal application values in MinS and MaxS Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 308 Process Control Instruction Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Type 50 in CO Type 60 in CO and immediately start your stopwatch Watch the PV When the PV starts to change stop your stopwatch Recotd this value It is the deadtime Multiply the deadtime by 4 This value
627. ult Messages and Error Codes Error Code Hex xxact 2i Ox1F39 Advisory Message EXPANSION 1 0 OBJECT TYPE MISMATCH INVALID STRING LENGTH Description An expansion I O object i e cable power supply or module in the user program I O configuration is not the same object type as is physically present The first word of string data contains a negative zero or value greater than 82 Fault Classification Non User Recoverable Recommended Action e Correct the user program I O configuration so that the object types match the actual configuration and e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode Or e Correct the actual configuration to match the user program I O configuration e Cycle power Check the first word of the string data element for invalid values and correct the data 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module 2 The xx in this error code means that the error occurs at the location of the last properly configured Expansion 1 0 module 1 You should use this information in conjunction with the specific error code to determine the source of the problem Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Fault Messages and Error Codes 499 Contacting Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for Automation for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following information ready Assi
628. unting template and door labels Controllers Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 1763 UM001 your MicroLogix 1100 system Controllers User Manual A description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual also Advanced Interface Converter AIC User 1761 6 4 contains information on network wiring Manual Information on how to install configure and commission a DNI DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 Information on DF1 open protocol DF1 Protocol and Command Set 1770 6 5 16 Reference Manual In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differences between solid state programmable Application Considerations for SGI 1 1 controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment Solid State Controls National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 Rockwell Automation Support this publication first Before you contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance we suggest you please review the troubleshooting information contained i
629. uplex Modem or Full Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Stop Bits 1 52 1 Data Bits 7 8 1 MicroLogix 1100 OS Series B FRN 4 or later Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 528 Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Slave Configuration The Modbus configuration screen and configuration procedure are shown below Channel Configuration x General Channel 0 Channel 1 l Driver Modbus RTU Slave x Md Address Baud 19200 oa I Parity NONE Modbus Data Table File Numbers Coils 099 110 Input Registers H902 fi 2 Contacts 1200 11 Holding Registers 4000 lt fi 3 IV Expanded r Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshak gt InterChar Timeout x1 msjO RTS Off Delay x20 mso RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms o OK Cancel Apply Help 1 To set up Channel 0 and data files for Modbus communication select the Channel 0 Configuration tab 2 Choose Modbus RTU Slave driver and assign driver characteristics 3 Enter Modbus Data Table File Numbers Select the Expansion check box to utilize multiple holding register data files TIP The controller default is one data file of 256 registers The Expansion check box enables an additional five files and 1280 holding registers The five additional tables do not need to
630. uration command 6 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 534 Protocol Configuration Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction Error Error Description Received Exception Code Code 87 Negative Acknowledge The slave cannot perform the program function received in the 7 command 88 Memory Parity Error The slave attempted to read extended memory but detected a 8 parity error in the memory 89 Non standard Error Code An error code greater than 8 was returned by the slave gt 8 When Channel 0 is configured for Modbus RTU Master or Modbus RTU Slave the associated Channel Status screen displays a Link Layer Error Count and a Link Layer Error Code Use the table below to interpret the Link Layer Error Code being displayed Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Link Layer Error Code Description No error No receive buffer available for reply Message received is too short Message received is too long UART error during reply reception CTS one second timeout prior to transmission CTS dropped in mid packet transmission Packet receive from unknown Slave or Bad slave 0 Function code Mismatch 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Bad CRC in reply packet 6 7 9 1 1 Function code not supported 1 3 Reply Timeout Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Protocol Configuration 535 ASCII Driver The ASCII driver provides connection to oth
631. us File 475 Math Overflow Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 14 binary Oor1 control read write Set 1 this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow ot overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set e the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 or 32 bits of the result The default condition of S 2 14 is cleared 0 When S 2 14 is cleared 0 and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set e the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e the destination address contains 32 767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word if the result is positive or 32 768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word if the result is negative To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation Watchdog Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 3H Byte 2 to 255 control read write This byte value
632. us a regular subroutine SBR label This should be the first instruction in your interrupt subroutine STS Selectable Timed Use the STS Selectable Timed Interrupt Start 264 Start instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program rather than starting automatically UID User Interrupt Disable Use the User Interrupt Disable UID and the User 265 UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Enable UIE instructions to create zones in 766 which 1 0 interrupts cannot occur UIF User Interrupt Flush Use the UIF instruction to remove selected pending 267 interrupts from the system Instruction Type input Execution Time for the INT Instruction When Rung Is Controller MicroLogix 1100 True 0 74 us False 0 74 us The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine ISR This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Use of the INT instruction is optional Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 264 Using Interrupts STS Selectable Timed Instruction Type output Start Execution Time for the STS Instruction When Rung Is STS Selectable Timed Start Controller Time 1 True False MicroLogix 1100 27 18 us 0 84 us The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts The STI instruction has one op
633. us flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the overflow variable HSC 0 OF Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 104 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch This bit is transitional and 1s set by the HSC sub system It is up to the conttol program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the overflow condition Overflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 105 Overflow Mask OFM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OFM Overflow HSC 0 OFM bi Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 t Oto7 control read write The OFM Overflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow an overflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Overflow Interrupt OFI Description Address DataFormat HSC Modes Type User Program Access OFI Overflow HSC 0 0FI bi Interrupt t 0to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions
634. usly by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in a run mode Mode Done MD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access MD Mode HSC 0 MD_ Pbi Done t 0 or 1 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The MD Mode Done status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior and the accumulator counts up to the High Preset Count Down CD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2 to7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The CD Count Down bit is used with the bidirectional counters modes 2 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CD bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CD bit is cleared 0 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 107 Count Up CU Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CU Count Up HSC O CU fbit 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 107 The CU Count Up bit is used with all of the HSCs modes 0 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CU bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CU bit is cleared 0 HSC Mode MOD Description Address Data
635. ut Data File The bits are defined as follows Bit Position 5 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 0 SGNO Channel 0 Data 1 SGN1 Channel 1 Data 2 SGN2 Channel 2 Data 3 SGN3 Channel 3 Data 4 reserved S3 S2 S1 S0 5 U0 00 U1 01 U2 02 U3 03 reserved 6 reserved Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 22 Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 1 0 Configuration Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is above the user specified range The module continues to convert data to the maximum full range value during an over range condition The bits reset when the over range condition clears UIx Under range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal 1s below the user specified range The module continues to convett data to the maximum full range value during an under range condition The bits reset when the under range condition clears SGNx The sign bit for channels 0 through 3 1762 OF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog output module status data for use in the control program 1762 OF4 Input Data File Bit Position
636. ut Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan ee nr 2 qp The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for rising edge behavior the input file value is normally off on for 1 scan when a rising edge pulse is detected The previous examples demonstrate rising edge behavior Falling edge behavior operates exactly the same way with these exceptions e The detection is on the falling edge of the external input e The input image is normally on 1 and changes to off 0 for one scan Falling Edge Behavior Example 1 External Input Latched Status Input File Value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X42 Scan Number X43 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan i 1 0 Configuration 33 Falling Edge Behavior Example 2 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output S
637. ut filter selection modified status bit B 479 input filtering 1 27 input scan 6 596 input output status file 3 79 inrush current G 597 instruction G 597 instruction execution time A 457 instruction set definition G 597 MicroLogix 1500 execution times A 457 overview 4 81 INT instruction 18 263 interrupt subroutine instruction 18 263 interrupts interrupt instructions 18 263 interrupt subroutine INT instruction 18 263 overview 18 259 selectable timed start STS instruction 18 264 user fault routine 18 262 user interrupt disable UID instruction 18 265 user interrupt enable UIE instruction 18 266 user interrupt flush UIF instruction 18 267 IOM instruction 17 257 IOS function file 3 79 J JMP instruction 16 249 JSR instruction 16 250 jump 6 597 jump to label instruction 16 249 jump to subroutine instruction 16 250 L label instruction 16 250 ladder logic G 597 last 100 Sec scan time status 8 485 latching inputs 1 30 LBL instruction 16 250 LCD Function File 23 445 23 446 CBS 23 448 DN 23 449 ERN 23 450 ERR 23 449 ESC 23 452 JOG 23 451 OK 23 452 POTO 23 451 POT1 23 451 SCD 23 448 Sub Elements 23 447 23 448 TBF 23 450 TIF 23 451 TO 23 449 WND 23 452 LCD Instruction 23 453 Addressing Modes and File Types 23 453 Default Values 23 454 Displaying Special Characters 23 455 Getting Value with Keypad 23 454 Use 23 453 LCD Overview 23 445 least significant bit LSB G 597 LED light emitting diode G 597 LEQ in
638. utes that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is terminated The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range of 1 65 500 minutes Diagnostic Counter Block of Communications Status File With RSLogix 500 version 7 00 00 and later formatted displays of the diagnostic counters for Ethernet communications channel are available under Channel Status These displays include a Clear button that allows you to reset the diagnostic counters while monitoring them online with the programming software Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 120 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 121 Length 110 55 words to follow including format code 122 Counters Format Code Ethernet always 0 123 Low word RMON Rx Octets High word 124 gn word IRMON R OCTETS 125 Low word RMON Tx Octets High word 126 gawod IRMON T OCTETS Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Function Files 75 Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 127 Low word RMON Rx Packets 123 WOId e ON amp pACKETS 129 Low word RMON Tx Packets High word 130 gn word ltRMON T PACKETS 131 Low word Frames Transmitted with Excessive Collisions 12 P9 word EEE T_EXCOL 133 Low word Frames Received with CRC Error ia P9 WO ieee RRC 135 Low word Frames Recei
639. utomation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846
640. valid bit number range is from 0 to 15 The bit number is the bit location within the string file element Bit level addressing is not available for words 1 and 2 of the control element Examples R62 Element 2 control file 6 R6 2 0 13 Bit 13 in sub element 0 of element 2 control file 6 R18 1 LEN Specified string length of element 1 control file 18 R18 1 POS Actual string length of element 1 control file 18 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers ACL _ Ascii Clear Buffers Channel 0 Transmit Buffer Yes Receive Buffer No Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1100 clear buffers both 61 46 us 0 87 us receive 20 3 us 0 87 us transmit 23 2 us 0 87 us Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 ASCII Instructions 315 The ACL instruction clears the Receive and or Transmit buffer s This instruction also removes instructions from ASCII queue TIP For MicroLogix 1100 the ACL instruction can also be used to clear the DF1 communication buffers when the channel is configured for any of the DF1 communication drivers Select 0 for the channel number that is configured for DF1 and Yes for both the Receive and Transmit Buffers When the ACL instruction is executed any pending outgoing DF1 replies any pending incoming DF1 commands and any pending outgoing DF1 commands are flushed Any MSG instructions in progress on that chann
641. value is not affected by this instruction Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 of the string you want to extract An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string e Number is the number of characters from 1 to 82 you want to extract starting at the indexed position If the Index plus the Number is greater than the total characters in the source string the Destination string will be the characters from the Index to the end of the Source string Destination is the string element ST where you want the extracted string stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AEX Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files E Mode P a E cs o T Parameter E Il 5 Eai a amp o S ja S o S S se ojo o cea a E Belz eo c o Z a EBD gt olo E lo o jw a je j lu 5 u E fe a E 2 e E la E 8 8 jS a Ea Ee S S a Source e e e e Index e e e e e e e Number e e e e e e e Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a true rung The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII
642. ved with Alignment Error 136 P9 word EEE amp ALIGN 137 Low word Count of frames not counted correctly 138 P9 word RMON _T_DROP 139 Low word Receive FIFO Overflow Count io P9 word IEEE R_MACERR 141 Low word Frames transmitted with Tx FIFO Under run High word 142 Ign Wore IEEE_T_MACERR 143 Low word Frames Transmitted with Single Collision ip HO word EEE T icol 145 Low word Frames Transmitted with Multiple Collisions ig Ah word ete T Col 147 Low word Frames Transmitted with Deferral Delay ug onwards eee T pg 149 Low word Frames Transmitted with Late Collisions igo Hah word ect T icon 151 Low word Frames Transmitted with Carrier Sense Errors 152 High Word eee T_CSERR 153 Low word RMON Tx Collision Count High word 154 gn wore tRMON T COL Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 76 Function Files Channel Status Ethernet Status IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Address Q0 00 00 00 00 00 General Commands Replies Connections Port Rix Octets Tx Octets Rx Packets Tx Packets Excessive Collisions CRC Errors Alignment Errors Dropped Frarnes Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block continued Description Total Commands Sent MAC Receive Errors MAC Transmit Errors Single Collisions Multiple Collisions Deferred Transmission Late Collisions Carrier Sense Errors Tx Collision Counts Word Bit 155 Low word 156 Hi
643. where Q is the queue number Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 Recipe and Data Logging 441 File Size FSZ File Size FSZ shows the number of records that are allocated for this queue The number of records is set when the data log queue is configured FSZ can be used with RST to determine how full the queue is To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q FSZ where Q 1s the queue number Records Stored RST Records Stored RST specifies how many data sets are in the queue RST is decremented when a record is read from a communications device To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q RST where Q is the queue number TIP If a queue is full and another record is saved the oldest record is over written Queue behavior is the same as a FIFO stack first in first out If a queue is full and an additional record is saved the first record is deleted DLS information can be used in the following types of instructions Instruction Type Operand Relay Bit Destination Output Bit Compare Source A Source B Low Limit LIM instruction Test LIM instruction High Limit LIM instruction Source MEQ instruction Mask MEO instruction Compare MEQ instruction Math Source A Source B Input SCP instruction Logical Source A Source B Move Source Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 442 Recipe and Data Logging
644. whether there is a Trimpot range error at each program download Whenever a program is downloaded the controller compares the old Trimpot values POTO and POT1 with the new Trimpot range TMIN to TMAX and sets 1 ERR bit if an error is found and resets 0 if no error is found Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 450 LCD Information For example if old POTO 100 new TMIN 200 and TMAX 50 controller sets 1 ERR bit This means a Trimpot range error has occurred at program download For mote information about Trimpot functionality refer to Using Trim Pots described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763 UMO01 LCD Module Operation Error Number ERN Feature Data Format Type User Program Access ERN LCD Module LCD 0 ERN word INT status read only Operation Error Number LCD Module Operation Error Number ERN shows the error code when an error occurs in LCD configurations and operation LCD Error Codes Error Code Description 0 None of Error Normal condition 1 Trimpot Hardware fault The retentive trim pot s value crashed by external failure as like battery fault error 2 Trimpot Range Over The Trimpot range of new program is range over Target Bit File Number TBF Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access TBF Target Bit File LCD 0 TBF word INT control read only Number Target Bit File Number TBF specifies the bit file to
645. will adjust the RTC to the nearest minute The RTA instruction adjusts the RTC based on the value of the RTC Seconds as described below IMPORTANT The RTA instruction will only change the RTC when the RTA rung is evaluated true after it was previously false false to true transition The RTA instruction will have no effect if the rung is always true or false RTA is set e If RTC Seconds are less than 30 then RTC Seconds is reset to 0 e If RTC Seconds are greater than or equal to 30 then the RTC Minutes are incremented by 1 and RTC Seconds are reset to 0 The following conditions cause the RTA instruction to have no effect on the RTC data e RTC is disabled e An external via communications message to the RTC is in progress when the RTA instruction is executed External communications to the RTC takes precedence over the RTA instruction To re activate the RTA instruction the RTA rung must become false and then true TIP There is only one internal storage bit allocated in the system for this instruction Do not use more than one RTA instruction in your program TIP You can also use a MSG instruction to write RTC data from one controller to another to synchronize time To send write RTC data use RTC 0 as the source and the destination Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 54 Function Files Memory Module The controller has a Memory Module Information MMI File which is updated with data from t
646. will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 486 System Status File RTC Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 38 word 1 to 12 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MON SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Day of Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 39 word 1 to 31 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DAY SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 51 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Hours Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 40 word 0 to 23 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot
647. xecution of all the other queued up messages The minimum time to message to every responding slave station increases linearly with the number of slave stations that cannot respond If the Message based selection is a ow slaves to initiate messages a slave station can initiate a message to the master station polled report by exception messaging ot to another slave station s ave to slave messaging The MSG command packet will remain in that slave station s transmit queue until the master station triggers its own MSG command packet to it which could be seconds minutes or hours later depending on the master s ladder logic If the Message based selection is dont allow slaves to initiate messages then even if a slave station triggers and queues up a MSG instruction in its ladder logic the master station will not process it Standard Polling Mode Standard polling mode is s rozg y recommended for larger systems that require time critical communication between the master and all the slave stations or for any system where slave station initiated messages are going to be used this includes slave programming over the network since this uses the same mechanism that slave to slave messaging uses The Active Node Table automatically keeps track of which slaves are and are not communicating Standard polling mode should ot be used in cases where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station
648. y OK OK key in Customized Display LCD 0 OK binary bit status control read write ESC ESC key in Customized Display LCD 0 ESC binary bit status control read write LCD Function File Customized Boot Message String File Address Offset CBS Sub Elements Feature User Program Access CBS Customized Boot LCD 0 CBS word INT control read write Message String File Address Offset Customized Boot Message String File Address Offset CBS defines which string file number is used for boot message When a valid string file is set the controller displays its first element that is up to four 4 lines of data with up to 12 characters per line including space and special characters If the string file has more than 48 characters only the first 49 characters are displayed and the remaining are ignored Start with Customized Display SCD Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access SCD Start with LCD 0 SCD binary bit control read only Customized Display Start with Customized Display SCD specifies whether to display a customized LCD screen instead the default I O Status screen at power up When this bit is set 1 the controllers enters the Customized Display mode at power up instead entering the default mode and displaying the I O Status screen and interfaces with LCD instructions in Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 LCD Information 449 the ladder program By setting this bit to ON 1 you can let y
649. y Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 003F COP CPW FLL A COP CPW or FLL instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA parameter references outside of the length and parameter do not point outside FILE SPACE entire data space of the data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0042 INVALID RECIPE Number of Recipes specified is Recoverable e Correct the value for Number of Recipes NUMBER greater than 256 e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0044 INVALID WRITE TO Write attempt to RTC function file Recoverable e Correct the invalid data RTC FUNCTION FILE failed This only occurs when e Re compile reload the program and enter attempting to write invalid data to the Run mode the RTC function file Examples of invalid data are setting the Day of Week to zero or setting the Date to February 30th 0050 CONTROLLER TYPE A particular controller type was Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified in MISMATCH selected in the user program the user program or configuration but did not match the e Reconfigure the program to match the actual controller type attached hardware 0051 BASE TYPE A particular hardware type AWA Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified in MISMATCH BWA BBB was selected in the user the user program or program configuration but did no e Reconfigure the program to match the match
650. you selected Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt Enter the sum into the UIF instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Publication 1763 RM001D EN P September 2011 268 Using Interrupts Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI i Function Files Function File HSE PTO Sir en Rrc gu MMI oat tr sl LEE as PFN Program File Number r ER Error Code HUI User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled r A5 Auto Start r ED Error Detected SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts The Selectable Timed Interrupt STI provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example of where you would use the STI are e PID type applications where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval e A motion application where the motion instruction PTO needs to be scanned at a specific rate to guarantee a consistent acceleration deceleration profile e A block of logic that needs to be scanned more often How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands requirements of the application It operates using the followin

1763-RM001 - Rockwell Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents